SPECIFICATIONS FOR MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866

Transcription

1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 CITY OF MONROVIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS Carl Hassel Director of Public Works July, 2014 City of Monrovia 600 S. Mountain Avenue Monrovia, CA (626)

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS... i NOTICE INVITING BIDS... 1 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS... 4 CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL... 8 BIDDING SCHEDULE... 9 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF ADDENDA BIDDER'S DECLARATION BID BOND NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT DECLARATION OF BIDDER S QUALIFICATIONS DECLARATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION PROJECT REFERENCE BIDDER S ASSURANCE INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AND CONTRIBUTION AGREEMENT TO COMPLY WITH CALIFORNIA LABOR LAW REQUIREMENTS FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES IN CONTRACTS CERTIFICATE OF NON-DISCRIMINATION BY CONTRACTORS WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATE STATUTORY PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CLAIMS STATEMENT ACKNOWLEDGING PENAL AND CIVIL PENALTIES CONCERNING THE CONTRACTORS' LICENSING LAWS AGREEMENT FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND SPECIAL PROVISIONS TECHNICAL PROVISIONS STANDARD PLANS AND DRAWINGS REFER TO BACK PAGES i

3 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Notice is hereby given that the City of Monrovia, California, will receive sealed bids at the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, 415 South Ivy Avenue, Monrovia, California, until 11:00am on xxx, 2014 for: TITLE: MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 At the time designated for receiving sealed bids for all work on said Project, the bids will be publicly opened, examined, and read aloud. All bids for the work must be in writing, must be sealed, and must be plainly marked on the outside: BID FOR: MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866. Any bid received after the hour stated above for any reason what so ever, will not be considered for any purpose but will be returned, unopened, to the bidder. Each bidder must submit a proposal to the City of Monrovia, c/o City Clerk, on one set of the standard forms available for the bidders use. Said proposal is to be accompanied by either a cash deposit, a certified or cashier's check, or a bidder's bond, made payable to the City of Monrovia, in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the total bid submitted. The envelope enclosing the proposal shall be sealed and addressed to the City of Monrovia, c/o City Clerk, and delivered or mailed to the City of Monrovia at 415 S. Ivy Avenue, Monrovia, CA The envelope shall be plainly marked in the upper left-hand corner as follows: City of Monrovia, c/o City Clerk Bidder s Name Bidder s Address Bidder s Trade MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT Project No. G-866 Open Only at: 11:00am xxx, 2014 City Hall City Clerk s Office 415 S. Ivy Avenue, Monrovia, CA CONTRACTOR LICENSE: The Contractor at the time of the bid opening shall possess a valid State of California Contractor s License Class A (General Engineering Contractor), and must maintain this valid license throughout the duration of the contract and project s final completion. 1

4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The general scope of work consists of: paving, landscaping, site structures, fountains, lighting, utilities, signage with decorative elements, site furnishings and preparation and implementation of environmental requirements including furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment, and all incidental and appurtenant work necessary for the completion of construction of the MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866. TIME OF COMPLETION: All work indicated in the contract plans and specification shall be completed within XX (XX) working days, after the date set forth as stated in the notice to proceed. Liquidated damages are in effect in the amount of $5, per calendar day for noncompletion of work within the contract period of XX (XX) working days.. FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: The work to be performed under this contract is subject to all Federal Requirements including, but not limited to, the Davis Bacon Act, Non-Discrimination, Equal Employment Opportunity and Federal Labor Provisions. GENERAL PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENT: The successful bidder will be required to pay the prevailing wage scale pursuant to the provisions of Sections 1770 to 1777, inclusive, of the Labor Code of the State of California or the Federal Davis-Bacon Act which ever are higher rates. Prevailing wages are those in effect at the time the work is actually being performed. The federal minimum wage rates are available directly from the Department of Labor Home Page at The City of Monrovia reserves the right to reject any or all bids and waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received. The award, if made will be to the lowest responsible bidder as so determined by the City. Plans and Specifications on a compact disc (CD) may be picked up at the Public Works Department, 600 S. Mountain Avenue, Monrovia, CA 91016, by paying a non-refundable fee of $10.00 per set. Plans and Specifications (CD) will be mailed by U.S. Mail for an additional charge of $15.00 per set or sent by an express delivery service using the bidder's account number or the bidder must pay the City in advance for the express service delivery. The City however does not guarantee the timely delivery of the requested plans and specifications. The actual payment to the contractor shall be on the basis of actual quantities of work completed and accepted by the City. PRE-BID CONFERENCE OR PROJECT FIELD WALK THROUGH: A non-mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held on X X X, 2014 at 10:00 a.m. at the Public Works Training Room, 600 S. Mountain Avenue, Monrovia CA Attendance is not mandatory, but recommended. QUESTIONS: Questions regarding this project must be received by XX, 2014 to be addressed: Please send all questions by to Jun Cervantes, P.E. City Engineer at [email protected]. (626)

5 ENGINEER S ESTIMATED COST: $6,400,000 3

6 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS FORM OF PROPOSAL: The Proposal shall be fully executed and submitted on the forms provided by the City of Monrovia and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed as directed herein. One (1) separate set of proposal forms have been included in each copy of the Contract Documents to be used by the bidder for submittal of his bid. DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: The Proposal shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to see that its Proposal is received as stipulated. Any Proposal received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals will be returned to the bidder unopened. In order to guard against premature opening of the Bids, Bidders shall submit their Bids and accompanying documents in a sealed inner envelope which in turn shall be enclosed in a sealed outer envelope. Both envelopes should be addressed as follows: City of Monrovia, c/o City Clerk 415 South Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA (Name of Bidder/ Bidder s Address/ Bidder s Trade) FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 Open Only at: xxx PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS: All Proposals shall include the following executed documents to be submitted with each bid: Bidding Schedule Indemnification and Hold Harmless Agreement and Waiver of Subrogation and Contribution Acknowledgment of Receipt of Addenda Agreement to comply with California Labor Law Requirements Bidder s Declaration Fair Employment Practices in Contracts Bid Bond Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors Noncollusion Affidavit Workers Compensation Insurance Certificate Declaration of Bidder s Qualifications Statutory Provision for Construction Contract Claims Designation of Subcontractors Statement Acknowledging Penal and Civil Penalties Construction Project Reference Bidder s Assurance 4

7 WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL: The Proposal may be withdrawn by the bidder by means of a written request, signed by the bidder or its properly authorized representative. Such written request must be delivered to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids for receipt of proposals prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals. No Proposal may be withdrawn after the hour fixed for opening bids. MODIFICATIONS AND ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS: Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to the Proposal will render it informal and may cause its rejection. The completed Proposal forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Alternative proposals will not be considered unless specifically requested. Oral, telegraphic, facsimile, or telephonic proposals or modifications will not be considered. DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS: In the event there is more than one bid item in a Bidding Schedule, the bidder shall furnish a price for each and all bid items in the Schedule, and failure to do so may render the Proposal informal and may cause its rejection. The bidder shall state in words and figures the unit prices or the specific sums as the case may be, for which it proposes to supply the labor, materials, supplies, or machinery, and completely perform the Contract. The total amount of each item bid and the total amount of the bid shall be stated in both figures and words. If the unit price and the total amount named by a bidder for any items are not in agreement, the unit price alone will be considered as representing the bidder's intention and at the time of the bid document review by the City the total will be changed by the City to conform thereto. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: Each proposal shall be in accordance with the plans, specifications and other contract documents and shall be accompanied by an unconditional certified cashier's check, cash or a bidder's bond, in an amount not less than ten (10) percent of the total bid submitted in the proposal. Said check or bond shall be made payable to the City of Monrovia and shall be given as a guarantee that the bidder, if awarded the work, will enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days after date of written Notice of Award and will furnish satisfactory Faithful Performance Bond, and Payment Bond, each of said bonds to be in the amount stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. All bonds submitted to the City must be with an Insurance Company with a surety rating of A or above as rated by A.M. Best, Duff and Phelps, Moody s, Standard and Poor s or Weiss Research. In case of refusal or failure to enter into said contract, each check or bond, as the case may be, shall be forfeited to the City. If the bidder elects to furnish a Bid Bond as his/her proposal guarantee, he/she shall use the form herein, or one conforming substantially to it in form. The Contractor will also be required to furnish a certificate that he/she carries compensation insurance covering his/her employees upon work to be done under this contract, which may be entered into between him/her and the City of Monrovia for the construction of said work. BIDDER S EXAMINATION OF SITE: Before submitting a proposal, the bidder shall carefully examine the drawings, specifications, and other contract documents, and he/she shall visit the site of the work. It will be the sole responsibility of the bidder to be familiar with the existing site conditions and has a clear understanding of the requirements of the contract regarding the furnishing of materials and performance of work. 5

8 COMPETENCY OF BIDDER S: In selecting the lowest responsible bidder, consideration will be given not only to the financial standing but also to the general competency of the bidder for performance of the work covered by the proposal. To this end, each proposal shall be supported by a statement of the bidder s experience as to recent date on the form entitled DECLARATION OF BIDDER S QUALIFICATIONS & ASSURANCE bound herein. No proposal for work will be accepted from a contractor who is not licensed in accordance with applicable state law. Contractor shall possess a valid State of California Contractor s License Class A (General Engineering Contractor), and must maintain this valid license throughout the duration of the contract and project s final completion. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: More than one proposal form from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different manes will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one proposal for the work contemplated will cause the rejection of all proposals in which such bidder is interested. If there is reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, all bids will be rejected and none of the participants in such collusion (Non-collusion Affidavit) will be considered for future proposals. RETURN OF PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: Within ten (10) days after award of the contract, the City will return all proposal guarantees, except bonds, to their respective bidder except those accompanying proposals submitted by the three (3) lowest responsible bidders. Those three (3) will be held until the contract has been finally executed after which they will be returned to the respective bidders whose proposal they accompany. AWARD OF CONTRACT: Award of a contract, if it be awarded, will be made to the lowest responsible bidder whose proposal complies with all the requirements prescribed. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality in a bid, and to make awards in the interest of the City. The award, if made, will normally be made within 30 days of the date for receipt of proposals. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The bidder to whom award is made shall execute a written contract with the City on the form of agreement provided, and shall secure all insurance and bonds required by the Specification within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of written Notice of Award. Failure or refusal to enter into a contract as herein provided or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the award and the forfeiture of the proposal guarantee. If the successful bidder refuses or fails to execute the contract, the City may award the contract to the second lowest responsible bidder. If the City of Monrovia awards the contract to the next lowest bidder, the amount of the lowest bidder s security shall be applied by the City to the difference between the low bid and the second lowest bid, and the surplus, if any, shall be returned to the lowest bidder. If the second lowest responsible bidder refuses or fails to execute the contract, the City may award the contract to the third lowest responsible bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second or third lowest bidders to execute the contract, such bidders guarantee likewise shall be forfeited to the City. The work may then be re-advertised. 6

9 NON-DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT: Contracts for work under this proposal will obligate the contractors and subcontractors not to discriminate against any person on account of age, race, color, religion, sex or national origin. This contract is subject to the State contract nondiscrimination and compliance requirements pursuant to Government Code Section The contractor, sub recipient or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of Title 49 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations) part 26 in the award and administration of US DOT assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy, as the recipient deems appropriate. Each subcontract signed by the bidder must include this assurance. LABOR NONDISCRIMINATION: Attention is directed to the following Notice that is required by Chapter 5 of Division 4 of Title 2, California Code of Regulations. NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR NONDISCRIMINATION PROGRAM (GOV. CODE, SECTION 12990) Your attention is called to the "Nondiscrimination Clause", set forth in Section A (4), "Labor Nondiscrimination," of the Standard Specifications, which is applicable to all nonexempt state contracts and subcontracts, and to the "Standard California Nondiscrimination Construction Contract Specifications" set forth therein. The Specifications are applicable to all nonexempt federally funded construction contracts and subcontracts of $5,000 or more. RACE NEUTRAL DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE): (This requirement does not apply for this project.) It is the City's policy to comply with Part 23 of Title 49, Code Federal Regulations regarding the utilization of Race Neutral Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE). Attention of bidders is drawn to the Contractor's obligation under these regulations. The City has set an annual goal of ten percent (10%) for the utilization of DBE s. The Contractor shall make a good faith effort to meet this minimum goal. PREVAILING WAGES: The City of Monrovia hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color or national origin consideration for an award. In accordance with the provisions of Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1 of the California Labor Code, the California Department of Industrial Relations has established the general prevailing rates of per diem wages for each craft, classification and type of work needed to execute contracts for public works and improvements. The per diem wages published at the date the contract is advertised for bids shall be applicable. Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file in the City Clerk's office, 415 S. Ivy Avenue, Monrovia, CA 91016, and such copies will be made available to any interested party upon request. Future effective wage rates, which have been predetermined, are on file with the Department of Industrial Relations, are referenced but not printed in said publication. The new wage rates shall be come effective on the day following the expiration date and apply to this contract in the same manner as if they had been included or referenced in this contract. 7

10 CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL Business Name: Business Address: State License Number: Phone Number & Fax Number: To the City Council City of Monrovia 415 S. Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA The undersigned bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools and services necessary to perform all work required under the City's Specifications entitled: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 In accordance with the intent of said Specifications, Drawings and all Addenda issued by said City prior to opening of the proposals. Said bidder agrees that within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of written Notice of Award of the Contract by said City, the bidder will execute a contract in the required form, of which the Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Specifications, Drawings and all Addenda issued by said City prior to the opening of proposals, are part, and will secure the required insurance and bonds; and that upon failure to do so within said time, then the proposal guarantee furnished by said bidder shall be forfeited to said City as liquidated damages for such failure; provided, that if said bidder shall execute the contract and secure the required insurance and bonds within said time, his/her check, if furnished shall be returned to him/her within ten (10) days thereafter, and the Bid Bond, if furnished, shall become void. Said bidder further agrees to complete all work required under the contract within the time stipulated in said Specifications, and to accept in full payment therefor the price named in the Bidding Schedule. Dated Bidder Signature Title 8

11 BIDDING SCHEDULE FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 CITY COUNCIL CITY OF MONROVIA 415 SOUTH IVY AVENUE MONROVIA, CALIFORNIA The undersigned declares that he/she has carefully examined the location of the proposed work, that he/she has examined the drawings and specifications and read the accompanying instructions to bidders, the Contract Documents, and hereby proposes to do all work in accordance with said drawings and specifications for the unit price or lump sum set forth in the following schedule and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation and services to do all work required for: PROJECT TITLE: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by the Engineer, and in accordance with the Special Provisions and Technical Provisions, the Contract Documents, in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition), and the requirements of the Engineer under said documents, for the prices shown herein. All construction work shall be completed by xxxx. 9

12 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL 1. 1 LS Restroom Building In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 2. 1 LS Stage Canopy In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 10

13 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL 3. 1 LS Trash Enclosure In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 4. 6 EA Picnic Table with benches In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 11

14 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL EA Interpretive signs In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 6. 3 EA Fountain In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 12

15 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL 7. 5 EA Information Kiosks In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 8. 3 EA Chess Table with benches In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 13

16 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL 9. 1 EA Monument Sign In Figures In Figures In Words In Words EA Steam Engine Play Element In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 14

17 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL EA Park Bench In Figures In Figures In Words In Words LS Parking Structure Murals In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 15

18 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT PRICE ITEM TOTAL EA Themed Play Element In Figures In Figures In Words In Words EA Bike Racks In Figures In Figures In Words In Words 16

19 17

20 (Item 1 through 15) TOTAL $ (In Figures) (In Words) Attached hereto is cash, a certified check, a cashier s check, or a bidder s bond in the amount of (Dollars) ($ ) said amount being not less than ten (10) percent of the net amount of the bid. It is agreed a portion of said bidder's bond amount equal to the difference between the low bidder and next bidder for which an award of contract is entered into by the City shall be retained as liquidated damages by the City of Monrovia if the undersigned fails or refuses to execute the Contract and furnish the required bonds and certificates of insurance within the time provided. Bidder (Company Name) Authorized Signature Title Note: All quantities hereon are approximate and are to be used only for a comparison of bids. Payment for quantities will be made for the actual quantities constructed on the job. The City reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any quantity shown and to delete any items from the contract. The contractor shall be paid for work actually performed as directed by the City at the unit price bid for the respective items where unit prices are requested. All payments shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment and doing all the work involved in constructing these items complete in place as specified herein or as directed by the Engineer. For all lump sum items the contractor will be paid the bid amount for the described work. Should a change in the scope of the lump sum items be ordered by the City, the contractor will be paid an amount as agreed upon by the City and the contractor pursuant to the Standard Specifications for Public Works construction (Green Book). In the case of any discrepancy between words and figures the words shall prevail. 18

21 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF ADDENDA FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS OFF-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of: Addenda No. Dated Addenda No. Dated Addenda No. Dated Addenda No. Dated Addenda No. Dated Addenda No. Dated Addenda No. Dated PROPER NAME OF BIDDER: BY: ADDRESS: Signature of Bidder Street, City & Zip Code Phone Number License No. & Type 19

22 BIDDER'S DECLARATION FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 It is understood and agreed that: 1. The undersigned has carefully examined all documents which will form a part of the Contract; namely, the Notice Inviting Bids, the Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal, the Bid Bond, the Contract, the Faithful Performance Bond, the Payment Bond, the Plans and Specifications, the Special Provisions, the Trade Sections, and the Federal Requirements. 2. The undersigned has, by investigation at the site of the work and otherwise, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work and fully informed himself as to all conditions and matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof. 3. The undersigned fully understands the scope of work and has checked carefully all words and figures inserted in this Proposal and he/she further understands that the City of Monrovia will not be responsible for any errors or omissions in the preparation of the Proposal by the bidder. 4. The undersigned agrees and acknowledges that he/she is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the State Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and that the undersigned will comply with such provisions before executing the Contract if it is awarded to the undersigned. The undersigned will begin work after award of Contract and a Notice to Proceed to Construct has been given as herein specified, and provided all requirements in regard to bonds and insurance have been satisfied and will complete said work within the time specified in the Bidding Schedule. The undersigned will execute the Contract and furnish the required statutory bonds and certificates of insurance within the period of time specified in the Contract Documents. 5. The undersigned certifies that this Proposal is genuine and not sham or collusive, or made in the interest or on behalf of a person not herein named, and the undersigned has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a sham bid nor induced any other person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding. The undersigned has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantage over any other bidder. 6. The undersigned will accept an award and enter into a Contract for all work scheduled herein on which he/she puts in a bid. The award for such work is to be entirely at the discretion of the City of Monrovia after evaluation of the bids as submitted. The undersigned agrees that the City of Monrovia shall recover or retain as liquidated 20

23 damages an amount equal to the difference between the low bid and amount of the bid of the bidder with whom the City of Monrovia enters into a Contract, and the surplus, if any, shall be returned to the lowest bidder in accordance with the provisions of the Public Contracts Code Sec in the event of his failure to execute a Contract and furnish required bonds and insurance therefor within the time provided. 7. This bid will not be withdrawn within a period of sixty (60) days after the date of its proper opening by the City of Monrovia. Should the City request and the bidder concur the bid may remain valid beyond the sixty (60) day period. 8. The undersigned bidder states under penalty of perjury that the representations made in submitting this bid are, to the best of his/her knowledge, true, accurate and complete. 9. The undersigned Bidder understands and agrees that the City of Monrovia reserves the right to reject any or all bids. Where there are base bid items and alternative additional/deductive bid items, the City reserves the right to award the base bid items and none of the alternative additional/deductive bid items or to award the base bid items and one or more of such additional/deductive bid items or to award the base bid items and to award any combination of the alternative deductive bid items. 10. The undersigned Bidder certifies that in all previous contracts or subcontracts, all reports which may have been due under the requirements of any AGENCY, State or Federal equal employment opportunity orders have been satisfactorily filed, and that no such reports are currently outstanding. 11. The undersigned Bidder certifies that affirmative action has been taken to seek out and consider minority and disadvantaged business enterprises for those portions of the work to be subcontracted, and that such affirmative action have been fully documented, that said documentation is open to inspection, and that said affirmative action will remain in effect for the life of any contract awarded hereunder. Furthermore, bidder certifies that affirmative action will be taken to meet all equal employment opportunity requirements of the contract documents. 12. The undersigned bidder certifies that he/she does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he/she does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under this control where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder certifies further that he/she will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he/she will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under his control where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this bid. 13. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, 21

24 locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national origin, because of habit, local, custom or otherwise. The bidder agrees that (except where he/she has obtained identical certification from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause), he/she will retain such certifications in his files. Respectfully submitted, Contractor's Business Name By Owner Business Address: Street By Title City State Zip Contractor's License No. and Business Phone Number Classification: Expiration Date: Fax Number Date Non-Business Hours/Emergency Phone Number 22

25 BID BOND KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that: WHEREAS the City of Monrovia ("City") has issued an invitation for bids for the work described as follows: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 WHEREAS (Name and address of Bidder) ("Principal"), desires to submit a bid to said City to perform all work required under the City s Plan and Specification. WHEREAS, bidders are required under the provisions of the California Public Contract Code to furnish a form of bidder's security with their bid. NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and (Name and address of Surety) ("Surety") a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), being not less than ten percent (10%) of the total bid price in lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal is awarded a contract for the work by City and, within the time and in the manner required by the bidding specifications, enters into the written form of contract included with bidding specifications, furnishes the required bonds, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for labor and materials, and furnishes the required insurance, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. In case law suit is brought upon this bond, Surety further agrees to pay all court costs incurred by City in the suit including reasonable attorney's fees in an amount fixed by the court. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code Sec

26 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by Principal and Surety, on the date set forth below, the name of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing body. Dated: "Principal" "Surety" By: By: Its: Its: By: By: Its: Its: (Seal) (Seal) Note: This bond must be dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of the authority of any person signing as attorney-in-fact must be attached. 24

27 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT To: The City of Monrovia, California: That undersigned, in submitting a bid for performing the following work by contract, being duly sworn, deposes and says: That undersigned has not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the following contract: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 State of California ) ) ss. County of Los Angeles ), being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is of the party making the foregoing bid, that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding, that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member of agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. Signature Subscribed and sworn to before me on (Date) (Notary Seal) Signature Notary Public 25

28 DECLARATION OF BIDDER S QUALIFICATIONS FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Permanent Main Office Address: 3. Treasury Number: 4. Number and Classification of License: 5. When organized: 6. If a corporation, when incorporated: 7. How many years have you been engaged in the business involved in this job under your present firm or trade name? 8. Contracts on hand: Show amount of each contract and the anticipated dates of completion: 9. General Character of work performed by your company: 10. Have you ever failed to complete work awarded you? 11. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? 26

29 12. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed: 13. List major equipment available for this contract: 14. List experience in work similar in importance to this project: 27

30 15. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers: 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and comply with other reasonable requests of the City of Monrovia for information? The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firms, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Monrovia in verification of the recitals comprising this declaration of bidder's qualifications. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Place where signed Contractor Date Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder Title 28

31 DECLARATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS [Public Contract Code Section 4104] FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 Public Contract Code 4104 provides as follows: Any officer, department, board or commission taking bids for the construction of any public work or improvement shall provide in the specifications prepared for the work or improvement or in the general conditions under which bids will be received from the doing of the work incident to the public work or improvement that of any person making a bid or offer to perform the work, shall, in his or her bid or offer, set forth: (a) (b) The name and the location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater. The portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor under this act. The prime contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each portion as is defined by the prime contractor in his or her bid. 29

32 SUBCONTRACTOR'S NAME AND CONTACT NAME ADDRESS & TELEPHONE DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED STATE LICENSE NUMBER AND CLASS DBE YES OR NO PERCENT (%) OF TOTAL PROJECT WORK TO BE DONE BY SUBCONTRACTOR 30

33 CONSTRUCTION PROJECT REFERENCE FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 In order to more fully evaluate your background and experience for the project herein proposed, it is requested that you submit a list of Public Works and/or similar construction projects completed or in progress within the last 24 months. Your cooperation in this matter is greatly appreciated. Number of years as a contractor in construction work of this type: Three projects of this type recently completed: 1. Name and address of City Name of person familiar with project Telephone Number Contract Amount Type of Work Date Completed 2. Name and address of City Name of person familiar with project Telephone Number Contract Amount Type of Work Date Completed 3. Name and address of City Name of person familiar with project Telephone Number Contract Amount Type of Work Date Completed Bidder's Signature NOTE: If requested by the City, the bidder shall furnish a certified financial statement, references, and other information sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of his current financial condition. 31

34 BIDDER S ASSURANCE FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 FROM: Name of Bidder: Business Address: Telephone No: ( ) TO: City Council, c/o City Hall City of Monrovia, California City Council: Pursuant to your published Notice Inviting Bids for: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 The undersigned declares that they have carefully examined the location of the proposed work; that they have carefully examined the Plans and Specifications, and read the accompanying Instructions to Bidders; and hereby proposes to furnish all materials, machinery, tools, labor, and services, and do all the work necessary to complete the project in accordance with said Plans and Specifications, and other Contract Documents, at the Item prices specified in the Bidding Schedule within the contract time. Executed at on the day of, 20. By: President By: Secretary By: Treasurer By: Bidder Address 32

35 33

36 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AND CONTRIBUTION Contract/Agreement/License/Permit No. or description Indemnitor(s) (list all names:) To the fullest extent permitted by law, Indemnitor hereby agrees, at its sole cost and expense, to defend, protect, indemnify, and hold harmless the City of Monrovia, and its elected officials, officers, attorneys, agents, employees, volunteers, successors, and assigns (collectively "Indemnitees") from and against any and all damages, costs, expenses, liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action, proceedings, expenses, judgments, penalties, liens and losses of any nature whatsoever, including fees of accounts, attorneys, or other professionals and all costs associated therewith (collectively "Liabilities"), arising or claimed to arise, directly or indirectly, out of, in connection with, resulting from, or related to any act, failure to act, error, or omission of Indemnitor or any of its officers, agents, servants, employees, subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers or their officers, agents, servants or employees, arising or claimed to arise, directly or indirectly, out of, in connection with, resulting from, or related to the above referenced contract, agreement, license, or permit (the "Agreement") or the performance or failures to perform any term, provision, covenant, or condition of the Agreement, including this indemnity provision. This indemnity provision is effective regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by Indemnitees and shall operate to fully indemnify Indemnitees against any such negligence. This indemnity provision shall survive the termination of the Agreement and is in addition to any other rights or remedies which Indemnitees may have under the law. Payment is not required as a condition precedent to an Indemnitee's right to recover under this indemnity provision, and an entry of judgment against an Indemnitee shall be conclusive in favor of the Indemnitee's right to recover under this indemnity provision. Indemnitor shall pay Indemnitees for any attorneys fees and costs incurred in enforcing this indemnification provision. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this instrument shall be construed to encompass (a) Indemnitees' sole negligence or willful misconduct to the limited extent that the underlying agreement is subject to Civil Code 2782(a) or the contracting public agency's active negligence to the limited extent that the underlying Agreement is subject to Civil Code 2782(b). This indemnity is effective without reference to the existence or applicability of any insurance coverages which may have been required under the Agreement or any additional insured endorsements which may extend to Indemnitees. Indemnitor, on behalf of itself and all parties claiming under or through it hereby waives all rights of subrogation and contribution against the Indemnitees, while acting within the scope of their duties, from all claims, losses and liabilities arising out of or incident to activities or operations performed by or on behalf of the Indemnitor regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by the Indemnitees. In the event there is more than one person or entity names in the Agreement as an Indemnitor, then all obligations, liabilities, covenants and conditions under this instrument shall be joint and several. "Indemnitor" Name: By: Its: Name: By: Its: 34

37 AGREEMENT TO COMPLY WITH CALIFORNIA LABOR LAW REQUIREMENTS [Labor Code 1720, , 1775, 1776, , 1813, 1860, 1861, 3700] FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 The undersigned Contract certifies that it is aware of and hereby agrees to fully comply with the following provision of California law: 1. Contractor acknowledges that this contract is subject to the provisions of Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 1720) of the California Labor Code relating to public works and the awarding public agency ("Agency") and agrees to be bound by all the provisions thereof as though set forth in full herein. 2. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section which requires the payment of travel and subsistence payments to each worker needed to execute the work to the extent required by law. 3. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Sections 1774 and 1775 concerning the payment of prevailing rates of wages to workers and the penalties for failure to pay prevailing wages. The Contractor shall, as a penalty to the Agency, forfeit not more than fifty dollars ($50) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing rate as determined by the Director of Industrial Relations for the work or craft in which the worker is employed for any public work done under the contract by Contractor or by any subcontractor. 4. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1776 which require Contractor and each subcontractor to (1) keep accurate payroll records, (2) certify and make such payroll records available for inspection as provided by Section 1776, and (3) inform the Agency of the location of the records. The Contractor is responsible for compliance with Section 1776 by itself and all of its subcontractors. 5. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section concerning the employment of apprentices on public works projects, and further agrees that Contractor is responsible for compliance with Section by itself and all of its subcontractors. 6. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1813 concerning penalties for workers who work excess hours. The Contractor shall, as a penalty to the agency, forfeit twenty-five dollars ($25) for each worker employed in the execution of the contract by the Contractor or by any subcontractor for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 3 of the California Labor Code. 35

38 7. California Labor Code Sections 1860 and 3700 provide that every contractor will be required to secure the payment of compensation to its employees. In accordance with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1861, Contractor hereby certifies as follows: "I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for worker's compensation or to undertake self-insurance to accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract." Bidder s Name Date By Signature Title 36

39 FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES IN CONTRACTS FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 The City of Monrovia has a policy whereby the City does not do business with any firm that discriminates against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Accordingly, every contract or subcontract of the City in excess of $5,000 for public works, or for goods and services, must be accompanied by a Certificate of Non-Discrimination, obligating the contractor or subcontractor to observe the requirements specified therein. In addition to the Certificate of Non-Discrimination, the City also requests that the lowest responsible bidder undertake an affirmative course of action to promote equal employment opportunities and to ensure that employees are treated the same during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 37

40 CERTIFICATE OF NON-DISCRIMINATION BY CONTRACTORS FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 As suppliers of goods or services to the City of Monrovia, the firm listed below certifies that it does not discriminate in its employment with regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin; that it is in compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local directives, and executive orders regarding non-discrimination in employment; and that it agrees to pursue positively and aggressively the principle of equal opportunity in employment. We agree specifically: 1. To establish or observe employment policies which affirmatively promote opportunities for minority persons at all job levels. 2. To communicate this policy to all persons concerned, including all company employees, outside recruiting services, especially those serving minority communities, and to the minority communities at large. 3. To take affirmative steps to hire minority employees within the company. Firm Signature Title Date Please include any additional information available regarding equal opportunity employment programs now in effect within your company: 38

41 WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATE FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 The Contractor shall execute the following form as required by the California Labor Code, Sections 1860 and 1861: I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance wit the provisions of that code, and I will comply wit such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of the Contract. Dated Contractor Signature Title 39

42 STATUTORY PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CLAIMS [Public Contract Code Section 20104] FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 This contract is subject to the provisions of Article 1.5 (commencing at Section 20104) of Division 2, Part 3 of the California Public Contract Code regarding the resolution of public works claims of less than $375,000. Article 1.5 mandates certain procedures for the filing of claims and supporting documentation by the contractor, for the response to such claims by the contracting public agency, for a mandatory meet and confer conference upon the request of the contractor, for mandatory non-binding mediation in the event litigation is commenced, and for mandatory judicial arbitration upon the failure to resolve the dispute through mediation. This contract hereby incorporates the provisions of Article 1.5 as though fully set forth herein. I, the undersigned Contractor, acknowledge that this contract is subject to the provisions of Section of the California Public Contract Code relating to construction contract claims and agree to be bound by all the provisions thereof as set forth in full herein. Bidder s Name Date By Signature Title 40

43 STATEMENT ACKNOWLEDGING PENAL AND CIVIL PENALTIES CONCERNING THE CONTRACTORS' LICENSING LAWS [Business & Professions Code ] [Public Contract Code ] FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 I, the undersigned, certify that I am aware of the following provisions of California Law and that I, or the entity on whose behalf this certification is given, hold a currently valid California contractor's license as set forth below: Business & Professions Code : (a) It is a misdemeanor for any person to submit a bid to a public agency in order to engage in the business or act in the capacity of a contractor within this state without having a license therefor, except in any of the following cases: (1) The person is particularly exempted from this chapter. (2) The bid is submitted on a state project governed by Section of the Public Contract Code or on any local agency project governed by Section [now ] of the Public Contract Code. (b) If a person has been previously convicted of the offense described in this section, the court shall impose a fine of 20 percent of the price of the contract under which the unlicensed person performed contracting work, or four thousand five hundred dollars ($4,500), whichever is greater, or imprisonment in the county jail for not less than 10 days nor more than six months, or both. In the event the person performing the contracting work has agreed to furnish materials and labor on an hourly basis, "the price of the contract" for the purposes of this subdivision means the aggregate sum of the cost of materials and labor furnished and the cost of completing the work to be performed. (c) (d) (e) This section shall not apply to a joint venture license, as required by Section However, at the time of making a bid as a joint venture, each person submitting the bid shall be subject to this section with respect to his or her individual licensure. This section shall not affect the right or ability of a licensed architect, land surveyor, or registered professional engineer to form joint ventures with licensed contractors to render services within the scope of their respective practices. Unless one of the foregoing exceptions applies, a bid submitted to a public agency by a contractor who is not licensed in accordance with this chapter shall be 41

44 considered non-responsive and shall be rejected by the public agency. Unless one of the foregoing exceptions applies, a local public agency shall, before awarding a contract or issuing a purchase order, verify that the contractor was properly licensed when the contractor submitted the bid. Notwithstanding any other provision of law, unless one of the foregoing exceptions applies, the registrar may issue a citation to any public officer or employee of a public entity who knowingly awards a contract or issues a purchase order to a contractor who is not licensed pursuant to this chapter. The amount of civil penalties, appeal, and finality of such citation shall be subject to Sections to , inclusive. Any contract awarded to, or any purchase order issued to, a contractor who is not licensed pursuant to this chapter is void. (f) (g) Any compliance or noncompliance with subdivision (e) of this section, as added by Chapter 863 of the Statues of 1989, shall not invalidate any contract or bid awarded by a public agency during which time that subdivision was in effect. A public employee or officer shall not be subject to a citation pursuant to this section if the public employee, officer, or employing agency made an inquiry to the board for the purposes of verifying the license status of any person or contractor and the board failed to respond to the inquiry within three business days. For purposes of this section, a telephone response by the board shall be deemed sufficient. Public Contract Code : In all contracts subject to this part where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted shall be invalidated by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with the laws of this state. However, at the time the contract is awarded, the contractor shall be properly licensed in accordance with the laws of this state. The first payment for work or material under any contract shall not be made unless and until the Registrar of Contractors verifies to the agency that the records of the Contractors' State License Board indicate that the contractor was properly licensed at the time the contract was awarded. Any bidder or contractor not so licensed shall be subject to all legal penalties imposed by law, including, but not limited to, any appropriate disciplinary action by the Contractors' State License Board. Failure of the bidder to possess proper and adequate licensing at the time of submittal of this bid shall constitute a failure to execute the contract and may result in the forfeiture of the security of the bidder. Contractor: License No: Class: Title: Expiration Date: Date: Signature: 42

45 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 The following Agreement and Bond forms are included herein for review and reference only by the bidder. Upon award of the contract by the City the original of these documents will be given to the successful contractor for completion and execution. 43

46 AGREEMENT FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which constitute the entire agreement between the City and the Contractor, are enumerated as follows: Proposal Documents, including the Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bidding Schedule, Acknowledgment of Receipt of Addenda, Bidder's Declaration, Bid Bond, Noncollusion Affidavit, Declaration of Bidder's Qualification, Designation of Subcontractors, Construction Project Reference, Bidder's Assurance, Indemnification and Hold Harmless Agreement and Waiver of Subrogation and Contribution, Agreement to Comply with California Labor Law Requirements, Fair Employment Practice in Contracts, Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors, Workers' Compensation Insurance Certificate, Statutory Provision for Construction Contract Claims, Statement Acknowledging Penal and Civil Penalties Concerning the Contractor's Licensing Laws; this Agreement; Standard Specifications; Special Provisions; Technical Sections; Drawings; Plans; and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after the execution of this Agreement. These form the Contract, and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. EFFECTIVE DATE OF CONTRACT: This Agreement shall become effective and commence as of the date set forth below on which the last of the parties, whether City or Contractor, executes said Agreement. The City will thereafter issue a Notice to Proceed to the Contractor with the start date of XXX with the completion date of XXX. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed and attested by their proper officers thereunto duly authorized. OWNER: City of Monrovia Attest: By: Alice D. Atkins, CMC, City Clerk APPROVED AS TO FORM: By: City Attorney By: City Manager Dated: CONTRACTOR:* Contractors Name By: By: Signature Date Signature Date Title Title * Signature(s) of Contractor require notarization and if a business other than a sole individual shall be accompanied by a Resolution of the business authorizing the given signatures. 44

47 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND WHEREAS, The City of Monrovia, California, City has awarded to, hereinafter designated as "Principal", a Contract for: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 WHEREAS, said Principal is required under the terms of said Contract to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said Contract; NOW, THEREFORE, we,, as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the sum of Dollars ($ ), this amount being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract price, lawful money of the United States of America, for payment of which sum well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. In case suit is brought upon this bond, the Surety will pay a reasonable attorney's fee to the Plaintiff(s) and to the "City" in an amount to be fixed by the court. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, well and truly keep and perform all the undertakings, terms, covenants, conditions and agreements in the said Contract and any alteration thereof, made as therein provided, all within the time and in the manner therein designated and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. FURTHER, the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or modification of the Contract Documents, or of the work to be performed thereunder, shall in any way effect the obligations of this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or modifications of the Contract Documents or of the work to be performed thereunder. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, three (3) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the Principal and Surety named herein, on this day of, 20, the name and corporate seal of each representative pursuant to authority of its governing body. Principal By Surety By Title Business Address of Surety Phone No. 45

48 NOTE: All signatures must be acknowledged by a Notary Public 46

49 PAYMENT BOND WHEREAS, The City of Monrovia, California, City has awarded to, hereinafter designated as "Principal", a Contract for: FY STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 AND WHEREAS, said Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with said contract, to secure the payment of claims of laborers, mechanics, materialperson and other persons, as provided by law; NOW, THEREFORE, we,, as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the sum of Dollars ($ ), this amount being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total contract price for which payment well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if said Principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, assigns, or subcontractors shall fail to pay any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 3181, or amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the contract, or any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Contractor and its subcontractors pursuant to Section of the Unemployment Insurance Code, with respect to such work and labor, then the Surety or Sureties herein will pay for the same in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this bond, otherwise the above obligation shall be void. In case suit is brought upon this bond, the said Surety will pay a reasonable attorney's fee to the plaintiff(s) and City in an amount to be fixed by the court. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 3181 as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. Said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or modification of the Contract Documents or of the work to be performed thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of such change, extension of time, alteration or modification of the Contract Documents or of work to be performed thereunder. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals on this day of, 20. Principal By Surety By Title Business Address of Surety Phone No. 47

50 NOTE: All signatures must be acknowledged by a Notary Public 48

51 SPECIAL PROVISIONS SP

52 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS TP

53 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866

54 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARD DRAWINGS: PREFACE... 1 SECTION 1 TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS... 1 Section 1-2 Definitions... 1 Section Additional Definitions... 1 SECTION 2 SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORK... 2 Section 2-1 Award and Execution of Contract... 2 Section Proposal... 2 Section Examination of Plans, Specifications, and Project Site... 2 Section Interpretation of Drawings and Documents... 2 Section Award of Contract... 3 Section Execution of Contract... 3 Section Return of Proposal and Guarantee... 4 Section 2-5 Plans and Specifications... 4 Section General... 4 Section Dimensions, Scaling Omissions and Errors... 4 Section Special Provisions and Technical Provisions... 4 Section Request for Information... 4 Section Interpretation of Plans and Specifications... 5 Section Precedence of Contract Documents... 5 Section Shop Drawings and Submittals... 5 SECTION 3 CHANGES IN WORK... 6 Section 3-1 Changes Requested by the Contractor... 6 Section Notification and Communication... 6 Section 3-3 Extra Work... 7 Section Payment... 7 Section Markup... 7 Section 3-4 Changed Conditions... 7 Section Environmental Provisions... 7 Section 3-5 Disputed Work... 8 Section Retention of Imperfect Work... 8 SECTION 4 CONTROL OF MATERIALS... 8 Section 4-1 Materials and Workmanship... 8 Section Inspection Requirements... 8 Section Supervision and Inspection by the City... 8 Section Test of Materials... 9 SECTION 6 PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK... 9 Section 6-1 Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work... 9 Section 6-7 Time of Completion... 9 Section Working Day... 9 Section 6-8 Completion and Acceptance Section 6-9 Liquidated Damages SECTION 7 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR SP-ii

55 Section 7-1 Contractor's Equipment and Facilities Section Contractor's Responsibility For Work Section Notice and Service Thereof Section Warranty of Title Section 7-2 Labor Section Laws Section 7-3 Liability Insurance Section 7-5 Permits Section 7-6 The Contractor's Representative Section 7-10 Public Convenience and Safety Section Traffic and Access Section Street Closures, Detours and Barricades Section Public Safety Section Edison Energized Conductors Section Emergency Provisions SECTION 9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Section 9-3 Payment Section Partial and Final Payment Section Work Performed Without Direct Payment SECTION 10 INSURANCE REQUIREMENT SP-iii

56 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARD DRAWINGS: PREFACE The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (latest edition) written and promulgated by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association and the Southern California Districts of the Associated General Contractors of California shall be the Standard Specifications of the City. All work shall conform to the latest editions, including supplements, the Special and Technical Provisions which supplement or modify the Standard Specifications and the Standard Drawings as issued by the City available at the time bids are opened, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. The above-referenced Standard Specifications, Special and Technical Provisions, and Standard Drawings are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. For the convenience of the Contractor, the section and subsection numbering system used in these Special Provisions corresponds to that used in the Standard Specifications. Section 1 Section 1-2 Terms, Definitions, Abbreviations and Symbols Definitions Section Additional Definitions The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 1-2 of the Standard Specifications Whenever in the Standard Specifications the following terms are used, they shall be understood to mean and refer to the following: CITY - The City of Monrovia, California - a municipal corporation. OWNER - The City of Monrovia, California - a municipal corporation. BOARD - The City of Monrovia, City Council - acting individually as the "City" CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - Documents including but not limited to the proposal, Special Provisions, Technical Provisions, Bonds, Insurance, Contract, and all Addenda setting forth any modifications of the documents. ENGINEER The City Engineer individual in charge of the City's Engineering Division or an authorized representative. BIDDER - An individual, co-partnership, association or corporation submitting a proposal for the work contemplated, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative. LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR - The legal address of the Contractor to be the address given on the Contractor's bid and is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters or other communications to the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered. LABORATORY - An established laboratory approved and authorized by the Engineer for testing materials and work involved in the contract. SP - 1

57 Section 2 Section 2-1 Scope and Control of Work Award and Execution of Contract Section Proposal The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 2-1 of the Standard Specifications. The proposal shall be fully executed and submitted on the forms provided by the City and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed as directed in the "Notice Inviting Bids". If the proposal is made by an individual it shall be signed and their full name and address shall be given; if it is made by a firm it shall be signed with co-partnership name by a general partner thereof, who shall also sign their own name, and the name and address of each member of such co-partnership shall be given; if made by a corporation, the name of the corporation shall be signed by its duly authorized officers and attested by the corporate seal. Bidders are warned against making erasures or alterations of any kind on their Proposal. Proposals that contain omissions, erasures, alterations, conditions or additions not called for may be rejected. At the time the bid is submitted the Contractor shall be licensed under the provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code of the State of California to do the type of work contemplated in the contract and shall be skilled and regularly engaged in the general class or type of work required by this contract. Section Examination of Plans, Specifications, and Project Site The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 2-1 of the Standard Specifications. Bidders shall read the specifications, examine the drawings, and make their own estimates of the existing facilities and difficulties which will attend the execution of the work called for by the proposed contract, including local conditions, uncertainty of weather, and all other contingencies. Bidders shall satisfy themselves by personal examination of the locations of the proposed work, and by such other means as they may choose as to actual conditions and requirements and as to the accuracy of the quantities and measurements stated in the Proposal forms. Information derived from the maps, plans, specifications, profiles, or drawings, or from the Engineer or authorized shall not relieve the bidder of this responsibility, and the interpretation of the data disclosed is not guaranteed nor is any liability assumed by the City. Section Interpretation of Drawings and Documents The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 2-1 of the Standard Specifications. If a prospective bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents including the Specifications, or discovers discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Specifications or Drawings, he may submit to the Engineer a written request for an interpretation or a correction thereof. Interpretations or corrections of the Contract Documents including the Specifications and Drawings, shall be made only by addendum duly issued by the Engineer, and a copy of such addendum will be sent by certified mail, postage prepaid, or delivered to each person receiving a set of the Contract Documents whose address is known to the Engineer and such addendum shall be considered a part of and incorporated in the Contract Documents. SP - 2

58 Section Award of Contract The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 2-1 of the Standard Specifications. After the Proposals have been publicly opened and read aloud, they will be checked for accuracy and compliance with all provisions as specified herein. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received. Should the bid sheet include base bid items and additional or deductive alternative bid items, the City reserves the right to either award the project work included in the base bid items only, or to award a project composed of the base bid items and one or more of the additional or deductive alternative bid items or the base bid item(s) and any combination of additive/deductive bid items. The additional or deductive items are not listed in any specific order or priority that may be interpreted as the order in which the City will select to award the work thereof. Award of the Contract, if it be awarded, will be made by the City within sixty (60) days after opening of the bids. Award will be made to the lowest responsible bidder as determined by the City. The City reserves the right to award the contract after the sixty (60) day period with the concurrence of the bidder. In selecting the lowest responsible bidder, consideration will be given to the general competency of the bidder for the performance of the work covered by the proposal. To receive favorable consideration, a bidder may be required to present evidence that they have successfully performed similar work of comparable magnitude or submit other evidence satisfactory to the City that they or their associates are personally competent to manage the proposed undertaking and to carry it forward to a successful conclusion. Professional integrity and honesty of purpose shall be essential requirements. A showing of adequate financial resources may be required but will not alone determine whether a bidder is competent to undertake the proposed work. Only manufacturers or contractors of established reputation, or their duly authorized dealers or City, having proper facilities for the manufacture of the materials or equipment and for servicing same, or for proper execution of the work called for in the contract, will be considered in making the award. Section Execution of Contract The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 2-1 of the Standard Specifications. A bidder whose proposal is accepted shall properly sign a written contract with the City on the form attached hereto and return said contract together with good and approved bonds and insurance certificates as required by the Contract Documents within five (5) calendar days from the date of the mailing of a notice from the City to the bidder, according to the address given by him, of acceptance of his proposal. Contract bonds and certificates of insurance, if required, shall be filed in all instances before delivering any equipment, materials, or performing any work under the contract; also before any purchase order shall be issued. An executed Power of Attorney form shall be submitted with all contract bonds herein specified. If a bidder whose proposal is accepted fails or refuses to enter into a contract as herein provided, or to conform to any stipulated requirement in connection therewith, the money represented by his check or bidder's bond shall be refunded less the difference between the low bid and the bid of the bidder with whom the City enters into an agreement in accordance with the provisions of the Public Contracts Code Section At the discretion of the City an award may be made to the bidder whose proposal is next most acceptable to the City, and such bidder and his surety shall fulfill every stipulation embraced herein as if he were the party to whom the first award was made. SP - 3

59 A corporation to which an award is made may be required before the contract is finally signed to furnish evidence of its corporate existence, of its right to do business in California, and of the authority of the officer signing the contract and bonds for the corporation to so sign. Section Return of Proposal and Guarantee The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 2-1 of the Standard Specifications The check or bond of a bidder to whom the contract has been awarded will be returned to him after all of the acts, for the performance of which said security is required, have been fully performed. The checks or bid bonds of the second and third lowest bidders will be returned when the bidder to whom the contract has been awarded has properly executed all of the required Contract Documents. Checks or bid bonds of other bidders will be returned when their proposals are rejected or in any event at the expiration of Sixty (60) days from the date of opening bids. Section 2-5 Plans and Specifications Section General Section Dimensions, Scaling Omissions and Errors The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The Specifications and Plans are intended to be coordinated so that figures, words or notes exhibited on the Plans and not mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, are to be executed to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if mentioned in the Specifications and set forth in the Plans. Work shown on the Plans, the dimensions of which are not given, is to be accurately followed according to the scale to which the Plans are made, but figured dimensions in all cases are to be followed, although they may differ from the scale measurements. Should anything be omitted from the Plans or Specifications which is necessary to a clear understanding of the work, or should any error appear either in the various instruments or in the work done by other contractors affecting the work included in the Plans or Specification, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify the Engineer. In the event of the Contractor's failure to give such notice, the Contractor shall make good any damage or defect in the work caused thereby. The execution of work specially detailed or explained without a previous written claim for an extra charge, shall constitute an acceptance by the Contractor of the detailed explanations as being in conformity with the work covered by the Contract. Section Special Provisions and Technical Provisions The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. It is specifically understood that the Special Provisions and Technical Provisions of the Project Manual and Contract Documents shall take precedence over any Notes, General Notes, Reference Notes or Schedules on the Plan Drawings when and where such items address the same issue or methods as discussed in the other. Section Request for Information The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The Engineer, whenever requested, will furnish to the Contractor such further detailed explanation, either orally or graphically as may be necessary to properly and accurately illustrate the work to be done, and the Contractor shall comply therewith. SP - 4

60 Section Interpretation of Plans and Specifications The Engineer will interpret the meaning of any part of the Plans and Specifications about which any misunderstanding may arise, and his decision shall be final. Section Precedence of Contract Documents The following supersedes this section of the Standard Specifications. The order of precedence of documents shall be: FIRST: Requirements of law, including the Code and Ordinances of the City of Monrovia. SECOND: Permits from other agencies as may be required by law. THIRD: Permits from City of Monrovia Departments as may be required by law or ordinance. FOURTH: The Contract Agreement. FIFTH: The Bid Proposal. SIXTH: Addenda. SEVENTH: Notice Inviting Bids. EIGHTH: Instructions to Bidders. NINTH: Special Provisions. TENTH: Technical Provisions. ELEVENTH: Plans. TWELFTH: Standard Plans. THIRTEENTH: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition). FOURTEENTH: Reference Specifications. Change orders, supplemental agreements, and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will take precedence over documents listed above, except those listed as FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD. Detailed plans shall have precedence over general plans. Section Shop Drawings and Submittals The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall submit no later than fifteen (15) calendar days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed copies of purchase orders and a list of all manufactured items and equipment and to be provided for incorporation in the project by manufacturer's name. Where the materials and equipment to be supplied are not the same manufactured items as identified in the specifications by type, size, model number, or similar feature then the list shall include such specifics on the items to be supplied. Brochures and other printed literature should be included to allow the City sufficient data to evaluate the material or equipment for use on the project. SP - 5

61 Should the Contractor fail to submit the material and equipment list to the City within the specified time period, the Contractor shall furnish and install the materials and equipment manufactured by the companies specified herein (provided such is currently in production by the manufacturer) and the Contractor will be deemed to have waived the right to submit an "or equal item". Where there is no named manufacturer for a material product or piece of equipment, the City shall be the sole judge of the suitability of a manufactured item with regards to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Should the contractor wish to install material or equipment on the project prior to the fifteen (15) calendar day period he shall submit a listing to the City at an earlier date to allow a minimum of ten (10) calendar days for the City's review, approval and/or rejection. During this initial period the Contractor is deemed to have thoroughly reviewed the project contract documents and the site and ascertained to the Contractors satisfaction, by use of Requests for Information (RFI's), the extent and interpretation of the City as to the work details and that the work shown and described in the plans and specifications can be completed without further clarification or by any changes thereto by the City. The Contractor shall prepare the drawings necessary for his own work and shall check the same for accurate measurements taken from the work, and when assured that such drawings have been properly prepared, shall submit same to the Engineer for approval. When shop drawings cannot be made from actual dimensions taken from the work, but are prepared from the Plans, it is clearly understood that the Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of the information upon which such drawings are prepared. The City does not guarantee their accuracy, but will make available to the Contractor information upon which such plans were made. It is absolutely understood that the Engineer's approval of the shop drawings is for the design only and not for dimensions or structural accuracy. Any material ordered by the Contractor prior to the approval of Shop Drawings, shall be at their own risk. The Engineer shall have the right to keep Shop Drawings submitted for approval two weeks before returning them to the Contractor with corrections or approval, and no claim for delay on this account shall be recognized. Six complete sets of submittals shall be furnished to the Engineer. Section 3 Section 3-1 Changes in Work Changes Requested by the Contractor Section Notification and Communication The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 3-1 of the Standard Specifications. All changes and notifications of discrepancies shall be submitted first to the City for review and approval, prior to submittal to the Architect or Consulting Engineer. Changes in the scope of work, additional work and contract cost changes shall not be authorized by any party other than the City of Monrovia. All correspondence for the project shall be made through the City of Monrovia. SP - 6

62 Section 3-3 Extra Work Section Payment Section Markup The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The following percentages may be added to the Contractor's costs and shall constitute the maximum markup allowed for all overhead and profits including bonding: 20% Labor 15% Materials 15% Equipment Rental 15% Other Items and Expenditures 5% General Contractor s Markup on Subcontractor s work Section 3-4 Changed Conditions Section Environmental Provisions The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 3-4 of the Standard Specifications. "Environmental Provisions The Contractor shall, as appropriate, comply with all provisions of Public contracts Code Section 7104 (SB1470). The requirements of this code are summarized as follows: In the event Contractor is required to dig any trench or excavation that extends deeper than four feet below the surface in order to perform the work authorized under this contract, Contractor agrees to promptly notify City in writing before further disturbing the site if any of the conditions set forth below are discovered: (1) Material that the Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in Section of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with the provisions of existing law. (2) Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated. (3) Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work of the character provided for in this Contract. The City agrees to promptly investigate the conditions, and if the City finds that the conditions do materially differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work, shall issue a change order under the procedures described in this Contract. That, in the event a dispute arises between City and Contractor as to whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for in this Contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under this Contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by this contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between contracting parties. SP - 7

63 Section 3-5 Disputed Work Section Retention of Imperfect Work The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 3-5 of the Standard Specifications. If any portion of the work done or materials furnished under the contract proves defective or not in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings, and if the imperfection in the same is not of sufficient magnitude or importance to make the work dangerous or undesirable, or if the removal of such work is impracticable or will create conditions which are dangerous or undesirable in the opinion of the Engineer, the Engineer shall have the right and authority to retain the work instead of requiring it to be removed and reconstructed, but he shall make such deductions therefore in the payment due the Contractor as may be just and reasonable. Section 4 Section 4-1 Control of Materials Materials and Workmanship Section Inspection Requirements Section Supervision and Inspection by the City The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. Work shall be done in strict compliance with the approved Plans and Specifications and under the supervision and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall decide all questions which may arise as to the quality or acceptability of the work performed and as to the manner or performance and rate of progress of the work, and all questions as to progress payments of compensation. Unless specifically authorized, work shall be done in the presence of an inspector appointed by the Engineer. Any work performed during the absence of said inspector without such authorization will be subject to summary rejection. The Engineer shall at all times have access to the work, and the Contractor shall furnish every reasonable facility for ascertaining that the materials and workmanship comply with the plans and specifications at the construction site, or at shops or yards, as desired. All work, equipment and materials shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall not cover up any work before inspection and approval. Any work, The Contractor, at his own expense, will be required to remove portions of the work covered up before such approval as may be necessary to expose the UN-approved work and permit the inspection to be made. All rejected work shall be remedied or removed and replaced by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and no compensation therefore will be allowed or paid to the Contractor. Any work done beyond the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Engineer, or any extra work done without valid written authority, will be considered unauthorized and will not be paid for. Unauthorized work may be ordered removed at the Contractor's expense. Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the Engineer made under the provisions of these Contract Documents, the Engineer shall have authority to cause defective or unauthorized work to be remedied, removed and/or replaced at the expense of Contractor, and may deduct the cost from any moneys due or which shall become due to the Contractor under this Contract. SP - 8

64 Inspection or approval of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any obligation to faithfully perform and comply with the contract. Defective work shall be made good and non-complying materials rejected and replaced at Contractor's expense, notwithstanding that such defective work has been previously overlooked by the Engineer and approved. Section Test of Materials The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. Should the test of any material, apparatus, or equipment show that it does not meet the guarantees or requirements of the Specifications, the Contractor shall at once proceed to furnish such new parts as may be necessary to bring it up to requirements. All expenses of furnishing new parts, or alteration to existing parts, and of tests made necessary by such failure to meet the guarantees and other requirements of the Specifications, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Section 6 Section 6-1 Prosecution, Progress and Acceptance of the Work Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 6-1 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor's proposed construction schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer within 48 hours of award of contract. The schedule shall be supported by written statements from each supplier of materials or equipment indicating that all orders have been placed and acknowledged, and setting forth the dates that each item will be delivered. Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the Engineer will schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Contractor to review the proposed construction schedule and delivery dates, arrange utility coordination, discuss construction methods, and clarify inspection procedures. Section 6-7 Time of Completion The Contractor shall commit to start construction on xxx and complete the work by xxx. Section Working Day The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor's working hours shall be limited to the hours between 7:00 A.M. and 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, excluding recognized holidays. Huntington Drive shall be limited to the hours between 9:00 A.M. westbound and 5:00 P.M. east bound. Deviation from normal working hours will not be allowed without prior written consent of the Engineer. In the event work is allowed by the Engineer outside of the normal working hours, at the request of and for the benefit of the Contractor, inspection service fees may be levied against the Contractor, including travel time where applicable. The above charge may also be levied if non-routine inspection services are deemed necessary by the Engineer as a matter of public safety or to otherwise insure the quality of the work. SP - 9

65 If work is done at night, the Contractor shall provide adequate light for proper prosecution of the work, for the safety of the workmen and the public, and for proper inspection. Section 6-8 Completion and Acceptance The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 6-8 of the Standard Specifications. In addition to the guarantees as required in Section 2-4 of the Standard Specifications, the Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for a period of one year after acceptance of the work by the City to insure that defects, which appear within said period, will be repaired, replaced, or corrected by the Contractor, at his own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer within ten (10) days after written notice thereof by the City. Title to all equipment, material and supplies delivered and installed at the job site, and structures, equipment and materials constructed or installed and all work done thereon, shall not vest or pass title in and to the City upon approval or field acceptance thereof, but shall be considered the property of the Contractor until final completion of the work and its formal acceptance by the City. The Contractor may insure the equipment, materials and work to protect Contractor's interest in the same from time to time, as required. The City will not, under any circumstances, be liable, answerable or accountable for any theft, loss or damage, however and by whatever cause, to said equipment, materials and work, or any part or parts thereof, used or employed in completing the contract. Section 6-9 Liquidated Damages The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 6-9 of the Standard Specifications. The Standard Specifications stipulate that liquidated damages per calendar day shall be deducted from any compensation due the Contractor should he fail to complete the work required by the terms of his Contract within the time specified hereinabove plus any authorized time extensions. For this project the City has determined that Liquidated Damages shall be $5, per calendar day for non-completion of the project after xxxx Section 7 Section 7-1 Responsibilities of the Contractor Contractor's Equipment and Facilities Section Contractor's Responsibility For Work The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 7-1 of the Standard Specifications. Until the formal acceptance of the work by the City, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall, subject to the insurance protection furnished in accordance with 7-3 herein, bear the risk of accident, loss or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements or from any other cause including fire, winds, and or earthquakes, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and otherwise correct damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before its acceptance. In case of suspension of work from any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and the proper temporary storage thereof. SP - 10

66 Section Notice and Service Thereof The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 7-1 of the Standard Specifications. Any notice required or given by one party to the other under the Contract shall be in writing and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by a duly authorized representative of such party. Any such notice shall not be effective for any purpose whatever unless served in the following manner: a.) b.) c.) Notice shall be given to the City by personal delivery thereof to the City's Engineer or by depositing the same in the United States Mail enclosed in a sealed envelope, certified and with postage prepaid, addressed to: City Engineer City of Monrovia 600 South Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA Notice shall be given to the Contractor by personal delivery thereof to said Contractor or to his authorized representative at the site of the project, or by depositing the same in the United States Mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to said Contractor at the address established for the conduct of the work under this Contract, postage prepaid and certified. Notice shall be given to the Surety, or any other person, by personal delivery to said Surety or other person, or by depositing the same in the United States Mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to such Surety or persons at the address of said Surety or persons last communicated to the party giving the notice, postage prepaid and certified. Section Warranty of Title The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 7-1 of the Standard Specifications No materials, supplies or equipment for the work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest therein or any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The Contractor warrants clear and good title to all materials, supplies and equipment installed and incorporated in the work, and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver the premises, together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him, to the City free from any claims, liens, encumbrances or charges, and further agrees that neither he nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any material or labor for work covered by the Contract shall have any right to a lien upon the premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon; provided, that this shall not preclude the Contractor from installing metering devices or other equipment of utility companies the title of which is commonly retained by the utility company. Nothing contained in this section, however, shall defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor, which are in the hands of the City. The provisions of this section shall be inserted in all subcontractor's and material contracts, and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into regarding such materials. SP - 11

67 Section 7-2 Labor Section Laws The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. Each bidder must submit with the Bid Proposal a fully executed Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors. Bids will not be considered unless accompanied by the completed Certificate. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of Sections 1776, and of the California Labor Code. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with Section 1776 and shall insert a provision in all subcontracts requiring subcontractors to comply with said section. Section 7-3 Liability Insurance The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 7-3 of the Standard Specifications The Contractor agrees to provide insurance according to the requirements set forth here. Contractor will maintain the following coverage on behalf of the City of Monrovia, its officials, employees, agents, and volunteers. Commercial General Liability Insurance shall be provided on Insurance Services Office CGL form No. CG or 88. Policy limits shall be no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence for all coverage and two million dollars ($2,000,000) general aggregate applicable exclusively to this project. There shall be no cross liability exclusion. Coverage shall apply on a primary non-contributing basis in relation to any other insurance or self-insurance (primary or excess) available to the City of Monrovia, its officials, employees, agents and volunteers. General liability insurance will not be limited to coverage for the vicarious liability or the supervisory role of the additional insured. Coverage for the additional insured shall apply to the fullest extent permitted by law excepting only the active negligence of the City of Monrovia as established by agreement between the parties or by the findings of a court of competent jurisdiction. The City of Monrovia, its officials, employees, agents, and volunteers shall be added as additional insured using Insurance Services Office additional insured endorsement form CG Business Auto Coverage shall be written on Insurance Services Office Business Auto Coverage form CA including owned, non-owned and hired autos. Limits shall be no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per accident. This policy shall be scheduled as underlying insurance to any umbrella policy as applicable. If Contractor owns no autos, a non-owned auto endorsement to the General Liability policy described above is acceptable. Workers Compensation/Employer s Liability shall be written on a policy form providing workers compensation statutory benefits as required by law. Employer s liability limits shall be no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per accident or disease. Unless otherwise agreed, this policy shall be endorsed to waive any right of subrogation as respects the City of Monrovia, it officials, employees, agents, and volunteers. Additionally, the Contractor and the City of Monrovia agree to the following provisions regarding insurance provided by Contractor: 1. Contractor agrees to provide insurance in accordance with the requirements set forth here. If Contractor uses existing coverage to comply with these requirements and that coverage does not meet the requirements set forth herein, Contractor agrees to amend, supplement or endorse the existing coverage to do so. In the event any policy of insurance required under this Agreement does not comply with these requirements or is canceled and not replaced, the City SP - 12

68 of Monrovia has the right, but not the duty, to obtain the insurance it deems necessary and any premium paid by the City of Monrovia will be promptly reimbursed by the Contractor. 2. Unless otherwise approved by the City of Monrovia, insurance provided pursuant to these requirements shall be written in insurers authorized to do business in the State of California and with a minimum Best s Insurance Guide rating of A:VII. Self-insurance will not be considered to comply with these insurance specifications. 3. Contractor shall provide proof that policies of insurance required herein expiring during the term of this Agreement have been renewed or replaced with other policies providing at least the same coverage. Proof that such coverage has been ordered shall be submitted prior to expiration. A coverage binder or letter from Contractor s insurance agent to this effect is acceptable. A certificate of insurance and/or additional insured endorsement as required in these specifications applicable to the renewing or new coverage must be provided to the City of Monrovia within five (5) days of the expiration of coverage. 4. Certificate(s) are to reflect that the insurer will provide thirty (30) days notice to the City of Monrovia of any cancellation of coverage. Contractor agrees to require its insurer to modify such certificates to delete any exculpatory wording stating that failure of the insurer to mail written notice of cancellation imposes no obligation, or that any party will endeavor (as opposed to being required) to comply with the requirements of the certificate. 5. Contractor agrees to require all subcontractors or other parties hired for this project to provide the same insurance as required of the Contractor unless otherwise agreed to be the City of Monrovia. The subcontractor s general liability insurance shall add as additional insured all parties to this Agreement using Insurance Services Office CG Contractor agrees to obtain certificates evidencing such coverage and make reasonable efforts to ensure that such coverage is provided as required herein. 6. The requirements in this Section supersede all other sections and provisions of this Agreement to the extent that any other section or provision conflicts with or impairs the provisions of this Section. Acceptability of Insurers Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best s rating of no less than A: VII. Verification of Coverage Contractor shall furnish the City with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this clause. The endorsements are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The endorsements are to be on forms provided by the City. All endorsements are to be received and approved by the City before work commences. As an alternative to the City s forms, the Contractor s insurer may provide complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, including endorsements effecting the coverage required by these specifications. Subcontractors Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insured s under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. SP - 13

69 Submittal Contractor shall submit to the City s Risk Manager insurance certificates indicating compliance with the minimum insurance requirements under Section 7-3 above, and policy endorsements indicating compliance with the minimum insurance requirements under Section 7-3 above, not less than seven (7) days prior to beginning of performance under this Contract. Failure on the part of Contractor to procure or maintain said insurance in full force and effect shall constitute a material breach of this Agreement under which City may immediately terminate the Agreement or procure or renew such insurance and pay any premiums therefore at Contractor s expense. Danielle Tellez, Risk Manager/H.R. Division Manager City of Monrovia 415 South Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA Section 7-5 Permits The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 7-5 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall, at the time of award, and through the term of the contract, possess a valid State of California contractor s license for the work he is required to perform. In addition, the Contractor and each subcontractor employed upon the work must have or obtain a valid City of Monrovia Business License in accordance with the provisions of the Monrovia Municipal Code. Section 7-6 The Contractor's Representative The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 7-6 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the name, address and business and home telephone numbers of the person responsible for the maintenance of job area safety devices. Section 7-10 Public Convenience and Safety Section Traffic and Access The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall provide temporary "No Parking" and all other signs that are necessary for the safe and orderly conduct of vehicular traffic as directed by the Engineer and as specified herein. He shall also provide a barricaded area in the parking lane for pedestrian traffic during such time as the parkway is unfit to be used for pedestrian traffic. At such times as driveways are inaccessible due to the Contractor's work, they shall be blocked by two (2) Class II barricades or one (1) Class II barricade and two (2) delineators. Driveways that are ramped or planked for temporary access shall be provided with a barricade or delineator at each side. The Contractor shall give 24-hour notice to affected property owners prior to blocking any driveway. The Contractor shall provide access for refuse collection on the regularly scheduled days. He shall also facilitate or assist in the collection where such work is hampered by his operations. SP - 14

70 Section Street Closures, Detours and Barricades The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not close any street without first obtaining the approval of the Engineer. Barricading, traffic control and detour diagrams in connection with street closures shall be submitted by the Contractor as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install barricades, delineators, warning devices and construction signs in accordance with the Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (WATCH) prepared by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association or the CA-MUTCD. During adverse weather or unusual traffic or working conditions additional traffic devices shall be placed as directed by the Engineer. All traffic signs and devices shall conform to the current State of California, Department of Transportation, "Manual of Warning Signs, Lights, and Devices for Use in Performance of Work upon Highways," unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Class II barricades along excavation edges parallel to the flow of traffic at a spacing of twenty-five feet (25'). Class II barricades mounted with flashers shall be installed around work areas in parkways. Class II barricades shall have alternating black and reflectorized white (or yellow) stripes at an angle of 45 degrees. The stripe width shall be four to six inches. During paving operations, barricades may be supplemented with minimum size eighteen-inch (18") high traffic cones and delineators such that spacing between barricades and/or cones or delineators is no greater than twenty feet (25'). At all access points such as intersecting streets, alleys and driveways, barricades and/or cones shall be provided at five foot (5') intervals so as to prevent vehicular access to the paving area. Where access from an intersecting street is prohibited, a "Road Closed" sign shall be provided at the nearest prior intersection. "No Left Turn" signs shall be provided wherever required by the Engineer. When one-way access from a side street or alley is permitted, barricades and cones shall be provided at five foot (5') intervals for a distance of fifty feet (50') on either side of the centerline of the intersecting street, or alley. Should the Contractor fail to furnish a sufficient number of traffic and/or pedestrian safety devices, the City will place such necessary items and the Contractor shall be liable to the City for providing such devices in accordance with the following provisions: 1. For placing of barricades - $5.00 per barricade for the first day or any part thereof and $2.00 per barricade per day for each day thereafter or any part thereof. For flashers - $2.50 per flasher for the first day or any part thereof and $1.00 per flasher per day for each day thereafter or any part thereof. For traffic cones - $1.00 per cone for each day or any part thereof. 2. In the event that the services of the City are required between the hours of 3:30 p.m. and 7:00 a.m., during the normal week or at any time on Saturday, Sunday or a City holiday, there shall be an additional charge to the above set forth minimums of $25.00 for each service trip required. Contractor shall relocate, preserve and maintain the visibility of all existing signs within the project limits that affect the flow of traffic, as directed by the Engineer. Any signs that are damaged or found to be missing during the course of construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense as directed by the Engineer. All other signs that interfere with the course of work and are not necessary for the safe flow of SP - 15

71 traffic will be removed and replaced by the City. Traffic control signs include Stop Signs, Speed Limit, Parking Restrictions and other regulatory signs. Section Public Safety Section Edison Energized Conductors The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. Contractor hereby promises and agrees that in the performance of the work specified in this Contract, it will employ and utilize only qualified persons, as hereinafter defined, to work in proximity to Edison's secondary, primary and transmission facilities. The term "qualified person" is defined in Title 8, California Administrative Code, Section 2700, as follows: "Qualified Person". A person who by reason of experience or instruction is familiar with the operation to be performed and the hazards involved." Contractor further promises and agrees that the provisions of this section shall be and are binding upon any subcontractor or subcontractors that may be retained by it, and that Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to assure compliance by said subcontractor or subcontractors with the requirements of this section. Section Emergency Provisions The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. Unusual conditions may arise on the project which will require that immediate and unusual provision be made to protect the public from danger or loss or damage to life and property, due directly or indirectly to the prosecution of the work, and it is part of the service required of the Contractor to make such provisions and to furnish such protection. Whenever, in the opinion of the City, an emergency exists of which the City is aware and against which the Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the safety of the public or the protection of utilities or of adjacent structures or property which may be injured by the progress of construction; and whenever, in the opinion of the City, immediate action shall be considered necessary in order to protect public or private personnel or property interests, or prevent likely loss of human life or damage on account of the operations under the Contract, then in that event the City may provide suitable protection to said interests by causing such work to be done and material to be furnished, as in the opinion of the City may seem reasonable and necessary, all at the expense of the Contractor. Section 9 Section 9-3 Measurement and Payment Payment Section Partial and Final Payment The following is in addition to the provisions of Section of the Standard Specifications. Progress payment requests are to be based on work completed as of the twentieth (20th) calendar day of each month. On or about the twentieth (20th) calendar day of the month the contractor and the City are to meet to compile the quantities of work in process during the past month's period and completed or to determine the percentage (%) of the work completed by bid item. Following agreement determination the contractor shall prepare the Progress Payment Request in a form agreed upon with the City, sign and submit same to the City. SP - 16

72 The City's procedure is to pay contractors on the Wednesday following the City Council's Tuesday meetings that are scheduled for the 1st and 3rd Tuesdays of each month. The City requires fifteen (15) working days prior to the City Council Meeting to review and approve the Payment Form. When the Payment Form is submitted it is to be accompanied by the following documents. 1. For the First Progress Payment Request: Conditional Waivers and Releases of Liens against the project by the contractor and all materialmen, vendors, subcontractors and independent contractors covering their work claimed in the Request to have been performed. 2. For the subsequent Progress Payment Requests and the Final Progress Payments Request Unconditional Waivers and Releases for Liens against the project by the Contractor and all materialmen, vendors, subcontractors, and independent contractors covering their work completed under the previous month's Progress Payment Request and Conditional Waivers and Releases of Liens against the project by the Contractor and all materialmen, vendors, subcontractors and independent contractors covering their work claimed in this Progress Request to have been performed. 3. For the Retention Payment Request: Unconditional Waivers and Releases of Liens against the project by the contractor and all materialmen, vendors, subcontractors, and independent contractors covering their respective portions of the work of the completed project. Payments may be withheld by the City pending receipt of any outstanding reports (payroll sheets, lien releases, etc.) required by the Contract Documents. Payment shall not be requested more than once a month nor in an amount less than five hundred dollars ($500.00). The City may reduce or withhold partial payments if, in the City's opinion, the Contractor is not diligently and efficiently endeavoring to comply with the intent of the Contract or fails to make payments for labor or materials used in the work. In addition, the final progress payment will not be released until the Contractor returns the control set of Plans and Specifications showing the as-built conditions. The full ten percent (10%) retention may be deducted from all payments. The final retention will be authorized for Payment at the earliest thirty-five (35) days after the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion provided there have been no challenges issued against the release of said payment. All progress and final contract payments must be requested in writing by the contractor submitting an invoice to the City including for the final retention payment. The Contractor may, at Contractor's sole cost and expense, substitute securities equivalent to any moneys withheld by the City to insure performance under the Contract. Such security shall be deposited with the City or a state or federally chartered bank as escrow agent, who shall pay such moneys to the Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the Contract. The Contractor shall be the beneficial City of any security substituted for moneys withheld and shall receive any accrued interest thereon. Securities eligible for investment shall include those listed in Government Code Section or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit. No such substitution shall be accepted until the Escrow Agreement, Letter of Credit, forms of security and any other document related to said substitution is reviewed and found acceptable by the City's Attorney. Section Work Performed Without Direct Payment The following is in addition to the provisions of Section 9-3 of the Standard Specifications. Whenever the Contractor is required per Plans and or Specifications to perform work or furnish equipment, labor, tools and materials of any class for which no price is fixed in the Proposal, it shall be understood that such work, equipment, labor, tools and materials shall be provided without extra charge, SP - 17

73 allowance, or direct payment of any kind. The cost of performing such work or furnishing such equipment, labor, tools and materials shall be included in the unit bid prices in the Proposal and no additional compensation will be paid therefore. Section 10 Insurance Requirement INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING, EXECUTING AND SUBMITTING EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE TO THE OWNER Insured Date (Contractor, Lessee, Permittee, etc.) A. Insured 1. In order to reduce problems and time delays in providing evidence of insurance to the Owner, you are requested to give your insurance agent or broker a copy of the enclosed Insurance Requirements and endorsement forms along with these instructions for completing, executing, and submitting evidence of insurance. 2. If the agreement requires Workers' Compensation coverage and you have been authorized by the State of California to self-insure Workers' Compensation, then a copy of the certificate from the State authorizing self-insurance for Workers' Compensation shall meet the requirements for Workers' Compensation insurance covering activities within the State of California. 3. All questions relating to insurance should be directed to the department or office responsible for your contract, lease, permit, or other agreement. B. Insurance Agent or Broker 1. The appropriate Endorsement Form shall be used. No changes in the terms of the Endorsement will be permitted. Certificates of Insurance alone will not be accepted by the Owner. 2. The insurance company underwriting the coverage must be licensed to sell insurance in the State of California and must be given a "A-:VII" or higher rating in the most recent edition of Best's Insurance Guide. The name of the Insurance Company and its address shall be noted on page 2 of the endorsement form. 3. More than one insurance policy may be required to comply with the insurance requirements. Endorsement forms appropriate to your insured's contract, lease or permit are checked below and enclosed. (X) Workers' Compensation/Employers Liability (X) General Liability (X) Automobile Liability ( ) Excess/Umbrella Liability ( ) Professional Liability ( ) Property insurance ( ) Fine Arts Property Insurance SP - 18

74 4. You shall have an authorized representative of the insurance company sign the completed endorsement forms, note his phone number at the bottom of page 3 and have said representative transmit the forms to the Owner. Signatures must be originals as the Owner will not accept facsimile (rubber stamp, photocopy, etc.) or initialed signatures. 5. The "General description of agreement(s) and/or activity (ies) insured" shall include reference to the activity and/or to either the specific Owner contract number, lease number, permit number or construction approval number. 6. The coverages and limits for each type of insurance are specified in the enclosed sheet of insurance requirements. When coverage is on a scheduled basis, then a separate sheet is to be attached to the endorsement listing such scheduled locations, vehicles, etc., so covered. 7. Endorsements to excess policies will be required when primary insurance is insufficient in complying with the Owner's requirements. 8. If there is insufficient space on the form to note pertinent information, such as inclusions, exclusions or specific provisions, etc., a separate sheet may be attached. 9. When additional sheets are attached, change the number of pages at the bottom of the form. 10. Completed Endorsement(s) and questions relating to the required insurance are to be directed to: Department of Public Works Engineering Division 600 South Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA (626) Improperly completed Endorsements will be returned to your insured for correction by an authorized representative of the insurance company. 12. DELAY IN SUBMITTING PROPERLY COMPLETED ENDORSEMENT FORMS MAY DELAY YOUR INSURED'S INTENDED OCCUPANCY OR OPERATION UNDER AGREEMENT WITH THE CITY. 13. For extensions or renewals of insurance policies which have the Owner's Endorsement Form(s) attached, the Owner will accept a copy of the endorsement (with an original signature) to extend the period of coverage as evidence of continued coverage. BIDDERS' ATTENTIONS DIRECTED TO THE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS BELOW. IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED THAT BIDDERS CONFER WITH THEIR RESPECTIVE INSURANCE CARRIERS OR BROKERS TO DETERMINE IN ADVANCE OF BID SUBMISSION THE AVAILABILITY OF INSURANCE CERTIFICATES AND ENDORSEMENTS AS PRESCRIBED AND PROVIDED HEREIN. IF AN APPARENT LOW BIDDER FAILS TO COMPLY STRICTLY WITH THE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS, THAT BIDDER MAY BE DISQUALIFIED FROM AWARD OF THE CONTRACT. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work SP - 19

75 hereunder by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. The cost of such insurance shall be included in the Contractor's bid. SP - 20

76 A. MINIMUM SCOPE OF INSURANCE Coverage shall be at least as broad as: 1. Insurance Services Office form number GL 0002 (Ed. 1/73) covering Comprehensive General Liability and Insurance Services Office form number GL 0404 covering Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability; or Insurance Services Office Commercial General Liability coverage ("occurrence" form CG 0001). 2. Insurance Services Office form number CA 0001 (Ed. 1/78) covering Automobile Liability, code 1 "any auto" and endorsement CA Workers' Compensation insurance as requirement by the Labor Code of the State of California and Employers Liability insurance. B. MINIMUM LIMITS OF INSURANCE Contractor shall maintain limits no less than: 1. General Liability: $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage. If Commercial General Liability Insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit. 2. Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage. 3. Workers' Compensation and Employers Liability: Workers' compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of California and Employers Liability limits of $1,000,000 per accident. C. DEDUCTIBLES AND SELF-INSURED RETENTIONS Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the Agency. At the option of the Agency, either: the insured shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions as respects the Agency, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or the Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claims administration and defense expenses. SP - 21

77 D. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS The policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: 1. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverages a. The Agency, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor, products and completed operations of the Contractor, premises owned, occupied or used by the Contractor, or automobiles owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations of the scope of protection afforded to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. b. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the Agency, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Agency, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. c. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Agency, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers. d. The Contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. 2. Workers' Compensation and Employers Liability Coverage The insured shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the Agency, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers for losses arising from the work performed by the Contractor for the Agency. 3. All Coverages Each insurance policy required by this clause shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended, voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the Agency for all reasons including payment of premium. E. ACCEPTABILITY OF INSURERS Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less than A-:VII. F. VERIFICATION OF COVERAGES Contractor shall furnish the Agency with certificates of insurance and with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be on forms provided by the Agency. Where by stature, the Agency's workers' compensation-related forms cannot be used, equivalent forms approved by the Insurance Commissioner are to be substituted. All certificates and endorsements are to be received and approved by the Agency before work commences. The Agency reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time. G. SUBCONTRACTORS Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. SP - 22

78 GENERAL LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT City of Monrovia ("the Agency") 415 S. Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA A. Policy Information Endorsement # 1. Insurance Company : Policy Number 2. Policy Term (From) (To) ; Endorsement Effective Date 3. Named Insured 4. Address of Named Insured 5. Limit of Liability Any One Occurrence/Aggregate $ / General Liability Aggregate (check one): Applies "per location/project" Is twice the Occurrence limit 6. Deductible or Self-Insured Retention (Nil unless otherwise specified): $ 7. Coverage is equivalent to: Comprehensive General Liability from GL0002 (Ed 1/73) Commercial General Liability "occurrence" form CG0001 Commercial General Liability "claims-made" form CG Bodily Injury and Property Damage Coverage is" "claims made" "occurrence" If claims-made, the retroactive date is Note: The Agency's standard insurance requirements specify "occurrence" coverage. "Claims-made" coverage requires special approval. If commercial general liability form or equivalent is used, the general aggregate must apply separately to this location/project of the general aggregate must be twice the occurrence limit. B. POLICY AMENDMENTS This endorsement is issued in consideration of the policy premium. Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached or any other endorsement attached thereto, it is agreed as follows: 1. INSURED. The Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees and volunteers are included as insureds with regard to damages and defense of claims arising from: (a) activities performed by or on behalf of the Named Insured, (b) products and completed operations of the Named Insured, or (c) premises owned, leased or sued by the Named Insured. 2. CONTRIBUTION NOT REQUIRED. As respects: (a) work performed by the Named insured for or on behalf of the Agency; or (b) products sold by the Named Insured to the Agency; or (c) premises leased by the Named Insured from the Agency, the insurance afforded by this policy shall be primary insurance as respects the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees or volunteers; or stand in an unbroken chain of coverage excess of the Named Insured's scheduled underlying primary coverage. In either event, any other insurance maintained by the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of this insurance and shall not contribute with it. 3. SCOPE OF COVERAGE. This policy, if primary, affords coverage at least as broad as: (1) Insurance Services Office form number GL 0002 (Ed.1/73), Comprehensive General Liability Insurance and Insurance Services Office form number GL 0404 Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability endorsement; or (2) Insurance Services Office Commercial General Liability Coverage, "Occurrence" form CG 0001 or "claims-made" form CG 0002; or SP - 23

79 GENERAL LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT (3) If excess, affords coverage which is at least as broad as the primary insurance forms referenced in the preceding sections (1) and (2). 4. SEVERABILITY OF INTEREST. The insurance afforded by this policy applies separately to each insured who is seeking coverage or against whom a claim is made or a suit is brought, except with respects to the Company's limit of liability. 5. PROVISIONS REGARDING THE INSURED'S DUTIES AFTER ACCIDENT OR LOSS. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policy shall not affect coverage provided to the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees or volunteers. 6. CANCELLATION NOTICE. The insurance afforded by this policy shall not be suspended, voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail return receipt requested has been given to the Agency. Such notice shall be addressed as shown in the heading of this endorsement.. C. INCIDENT AND CLAIM REPORTING PROCEDURE Incidents and claims are to be reported to the insurer at: Attn: (Title) (Department) (Company) (Street Address) (City) (State) (Zip Code) (Telephone Number) D. SIGNATURE OF INSURER OR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INSURER I, (print/type name), warrant that I have authority to bind the below listed insurance company and by my signature hereon do so bind this company. SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (original signature required on endorsement furnished to the Agency) ORGANIZATION: ADDRESS: TITLE: TELEPHONE: SP - 24

80 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT City of Monrovia ("the Agency") 415 S. Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA A. Policy Information Endorsement # 1. Insurance Company : Policy Number 2. Policy Term (From) (To) ; Endorsement Effective Date 3. Named Insured 4. Address of Named Insured 5. Limit of Liability Any One Occurrence/Aggregate $ / 6. Deductible or Self-Insured Retention (Nil unless otherwise specified): $ B. POLICY AMENDMENTS This endorsement is issued in consideration of the policy premium. Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy premium. Notwithstanding any inconstant statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached or any other endorsement attached thereto, it is agreed as follows: 1. INSURED. The Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees and volunteers are included as insureds with regard to damages and defense of claims arising from: the ownership, operation, maintenance, use, loading or unloading of any auto owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the Named Insured, regardless of whether liability is attributable to the Named Insured or a combination of the Named Insured and the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees of volunteers. 2. CONTRIBUTION NOT REQUIRED. As respects work performed by the Named Insured for or on behalf of the Agency, the insurance afforded by this policy shall: (a) be primary insurance as respects the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees or volunteers: or (b) stand in an unbroken chain of coverage excess of the Named Insured's primary coverage. In either event, any other insurance maintained by the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of this insurance and shall not contribute with it. 3. SCOPE OF COVERAGE. This policy, if primary, affords coverage to the Named Insured at least as broad as: (1)Insurance Services Office form number CA 0001 (Ed. 1/78). Code 1 ("any auto") an endorsement CA (2)If excess, affords coverage which is at least as broad a the primary insurance forms referenced in the preceding section (1). 4. SEVERABILITY OF INTEREST. The insurance afforded by this policy applies separately to each insured who is seeking coverage or against whom a claim is made or a suit is brought, except with respect to the Company's limit of liability. 5. PROVISIONS REGARDING THE INSURED'S DUTIES AFTER ACCIDENT OR LOSS. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policy shall not affect coverage provided to the Agency, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees or volunteers. 6. CANCELLATION NOTICE. The insurance afforded by this policy shall not be suspended, voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice by certified mail return receipt requested has been given to the Agency, Such notice shall be addressed as shown in the heading of this endorsement. SP - 25

81 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT City of Monrovia ("the Agency") 415 S. Ivy Avenue Monrovia, CA C. INCIDENT AND CLAIM REPORTING PROCEDURE Incidents and claims are to be reported to the insurer at: ATTN: (Title) (Department) (Company) (Street Address) (City) (State) (Zip) (Telephone Number) D. SIGNATURE OF INSURER OR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INSURER I, (print/type name), warrant that I have authority to bind the below listed insurance company and by my signature heron do so bind this company. SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (original signature required on endorsement furnished by the Agency) ORGANIZATION: ADDRESS: TITLE: TELEPHONE: SP - 26

82 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO CITY OF MONROVIA ( Agency ) Return Completed Certificate to: City of Monrovia (Agency) 600 S. Mountain Avenue Monrovia, CA Attn: Department of Public Works/City Engineer This certifies to the Agency that the following described policies have been issued to the Insured named below and are in force at this time. Insured Address Description of operations/locations/products insured (show contract name and/or number, if any): POLICIES AND INSURERS LIMITS POLICY NUMBER Workers' compensation Employers Liability $ (Name of Insurer) EXPIRATION DATE Best's Rating Check policy type: Comprehensive General Liability Or Commercial General Liability (Name of Insurer) Best's Rating Claims Made or Occurrence Business Auto Policy Liability Coverage Symbol (Name of Insurer) Best's Rating (Name of Insurer) Best's Rating Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ Commercial General Liability Each Occurrence $ General Aggregate either per project/ location $ or twice occurrence limit $ Each Person $ Each Accident $ Each Accident - Property Damage $ Or Combined Single Limit $ Occurrence/ Aggregate $ Self-Insured Retention $ Claims Made or Occurrence Note: If commercial general liability insurance is used or if aggregate limits are endorsed to the comprehensive general liability policy form, the general aggregate must apply per location/project or the aggregate limit must be at least twice the occurrence limit. SP - 27

83 The following coverage or conditions are in effect: Yes No The Agency, its officials, officers, employees and volunteers are named on all liability policies described above as insureds as respect: (a) activities performed for the Agency by or on behalf of the named insured, (b) products and completed operations of the Named Insured, and (c) premises, owned, leased or used by the Named Insured, Products and Completed Operations. The undersigned will mail to the Agency 30 days' written notice of cancellation or reduction of coverage or limits. Cross Liability Clause (or equivalent wording). Personal Injury, Perils A, B and C. Broad Form Property Damages X, C, U Hazards included. Contractual Liability Coverage applying to this Contract. Liquor Liability. Coverage afforded the Agency, its officials, officers, employees and volunteers as Insureds applies as primary and not excess or contributing to any insurance issued in the name of the Agency. Waiver of subrogation from Worker's Compensation insurer. This certificate is issued as a matter of information. This certificate is not an insurance policy and does not amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed herein. Notwithstanding any requirement, term or condition of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate of insurance may be issued or may pertain, the insurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all the terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies. Agency of Brokerage Insurance Company Address Home Office Name of Person to be Contacted Authorized Signature Date Note: Authorized signatures may be the agent's if agent has placed Telephone Number insurance through an agency agreement with the insurer. If insurance is brokered, authorized signature must be that of official insurer. SP - 28

84 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATE The Contractor shall execute the following form as required by the California Labor Code, Sections 1860 and 1861: I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake selfinsurance in accordance wit the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of the Contract. DATED: Contractor By: Signature Title ATTEST: By: Signature Title SP - 29

85 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS FOR MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 TP- i

86 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND LOCATION... 1 GENERAL NATURE OF WORK... 1 TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES... 2 PROJECT PHASING AND SCHEDULING... 2 PERMITS AND LICENSES... 2 COORDINATION WITH UTILITIES AND OTHER AGENCIES... 2 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE & NOTICES... 3 TRAFFIC CONTROL... 3 CLEAN UP OF WORK AREA... 4 EMERGENCY RESPONSE... 4 STORAGE YARD... 4 GENERAL WORK PLAN INFORMATION... 4 SLURRY SEAL... 6 ADJUST WATER VALVE COVERS ADJUST MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER CLEARING AND GRUBBING SUBGRADE PREPARATION PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE WORK ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PAVEMENT MARKERS SURVEY MONUMENTS TP- ii

87 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS FOR MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND LOCATION PLAN NO. Description None MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 STANDARD PLANS City of Monrovia Standard Plans Standard Plans for Public Works Construction, latest edition Caltrans Standard Plans, latest edition Los Angeles County Department of Public Works Standard Plans, latest edition GENERAL NATURE OF WORK The scope of work under this contract includes furnishing all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, tools and equipment, permits, services, and all incidental and appurtenant work necessary for completion of the work described as follows: SITE WORK Site work includes demolition of existing pavement and miscellaneous items. No buildings or other large structures will be demolished. Site work includes pavement, seating walls, planters, water features, hydration stations, removable bollards, lighting and signage. Site work to include landscaping and associated irrigation systems. Site work to include fountains and associated control systems. Site work to include painted murals on the Metro Gold Line parking structure. SITE STRUCTURES Site structures include a restroom building, stage / canopy structure and trash enclosure. UNDERGROUNDING UTILITIES Underground utilities including water, sewer, power and landscaping irrigation. There is an existing gas line serving the Depot to be maintained. SIDEWALK IMPROVEMENTS These improvements refer to work performed inboard of the curb line which includes curbs, gutters, sidewalks, landscaping, signage, street lights and traffic signals. This work is only at Peck Road. FURNISHINGS Furnishings include benches, tables, play structures and bike racks. TP - 1

88 TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES For purposes of Section 6-1 of the Standard Specifications, as supplemented by the Owner s Special Provision, the time of completion of this Contract shall be xxx. Attention is directed to the provisions of Section 6-9 of the Standard Specifications which stipulate that liquidated damages of $5, per calendar day for non-completion of the project after xxx shall be deducted from any compensation due the Contractor should he fail to complete the work required by the terms of his contract within the time specified herein above, plus any authorized time extensions. PROJECT PHASING AND SCHEDULING The work shall be scheduled and completed in phases as follows: 1. Businesses will remain open during construction. The Contractor shall provide access at all times unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer in writing. 2. Disruptions to vehicular traffic should be minimized and coordinated to the greatest extent during construction. 3. The contractor shall provide pedestrian access to all businesses at all times. Store front access shall be provided with plywood walkway during construction. 4. Full closure to through traffic shall be coordinated between Mondays and Thursdays with prior approval of the City Engineer. 5. Closure of half a street during daily work is acceptable in order to promulgate the work in an efficient manner. The Contractor shall provide detour signs and flagmen and notify the businesses daily. 6. All removed concrete and or asphalt pavement shall be poured and repaired and reopened to traffic within 24 hours of demolition unless prior written approval is obtained from the City Engineer on a case by case bases. 7. All streets shall remain open to traffic on Fridays, Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. 8. Please note trash pick up on project streets. PERMITS AND LICENSES As set forth in Section 7-5 of the Standard Specifications, and supplemented by the Owner's Special Provisions, the Contractor and his Subcontractors shall procure all permits and licenses, including a license to do business in the City of Monrovia, pay all fees and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work except the fees for the City's Public Works Department s Encroachment Permits will be waived for this Contract. COORDINATION WITH UTILITIES AND OTHER AGENCIES At least two (2) working days prior to starting work, the contractor shall contact Underground Service Alert (USA) at 811. Contractor shall submit to USA a complete list of Thomas Brothers Map Book Pages and Grids encompassing the area of work. Contractor shall notify the USA of any changes as they occur to the area of work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, Police Department, Fire Department, and Refuse Collection Service, and street sweeping company of any street closures 48 hours prior to the start of construction: City of Monrovia 1. Engineering Division (626) Police Department (626) Fire Department (626) Affected Utilities & Services TP - 2

89 The Contractor shall notify all affected public utilities and services 48 hours in advance of any excavation. The following names and telephone numbers are intended for the convenience of the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete or correct. 1. Underground Service Alert Adelphia (626) Verizon (800) Los Angeles County Sanitation Districts (562) Southern California Edison Company (626) Southern California Gas Company (800) Metropolitan Transportation Agency (213) Monrovia Transit (626) Foothill Transit (626) Monrovia Unified School District (626) Athens Disposal (626) Monrovia Postmaster (800) California Street Maintenance (street sweeping) (800) Computer Service (traffic signals and loops) (951) City of Monrovia Community Development Dept. (626) Monrovia Community Services Recreation Dept. (626) Monrovia Library Division (626) If the Contractor finds evidence of utilities not shown on the plans, he shall notify the owner immediately. Compensation for notifications to and coordination with utilities and other agencies shall be included in the unit bid prices in the Proposal and no additional compensation shall be allowed therefor. PUBLIC CONVENIENCE & NOTICES The Contractor shall notify the residents and businesses affected by the construction, in writing, not less than 48 hours or two (2) working days, whichever is a greater period of notice, in advance of commencement of construction on the street. The notice shall be first approved by the City and shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Title and description of project. 2. The time and approximate dates of the work for that street. 3. Name and address of contractor including regular work day and off hour s emergency telephone numbers. 4. Telephone number of City. TRAFFIC CONTROL All streets of the project shall be open to the public with a minimum of 2 traffic lanes (one in each direction) before 7:30 a.m. and after 5:00 p.m. and on Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays except for special conditions listed below. Adjacent streets shall not be closed to the public in the same working day. A written traffic control and pedestrian access plan shall be submitted to the City for approval of the Engineer before any work begins on a street. The traffic control plan shall be in accordance with the California MUTCD, latest edition and the WATCH Manual. Traffic signs conflicting with the improvement shall be covered or relocated as directed by the Engineer. All temporary striping, signing and devices shall be maintained by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. TP - 3

90 The traffic control plan shall provide, place, and maintain precautionary traffic and construction signs, pedestals, lanterns, temporary reflective centerline and lane line tapes and painted barricades, delineators and/or provide flagmen in sufficient number to the satisfaction of the City Engineer for adequate traffic control in and on the streets that lead to the construction area per the traffic control plan(s) submitted. Normal work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday except holidays. No streets of the project may be closed before 7:30 a.m. and must be open after 5:00 p.m. Where sidewalks, curb and gutter, and other concrete work is to be done adjacent to the schools appropriate protective measures shall be carried out to minimize any impediment to pedestrian children and their escorts from gaining access to the schools. CLEAN UP OF WORK AREA As work progresses, the Contractor shall clean all work surfaces of excess tack coat, bituminous and asphaltic materials, demolition rubble arid excavated materials. In case of default the City will clean those surfaces and the cost of doing such work shall be charged against the Contractor. EMERGENCY RESPONSE The Contractor shall furnish the City with the names and telephone numbers of a minimum of two (2) responsible representatives able to expedite requests beyond the normal working hours and on weekends and holidays. STORAGE YARD The following shall replace section of the Standard Specifications: The Contractor shall obtain approval from the City Engineer for any proposed storage yard site proposed to be located within the City of Monrovia, prior to delivery of equipment and or materials. GENERAL WORK PLAN INFORMATION The unit prices to be paid for the items listed in the Proposal shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, and doing all the work involved in furnishing and installing the materials complete and in place, in accordance with the details shown on the Plans and as specified herein. All incidental work which is neither shown on the Plans nor otherwise specified, and which is necessary to complete the construction of improvements as shown on the Plans and as specified herein, shall be furnished and installed as though such work were shown on the Plans or specified, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. The specifications are as follows: a. Posting of No Parking signs and Sweeping Prior to Crack Sealing All streets to be crack sealed are to be swept by either a vehicle mounted vacuum or broom mechanical sweeper either the day of the crack sealing or the prior day. Prior to sweeping No Parking notices are to be posted a minimum of two (2) working days prior to the crack sealing day. b. Blowing Out of Cracks TP - 4

91 All cracks and joints in the asphaltic concrete paving and edges of AC paving in contact against concrete gutters or other concrete features are to be blown clean and free from dirt, debris, and vegetation with compressed air through a nozzle pipe with the air pressure not less than 100 psi at the nozzle. All cracks shall be cleaned to a minimum depth of ½ inch. c. Routing Out of Cracks All cracks found to be ¼ inch to 1 inch in width shall be mechanically routed to a minimum depth of ½ inch or as deep as the AC material is loose and/or broken. The router shall be a two-wheeled, impact router, such as the Crafco 200 router or equal capable of following random cracks. For cracks found to be 1/8 inch to ¼ inch in width shall have any loose materials blown out without the need to router. For cracks more than 1 inch in width the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and/or Public Works Inspector before proceeding with crack sealing as specified herein. Following blowing out and /or routing of cracks all cracks are to be blown out and the blown out material removed from the street surface. d. Sealing of Prepared Cracks All cracks, 1/8 and larger, shall be sealed by insertion of a nozzle into the crack and filling it from the bottom up with the approved sealant material. The sealant material shall be at approximately 350 F during the application. The sealant material shall extend above the adjacent AC pavement surface by approximately ¼ inch. Crack sealant material is to be used only on the AC surfaces and the Contractor is to avoid placing oil on concrete surfaces. Any significant sealant areas on concrete surfaces are to be removed by the Contractor. e. Squeegeeing After filing of the crack with sealant, the sealant along the crack is to be squeegeed with a U shaped squeegee so as to strike off excess material and to provide a Band-Aid effect with the sealant. After the sealant has cooled, there may be a slight depression of not more than 1/8-inch below the adjacent pavement. f. Sanding Upon completion of Squeegeeing the areas of the filled cracks and adjacent areas of spread sealant are to be sanded by spreading by shoveling onto the pavement surface. The sand is to be of a thickness to blot the wet oil and allow the use of the street surface following the end of the work day when the street is to be reopened to vehicle and pedestrian traffic. Following one day minimum of drying with the sand thereon the sand is to be removed provided the oil is no longer tacky and tracking. Should the oil still be tacky and tracking the sand is to be allowed to remain until the crack seal on the street surface is no longer tacky or tracking. Should the Contractor choose to slurry seal the street while the crack seal oil is still tacky or tracking he may do so by closure of the street, removal of the sand and then by application of the slurry seal material. TP - 5

92 g. Equipment (1) The sealant shall be produced in a double boiler heater system such as the Crafco EZ Pour 200 sealant machine or equal, capable of heating the sealant to the sealant manufacturer s recommendations without placing direct heat onto the sealant. (2) Air Compressor for Cleaning of Cracks The air compressor shall be capable of providing a minimum of 100 psi at the nozzle for removal of any debris, dirt, or vegetation that may be in cracks including for those cracks that are to be routed mechanically. (3) Squeegee The squeegee work end shall be a U shaped, rubber-footed tool capable of leveling off the sealant without leaving an excess of material on the cracks after filling. h. Sealant Material The sealant material shall cure immediately upon cooling to a sufficient viscosity to prevent tracking by traffic. The sealant shall be Arm-R-Shield-CF manufactured by Arizona Refining Company or CRAFCO manufactured by Crafco, Inc., or equal. i. Payment for crack sealing will be paid on the basis of the overall square footage of the street or site areas in which there are cracks, regardless of the magnitude, size, or frequency of the cracks and whether or not routing is required for a few, many, or all cracks. SLURRY SEAL a. General (1) The slurry seal work consists of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary for the complete application of Type II Slurry Seal with 2% latex, as specified herein and in accordance with the Scope of Work. (2) Slurry seal shall consist of a mixture of emulsified asphalt, mineral aggregate and water, properly proportioned, mixed and spread evenly on pavement surfaces, as specified herein and as directed by the Engineer. The cured slurry shall have a uniform appearance, fill all cracks, adhere firmly to the surface and have a skid resistant surface. b. Applicable Publications The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto: (1) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Publications: M Emulsified Asphalt M Cationic Emulsified Asphalt (quick setting) TP - 6

93 (2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: C Amount of material finer than No. 200 Sieve in mineral aggregates by washing. C Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate. C Resistance to abrasion of small size course aggregate by the use of Los Angeles machine. C Sieve or screen analysis of fine and course aggregate. D Sampling aggregates. D Sampling bituminous materials. D Mineral filler for bituminous paving mixtures. D Emulsified asphalt. D recovery of asphalt from solution by Abson Method. D Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. D Sand equivalent value of soils and fine aggregates. D Inspection and testing agencies for bituminous paving materials. (3) State of California, Department of Transportation, Division of Highways Publications: 335A Test Method for design of slurry seal c. Submittals (1) Certified Laboratory Test Reports. Before delivery of materials, certified copies in triplicate of the reports of all tests required in referenced publications shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer. The testing shall have been performed, at the Contractor s expense, by an independent laboratory approved by the Engineer. Certified test reports are required for the following: (a) Percentage of water test will be performed in accordance with ASTM C131. (b) Wet track abrasion test will be performed in accordance with California Division Highways Test No. 335A, (2) Job Mix Formula. A job mix formula shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer. The formula shall indicate the Wet Track abrasion resistance. Trial mixes shall be prepared to determine proportions, evaluate measured wear and to observe surface textures, tackiness and mix segregation. Samples of materials to be used on the job shall be used to determine job mix and shall be available in sufficient quantity to produce not less than 30 lbs. of emulsified asphalt slurry mixtures. A sample of the emulsion (5 gallons) and 100 lbs. of the aggregate to be used on the job shall be delivered to the laboratory one week prior to start of construction. d. Delivery and Storage Materials shall be delivered to the site in an undamaged condition. The materials shall be protected against damage and stored in a location designated by the Engineer. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Agency. e. General Requirements TP - 7

94 All existing thermoplastic street pavement marking legends that are within the area to be slurry sealed shall be removed. All street surfaces shall be swept thoroughly by a vehicle mounted and enclosed rotary broom sweeper to remove all loose materials from the pavement surface on the day of the proposed slurring, prior to slurry application proceeding. The slurry seal shall be applied only when the existing surface is clean and free of visible moisture. Slurry seal shall be applied only when the pavement temperature and atmospheric temperature is above 60 F and rising, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The slurry seal shall be properly proportioned, mixed, and spread evenly on the surface as specified herein and as directed. The cured slurry shall have a homogeneous appearance, fill all surface voids and penetrate cracks, adhere firmly to the surface, and have skid-resistant texture. f. Material (1) The mineral aggregate shall be 100% crushed rock, of angular, sound, durable, hard, resistant to abrasion and free from lamination, weak cleavages, and undesirable weathering. It shall be of such character that it will not disintegrate from the action of air, water, or the conditions to be met in the handling and placing and having a specific gravity of no less than 2.60 all material shall be clean and free from deleterious impurities, including alkali, earth, clay and refuse. The grading of the aggregate, per square yard shall conform to the following gradations: Sieve Size Type II Percent Passing 3/8 100 No No No No No No No Care should be exercised to prevent segregation of aggregate in storage and handling; if segregation occurs, the material shall be worked prior to mixing in a manner to hold segregation to the minimum. Aggregates shall have a percentage of water of not more than 40 percent when tested according to ASTM D131. When tested in accordance with the ASTM D2419, the aggregate blend shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 55. In addition, the aggregates will be tested for conformity to ASTM C117, ASTM C128, and ASTM C136. Mineral filler such as portland cement, limestone dust, or fly ash shall be considered as part of the blended aggregate and shall be used in the minimum required amounts. Fillers shall meet the gradation requirements of ASTM D242. Bids shall be based on TP - 8

95 the range of aggregate and emulsion weights specified hereinbefore. The amount of emulsified asphalt shall be determined by the job mix for the specified wear value. If the amounts used are more than the specified range, an adjustment in the contract price will be made as provided in the contract. (2) Grade QSKH Emulsion QSKH shall use a paving asphalt with a penetration in the range of 60 to 70 as a base. It shall meet the following specifications when tested according to appropriate ASTM methods. Emulsion Test Furol viscosity at 77 F D244 Residue from distillation % by weight 57 Min. D244 Mixing test at 70 F 30 Min. Sieve test (% retained on No. 20).10 Max. D244 Particle charge test Positive Storage stability; one day settlement 1% Max. Residue Test Penetration D-5 Solubility in carbon test (%) 97.5 Min. 77 cms. 40 Min. D113 The Contractor shall furnish a certified statement from the manufacturer of the emulsion giving the analysis of the base asphalt used in its manufacture. (3) Water shall be potable. (4) Emulsified Asphalt Slurry Mixture. The mixture shall have the following characteristics: a. Resistance to abrasion. Allowable wear of cured slurry mix as tested in accordance with the wet track abrasion test shall not exceed 100. The cured slurry being tested shall not pick up on the roller of the apparatus. b. Fluidity. The mixture shall be sufficiently free flowing to fill cracks in the pavement. c. Non-segregation. The mixture shall not segregate during or after lay down. d. Surface Texture. The mixture shall have a non-skid texture. g. Construction (1) Equipment. The equipment used in the performance of the work shall be subject to approval and shall be maintained in satisfactory working condition at all times. Descriptive information on the slurry mixing and application equipment to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 7 days before the work is scheduled to start. (2) Mixer. The slurry mixing machine shall be a continuous flowing mixing unit and be capable of delivering accurately a predetermined proportion of aggregate, water, and emulsified asphalt to the mixing chamber and to discharge the TP - 9

96 thoroughly mixed product on a continuous basis. The aggregate shall be prewetted immediately prior to mixing shall be capable of thoroughly blending all ingredients together. The mixing machine shall be equipped with an approved fines feeder that provides a method of accurately introducing a predetermined proportion into the mixer. The fines feeder shall be used whenever added mineral filler is apart of the aggregate blend. The mixing machine shall be equipped with a water pressure system and fog type spray bar adequate for complete fogging of the surface ahead of the spreading equipment with an application of 0.05 to 0.10 gallon per square yard. Sufficient machine storage capacity to mix properly and apply a minimum of 12 tons of the slurry shall be provided. Proportioning devices shall be calibrated prior to placing slurry seal. (3) Self-Contained Slurry Machine. The machine shall be capable of rapid discharge of the mixed materials into a spreader having suitable controls to allow adjustment for variations in pavement grades and slope. The spreader shall be similar to the spreader box as hereinbefore specified. The spreader box may be either an integral part of a self-contained slurry machine or a separate towed unit. The self-contained slurry unit shall be mounted on a truck or other vehicle capable of producing evenly controlled low rates of speed throughout the operation so that the slurry is spread evenly and all cracks are filled. (4) Slurry Spreading Equipment. Attached to the mixer machine shall be a mechanical type squeegee distributor equipped with flexible material in contact with the surface to prevent loss of slurry from the distributor. It shall be maintained to prevent loss of slurry on varying grades and crown by adjustments to assure uniform spread. There shall be a lateral control device and flexible strike off. The spreader box shall have an adjustable width. The box shall be kept clean, and the build-up of asphalt and aggregate on the box shall not be permitted. The use and condition of burlap drags or other drags shall be approved by the Engineer. (5) Cleaning Equipment. Power brooms, power blowers, air compressor, water flushing equipment, and hand brooms shall be suitable for cleaning the surface and cracks of the old surface. (6) Hand Tools. Hand squeegees, shovels, and burlap drags, and other equipment shall be provided as necessary to perform the work. h. Construction Procedures (1) General. No application of slurry shall occur until all deep patching, crack sealing or other preliminary pavement repairs have been completed by City personnel. The surface of the pavement shall be thoroughly cleaned and swept by the Contractor prior to the application of slurry seal. The application of slurry shall be scheduled to commence after 8:30 a.m. and shall be completed prior to 2:00 p.m. (2) No slurry shall be applied when the weather forecast indicates a probability of rainfall or when the air or pavement temperature is no higher than 60 degrees TP - 10

97 Fahrenheit and falling. Slurry may be applied when both air and pavement temperatures are 60 degrees and rising. (3) Manhole and Water Valve Covers. All metal manhole and water valve covers shall be protected by the Contractor. The procedure for protection shall be approved by the City Engineer. After the slurry seal has been applied and cured, the Contractor shall remove all slurry seal material attached to manhole and water valve covers. All water valve covers left exposed to slurry shall be cleaned and painted at the Contractor s cost. (4) The surface of the pavement shall be fogged with water directly preceding the application of the slurry. The slurry mixture shall be of the designated consistency when deposited on the surface and no additional elements shall be added. Total mixing time shall not exceed four (4) minutes. A sufficient amount of slurry shall be carried in all parts of the spreader at all times so that complete coverage is obtained. No rippling, lumping, balling, or unmixed aggregate shall be permitted, nor shall segregation of the emulsion and aggregate fines from the course aggregate. If the course aggregate settles to the bottom of the mix, the slurry shall be removed from the pavement. (5) Rate of Application. The Type II slurry seal shall be applied at a rate which shall provide an average of 1,350 square feet of coverage per extra long ton (an extra long ton of slurry is made of 2,000 pounds of dry aggregate plus emulsified asphalt). The amount of slurry actually placed on the pavement shall not vary more than 10% from the theoretic tonnage calculated for the pavement. (6) Joints. No excessive build-up causing unsightly appearance shall be permitted on longitudinal or transverse joints. Unless otherwise approved, the overlap at the joints, shall not exceed 2 and shall be feathered; excessive unapproved overlaps will not be paid for. Joints between asphalt pavement and concrete pavement and/or concrete gutter shall be completely and neatly sealed without excessive slop-over onto the concrete; any unsightly and objectionable excess shall be immediately removed. At street intersections at the beginning and end of work segments, the slurry shall be neatly spread or trimmed to a straight line defined by the near curb lines of the street adjacent to the work. Approved squeegees or lutes shall be used to spread slurry in areas inaccessible to the machine. Care shall be exercised to insure the maximum rate of application with no excess, and leaving no unsightly appearance. Texture of slurry spread by hand shall match that which was applied by machine. Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all excess emulsion spread beyond slurry limits, on driveways, sidewalks, etc. (7) Smoothness. The finished surface of the slurry seal shall be at least as smooth as the original pavement surface. Any corrugations on the surface creating vibration noticeable by passengers in an automobile driving over the slurry sealed surface at legal speeds will result in rejection of the slurry seal construction. TP - 11

98 (8) Removal and Resealing. Any slurry seal application that has been rejected shall be removed by cold planing to the original pavement. A new slurry seal application shall then be placed on the pavement. Any placement of slurry seal rejected shall be removed and replaced with the cost borne by the Contractor. (9) Protection of Slurry. The Contractor shall provide such flagmen and barricades as required to protect the uncured slurry from vehicular traffic. Any damage to the uncured slurry shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. i. Field Sampling and Testing All sampling and testing shall be conducted by the Contractor as specified herein, at the expense of the Contractor. All materials and materials sources shall have been approved by the Engineer not less than five (5) days prior to the use of such materials in the work. Duplicate samples shall be taken at the same time and in the same manner as the original ones. (1) Sampling. Method of sampling the sieve analysis of aggregates shall be in accordance with ASTM D75. Methods of sampling bituminous material shall be in accordance with ASTM D140. (2) Testing. a. Job Mix Test. Samples of the asphalt emulsion and slurry seal mixture shall be taken at the rate of at least one sample per day from each mixture used on the project, and shall be tested by the Contractor to determine conformance with the job mix proportions. Duplicate samples shall be provided to the Engineer. The following tests shall be performed by a City approved engineering testing laboratory: [1] Emulsified Asphalt. Percent residue of the emulsion by evaporation (hot plate residue). [2] Slurry Seal Mixture. [a] Moisture content as percent of dry weight of slurry before extraction. [b] Asphalt content as percent of dry weight of extracted aggregate. [c] Gradation of extraction aggregate. [d] Percent of emulsified asphalt in slurry mixture based on weight of dry aggregates. b. Test results shall be certified by the laboratory and submitted to the Engineer for approval. Trial Application The Contractor shall place a test strip of 60 square yards in a designated area. The test section shall be placed using the same equipment and methods as will be used on TP - 12

99 the job. Slurry mixture placed in test strip shall conform to job mix with minor variations to obtain crack fillings, bond to pavement, and desired skid resistant texture. In the event that the materials do not meet the requirements for fluidity, nonsegregation, or surface texture, a new job mix shall be formulated and tested at the Contractor s expense. Work shall not proceed before approval of design mix and acceptance following the placing of a test strip. j. Traffic Control The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, posting and removing temporary No Parking signs along all routes. Signs shall be posted at all intersections, at end of cul-de-sac streets, and on each side of the street a maximum of 200 feet between signs. Signs may be attached to existing poles, parkway trees, or whatever public facility is existing in the public right-of-way. When necessary, the Contractor shall furnish posts or traffic cones. The Contractor is responsible for the removal of all temporary No Parking signs after all the work is completed on each street. No use of staples or nails is permitted. Signs should be affixed by tape, cord, or light rope or wire. The Contractor s spreading schedule shall provide for ample on-street parking within 800 feet of any residence. Notification shall be given 48 hours in advance of any street closure or restriction to access by the Contractor. The Engineer may add or subtract streets to this list at his discretion provided notice is given to the Contractor. When individual streets are being sealed, those streets may be closed to traffic by the Contractor, subject to the following conditions. (1) On major streets, traffic maintenance shall conform to the provisions in Section 7-10 Public Convenience and Safety of the Standard Specification and these Special Provisions. (2) Slurry seal application operations shall terminate prior to 2:00 p.m. of each working day. (3) No streets shall be closed to traffic before 8:30 a.m. or after 5:00 p.m. (4) Street closures shall be closed to traffic for a minimum of three (3) hours after being sealed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. (5) No street shall be closed to traffic until immediately prior to application of the slurry seal. (6) Emergency vehicles shall be permitted to pass through the work area without delay at all time. (7) Only one slurry seal operation will be allowed in any one site or street during any one day unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. (8) Adjacent streets shall be slurry sealed on alternate work days. k. Watering and Dust Control (1) Traveling Meters Water for grading, compaction, test, controlling dust, curing concrete and for other uses in the work will be furnished by the City. All City furnished water used in the work by the Contract or shall be measured by means of a traveling meter. Traveling meters may be secured by the Contractor from the Utilities Division, Public Works Department, upon deposit of $ per meter, with the TP - 13

100 Cashier. The deposit will be refunded by the City upon return of the meter in good condition to the Utilities Division. (2) The Contractor shall, at all times, provide for the abatement of dust nuisance in accordance with the provision of Subsection of the Standard Specification. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and operate a selfloading motor sweeper with spray nozzles as often as necessary to keep paved areas acceptably clean wherever construction, including restoration, is complete. l. Clean-Up, Repair or Damages and General Appearance of the Site Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean all slurry material from concrete surfaces. e Contractor shall repair all damage done to existing improvements during construction. Dirt, debris, and other deleterious material shall be removed on a daily basis. case of default, the City will clean up the site and repair damages as described above, and the cost of doing such work shall be charged against the Contractor. m. Payment The contract unit price paid shall be included in the bid and shall include full compensation for furnishing all overhead, supervision, labor, material, tools, equipment, vehicles, and incidentals for performing the work involved in placing the type II slurry seal with 2% latex, completely in place, limits as shown on the plans and specifications, including removal of existing thermoplastic pavement markings, cleaning of surface, traffic control, construction signs and erosion control including BMP s and applicable NPDES requirements, and pre-striping of slurried street and placement of fire hydrant blue dots if needed. ADJUST WATER VALVE COVERS Water valves shall be located in the field prior to beginning any work on this project. Upon completion of the paving the contractor shall furnish and install new 4TT valve box assemblies per Standard S-130 to the grade of the new A.C. surface. Any water system appurtenances damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced at the Contractor s expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, placing, and maintaining barricades and lights or other traffic control, as necessary to protect the public from danger due to the work being done. Full payment for complying with the above requirements and conditions will be considered as included in the price bid per unit and no additional compensation will be made therefore. ADJUST MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER Adjustment of City of Monrovia and County Sanitation District sewer, and City and Flood Control District storm drain manhole frames and covers shall be made to the new finished grade, pursuant to each entities requirements. The work shall be done in conformance with Subsection of the Standard Specifications and per City Standard S (Adjustment of Southern California Edison and General Telephone Company manhole and vault covers will be carried out by those entities; After the pavement has been completed, the necessary portions of the pavement and concrete collar around the manhole or pad shall be neatly removed, to within 16-inches of the manhole frame and 10-inches below the finished surface, the structure built up, and the TP - 14

101 manhole frame set to be backfilled to within 1.5-inches of the surface with Portland Cement Concrete conforming to Subsection Payment: Payment for adjustment of manhole frames and covers, and utility valves to grade, where the difference between existing and final elevation of the top of the frame is less than 15 inches will be made at the contract unit price for adjusting each manhole or utility valve. Payment shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment for completing all work involved as specified. CLEARING AND GRUBBING In addition to the work outlined in Section of the Standard Specification, the following items of work are included but not limited to: 1. Sawcut, removal and disposal of existing concrete pavement, curb and gutter, base and shrubs within the project site and as shown on the plan or directed by the Engineer. 2. Maintaining dust control at all times by watering. 3. Removal and disposal of any additional items not specifically mentioned herein, which may be found within the work limits or are shown on the plans to be removed. 4. Removal and disposal of unnamed concrete improvements. 5. Restoration and clean up of the site. Payment: Payment for clearing and grubbing will be included in other related bid items. Payment shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment for completing all work involved in the removal and disposal of unsuitable materials from the site. SUBGRADE PREPARATION (only as directed by the Engineer) The preparation of the subgrade prior to placement of the crushed aggregate base or concrete sidewalk shall be performed in accordance with Section 301-1, of the Standard Specification. Subgrade and base shall be scarified and cultivated. Subgrade and aggregate base shall be recompacted to a minimum of ninety percent (90%) and ninety-five percent (95%) respectively relative compaction. City shall obtain the first compaction test after backfills are completed and approved by the Engineer before placement of crushed aggregate base or concrete. Should this test fail, all further tests shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Payment: All payments shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment for completing all work involved in earthwork as specified. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE WORK Concrete shall conform to Section 201 of the Standard Specifications. Portland cement concrete shall be of class 520-C-2500 mix for the sidewalk, curb and gutter. Expansion joints, fillers, sealants to be used for treating joints in Portland cement concrete and score lines shall be constructed in conformance with Subsections and of the Standard Specifications. The score lines for the sidewalk shall be 30-inch by 30-inch squares. Payment: Payment for the concrete sidewalk shall be at the price bid per square foot and curb and gutter per lineal foot. All payments shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all TP - 15

102 labor, materials, tools and equipment and doing all work involved in constructing these items complete in place as specified herein or as directed by the Engineer. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Asphalt rubber hot mix shall comply with Section and shall be furnished and placed in accordance with the provisions in Section of the Standard Specifications. The asphalt used shall be PG conforming to and shall be modified with an asphalt modifier. The thickness of regular asphalt leveling course (C mix) varies with an average of half inches (0.5 ) and the overlay of asphalt rubber hot mix ARHM (GG-C) thickness varies 2-3 inches. Payment: Payment for asphalt pavement shall be at the unit bid price per square feet SF. Payment shall be for full compensation that shall include removal, disposal of existing AC pavement variable thickness 4-6, furnishing all labor, materials for paving within the work area, tools and equipment necessary to complete the work in place, submittal of laboratory test results and certificates and all incidentals. PAVEMENT MARKERS Pavement markers shall conform to the provisions of Section 214 of the Standard Specification. The placement of raised pavement markers shall be in accordance with Section 312 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. The markers shall be installed at locations shown on the plans. Raised blue reflective pavement markers shall be placed in front of fire hydrant in accordance with the California MUTCD or otherwise directed by the City Engineer. Painting for pavement markings shall be in accordance with Section and Section of the Standard Specification and as directed by the City Engineer. The paint for pavement markings shall be rapid dry latex and water base paint. Two coats of paint shall be applied with a minimum of one week (7 calendar days) between applications. The contractor shall furnish all necessary paint and beads material. Paint shall be Pervo Paint Company water base paint, numbers 6050 white, 6053 yellow and 5002 black, or equal. The Contractor shall install the reflective pavement markers, paint pavement markings, words, legends, arrows, traffic lines and crosswalks after applying asphalt concrete overlay per CALTRANS Standard. Contractor shall check with City and use pavement wording and legend stencils conforming to the latest Caltrans Standards. Payment: Payment for the removal and installation of pavement markings, words, lines, arrows and installation of new reflective raised pavement markers will be in one lump sum item, complete in place, and in accordance with Subsection of the Standard Specification. SURVEY MONUMENTS Survey monuments shall conform to the provisions of Section 2-9 and Section 309 of the Standard Specification. All existing survey monuments, centerline ties and survey reference points shall be protected in place or re-established when disturbed or missing. This work shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be completed by a licensed surveyor. The Contractor shall provide and submit the centerline ties to indicate the point of street intersection at street crossings subject to resurfacing. The centerline ties shall be submitted to the County for TP - 16

103 record and delivered to the City. There must be a minimum of three (3) ties for each street intersection. Payment: Payment for the establishment, protection and/or re-establishment of survey monuments, centerline ties and reference points shall be at the bid price per each. The payment shall be considered full compensation for all labor, materials, applicable fees, tools and equipment necessary to perform all the work for establishing the centerline ties and submission of the County recorded survey data to the City as specified herein. TP - 17

104 MONROVIA STATION SQUARE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS ON-SITE PROJECT NO. G-866 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION Site Clearing Finish Grading Water Distribution Sanitary Sewerage Storm Drainage Decomposed Granite Concrete Paving & Formwork Precast Concrete Unit Pavers Turf Block Fire Lane Landscape Irrigation Landscape Planting Silva Cells Planting Soil for Silva Cells Landscape Maintenance DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Concrete Formwork Concrete Reinforcement Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS Structural Steel Miscellaneous Metals DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Not Used DIVISON 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Water Repellents Single-ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Steel Doors and Frames Door Hardware Fiberglass-Sandwich Panel Assemblies

105 2 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Graffiti-Resistant Coatings Painting Concrete Floor Sealer DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Dimension Letter Signage Pylon Signage Toilet Compartments DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Not-Used DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not-Used DIVISON 13 SPECIAL CONSTUCTION Not-Used DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not-Used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Basic Mechanical Requirements Supplementary Mechanical Requirements Mechanical Product Substitutions Plumbing DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL General Electrical Provisions Conduit Ductbank Conductors Building Wire and Cable Boxes Wiring Devices Panelboards Support Devices and Seismic Restraints Electrical Identification Switchboards Utility Service Entrance Grounding Enclosed Circuit Breakers Lighting Fixtures Exterior Lighting

106 SECTION SITE CLEARING PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Remove surface debris. B. Remove, recycle indicated paving, curbs, and C. Clear site of plant life and grass. D. Remove trees and shrubs. E. Remove root system of trees and shrubs. F. Erosion and sedimentation control measures. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for dust control and disposal of debris. B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies. C. Obtain required permits from authorities. D. Do not close or obstruct roadways and sidewalks without permits. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Removal of existing construction and legally dispose of items offsite, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or recycled. B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition waste and subsequently deposit in landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Salvage: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent use. D. Recovery: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing.

107 E. Existing to Remain: Items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not indicated to be removed, salvaged, or recycled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Preclearing Photographs: Show conditions of existing adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damaged by clearing operations. Submit before work begins. B. Record Documents: Submit under provisions of Section Accurately record locations of capped utilities and other subsurface conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform best management practice techniques for given site conditions as defined in Section 3 of the Stormwater Best Management Practice Handbook (BMP Handbook), Construction Edition, as published by the California Storm Water Quality Association. B. Coordinate work of this section with permit provisions of State Water Resources Control Board Order No DWQ and the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. C. Comply with City of Monrovia Dust Control Ordinance. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Recycled Demolition Waste: Crushed asphalt paving, concrete paving, and concrete. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Correlate existing conditions with requirements indicated. B. Inventory and record condition of items to be removed and salvaged. C. Execute predemolition photographs.

108 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify that existing plant life and features designated to remain are tagged or identified. 3.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during clearing operations. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect utilities that remain, from damage. B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks and existing structures from damage or displacement. 3.5 CLEARING A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. B. Remove trees and shrubs indicated. C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood without disturbing subsoil. D. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life. E. Remove paving, curbs, and other items as indicated. Neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface. 3.6 RECYCLING OF DEMOLITION MATERIALS A. Separate recycled demolition materials from other demolished materials. B. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.

109 C. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind blown dust. D. Do not store materials with in drip line of trees. E. Transport recyclable materials that are not indicated to be reused off Owner s property to recycling receiver or processor. F. Recycled incentives received for building demolition materials shall be equally shared between Contractor and Owner. G. Asphalt : Crush asphalt concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2. G. Asphalt: Break up and transport asphalt paving to asphalt recycling facility. H. Concrete: Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2. I. Concrete Reinforcement: Remove reinforcement from concrete and sort with other metals. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Except for items to be recycled or otherwise indicated to remain, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA approved landfill. B. Do not burn or bury materials on site. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by clearing. B. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before clearing operations began. C. Leave site in a clean condition. END OF SECTION

110 SECTION FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: weeding and finish grading of lawn and planting areas. B. Related work: 1. Section 02722: Decomposed Granite 2. Section 02770: Concrete Paving and Formwork 3. Section 02810: Landscape Irrigation 4. Section 02900: Landscape Planting 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Finish grading: finish grading shall consist of adjusting and finishing soil surfaces with site or imported topsoil, raking grades to a smooth, even, uniform plane. Remove and legally dispose of all extraneous matter off site. Facilitate natural run-off water and establish grades and drainage indicated as part of the contract work. B. The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Import Top Soil: Import top soil shall be classified as sandy loam, and must conform to the following: 1. Particle size Class Particle Size Range Maximum % Minimum % Coarse sand mm 15 0 Silt plus clay <0.05mm Other classes: Gravel 2-13mm 15 0 Rock 1/2-1 5% by volume with none > 1 2. Chemistry a. Salinity: Saturation Extract Conductivity (ECe) - less than C b. Sodium: Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) - less than 6.0 c. Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration - Less than 1.0 ppm d. Reaction: ph of Saturated Paste without high lime content 3. Soil shall contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium and magnesium to support normal plant grown. In the even t of nutrient inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required material prior to planting. B. In order to insure conformance, samples of the import soil shall be submitted to an approved laboratory for analysis prior to and following backfilling. C. Obtain imported topsoil from approved local sources. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Verification of conditions: Prior to commencing the finish grading, review the installed work of other trades and verify that their work is complete. 1. Rough Grading: Grading in planting areas (except raised planter areas) shall be established to within plus or minus 0.10 foot prior to beginning of finish grading

111 2. Moving onto the site and/or commencing work shall be construed as acceptance of rough grade conditions by the Contractor. B. Import topsoil only when necessary to supplement site soil to achieve grades shown on Drawings, or if site soil is unsuitable for planting. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Weeding: Before finish grading, weeds and grasses shall be dug out by the root or sprayed with an herbicide and disposed of off-site. This procedure is outlined under the Landscape Planting Section. B. Debris: Remove stones and debris 1 inch in diameter and greater and clumps of earth that do not break up. Dispose of off-site. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. General: When rough grading and weeding have been completed, and the soil has dried sufficiently to be readily worked, lawn and planting areas shall be graded to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Grades indicated on Drawing are grades that will result after thorough settlement and compaction of the soil. 2. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform finish grades and, if required, shall be made at the direction of the Architect. 3. Finish grades shall be smooth, even, and a uniform plane with no abrupt change of surfaces. 4. Soil areas adjacent to buildings shall slope away from the building to allow a natural run-off of water, and surface drainage shall be directed as indicated on the drawings by remodeling surfaces to facilitate the run off water at 2% minimum grade. 5. Low spots and pockets shall be graded to drain properly. B. Drainage: Finish grade with proper slope to drains. 1. Flow lines, designated or not, shall be graded and maintained to allow free flow of surface water. 2. If any drainage problems arise during construction period due to Contractor's work (such as, but not limited to, low spots, slides, gullies and general erosion), the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing these areas to a condition equal to their original condition, and in so doing shall prevent further drainage problems from occurring. C. Toe of slope: To prevent soil creep or erosion across pavement, where pavement (walk, curb, etc.) is at the toe of a slope, finish grade is to level out or swale slightly at least 6 before reaching pavement D. Moisture Content: The soil shall not be worked when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction occurs, nor when it is so dry that dust may form in the air or that clods do not break readily. Water may be applied, if necessary, to provide moisture content for tilling and planting operations. It is the Contractor s responsibility to control dust that is spread as a result of grading operations. E. Grades: The finish grade shall be 1-1/2 inch below grade of adjacent pavement, walks, curbs, or headers except when drainage conditions require flush grades, as directed by the Owner's Representative, or if otherwise indicated on Drawings. F. Compaction: Soils in planted areas shall be loose and friable, yet firm enough that no settling occurs from normal foot traffic or irrigation. 3.4 FIELD OBSERVATION: A. Contact the Architect 48 hours or two working days in advance of each agreed observation or conference. B. Schedule for On-Site Reviews: At completion of finish grading and prior to any planting operations. END OF SECTION

112 SECTION WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water mains, valves, fittings, and accessories. B. Fire hydrants and assemblies. C. Backflow preventer. D. Thrust blocks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASSE Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers. B. ASSE Performance Requirements for Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly. C. AWWA C104 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile- Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. D. AWWA C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and other Liquids. E. AWWA C110 - Standard for Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 inch through 48 inch for Water and Other Liquids. F. AWWA C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. G. AWWA C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds for Water or Other Liquids. H. AWWA C300 - Standard for Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids. I. AWWA C502 - Standard for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants.

113 J. AWWA C600 - Standard for Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances. K. AWWA C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. L. AWWA C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inch through 12 inch for Water. M. AWWA C901 - Standard for Polyethylene Pressure. Pipe and Tubing 1/2 inch through 3 inch, for Water Service. N. AWWA M17 - Manual for Installation, Field Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Hydrants. O. AWWA M23 - Manual for PVC Pipe-Design and Installation. P. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. Q. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association, Concrete Pipe Handbook. R. CDA - Copper Development Association, Copper Tube Handbook. S. NFPA Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections. T. UL Standard for Hydrants for Fire Protection Service. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Submit product data for pipe and pipe accessories. C. Submit reports on piping disinfecting. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section

114 B. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, and depths. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. B. Piping: Provide pipes of the following materials, of weight/ class indicated. Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining method as indicated. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type K hard drawn. D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cement mortar lining complying with AWWA C104; Class 51 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fittings: Ductile-iron, AWWA C110; cement lined, AWWA C104; and rubber-gasket joints, AWWA C Encasement: AWWA C105, polyethylene film tube. E. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: AWWA C900, Class Fittings: Integral wall (thickened bell end), integral sleeve reinforced bell end or elastomeric gasket couplings meeting the requirements of AWWA C900. F. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: AWWA C901, Class HYDRANT 1. Fittings: Copper alloy or nylon barbed insert type with 2 strap-type stainless steel clamps over pipe at each insert. A. Type as required by utility company.

115 2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS A. ASSE standard backflow preventer of size indicated for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss indicated. B. ASSE 1013 reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer with OS and Y gate valves on inlet and outlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve having ASME A air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. 2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." C. Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved plastic-laminate label, for installation on main electrical meter panel; not less than 1 inch by 3 inches, with captions "CAUTION - THIS STRUCTURE HAS A NONMETALLIC WATER SERVICE." 2.5 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Valves and Fittings: Conform to AWWA Specifications. All valves and fittings shall be designed for an operating pressure larger than the design pressure of lines on which they are installed. B. Gate Valves: Double disk parallel seat type, iron body, bronze mounted inside screw, non-rising stem, flanged or screw filling standard hub nut. C. Thrust Blocking: Provide on water lines at bends, tees and fire hydrants. Use 2,500 psi concrete as specified in Section Locate and place in accordance with standard practice. D. Access Boxes: Unless otherwise specified in accordance with Section FILL MATERIAL A. Sand: Type specified in Section

116 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work, and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fill material of sand. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage tile or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with code. B. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within 5/8 inches. C. Route pipe in straight line. D. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe of joints. E. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. F. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe. G. Copper Tube: Install in accordance with CDA "Copper Tube Handbook" H. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 Appurtenances." I. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA M23. J. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

117 K. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks. L. Install warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 8 inches below finished grade directly over piping. N. Water Main Connection: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of size and in location as indicated, from water Purveyor. O. Water Service Termination: Terminate water service piping 5'-0" from building foundation in location and invert as indicated. Provide temporary pipe plug for piping extension into building. 3.4 INSTALLATION - HYDRANT A. Comply with AWWA M17. Install with gate valve and provision for drainage as indicated. B. Set hydrants plumb and locate nozzles perpendicular to roadway. C. Set hydrants to grade with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground. D. Locate control valve 4 inches away from hydrant. E. Provide drainage pit 36 inches square by 24 inches deep filled with 2 inch washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer. F. Paint hydrants in accordance with Section INSTALLATION - BACKFLOW PREVENTOR A. Install backflow preventer of type, size and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. B. Install according to authority having jurisdiction. C. Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on 2,500-psi; concrete piers as indicated.

118 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. General: Install valves as indicated with stems pointing up. Provide valve box over underground valves. 3.7 FIE L D QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered, and after thrust blocks have sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing, and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Test: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for two hours. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Use disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction. B. In case a method is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure described in AWWA C651, or as described below: 1. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Valve off system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Valve off system or part thereof and allow to stand for three hours. 3. Flush system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system. C. Prepare reports for all disinfecting activities and submit to Architect. END OF SECTION

119 SECTION SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers. C. Manhole access, cleanout access. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association. B. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM C12 - Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. D. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. E. ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. F. ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gasketts. G. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. H. ASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and I. ASTM D Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. J. ASTM D Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. K. ASTM D Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM D Specifications for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.

120 M. ASTM D Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. N. AWWA C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and other Liquids. O. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Submit product data for pipe and pipe accessories. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section B. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts and invert elevations. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74; service type; bell and spigot end joints. B. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices. C. Vitrified Clay Pipe: ASTM C700, extra strength, unperforated, plain end joints. D. Vitrified Clay Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C425, compression gasket joint. E. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2751, SDR 35, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed end joints.

121 F. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR35 wall thickness, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed end joints. 2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Same material as pipe, molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required 'T', bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps, and other configurations required. 2.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SANITARY SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic-Lined Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SANITARY SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW." 2.4 MANHOLES AND CLEANOUTS A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, removable lid, closed lid design; nominal lid and frame diameter as indicated. B. Shaft Construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female dry joints; cast steel ladder rungs into shaft sections at 12 inches nominal shaft diameter as indicated. C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300; levelled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sewer pipe sections. D. Cleanouts: Cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast-iron access frame and heavy-duty secured, scoriated cast-iron cover. 2.5 FILL MATERIAL A. Sand: Type specified in Section

122 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work, and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fill material of sand. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage tile or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Extend sanitary sewerage system to connect to building sanitary drain, of sizes and in locations indicated. B. Join and install cast-iron soil pipe and fittings with compression gaskets in accordance with CISPI Handbook, Volume I. Use service class gaskets. C. Encase cast iron soil pipe and fittings in polyethylene tubing in accordance with AWWA C105. D. Join vitrified clay pipe and fittings with rubber sealing elements and install piping in accordance with ASTM C12. E. Solvent cement ABS pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3212 and install piping in accordance with ASTM D2321. F. Solvent cement PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2855 and install piping in accordance with ASTM D2321. G. Place pipe on minimum four inch deep bed of sand. H. Lay pipe to slope gradient noted on Drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. I. Install warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground sanitary sewer piping. Locate 8 inches below finished grade directly over piping.

123 J. Install sand at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches. J. Place sand in maximum 6 inch lifts, consolidating each lift. K. Increase compaction of each successive lift. Refer to Section for compaction requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. L. Connect to municipal sewer system. 3.4 INSTALLATION - MANHOLES A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverted for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated. B. Set cleanout frame and cover in concrete block 18 x 18 x 12 inches deep. C. Set top of cleanouts flush with paved surfaces. Elsewhere, set top 1 inch above surrounding earth grade. D. Install accessories as indicated. E. Set top of frame and covers flush with paved surfaces. Elsewhere, set top 3 inches above grade. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section

124 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section B. Protect pipe from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION

125 SECTION STORM DRAINAGE PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building and site storm drainage system to point of disposal. C. Catch basins, drywells, cleanouts, and manhole access. D. Paved area and site surface drainage. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association. B. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM C12 - Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. D. ASTM C33 - Specification for Cement Aggregates. E. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. F. ASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated. G. ASTM C858 - Specifications for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. H. ASTM D Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. I. ASTM D Practice for making Solvent - Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. J. ASTM D Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and other Gravity-Flow Applications.

126 K. ASTM D Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM D Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials. M. AWWA C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and other Liquids. N. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Submit product data indicating pipe, pipe accessories and drainage structure. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section B. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, manholes, cleanouts, and invert elevations. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPE MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74; service type; bell and spigot end joints. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, Class II with Wall Type B; mesh reinforcement; bell and spigot end joints.

127 C. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D3034; SDR 35 minimum wall thickness; bell and spigot style; solvent cement joints conforming to ASTM D2564. D. Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D3034; SDR 35 minimum wall thickness; bell and spigot style; solvent cement joints conforming to ASTM D2564; perforations to be symmetrically located in an arc of 160 degrees. Perforations shall have a total open area of at least 0.3 square inches per lineal foot of pipe. Perforations shall be either holes or slots. Diameter of holes may vary from 1/4 inch minimum to 3/8 inch maximum; the width of the slots may vary from 3/16 inch minimum to 5/16 inch maximum; the length of the slot shall not exceed 4 inches. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Same material as pipe, molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required 'T', bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps, and other configurations required. B. Geotextile Fabric: As specified in Section PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - STORM SEWER SERVICE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - STORM SEWER SERVICE BURIED BELOW." 2.4 CATCH BASINS A. Basin Lid and Frame: Galvanized cast iron construction, hinged lid, linear grill lid design; nominal lid and frame size as indicated. Grate bars to be less than 1/2 inch apart. B. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 02751; levelled top surface sleeved to receive storm sewer pipe sections.

128 2.5 MANHOLES AND CLEANOUTS A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, removable lid, closed checkerboard grill lid design, nominal lid and frame diameter as indicated. B. Shaft Construction and Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female joints; cast steel ladder rungs into shaft sections at 12 inches, nominal shaft diameter as indicated. C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300; levelled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sewer pipe sections. D. Cleanouts: Cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast-iron access frame and heavy-duty, secured, scoriated cast-iron cover. 2.6 DRY WELLS A. ASTM C858, precast reinforced perforated concrete rings with cast-in-place concrete floor and lift-off-type concrete cover with lift rings. B. Wall thickness of 4 inches with 1 inch diameter or 1 x 3 inch slotted perforations totally free area of 15 percent of ring surface. C. Aggregate fill for drywell; ASTM C33 gravel, crushed gravel or crushed stone. 2.7 CU R B INLETS A. Cast-in-place reinforced concrete of type specified in Section Conform to standards of authority having jurisdiction and as indicated. B. All exposed face plates and metal parts to be galvanized. 2.8 FILL MATERIAL A. Sand: Type specified in Section

129 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work, and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fill material of sand. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage tile or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Extend storm sewerage piping to connect to building storm drain, of sizes and in locations indicated. B. Include storm sewerage system piping and appurtenances from a point 5'-0" outside building foundation to point of disposal. C. Join and install cast iron soil pipe and fittings with compression gaskets in accordance with CISPI Handbook, Volume I. Use service class gaskets. D. Encase cast iron soil pipe and fittings in polyethylene tubing in accordance with AWWA C105. E. Join vitrified clay pipe and fittings with rubber sealing elements and install piping in accordance with ASTM C12. F. Join concrete pipe and fittings with rubber gaskets and install piping in accordance with ACPA Installation Manual. G. Solvent cement PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2855 and install piping in accordance with ASTM D2321. H. Place pipe on minimum 4 inch deep bed of sand. I. Install perforated PVC pipe at a minimum slope of 0.05 percent.

130 J. Install warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground storm drain piping. Locate 8 inches below finished grade directly over piping. K. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. L. Install coarse sand at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches. M. Place sand in maximum 6 inch lifts, consolidating each lift. N. Increase compaction of each successive lift. Refer to Section for compaction requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. O. Connect to municipal drainage system. 3.4 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS, AND MANHOLES A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for storm drainage pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. E. Install accessories as indicated. F. Set top of frame and covers flush with paved surfaces. Elsewhere, set tops 3 inches above grade. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated. B. Set cleanout frame and cover in concrete block 18 x 18 x 12 inches deep. C. Set top of cleanout flush with paved surfaces. Elsewhere, set top 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.

131 3.7 INSTALLATION - DRYWELL A. Install as indicated on undisturbed native soil. B. Fill around drywell with 1 to 2 inch crushed rock on gravel to a minimum of 12 inches beyond drywell perimeter. Fill drywell full depth with crushed rock or gravel. C. Set top of drywell a minimum of 12 inches below finished grade FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section B. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other debris as work progresses. 3.9 PIPELINE FLUSHING A. Flush newly constructed storm drain piping with water. B. Collect and remove any rock, debris and silt using a metal screen during flushing procedure PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section B. Protect pipe from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION

132 SECTION DECOMPOSED GRANITE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes decomposed granite, and the following: 1. Sub-grade Preparation 2. Base Preparation 3. Stabilizer Application 4. Compaction 5. Cleanup B. Related work: 1. Section 02310: Finish Grading 2. Section 02900: Landscape Planting C. Definitions: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedure: In accordance with Division One, or two weeks prior to start of installation. B. Submit one pint sample of the specified decomposed granite, with named source. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DECOMPOSED GRANITE: A. Decomposed granite is referred to by the abbreviation (D.G.), or referred to as disintegrated granite. All decomposed granite for vehicular surfaces shall conform to the following grading requirements: Sieve Designation % Passing Sieve Designation % Passing 3/8 inch 100 No No No No No No No B. The portion of D.G retained on the no. 4 sieve shall have a maximum percentage of wear of 50 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO T96. C. The portion passing a No. 40 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 25 and maximum plasticity index of 7 as determined by AASHTO T89 and AASHTO T90, respectively. D. D.G. to be used for pathways and non-vehicular areas may be ¼ minus sieve size. E. Crushed aggregate screenings shall be free from clay lumps, vegetative matter and deleterious material. F. See Drawings for D.G. color specification. 2.2 EDGING A. Steel edging: 3/16 x 5 ½, manufactured from 6063 extruded aluminum alloy of T-6 hardness with interlock system and 5 stake punch outs fabricated in each strip. Stakes 12 long, lock 1/2 below top of edging

133 1. Finish: Black anodized PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE AND DECOMPOSED GRANITE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION A. Subgrade and base under all D.G. shall be prepared and compacted to 90% relative compaction. B. Minimum compaction for D.G. surfaces shall be 90% relative compaction. C. The finish grade shall be even between the headers with no humps or depressions after the compaction. The Contractor shall provide compaction tests as required by the Architect. D. Treat compacted subgrade with pre-emergent herbicide, as recommended by certified pest control advisor. 3.2 CLEANUP A. After all stabilization operations are completed, remove trash, excess materials, empty containers and rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a smooth condition throughout the site. END OF SECTION

134 SECTION CONCRETE PAVING & FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide complete concrete paving and curbs as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. See Drawings, schedules and details for types and locations of concrete work required. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and supervision in accordance with these specifications and applicable Drawings. B. Work Specified in This Section: 1. Concrete pavements, sidewalks and mow strips. 2. Concrete footings for site construction. 3. Concrete planter curbs. 4. Concrete planter walls or landscape walls. C. Related Work in Other Sections 1. Earthwork. 2. Compacted base courses under paving. D. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner s authorized representative. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Fully coordinate work with all other trades involved. Coordinate with General Contractor items of other trades to be furnished and set in place. They shall execute portions of their work that is embedded, built in, attached to, or supported by the work of this section in ample time so that progress of the work is not delayed. Any cutting or patching made necessary to comply with this injunction shall be done at the General Contractor's expense. General Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete and for the provision of holes, openings, etc., necessary to the execution of the work of other trades. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All concrete work shall be true to line and grade as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper drainage, without birdbaths, on all concrete paving surfaces. Any discrepancies or omissions on Drawings or conditions on the site that prevent the Contractor from providing proper drainage shall be brought to the attention of the Owner s Representative in writing for correction or relief before work proceeds. All construction shall conform to current applicable codes and ordinances. B. Piping: Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. Locate conduit to maintain strength of structures to maximum. Verify size, length and location of electrical conduit. Sleeve any other piping. C. Embedments: Anchor plates, inserts, and other items embedded in concrete shall be accurately secured so that they will not be displaced during placing of concrete. 1. Reactive metal embedments shall be sleeved or have a bituminous coating applied to the portions in contact with concrete. Applies to zinc, aluminum, steel (not stainless) and iron. D. Samples: Furnish one 4'x4'x4" sample of each concrete finish with all specified joints in places at job site for approval from Owner s Representative. Approved samples shall be standards for finishes and joints in concrete work

135 E. Surface Tolerances: Finished paving surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch when measured with a 10-ft. metal straightedge, except at grade changes. No birdbaths or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Correct irregularities to the satisfaction of Owner s Representative. F. Surface Friction Coefficient: All concrete shall have a slip-resistant surface with a minimum friction coefficient of 0.6. Pool areas shall have a coefficient of 0.8. G. Testing PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. The Owner s Representative will select a qualified testing laboratory to take samples for testing during the course of the work as considered necessary. The Owner s Representative will pay for costs of such tests. Contractor shall cooperate in making tests and shall be responsible for notifying the designated laboratory in sufficient time to allow taking of sample at time of pour. 2. Refer to Division 1 for specific requirements of testing. 3. Should tests show that concrete is below specified strength; Contractor shall remove all such concrete as directed by Owner s Representative. Full cost of removal of low-strength concrete, its replacement with concrete of proper specified strength, and testing shall be borne by Contractor. 4. The specifications and recommended practices of the American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), The Uniform Building Code, and the Shaw US Patent #4,748,788, referred to in this specification with their individual designations are to be considered part of this specification. The latest revision of each recommended practice or specification shall apply. 2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation C150, Type II cement with low alkaline. B. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project. 2.2 AGGREGATES A. Coarse aggregate for concrete paving: 1. Shall be non-reactive aggregate. No Sun Valley aggregate shall be used. Contractor will submit a certificate stating that the aggregate has no history of reactivity and meets the ASTM standards 2. Coarse aggregate for regular-weight concrete shall be hard, curable, uncoated, washed, graded, cleaned, and screened crushed rock or gravel conforming to current requirements of ASTM Designation C Coarse aggregate for paving shall not exceed 3/4 inch. 4. Use same aggregate from single source throughout entire project. B. Aggregate for exposed aggregate finish shall be ¼ to 5/8 water-washed #4 pea rock with smooth edges. C. Fine aggregate: 1. Sand shall be clean, hard, and durable with uncoated grains 2. Free from injurious amounts of silt, loam, clay or other deleterious matter, 3. Conforming to ASTM Designation C33, 4. Graded in size from coarse to fine with % by weight passing a No. 4 sieve, 45-70% passing a No. 16 sieve, 15-30% passing a No. 50 sieve, and 3-8% passing a No. 100 sieve

136 2.3 WATER 5. Use same sand from single source throughout entire project. A. Provide clean, potable concrete mixing water free from injurious amounts of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials, or other deleterious matter. 2.4 COLORING AGENTS A. Only commercially pure mineral pigments shall be used to produce the desired color and in no case shall they exceed 10% of the cement content by weight. Color shall be as specified on drawings. Coloring agent shall be used in strict conformity with manufacturer's specification. 1. Integral color admixtures for color-conditioned concrete: Davis Colors, Chromix by Scofield, Bomanite Integral Color, QC Integral Color, or equal. 2. Penetrating, acid stains for coloring new or old concrete (Lithochrome chemical stain by Scofield, Bomanite Chemical Stain, QC Patina Stain, or equal). Chemical stains applied to cured concrete shall be water solutions of metallic salts that penetrate and react with the concrete to produce insoluble, abrasion-resistant color deposits in the pores. Stains shall contain dilute acid to etch the concrete surface lightly so that the staining ingredients can penetrate deeper and react more uniformly. 3. Color wax for curing and finishing colored concrete flatwork (Lithochrome Colorwax, or equal) shall be a semitransparent material designed to enhance the natural appearance of the surface to which it is applied. The color of the color wax shall be as near as possible to the color of the surface to which it is applied, to enhance the depth of color 4. Shake-on color hardeners for surface color conditioning shall be a streak-free intergrind of pigments, surfaceconditioning and dispersing agents and Portland cement combined with hard, graded aggregate. Pigments are lime-proof and have maximum resistance to the effects of sunlight. (Lithochrome Color Hardener, Bomanite Color Hardener, QC Color Hardener, or equal) 2.5 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS A. Pre-molded expansion joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1751-6B size per Drawings. Ethafoam Polyfelt by White Cap, Inc., "Denver foam backer rod by DFC, "Sonofoam" backer rod by Sonneborn, or approved equivalent. B. Joint sealant compound shall be polyurethane two-part as manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equivalent. Color shall be per Drawings, or as approved by Owner s Representative. 2.6 METAL DOWELS A. Shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation A36. B. Dowels at expansion joints shall be ½ diameter rebar free of dirt, grease and oils. C. 50% of each dowel shall be encased in a Speed Dowel plastic sleeve, available from Greenstreak (888) or Diamond Dowel System, available from Hub Construction Specialties (800) , to allow parallel lateral movement of each dowel. 2.7 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing bars shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation A615 deformed Grade 40 or Grade 60 billet-steel, clean and free from rust, scale, or coating that will reduce bonding. B. Welded wire fabric shall conform to current requirements of ASTM Designation A185. Tags designating wire size and spacing shall be left on each roll until ready to use. Lap 6" on all edges. C. Provide certified mill test reports regarding chemical and physical properties of all reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric furnished

137 2.8 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Precast concrete shall be used where indicated on the Drawings and may be used elsewhere with approval by Owner s Representative. Precast concrete must equal or exceed the specifications for concrete as stated herein. Precast concrete units shall be fabricated by a reputable manufacturer who shall submit conclusive evidence of successful completion of similar work, and who has the skill, craftsmanship, and equipment to fully comply with the Drawings and specifications. B. Submit shop Drawings for all precast concrete items, and submit samples as specified for concrete herein. C. All precast concrete items that abut or are adjacent to cast-in-place concrete shall be as indicated on Drawings. The Contractor shall allow adequate time for coordination of work and submission and approval of samples so that suitable uniformity of concrete work is obtained. Chipped or damaged precast units will not be accepted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN OF MIXES AND PROPORTIONING A. Ensure that batch plant guarantees single source supply for cement, fine aggregate, and coarse aggregate for entire length of project B. Proportioning and mixing of cement, aggregate, admixture, and water to attain required plasticity and strength shall be in accordance with the current edition of the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice and the PCA "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures." C. Concrete mixtures shall be designed by an approved commercial testing laboratory, using approved materials furnished by the Contractor, to obtain the specified minimum compressive strengths. D. Any use of accelerants shall be limited to non-chloride accelerators. E. Maximum slump shall be 5, with ½ slump differential for successive batches. 3.2 FORM WORK A. Forms shall be constructed accurately to dimensions and plumb and true to line and grade. Forms shall be substantial, mortar tight, braced, and tied so as to maintain position and shape during placing of reinforcing and concrete. Way surfaces and bulged walls or slab surfaces resulting from settlement or springing of formwork will not be acceptable. B. The Contractor shall carefully examine Drawings and provide all recesses and all openings of proper sizes or shapes required or as may be directed by Owner s Representative for installation of all work requiring opening. C. Forms shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that construction joints shall occur at approved locations. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out before concrete is placed and forms shall be removed without damage to concrete. D. Care shall be taken in all details of forming, setting, reinforcing, mixing, and placing all concrete exposed in finish work to obtain smooth, even surfaces of dense concrete, and clean sharp inside and outside corners, except where tooled corners are indicated. Concrete will be free of voids and irregularities. E. Earth forms may be used for footings only where soil is firm and stable and concrete will not be exposed. Excavations shall be cut neat and accurate to size, and all exposed concrete shall be formed with the form extending at least six inches below finish grade. F. Forms shall be carefully observed and checked for alignment and level as the work proceeds. All needed adjustment or additional bracing shall be done promptly. G. After forms have been placed and approved, the Contractor shall see that all other trades have been properly notified and are given sufficient time to complete installation of their work. Placing of reinforcing steel shall proceed progressively with work of other trades and each shall arrange their working schedules so as to avoid disturbing or

138 moving of work already installed by one trade to admit the work of another. Each trade shall be entirely responsible for proper installation and securing of the work and each shall keep his work under observation during placing of concrete. H. Before pouring footings for foundations, see that bottoms of excavations are undisturbed earth free from water or frost, properly cleaned and leveled off, and compacted as required by the ACI building code. Do not place concrete on frozen earth or uncompacted fill. I. Forms shall remain in place long enough to allow concrete to set properly and the Contractor shall assume all responsibility for removing forms. In no case shall supporting forms or shoring be removed until concrete has sufficient strength to safely carry its own weight and the load upon it. Supporting vertical surfaces shall stay in place for 2 days minimum. 3.3 BASE PREPARATION A. Subgrades shall consist of a minimum 4 layer of graded washed concrete sand compacted to 95% relative compaction. Sand shall be kept damp prior to concrete placement. All subgrades shall be graded to plus or minus 0.05 B. Conform to all recommendations as noted in the soils engineer's report. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Place all reinforcement as shown on Drawings. Accurately place and securely fasten and support reinforcement to prevent displacement before or during pouring. Hang footing bars from forms. Support wire mesh with suitable metal cradles. B. Clean, bend, and place reinforcement in accordance with current requirements of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. C. Reinforcement Splices: 3.5 FINISHES 1. Welded wire fabric - One-mesh minimum 2. Reinforcing bars: a. #3 through #7 = 30-bar diameter b. #8 through #9 = 40-bar diameter c. #10 through #11 = 54-bar diameter A. Steel Trowel Finish: After surface water disappears and floated surface is sufficiently hardened, steel trowel and retrowel to smooth surface. After concrete has set enough, re-trowel to a smooth uniform finish, free of trowel marks or other blemishes. Avoid burned areas produced by excessive troweling. B. Sandblast: Refer to drawings for the areas to be sandblasted. Exterior landscape concrete surface shall be sandblasted as follows: 1. Landscape concrete walls shall be sandblasted to remove fines and board grains from surfaces. 2. Landscape paving surfaces shall be medium to light sandblasted to expose aggregate surface. Sandblast after saw cutting is done. See sample requirements in this section. C. Retarded Finish 1. Before initial set takes place, apply retarder to finished surface as directed by retardant manufacturer by spray, roller, or brush, depending on retardant consistency. Cover with wet curing burlap and cure for not less than ten (10) and no more than eighteen (18) hours. Test surface with a knife blade to determine when to commence work of revealing aggregate

139 3.6 JOINTS 2. Edge with a small radius edger before and immediately after the surface aggregate has been embedded. 3. Reveal aggregate by using water jet and coarse fiber brushes to remove retarded paste from surface, washing thoroughly until surface is clean and exposure is complete. Then replace curing burlap and maintain moist for at least 7 days. 4. Slab surfaces shall exhibit an aggregate exposure of coarse aggregate particles of a 3/8-in. size, constituting not less than 60% and not more than 80% of the surface. Exposure shall be to sufficient depth to provide a surface profile of 1/8 in. + 1/16 in. 5. Control joints shall be scored straight even lines. A. Score joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete using a jointer to cut the groove so that a smooth uniform impression is obtained. All joints shall be struck before and after brooming. B. Expansion Joints and Edging: Expansion joints shall be formed provided at the location and intervals as shown on the Drawings and at all locations where concrete paving abuts buildings or other permanent vertical structures. Approved joint material shall be placed with top edge 1/4 in. below the paved surface, and shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression. All edges shall be struck before and after brooming. After the curing period, expansion joints shall be carefully cleaned and filled with approved backer rod and joint compound flush with the paved surface in such a manner as to avoid spilling on paved surfaces or overflow from joint. C. Sawcut joints: Sawcut all joints as shown on Drawings. Sawing shall be done as soon as the surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade. Sawcut joints before sandblasting. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect concrete against frost, rapid drying, and rain damage, and keep moist for at least seven (7) days after placing. Protect concrete during this period by wet burlap, canvas covering, or liquid curing compound. Secure Owner s Representative's approval of proposed methods. During this period maintain concrete above 70 F for at least three days or above 50 F for at least five days. Concrete from which forms are removed within seven (7) days after pouring shall be sprayed during the curing period as frequently as drying conditions may require. Concrete covering shall be a type that will not stain or discolor finished concrete surfaces. Cure concrete in accordance with requirements of the current ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. B. Metal Form Ties: Metal form ties extending from the face of permanently exposed concrete shall be cut off at least one inch deep in the concrete immediately after removal of forms. Fill holes with a 1:3 cement and sand mortar as dry as possible and finish flush with the adjacent surface. C. Defects: All defects in concrete work shall be corrected. Voids shall be chipped to sound concrete and to a depth of at least one-inch with the edges perpendicular to the surface and parallel to form markings. Repairing voids and rubbing shall be done as directed by the Owner s Representative, and shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Concrete surfaces so repaired shall duplicate the appearance of the unpatched work. END OF SECTION

140 SECTION PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: Division 1 applies to this section. Provide exterior pavers, complete. 1.2 WORK IN THIS SECTION: Principal items include: A. Concrete pavers. B. Aggregate sub-base. C. Sand bed under pavers. D. Geotextile fabric. E. Joint sand. F. Sealant. G. Edge restraints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Two samples, for selection and approval, of each type of paver unit to show the full range of color and texture. 2. Representative samples of rock and boulders B. Sample Panels: At site, prepare as many 48 square sample areas as are required for approval. Include an edge and end condition in each sample. Installations must conform to the approved samples. Approved samples may be part of the Work, if they are approved and conform to all other requirements indicated and specified. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Submit complete. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver pavers on pallets. B. Store all materials in dry covered locations and protect from moisture. C. Handle and store pavers by methods that preclude cracking, chipping, or defacing. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Inspect and verify surfaces to receive the work of this section. B. Report to the architect all conditions that prevent correct installation of pavers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC MATERIALS: A. Bedding sand: Naturally occurring, not manufactured, ASTM C 33, all passing the No. 30 sieve

141 B. Geotextile fabric per Geotechnical recommendations. If no recommendations are made by the Engineer, use the following: 1. Under vehicular paving: Mirafi Filterweave 700, or equal. 2. Under pedestrian paving: Mirafi 160N, or equal. C. Aggregate base: Clean, crushed or uncrushed aggregate, all passing 2" sieve, and all retained on No. 100 sieve. D. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali. E. Hydrated lime: ASTM C207, Type S. F. Joint sand: conform to the requirements of ASTM C-144 except that the sand shall be dry and shall conform to the following grading requirements. ASTM Sieve size (mm) Percentage passing by weight No. 8 (2.360) 100 No. 16 (1.180) No.30 (0.600) No.50 (0.300) No.100 (0.150) 5-10 No.200 (0.075) 0-5 G. Sealant: An epoxy-modified joint stabilizing sealer capable of penetrating and sealing the surface of the paver without causing discoloration or reducing the static coefficient of friction to below accepted figures. The sealer will bond the joint sand in an interlocking paver installation. The joint sand stabilizing material shall be Surebond SB as manufactured by Surebond Inc., 500 E. Remington Road, Schaumburg, IL, Telephone Distributor: Surebond is distributed by Surebond International, Inc., P.O. Box 17147, Irvine CA (Warehouse: Sky Park Circle, Suite H, Irvine CA ) Telephone H. Water: From domestic potable source. I. Edge restraints: EdgePro Paver Restraint by Dimex, PaveEdge by PaveTech or equal, unless otherwise specified on plans. J. Herbicide, as recommended and applied by licensed pest control consultant. 2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS: A. Manufacturers, types and colors as indicated on drawings. Shop cast of colored concrete, cast in sizes and shapes indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PAVER BASE PREPARATION A. General: Concrete pavers shall be installed as detailed over sand bed. Conform to paver manufacturer's instructions for all elements not specified herein

142 B. Pavers in vehicular areas: prepare base per Soils Engineer. C. Subgrade to Receive Sand Bed: 1. Remove all weeds, debris and other foreign material. 2. Smooth and roll subgrade to level surface. 3. Lay one layer of appropriate geotextile fabric smoothly over the subgrade. 4. Apply 6 inches of aggregate base over fabric, lapping fabric up sides of aggregate, and compact with heavy rollers. 5. Apply sand leveling course over the compacted aggregate. 6. Screed sand to 1 to 1-¼ thickness and level the sand to smooth dense surface. Perform this work immediately before laying pavers. 3.2 SAND BED SET PAVERS A. Over the sand bed, lay the pavers with tight fitting joints. Pound each tile into place so that finished surface is aligned and level. B. At borders, ends and where space exists between full modules and adjacent materials, provide cut pavers to complete the pattern. C. Edge restraints: Install per manufacturer s instructions on all edges that do not butt against adjacent hard material, such as concrete pavement or wall. D. Sand Fill: 1. After pavers are laid, sprinkle loose joint sand over the entire surface, and sweep into all open joints. 2. Vibrate and compact pavers into sand setting bed using equipment 5000 pound centrifugal compaction force for 80 mm pavers, 3000 pound equipment for 60 mm pavers. Do not vibrate within 3 ft. of unrestrained edges of the paving units. 3. Repeat joint sanding and vibrating process (a minimum of three times) until joints are full. Ensure that the joints are filled to the top of the bottom of the chamfer or 1/8 inch below the finished elevation of the pavement. 4. Remove excess sand from surface. E. Seal pavers with Surebond joint stabilizer: 1. The surface shall be clean and free from any staining, oil, dust and any loose material prior to the application of joint sand stabilizer. The surface of the paver and the joint sand should be dry for its full depth prior to commencing work. 2. The joint sand stabilizer shall be applied evenly with a nozzle pressure not exceeding 25 PSI (Pounds/ Square Inch) at a coverage rate of 120 to 140 square feet per gallon. All joints are to be adequately flooded and no surplus material shall be left on the surface

143 3. The treated area should be protected from rain or moisture and not be trafficked for 24 hours after completing the application of the stabilizer. Work shall cease if inclement weather (rain or strong wind) will affect the stabilizing operation and shall not recommence until the joint sand has dried sufficiently to allow penetration of the sealant. 3.3 CLEANING OF PAVER SURFACES A. Clean excess sand off exposed surfaces immediately. B. Acceptably repair imperfect joints, holes, defaced units, chipped edges or corners, and all other defects or replace the defective units. C. If the pavement has been stained, routine cleaning should be carried out with high pressure washing equipment delivering water at a temperature not exceeding 220 degrees Fahrenheit with 45 degree fan shaped spray nozzles at pressures not exceeding 2500 PSI after applying non-citric based degreasers and detergents. The nozzle shall be directed at the pavers from a height of 2 feet and at an angle of 45 degrees. Care should be taken to prevent the jets from being directed into the joints so as not to dislodge the joint sand. D. Stains on exposed surfaces are subject to sandblast cleaning, as directed, to obtain clean uniform approved appearance, at no extra cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION

144 SECTION TURF BLOCK FIRE LANE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work specified in this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete pervious, cast-in-place, monolithic, cellular pavement, including plastic formers, wire mesh reinforcement and curing compound. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1. Section Irrigation System. 2. Section Landscape Planting. 3. Section Concrete Paving and Formwork. A. Product Data: 1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer s specifications, test data and other data required for each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 2. Submit special concrete finishes technical bulletins listing manufacturer s name, product name, descriptive data, curing time and application requirements. 3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other safety requirements. B. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 1. Documentation of sub-grade compaction results prior to concrete placement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: The contractor for this work shall be a Bomanite Grasscrete Franchise Partner and Certified Applicator approved by Bomanite Corporation (559) Provide letter of certification from Bomanite Corporation stating that installer is a certified applicator of special concrete finishes and is familiar with proper procedures/installation requirements of the manufacturer. 2. Use an authorized Bomanite Grasscrete Franchise Partner and adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft. 3. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. 4. Applicator shall be familiar with any previously approved mock-ups that demonstrated standard of workmanship. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in the support and training of a national installer network and manufacturing products required/listed to complete the work. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from same manufacturer s plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Mock-ups: 1. No mock-ups required for standard system. 2. Mock-ups are required for curved areas where use of standard forms is not feasible

145 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components and application. B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer s written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. C. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers. Maintain record of container numbers. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Comply with manufacturer s written instructions for ambient temperature and other conditions affecting installation performance. 2. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 14 days or as directed by the manufacturer before trafficking of Bomanite Grasscrete can begin. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce products, the following requirements apply to product selection: B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturer listed. For other manufacturers to be considered, submit according to the specifications in Product Requirements. 1. Acker-Stone 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The product is required to bear daily traffic of fire appliance vehicles traveling at speeds greater than 30 miles per hour. B. The product is required to be continuously reinforced with wire mesh. C. The product is required to be manufactured from cast-in-place concrete with a minimum thickness of 5 ½. 2.3 MATERIALS A. See drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The sub-grade for Grasscrete shall be prepared for expected loading and drainage requirements. Sub-grade for vehicle traffic shall be in accordance with local concrete street specifications. For most applications, except for very heavy loads, native soil having a minimum R Value of 30 and a compaction of 95% will provide a suitable sub-grade. In areas having poor soil and/or very heavy anticipated loads, 4" or more of soil should be excavated and replaced with compacted base rock.) If an open void or gravel filled system is being utilized as a fully pervious system, a minimum of an 18 bed of clear granular stone will be required to provide an adequate reservoir. B. Substrate preparation shall be as directed by Geotechnical Report and Civil Engineer. C. The concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi in 28 days when placed at a 4-5 slump. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I, II or V. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33 and be 3/8" minus

146 Mixing water shall be fresh, clean and potable. In freeze-thaw areas, air entrainment of 6.5% to 8.5% shall be provided. Water reducing admixtures and/or super-plasticizers are permitted and shall conform to ASTM C 494. D. The Grasscrete slab shall have a minimum thickness of 5 1/2". Grasscrete cast with Re-Usable Formers should be recessed 1"- 1 ½" below adjoining surfaces to allow for grass and topsoil. All perimeters of Grasscrete should be restrained by an existing hard surface or a monolithic concrete border. Where used for emergency vehicle access roads or any driving surface, all unrestrained edges shall be a monolithic concrete border having a minimum width of 12". E. The Grasscrete shall be reinforced with 6x6 w2.9xw2.9 or greater welded wire mesh 6 on center seated 1 ½ above the sub-grade. Consult the Grasscrete Technical Bulletin for complete information on correct reinforcement for the project requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Examine sub-grade, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish. Rectify conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that elevations and compaction meet Project Conditions above. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Construction Process: 1. Sub-grade shall be leveled to a uniform plane 6 ½"- 7" below the final grade of the Grasscrete slab and adjoining surfaces. 2. Wire mesh reinforcement shall be placed on the sub-grade. 3. Grasscrete formers shall be placed over the mesh on the sub-grade with the mesh then being chaired or pulled up during the concrete placing process. 4. Concrete shall be placed and leveled to the top of the Grasscrete formers. The concrete surface shall have a coarse broomed finish. 5. Grasscrete formers shall be removed from the concrete after the concrete has hardened sufficiently. B. Curved areas: 1. Areas where complete former will not fit are to be filled with 3 pipe holes. Holes are to comprise 50% of area. 3.4 PROTECTION A. General: Protect finished work from traffic until fully cured in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. END OF SECTION

147 SECTION LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings that the finished system is complete in every respect and shall be ready for operation satisfactory to the Owner. B. The work shall include all materials, labor, services, transportation, and equipment necessary to perform the work as indicated on the drawings, in these specifications, and as necessary to complete the contract. 1.2 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS A. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features. B. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. When an item is shown on the plans but not shown on the specifications or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be as shown on both. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority for clarification. C. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect as soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed, the Irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section. B. Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturer of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. C. All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. D. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to Owner. E. The Contractor shall secure the required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or arrangements made by others affecting the work of this section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Materials List: 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from suppliers or delivered to the job site, submit to the Owner a complete list of all irrigation system materials, or processes proposed to be furnished and installed as part of this contract

148 2. The submittals materials list shall include the following information: a. A title sheet with the job name, the contractor s name, contractor s address and telephone number, submittal date and submittal number. b. An index sheet showing the item number (i.e. 1,2,3, etc.); an item description (i.e. sprinkler head); the manufacturer s name (i.e. Hunter Industries); the item model number (i.e. I-40-ADV/36V); and the page(s) in the submittal set that contain the catalog cuts. c. The catalog cuts shall be one or two pages copied from the most recent manufacturer s catalog that indicate the product submitted. Do not submit parts lists, exploded diagrams, price lists or other extra information. d. The catalog cuts shall clearly indicate the manufacturer s name and the item model number. The item model number, all specified options and specified sizes shall be circled on the catalog cuts. e. Submittals for equipment indicated on the legend without manufacturer names, or as approved, shall contain the manufacturer, Class or Schedule, ASTM numbers and/or other certifications as indicated in these specifications. 3. Submittal materials list format requirements: a. Submittals shall be provided as one complete package for the project. Multiple partial submittals will not be reviewed. b. Submittal package shall be stapled or bound in such a way as to allow for disassembly for review processing. Submittals shall not have tabs, tab sheets, spiral binding, or any other type of binding that will interfere with automated copying of submittals. c. Submittal package shall have all pages numbered in the lower right hand corner. Page numbers shall correspond with submittal index. d. Re-submitted packages must be revised to include only the equipment being re-submitted. Equipment previously reviewed and accepted shall not be re-submitted in the materials list/index sheet or in the catalog cut sheet package. B. Substitutions: If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative for approval. 1. Provide a written statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. 2. Provide catalog cut sheets, technical data, and performance information for each substitute item. 3. Provide in writing the difference in installed price if the item is accepted. C. The Landscape Architect or Owner s authorized representative will allow no substitutions without prior written acceptance. D. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. E. The Landscape Architect or Owner s authorized representative will not review the submittal package unless provided in the format described above. 1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the locations, size and detail of points of connection provided as the source of water, and electrical supply connection to the irrigation system. B. Irrigation design is based on the available static water pressure shown on the drawings. Contractor shall verify static water on the project prior to the start of construction. Should a discrepancy exist, notify the Landscape Architect and Owner's authorized representative prior to beginning construction. C. Prior to cutting into the soil, the Contractor shall locate all cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly encountered underground and he shall take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Landscape Architect and Owner who will arrange for relocations. The Contractor will proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or any other such conditions are encountered. D. The Contractor shall protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction. Contractor shall repair, at his own cost; all damage resulting from his operations or negligence

149 E. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor for installation of required sleeving as shown on the plans prior to paving operations. F. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the existing irrigation systems in areas adjacent to and within the Project area of work. G. The Contractor shall protect all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, from damage due to his operations. H. Contractor shall notify Owner s Representative if any existing system is temporarily shut off, capped or modified. Provide 48-hour notice, prior to turning off or modifying any existing irrigation system. I. The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, damaged by the construction of this project. Adjacent irrigation systems shall be made completely operational and provide complete coverage of the existing landscaped areas. All repairs shall be complete to the satisfaction of the Owner s Representative. J. The contractor shall provide bore holes under any existing pavement or paving encountered for the required lateral, mainline and low voltage control wire sleeving. Bore holes under 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be made with a BulletMole underground boring tool as manufactured by Dimension Tools, LLC (Contact telephone number (888) or at Bore holes larger than 2 inches in diameter shall be made with an approved mechanical boring tool. No air jacking or hydraulic boring of any kind shall be allowed. 1.6 INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall permit the Landscape Architect and Owner's authorized representative to visit and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for such visits. B. Where the specifications require work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be covered over until accepted by the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and/or governing agencies. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing. Should any work be covered without testing or acceptance, it shall be, if so ordered, uncovered at the Contractor's expense. C. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum: 1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. System layout. 3. Pressure test of irrigation mainline (Four hours at 125 PSI or 120% of static water pressure, whichever is greater.) Mainline pressure loss during test shall not exceed 2 PSI. 4. Coverage test of irrigation system. Test shall be performed prior to any planting. 5. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period. 6. Final acceptance prior to turnover. D. Site observations and testing will not commence without the field record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor. Record drawings must complete and up to date for each site visit. E. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be retested. Hourly rates and expenses of the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies for re-inspection or retesting will be paid by the Irrigation Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. 1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installation work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Landscape Architect and Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external load

150 1.8 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL A. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of rubbish and debris generated by his work and workmen at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the Owner's authorized representative. B. At the time of completion the entire site will be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish and debris which shall be disposed of off-site in a legal disposal area. 1.9 TURNOVER ITEMS A. Record Drawings: 1. Record accurately on one set of drawings all changes in the work constituting departures from the original contract drawings and the actual final installed locations of all required components as shown below. 2. The record drawings shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the Owner. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative. 3. All record drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD 2014 drafting software and the original irrigation drawings as a base. No manual drafted record drawings shall be acceptable. The Contractor may obtain digital base files from the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative. 4. If the Contractor is unable to provide the AutoCAD drafting necessary for the record drawings the irrigation designer does provide record drawing drafting as a separate service. 5. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings plotted onto vellum sheets for review by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative. After acceptance by the Landscape Architect, City Inspector or Owner s authorized representative re-plot the record drawings onto reproducible Mylar sheets. The Contractor shall also provide record drawing information on a digital AutoCAD Release 2014 drawing file. All digital files shall be provided on a compact disc (CD) clearly marked with the project name, file descriptions and date. a. Record drawing information and dimensions shall be collected on a day-to-day basis during the installation of the pressure mainline to fully indicate all routing locations and pipe depths. Locations for all other irrigation equipment shall be collected prior to the final inspection of the work. b. Two dimensions from two permanent points of reference such as buildings, sidewalks, curbs, streetlights, hydrants, etc. shall be shown for each piece of irrigation equipment shown below. Where multiple components are installed with no reasonable reference point between the components, dimensioning may be made to the irrigation equipment. All irrigation symbols shall be clearly shown matching the irrigation legend for the drawings. All lettering on the record drawings shall be minimum 1/8 inch in size. 6. Show locations and depths of the following items: a. Point of connection (including water POC, backflow devices, master control valves, flow sensors, etc.) b. Routing of sprinkler pressure main lines (dimensions shown at a maximum of 100 feet along routing) c. Isolation valves d. Automatic remote control valves (indicate station number and size) e. Quick coupling valves f. Drip air relief and flush valves g. Routing of control wires where separate from irrigation mainline h. Irrigation controllers (indicate controller number and station count) i. Related equipment (as may be directed) B. Controller Charts: 1. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller. Chart shall show the area covered by the particular controller. The areas covered by the individual control valves shall be indicated using colored highlighter pens. A minimum of six individual colors shall be used for the controller chart unless less than six control valves are indicated. 2. Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative must approve record drawings before controller charts are prepared. 3. The chart is to be a reduced copy of the actual "record" drawing. In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a readable size. 4. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils in thickness. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

151 1. Two individually bound copies of operation and maintenance manuals shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative at least 10 calendar days prior to final inspection. The manuals shall describe the material installed and the proper operation of the system. 2. Each complete, bound manual shall include the following information: 3. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of guarantee period, list of equipment including names and addresses of local manufacturer representatives. a. Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment. b. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information for all equipment. D. Equipment: 1. Supply as a part of this contract the following items: a. Two (2) wrenches for disassembly and adjustment of each type of sprinkler head used in the irrigation system. b. Three 30-inch sprinkler keys for manual operation of control valves. c. Two keys for each automatic controller. d. Two quick coupler keys with a 1" bronze hose bib, bent nose type with hand wheel and two coupler lid keys. e. One valve box cover key or wrench. f. Six extra sprinkler heads of each size and type. g. For specified ball valves if required: One (1) 5-foot long valve handle, to fit the specified ball valves. 2. The above equipment shall be turned over to Owner's authorized representative at the final inspection COMPLETION A. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies will inspect the work, and if not accepted, will prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. Punch list to be checked off by contractor and submitted to Landscape Architect or Owner s Authorized representative prior to any follow-up meeting. This checked off list to indicate that all punch list items have been completed. At the time of the post-maintenance period or final inspection the work will be re-inspected and final acceptance will be in writing by the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies. B. The Owner's authorized representative shall have final authority on all portions of the work. C. After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall instruct Owner's authorized representative in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and shall furnish a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions. D. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one-year period following acceptance shall be repaired to the Owner's satisfaction by the Contractor without any additional expense to the Owner. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind as a result of the work GUARANTEE A. The entire sprinkler system, including all work done under this contract, shall be unconditionally guaranteed against all defects and fault of material and workmanship, including settling of backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one (1) year following the filing of the Notice of Completion. B. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the guarantee period, it shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to Owner within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of written notice from Owner. When the nature of the repairs as determined by the Owner constitute an emergency (i.e. broken pressure line) the Owner may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. Any and all damages to existing improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner by the Contractor, all at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Guarantee shall be submitted on Contractors own letterhead as follows: GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse, or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defective material during the period of one year from date of filing of the Notice of Completion and also to repair or replace any

152 damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 10 calendar days following written notification by the Owner. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within the time specified after receipt of written notice from Owner, we authorize the Owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: SIGNED: DATE: PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SUMMARY 2.2 PIPE Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type shown on the drawings and specifications. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet Landscape Architect's, Owner's, or governing agencies standards will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at no expense to the Owner. A. Pressure supply line between the water meter and the backflow prevention device shall be type K copper, one size larger than backflow device. B. Backflow prevention assemblies, and all other above grade assemblies, shall be constructed of threaded brass pipe and threaded brass fittings the same size as the backflow device, unless otherwise directed. C. Pressure supply lines 2 inches in diameter and up to 3 inches in diameter downstream of backflow prevention unit shall be Class 315 solvent weld PVC. Piping shall conform to ASTM D2241. D. Non-pressure lines 3/4 inch in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control valve shall be SCH 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Brass pipe shall be 85 percent red brass, ANSI, IPS Standard 125 pounds, Schedule 40 screwed pipe. B. Fittings shall be medium brass, screwed 125-pound class. C. Copper pipe and fittings shall be Type "K" sweat soldered, or brazed as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval, Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion. B. All plastic pipe shall be extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in accordance with ASTM D2672, ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785. C. All solvent weld PVC fittings shall be standard weight Schedule 40 (and Schedule 80 where specified on the irrigation detail sheet, all mainline fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC) and shall be injection molded of an improved virgin PVC

153 fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep socket" bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and ells shall be side gated. All fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466. D. All threaded nipples shall be standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads and shall conform to ASTM D1785. E. All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer and solvent cement applied per the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be of a fluid consistency, not gel-like or ropy. Solvent cementing shall be in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855. F. When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base Teflon paste, tape, or equal. G. All pressure mainlines installed with solvent weld PVC fittings shall be installed with concrete thrust blocking at all directional changes in the mainline routing. Concrete thrust blocking shall not be required when ductile iron fittings and mechanical restraints are specified. 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS A. The backflow prevention unit shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. B. The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local codes. C. The backflow enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2.6 VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. Ball valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. All ball valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than 150 PSI and shall conform to AWWA standards. B. Quick Coupler Valves: 1. Quick coupler valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. Quick coupler valves shall be brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand normal working pressure of 150 psi without leakage. Valves shall have 1 female threads opening at base, with two-piece body. Valves to be operated only with a coupler key, designed for that purpose. Coupler key is inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be made between the coupler key and valve. C. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Automatic control valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. Automatic control valves shall be electrically operated. 3. Provide Christy's valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number. 2.7 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable, weather-resistant plastic material resistant to sunlight and chemical action of soils. B. The valve box cover shall be green in color and secured with a hidden latch mechanism or bolts. C. The cover and box shall be capable of sustaining a load of 1,500 pounds. D. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box. E. The plastic irrigation valve box cover shall be an overlapping type. F. Automatic control valve, master valve, flow sensor valve boxes shall be 17"x11"x12" nominal rectangular size. Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV" with the valve identification number, or MV, FS "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters / numbers

154 G. Drip air relief valve boxes shall be 6" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with ARV "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters. H. Quick coupler, flush, and ball valve boxes shall be 10" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with "QCV", FV, or BV "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters. 2.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Automatic controller shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. B. Controller enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. C. Controller shall be grounded according to local codes using equipment of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings; or as required by local codes and ordinances. 2.9 ELECTRICAL A. All electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior installations. B. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING A. Remote control wire shall be direct-burial AWG-UF type, size as indicated on the drawings, and in no case smaller than 14 gauge. B. Remote control wire shall be 14 AWG solid core twisted pair, type as indicated on the irrigation drawings. C. Connections shall of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. D. Common wires shall be white in color. Control wires shall be red (where two or more controllers are used, the control wires shall be a different color for each controller. These colors shall be noted on the "Record Drawings" plans located on controller door). E. Ground wires shall be green in color or bare copper and in no case smaller than 6 gauge IRRIGATION HEADS AND DRIP EMITTERS AND INLINE DRIP TUBING A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be of the manufacturer, size, type, with radius of throw, operating pressure, and discharge rate indicated on the drawings. B. Irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be used as indicated on the drawings DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT Drip tubing equipment such as flush valves, air relief valves, wye strainers and pressure regulators shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Landscape Fabric: 1. Landscape fabric for valve box assemblies shall be 5.0- oz. weight woven polypropylene weed barrier. Landscape fabric shall have a burst strength of 225 PSI, a puncture strength of 60 lbs. and capable of water flow of 12 gallons per minute per square foot. 2. Type: DeWitt Pro 5 Weed Barrier or approved equal. B. Equipment such as flow sensors, rain sensors, flush valves, air relief valves, wye strainers, and master valves shall be of the manufacturer, size and type indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION

155 3.1 SITE CONDITIONS A. Inspections: 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies have been resolved. C. Grades: 1. Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to finish grade. 2. Final grades shall be accepted by the Engineer before work on this section will be allowed to begin. D. Field Measurements: 1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all irrigation materials with all other work. 2. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions prior to proceeding with work under this section. 3. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by his operations or neglect. E. Diagrammatic Intent: The drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment and fixtures are drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets in piping and changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform with structures and to avoid obstructions or conflicts with other work at no additional expense to Owner. F. Layout: 1. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads, valves, backflow preventer, and automatic controller. 2. Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to differences between site and drawings. Where piping is shown on drawings under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install the piping in the planted areas. G. Water Supply: Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to Owner. H. Electrical Service: 1. Connections to the electrical supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to Owner. 2. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. Electrical power source to controller locations shall be provided by others. 3. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. 230-volt single-phase electrical power source to pump assembly location shall be provided by others per NEC codes. 3.2 TRENCHING A. Excavations shall be straight with vertical sides, even grade, and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on drawings to the depths below finished grade and as noted. Where lines occur under paved area, these dimensions shall be considered below subgrade. B. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches on pressure supply lines 2 ½ inches and smaller. C. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches for control wires within planters. D. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches for control wires within sleeves below paving

156 E. Provide minimum cover of 36 inches on pressure supply lines under vehicular travel ways. F. Provide minimum cover of 12 inches for non-pressure lines. G. Pipes installed in a common trench shall have a 4-inch minimum space between pipes. 3.3 THRUST BLOCKS A. Thrust blocks must be constructed of Class B concrete. B. Thrust blocks shall be poured against undisturbed site soil. C. PVC fitting joints shall be kept free of concrete. Do not encase fitting in concrete. D. Thrust blocking shall be sized to provide the minimum bearing areas as shown below. Bearing areas indicated have been calculated for Class 200 PVC pipe at a test pressure of 150 PSI in soil with 2,000 PSI bearing capacity. Increase thrust block sizing as necessary for varying soil conditions. 1. Provide a minimum thrust block bearing area of 2.0 square feet on all bends (all degrees) and tees installed on pressure supply lines 4 inches and smaller. 3.4 BACKFILLING A. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and rocks over 1/2 inches in diameter. B. Backfill shall be tamped in 4-inch layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be compacted to dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil and shall conform to adjacent grades. C. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed. D. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill. E. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 4 inches over and under all piping under paved areas. 3.5 PIPING A. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement. B. Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted. C. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification. D. Remove all dented and damaged pipe sections. E. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches from each other and 12 inches from lines of other trades. F. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other. G. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling. H. PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner, which will provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. I. Center load all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing

157 J. All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon tape or Teflon paste. K. For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope an all threaded plastic-to-metal connections, except where noted otherwise. All plastic-to-metal connections shall be made with plastic female adapters. 3.6 CONTROLLER A. The exact location of the controller shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative before installation. The electrical service shall be coordinated with this location. B. The Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for the final electrical hook up to the irrigation controller. C. The irrigation system shall be programmed to operate during the periods of minimal use of the design area. 3.7 CONTROL WIRING A. Low voltage control wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as the pressure supply lines whenever possible. B. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together in a bundle at intervals of 10 feet. Bundle shall be secured to the mainline with tape at intervals of 20 feet. C. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an 18-inch service loop at each connection. D. An expansion loop of 12 inches shall be provided at each wire connection and/or directional change, and one of 24 inches shall be provided at each remote control valve. E. A continuous run of wire shall be used between a controller and each remote control valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval. 3.8 VALVES A. Automatic control valves, quick coupler, and ball valves are to be installed in the approximate locations indicated on the drawings. B. Valve shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible. C. Install all valves as indicated in the detail drawings. D. Valves to be installed in valve boxes shall be installed one valve per box. E. Provide valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number. 3.9 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible. B. Each valve box shall be installed on a foundation of 3/4 inch gravel backfill, 3 cubic feet minimum. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 1/2 inch above the surface of surrounding finish grade in lawn areas and 2 inches above finish grade in ground cover areas IRRIGATION HEADS DRIP EMITTERS AND INLINE DRIP TUBING A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. B. Spacing of heads and inline drip tubing shall not exceed maximum indicated on the drawings. C. Riser nipples shall be of the same size as the riser opening in the sprinkler body

158 3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS A. Backflow Prevention Units shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local codes. B. The exact location of the backflow device shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or owner's authorized representative before installation. C. The contractor shall be responsible for the testing and certification of the backflow device for proper operation. Testing and certification shall be performed by a state qualified backflow tester MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail drawings or specifications, using best standard practices. B. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 18 inches from walks, curbs, header boards, or paved areas where applicable. C. Install devices such as rain sensors, freeze sensors, flush valves, and air relief valves, master valves and flow sensors as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer FLUSHING THE SYSTEM A. Prior to installation of irrigation heads, the valves shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the lines and risers. B. Irrigation heads shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM A. Contractor shall adjust valves, align heads, and check the coverage of each system prior to coverage test. B. If it is determined by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative that additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage, all necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting. C. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations commence. D. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer TESTING AND OBSERVATION A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been observed, tested and accepted by the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies. B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing. C. When the sprinkler system is completed, the Contractor shall perform a coverage test of each system in its entirety to determine if the water coverage for the planted areas is complete and adequate in the presence of the Landscape Architect. D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Landscape Architect. This test shall be accepted by the Landscape Architect and accomplished before starting any planting

159 E. Areas to be maintained for the formal maintenance period shall start maintenance at the same time, as directed by the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies. Partial areas will not be released into maintenance prior to completion of items listed in the pre-maintenance review. The maintenance period may not be phased. F. If, after the maintenance review, the irrigation systems are not accepted by the Landscape Architect, the contractor shall reimburse the Architect for additional site visits, or additional time required to review work. All additional time will be billed at the Architect s hourly rate and will be paid for by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. G. Final inspection will not commence without record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor MAINTENANCE During the maintenance period the Contractor shall adjust and maintain the irrigation system in a fully operational condition providing complete irrigation coverage to all intended plantings COMPLETION CLEANING Clean up shall be made as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be swept, and any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. END OF SECTION

160 SECTION LANDSCAPE PLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes materials, soil preparation, planting, seeding, sodding, staking and guying, and cleanup. B. Related work: 1. Section 02970: Landscape Maintenance 2. Section 02810: Irrigation System 3. Section 02310: Finish Grading C. Definitions: 1. Architect: the Architect or the Owner's authorized representative. 2. Soil Test: Required testing performed by Contractor after site is rough graded. A current soil report is also required for import soil prior to transport to the site. 3. Punch List: List of work within the Contract, generated by Architect that needs to be completed, repaired, replaced, or rectified by Contractor. 4. Pre-maintenance review: Observation by Architect to verify substantial completion of the Work. The Architect will generate a Punch List during this review. Maintenance Period will commence when Contractor has completed items on this Punch List and Architect has verified that the Punch List is complete. 5. Maintenance Period: See Specification section Final Acceptance: Observation review by Architect at end of the specified Maintenance Period to verify completion and acceptance of the Work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Provide plants and planting materials that meet or exceed specifications of Federal, State, and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease or insect control. 2. Provide quality and size conforming to current edition of Horticultural Standards for number one nursery stock as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. 3. Provide plants that are true to name. Tag one of each bundle or lot with the name and size of plants in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen. 4. Botanical names shall take precedence over common names. B. Workmanship: Perform work in accordance with the best standards of practice for landscape work and under the continual supervision of a competent foreman capable of interpreting the Drawings and Specifications. C. Quantities and Types: Plant materials shall be furnished in the quantities and/or spacings as shown or noted for each location, and shall be of the species, kinds, sizes, etc., as symbolized and/or described in the Plant List, and as indicated on the Drawings. D. Verification of dimensions and quantities: scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with work, carefully check and verify dimensions and quantities and immediately inform the Architect of discrepancies between the Drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions. Do not start work in areas where there are discrepancies until approval for same has been given by the Architect. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit documentation to Architect 60 days before start of planting that plant material is available. Include: 1. A list of plants stating quantity, size, and supplier. a. Requests for substitutions due to unavailability must be made in writing. b. Substitutions may not be made without approval of the Architect

161 c. Contractor shall notify Architect 24 hours in advance of delivery of plant materials, and shall submit an itemized list of plants in each delivery. 2. Photographs of trees 24 box and larger. a. Label each photo with plant name, plant height, spread and trunk caliper. b. Label each photo with nursery name, nursery contact and phone number. c. Photograph shall include a person in picture for scale purposes. B. Soil Test: Contractor shall have import soil and the soil of the site tested for fertility, agricultural suitability, and appraisal by Soil and Plant Laboratory Inc. (714) , or Wallace Labs (310) Submit a copy of the Planting Plan and Plant Legend to the laboratory with the samples. 2. Soil report shall include: a. ph measurement. b. Nutrients and elements: 1) Measurement (low, medium, high) of: Boron, calcium, copper, iron, magnesium, manganese, molybdenum, phosphorus, potassium, sodium, sulfur, and zinc. 2) Analyze saturation extract for: calcium, magnesium, sodium, boron, chloride, phosphorus, nitrate and sulfate. 3) Trace metals: Aluminum, arsenic, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, nickel, selenium, silver, strontium, tin and vanadium. 4) The presence of calcium carbonate and/or magnesium carbonate. c. Soil Texture (gravel, sand, silt and clay). Determine organic matter content by the measurement of organic carbon. The quality of the organic matter shall be determined by measuring organic carbon and total nitrogen. 1) Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 1, Physical and Mineralogical Methods, Soil Science Society of America, Inc., 1986, chapter 36, pgs and Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 3 Chemical Methods, Soil Science Society of America, Inc, 1996, chapter 34, pgs & pgs and chapter 37, pg 1088 d. Interpretation and recommendations for correction of nutritional deficiencies/ excesses and potential toxicities. 3. Soil shall be tested from a minimum of four (4) locations per acre of planted area. Contractor shall record locations where samples were taken. 4. A copy of the soil test results shall be submitted to the Owner and Architect before work begins. 5. Contractor shall pay cost of soil tests. C. Cut sheets of materials to be used: tree stakes, tree guys, root barriers, amendments, mycorrhizal fungi, etc. D. Legible copies of delivery slips for soil amendments, including mycorrhizal fungi. E. The Contractor shall submit samples or specifications of items being used upon the request of the Architect, and as required by this Part 2 of this Specification. 1.4 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect, in advance, for the following observations, according to the time indicated: 1. Pre-construction conference seven (7) days 2. Tree tagging at nursery (trees 24 box size and larger) 48 hours 3. Final grade, soil preparation and planting area layout review - 72 hours 4. Plant materials review - 48 hours 5. Plant layout review - 48 hours 6. Planting operations - 48 hours 7. Completed planting (Pre-maintenance) walk through seven (7) days

162 B. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling site Observation visits with Architect as work progresses. Failure to schedule required Observations shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for obtaining approvals. Contractor shall redo, at no cost to the Owner, work that does not satisfy the Owner. C. Observations may be waived or combined at the discretion of the Architect. D. When someone other than the Architect conducts Observations, the Contractor shall show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made. E. No site visits shall commence without adequate preparation or items noted in previous Observation Reports, either completed or remedied, unless the Owner has waived such compliance. Failure to adequately prepare or accomplish previous punch list items shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the Architect for the site visit at his current billing rates per hour plus transportation costs. No further inspections will be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fertilizer or soil amendments to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and conformance to state law. Protect material from damage or breakage. Immediately remove empty containers from site. B. Deliver plants with legible identification labels. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather or injury. Maintain in a healthy, vigorous condition. Architect may at time reject plant material not maintained in this condition. C. Handling: Do not drop plants or pick up container plants by their stems or trunks. 1.6 SAMPLES AND TESTS: A. Contractor shall submit soil samples for testing, per this Specification. B. Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Architect. C. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. D. Contractor shall pay cost of testing or replacement of materials not meeting specifications. 1.7 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT A. Contractor shall fully warrant and agree to replace poor, inadequate, or defective materials and workmanship for one year from date of acceptance of completed planting work. B. Palm trees: Guarantee newly planted palm trees for a period of two years following planting and acceptance by Owner. C. Replacement: Materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the establishment period shall be replaced immediately. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition of material. Material to be replaced during the warranty period shall be replaced by the Contractor within fifteen days of written notification by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL A. Site Soil: 1. Site soil used to form landscape planting areas or backfill planters shall be clean, fertile, loamy soil, free of stones, sticks, stumps, or other deleterious matter one inch in diameter or larger. It shall also be free from wire, plaster, construction debris, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to planting or maintenance. 2. The Architect shall approve suitability of soil of the site after reviewing results of the soil test

163 B. Import Top Soil: Clean, fertile, sandy loam soil, free of stones or other deleterious matter one inch in diameter or larger. It shall also be free of pockets of coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, lumber, brush and other litter. It shall not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable disease-causing organisms such as insects and plant pathogens. Import top soil must conform to the following: 1. Particle size Class Particle Size Range Maximum % Minimum % Coarse sand mm 15 0 Silt plus clay <0.05mm Other classes: Gravel 2-13mm 15 0 Rock 1/2-1 5% by volume with none > 1 2. Chemistry a. Salinity: Saturation Extract Conductivity (ECe) - less than C b. Sodium: Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) - less than 6.0 c. Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration - Less than 1.0 ppm d. Reaction: ph of Saturated Paste without high lime content 3. Soil shall contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium and magnesium to support normal plant grown. In the even t of nutrient inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required material prior to planting. 4. In order to insure conformance, samples of the import soil shall be submitted to an approved laboratory for analysis prior to and following backfilling. 5. Obtain imported topsoil from approved local sources. C. Backfill for at grade trees and shrubs shall be per Soils Report. 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Soil amendments shall be as required by Soils Test.. B. Contractor shall provide amendments recommended by Soils Report at no additional cost to Owner, including recommendations for the quality of organic amendment. C. Mycorrhizal fungi shall be added in all planting areas, regardless of Soils Report. Mycorrhizal inoculum consists of a combination of : 1. Innoculum shall contain a blend of eight top types of Endospores: Glomus aggregatum, G. clarum, G. deserticola, G. intraradices, G. monosporus, G. mosseae, Gigaspora margarita, and Paraglomus brasilianum, and seven top types of Ecto fungi spores:lacarria laccata, Pisolithus tinctorius, Rhizopogon amylpogon, R. fulvigleba, R. rubescens, R. villosuli, and Scleroderma spp. The guaranteed Endo spore count shall be a minimum 50 spores/cc, and the Ecto spore count shall be a minimum 50,000 spores/cc 2. Manufacturers: a. BioOrganics Mycorrhizae Inoculants, (888) b. Mycorrhizal Applications, Inc, (866) c. Or equal. 2.3 PLANT TABLETS A. 7 gram planting tablet designed for 12 month slow release NPK, 20% humus, 4% humic acids, 3.5% sulfur, 2% iron, micronutrients. 2.4 PLANT MATERIAL: A. Plants shall be in conformance with the California State Department of Agriculture's regulation for nursery inspections, rules, and ratings. Plants shall be healthy, vigorous, and free of insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, frostburns,

164 abrasions, or other disfigurement. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to that of the planting site, and well hardened off. Plants shall have vigorous fibrous root systems which are not rootbound or potbound. The Architect is the sole judge as to acceptability of plant material. B. The size of the plants will correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock or as specified on Drawings. C. The Architect shall approve plant material prior to planting. Plants shall be subject to review and approval of Architect at place of growth or upon delivery for conformity to specifications, and for injury, insect infestation, and trees and shrubs for improper pruning. Such approval shall not impair the right of review and rejection during progress of the work. Architect reserves the right to refuse review if, in his/her judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available for review. D. Plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective, and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the site and replaced with new plants at the Contractor's expense. E. Plant material shall be true to botanical and common name and variety as specified in "Sunset Western Garden Book. F. Substitute plant material will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the Architect. 2.5 SEED MIXES: A. Turf grass seed shall be dwarf fescue hybrid, such as Bonsai or "Marathon IIe", or equivalent approved by Architect. B. See Drawings for other seed mixes. 2.6 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS: A. Wood tree stakes: Lodgepole pine, fully treated with CuNap, ACQ or other non-arsenic wood preservative. Do not use split stakes box trees and smaller: 2" (nom.) diameter by 10' long box trees: 3 (nom.) diameter by 12 long. B. Tree Ties: 1. Flexible vinyl tree ties meeting ASTM-D-412 standards for tensile and elongation strength. Material shall be black. 2. Each tie shall be a single piece, not multiple ties joined together. 3. Manufacturers: VIT Cinch Tie, VIT Cinch Belt (larger trees), Villa Root Barrier E-Z Band, or equal. C. Guying Hardware: 1. Wire: Pliable 1/8 galvanized steel cable. 2. Hose: 1/2" new black rubber hose. 3. Turnbuckles: galvanized or dip-painted, size as required. 4. Cable clamps: galvanized, size as required. 5. Safety Sleeve: 1/2" white PVC full length of wire. 6. Steel Guy Anchor: Duckbill Anchor by Foresight Products (800) ; Platypus Tree Anchoring Systems (866) , or equal. Size as needed. 2.7 WATER: A. Furnished by Owner. B. Transport by Contractor as required

165 2.8 MULCH: A. Composted, shredded tree trimmings: 1. Forest Floor 0-4 by Aguinaga Fertilizer Company, (949) B. Submit mulch samples for approval by Architect. No shredded lumber products will be accepted. C. Rock mulches: per Plans. 2.9 METAL EDGING: A. Steel edging shall be 3/16 x 5 ½, with black anodized finish, with 18 aluminum stake. 1. Manufacturer: Sure-Loc. (800) DRAINAGE MATERIAL - 3/8" CRUSHED ROCK: 95% -100% passing through a 3/8" screen. 0-5% passing through No. 8 mesh # per cubic yard SOIL SEPARATOR: A. Nonwoven polypropylene fabric, needle-punched, with UV Resistance of 70%, AOS of 70 US Standard sieve, water flow rate of 110 gpm/ft2. 1. Geotex 701, manufactured by Propex, or equal WEED CONTROL FABRIC A. Spun-bonded polypropylene with UV inhibitors, non-degrading geotextile fabric that blocks 95% of weed growth and is permeable to air, water, gasses and fertilizer. Typar 3301 or equal. B. Properties: 1. Unit Weight: 3.0 oz/yds 2 2. Tensile Strength: 135 pounds 3. Puncture Strength: 35 pounds 4. Air Opening Size: 60/70 equivalent sieve 5. Elongation at Break: <70% 6. Trap Tear: 50 pounds 7. Flux: 70 gal/ft 2 /min 8. Permitivity: 1.2 sec Color: Black 2.13 ROOT BARRIER A. Polyethylene (0.08 inch thick) or polypropylene ( mm thick), with self-locking joiners, ½ raised 90 degree molded root deflecting ribs, ground lock tabs, double top edge, UV inhibitors. Use 24" barrier unless otherwise stated. B. Bamboo root barrier: 0.76mm thick, minimum, polyethylene. Use 36 wide barrier unless otherwise stated TREE TRUNK PROTECTOR A. 9 height with 4 diameter, expandable, ventilated, 1.52 mm thick UV inhibited polyethylene, gray-brown color. Arbor Guard by Deep Root Corp (800) TP-128 by NDS (800) , or equal DRAIN PIPE: A. Sub-Surface perforated or non-perforated as indicated on Plans, size and type noted, manufactured by Lasco, National Diversified Sales (NDS) or Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. Perforated pipe shall be completely wrapped with a water

166 permeable nylon screen that is lapped and welded around the pipe, and surrounded by minimum 4" thickness of gravel, unless otherwise noted on Plans. B. Planter Area Drainpipe and Fixtures: National Diversified Sales (NDS) SDR 35 fittings and SDR 35 drain pipes with specified grates, color black, and size and type per plan. NDS, Newbury Park, California, telephone: (800) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Site acceptance: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work with the General Contractor and other Sub- Contractors so no damage occurs to plantings after installation. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying grades and site conditions before beginning work. No change in Contract price will be owed for actual or claimed discrepancy between existing grade and those shown on the plan after Contractor has accepted existing grades and moved on the site. B. Scheduling: Perform planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable, as approved by Architect. C. The irrigation system shall be operational and approved prior to planting. D. Utilities: Prior to excavation for planting or installation of stakes or guys, Contractor shall locate utility lines and cables, so that proper precautions will be taken not to damage them. In the event of a conflict between utility lines and plant locations, promptly notify the Architect, who shall arrange for the relocation of one or the other. Failure to follow this procedure shall make the Contractor responsible for repairing damages at his own expense. 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION: A. Planting Areas: 1. Uniformly spread amendments and thoroughly cultivate by means of mechanical tiller per Soils Report. 2. Use nutrients recommended in the Soil Report. 3. Add the appropriate Mycorrhizal inoculum and incorporate at manufacturer s recommended rate. 4. Perform soil preparation after irrigation is installed and tested, and prior to planting. B. Final Grades and Planting Area Layout: 1. At time of planting, the top two (2) inches of areas to be planted or seeded shall be free of stones, sticks, stumps, or other deleterious matter one inch in diameter or larger. It shall also be free from wire, plaster, construction debris, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to planting or maintenance. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for shaping planting areas as indicated on Plans or as directed by Architect. 3. Minor modifications to grade may be required to establish the final grade. Remove soil generated by excavations to an approved off-site location unless said soil can be utilized to obtain desired grade. 4. Finish grading shall insure proper drainage of the site as determined by the Architect. 5. Areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 1-1/2" below adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, headers, cleanouts, drains, manholes, etc. or as indicated on Plans. 6. Surface drainage shall be away from building foundations. 7. Eliminate erosion scars prior to commencing maintenance period. Depressions due to settling shall be eliminated before and after planting. 8. Slopes of two to one (2:1) or steeper shall be protected with erosion control fabric. Contractor shall request clarification from Architect for fabric and methods. C. Compacted Soil / Percolation Testing: Soil may be heavily compacted which can hinder root development, drainage and aeration. 1. Severely compacted areas shall be ripped or tilled to a depth of at least 9 prior to planting. 2. Percolation tests of water through the soil shall be performed where trees 24 box size and larger are proposed. If trees are to be planted over a large area, several percolation tests will be required. a. Excavate two planting pits 24 deep by 2 times rootball diameter. Install sand filled drainage sump as specified in 3.3.D.4, below, in one of the pits

167 b. Fill the pits with water and allow to drain completely. c. Fill the pits with water a second time. d. Results: 1) If the pit with no sump drains completely within 24 hours, no drain sump is necessary for trees planted within the vicinity of the test pit. 2) If the pit with no sump does not drain completely within 24 hours, but the pit with the sump does, sumps are required for trees planted in the vicinity of the test pit. 3) If the pit with the sump does not drain completely within 24 hours, advise the Owner prior to planting. D. Pre-Plant weed Control: 1. Grow & Kill : If weeds exist on site at the beginning of work, spray with a non-selective systemic contact herbicide, recommended by an approved licensed landscape Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Operator. Leave sprayed plants intact to allow systemic kill as directed by Advisor. After recommended kill period, water thoroughly to encourage new weed growth, and re-apply systemic herbicide. 2. Treat planting areas, except for those to be seeded, with pre-emergent herbicide, recommended by an approved licensed landscape Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Operator 3. Maintain site weed free until final acceptance by Owner by utilizing mechanical, manual, or chemical treatment. 3.3 PLANTING A. Planting Layout: Plant layout is to be approved by Architect before planting begins. Layout of trees and major plantings shall be approved first. One tree with each type of specified staking shall be approved prior to planting of trees. Bring conflicts regarding the exact locations of plant pits to the attention of Owner s representative and Architect. If underground utility lines or other unknowns are encountered in excavation for planting, alternate locations for planting may be selected by the Architect. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify with the Owner's superintendent and governing agencies the location and depth of underground utilities. B. Planting of Trees and Shrubs (at grade): 1. Do not plant rootbound, dried out, undersized, or damaged plants. 2. Install trees, shrubs, and groundcovers before planting seed or sod. 3. Excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces and shall be twice the diameter and the depth of the root b. 4. Drainage: Drainage sumps are to be provided in each tree pit. Drain sumps (12-inch diameter by 6 feet deep) may be augured. Sump is to be filled with coarse sand. Planting may proceed after sump installation. 5. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out, before positioning trees and shrubs. 6. Install root control barriers where indicated on Plans and where site conditions (trees within three feet of pavement) dictate. Install per manufacturer's instructions. 7. Center plant in pit or trench. Remove boxes and cans without damage to rootball. Add the appropriate Mycorrhizal inoculum next to rootball at manufacturer s recommended rate. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been dampened firmly around b or roots. An earthen basin shall be constructed around each plant. Each basin shall be of a depth sufficient to hold at least two inches (2 ) of water. Remove basin in turf areas after initial watering. Plants that settle deeper than the surrounding grade shall be raised to surrounding grade level. C. Planting Tablets: Place the following numbers of 7-gram planting tablets within the backfill of each plant: Container size / Number of tablets 1 gallon gallon gallon " box " box " box D. Staking and Guying: Staking and Guying of trees shall be completed immediately upon planting. Stakes shall be installed plumb and as indicated in details. Guy locations and methods shall be reviewed prior to planting of boxed

168 trees. Bring conflicts of locating guys or stakes to the attention of Architect. Remove nursery stakes when site stakes have been installed. E. Ground covers: Ground covers or seedlings shall be planted in straight rows and evenly spaced, unless otherwise noted, and at intervals called out in the drawing. Triangular spacing shall be used unless otherwise noted on the drawing. Fill in bare areas with plants at the required spacing. Damage to plants by trampling or other work in this contract shall be repaired immediately. F. Sod Planting: 1. Preparing Soil: Remove rocks or sticks from area to be sodded. Prepare soil as noted elsewhere in specifications and break up clods. 2. Grading and Rolling: Carefully smooth surfaces to be sodded. Roll area in two directions to expose soil depressions or surface irregularities, then re-grade and re-roll soil as required producing a firm smooth surface. Be sure soil is level, smooth, and moist (not wet) before laying sod. Avoid laying sod on hot or extremely dry soil. 3. Laying Sod: Lay first strip of sod slabs along a straight line (use a string in irregular areas). Butt joints tightly. Do not overlap edges. On second strip, stagger joints (as with laying brick). Use a sharp knife to cut sod in order to fit curves, edges, and sprinkler heads. 4. Watering During Planting: Do not lay whole lawn before watering. When a large area has been sodded, water lightly to prevent drying. Continue to lay sod and water until installation is complete. 5. Rolling Sod: After laying sod, roll lightly to eliminate irregularities and to form good contact between sod and soil. Avoid heavy roller or excessive initial watering which may cause roller marks. 6. Irrigation: Water the completed lawn surface thoroughly. Soil should be moistened at least eight inches deep. Repeat sprinkling at regular intervals to keep sod moist until rooted. After sod is established, decrease frequency and increase amount of water per application as necessary. 7. Replacement: Replace dead or dying sod with equivalent material as directed by Architect. G. Mulch covers: 1. Complete planting and finish grades before placing mulch. 2. Place mulch material in a continuous layer 3" deep adjacent to plant crown in shrub and groundcover areas, and in areas between shrubs. 3. Place mulch in a 2 deep layer in areas with flatted groundcover and annual color. 4. Install special mulches (glass, rock) over weed control fabric. a. Overlap fabric a minimum of 8. H. Install Arbor-gard tree trunk protector on trees planted in turf areas. Install per manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CLEANUP A. After planting operations have been completed, remove trash, excess soil, empty plant containers, and rubbish from the property, and dispose of legally. B. Cleanup shall be performed at the end of each working day, with a maximum cleanup effort (in a manner satisfactory to the Owner) for each weekend or Holiday. C. The Contractor shall sweep the site and shall wash down pavement within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition. D. Walks shall be left in a clean and safe condition. E. Scars, ruts, or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a smooth condition throughout the site. END OF SECTION

169 SECTION SILVA CELLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing and installing Silva Cell system, including: geotextile, geogrids, aggregates, sub base material, backfill, drainage system, root barrier, compost, and the installation of planting soil. B. Related Sections 1. Section Planting Soil for Silva Cells 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Aggregate Sub Base (below Cell frame): Aggregate material between the bottom of the Silva Cell frame and the compacted subgrade below, designed to distribute loads from the frame to the subgrade. B. Aggregate Base Course (above Cell deck): Aggregate material between the paving and the top of the Silva Cell deck below designed to distribute loads across the top of the deck. C. Aggregate Setting Bed For Pavers (above Cell deck): Aggregate material between the aggregate base course and unit surface pavers, designed to act as a setting bed for the pavers. D. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation beside the Silva Cell frames to the excavation extents. E. Bridging Slab: Bridging slabs are to be used in locations where spacing larger than 3 inches (75 mm) is necessary between Silva Cell frames. F. Compost: Organic material subjected to composting processes G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil or paving. H. Geogrid: Net-shaped synthetic polymer-coated fibers that provide a stabilizing force within soil structure as the fill interlocks with the grid. I. Geotextile: A geosynthetic fabric, applied to either the soil surface or between materials, providing filtration, separation, or stabilization properties. J. Inspection Riser for Drainage: Vertical, perforated pipe installed at tree openings to allow access for visual inspection of water levels at base of Silva Cell system. Designers to determine frequency of risers, one riser for every three trees is recommended. **May be modified to act as a cleanout for drain lines. This variation would not be perforated. K. Inspection Riser for Soil: Vertical pipe installed within pavement section to allow access for visual inspection of soils within Silva Cell system. Designers to determine frequency of risers based on soil inspection goals. One riser for every two trees is recommended

170 L. Irrigation: Trees planted in the Silva Cell system must receive adequate water to ensure survival of the living system during periods of drier weather. Harvest of natural rainwater or supplemental water must be a part of the system, either through pressurized or non-pressurized systems, within the soil of the Silva Cell system. M. Planting Soil: Soil as defined in Division 2 Section , Planting Soil for Silva Cells, intended to fill the frames and other planting spaces. N. Root Barrier: Plastic root diversion device. O. Root package: The earthen package containing the root system of the tree as shipped from the nursery. P. Silva Cells: Plastic structural cellular system with posts, beams and decks designed to be filled with planting soil for tree rooting and support of vehicle loaded pavements. The soil within the cells may also be used as part of rainwater filtering, retention and detention systems. Q. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill. R. Strongback: Modified Silva Cell frame designed to be attached to top of Silva Cells for stability while installing planting soil and backfill. S. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. T. Tree: A perennial woody plant with one or several trunks and a distinct crown and intended to become large enough to shade people and or vehicles. U. Zip Tie: A tensioning device or tool used tie similar or different materials together with a specific degree of tension. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Upon forty-five (45) days prior to start of installation of items in this section, the Contractor shall provide submittals required in this section to the landscape architect for review and approval. B. Product Data: For each type of product, submit manufacturer's product literature with technical data sufficient to demonstrate that the product meets these specifications. 1. For bulk materials, including soils and aggregates, Include analysis of the materials by a recognized laboratory made that demonstrates that the material meets the specification requirements. 2. Silva Cell manufacturer's letter of review and approval of the project, plans, details and specifications for compliance with product installation requirements. C. Silva Cell System Mock Up: 1. Prior to the installation of Silva Cells, construct a mock up of the complete installation at the site. The installation of the mock up shall be in the presence of the landscape architect. 2. The mock up shall be a minimum of 100 square feet in area and include the complete Silva Cell system installation with sub base compaction, drainage installation, base course aggregate and geotextile as required, geogrids, backfill, planting soil with compaction, decks, top geotextile and all necessary accessories. 3. The mock up area may remain as part of the installed work at the end of the project provided that it remains in good condition and meets all the conditions of the specifications. D. Compaction testing results: Submit results of all compaction testing required by the specifications including the bulk density test of the mock up and installed soil to the landscape architect for approval. E. Qualification Data: Submit documentation of the qualifications of the Silva Cell installer sufficient to demonstrate that the installer meets the requirements of paragraph "Quality Assurance"

171 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. General: Prior to the start of Work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades. B. Schedule all utility installations prior to beginning work in this section. C. Where possible, schedule the installation of Silva Cells after the area is no longer required for use by other trades and work. Protect installed Silva Cells from damage in the event that work must occur over or adjacent to the completed Silva Cells. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Silva Cells and related products shall be installed by a qualified installer whose work has resulted in successful installation of planting soils and planter drainage systems, underground piping, chambers and vault structures. 1. Submit list of completed projects of similar scope and scale to the Owner, demonstrating capabilities and experience. 2. The installer and the field supervisor shall have a minimum of five years successful experience with construction of similar scope in dense urban areas. 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Installer is required to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. This person shall be identified during the Pre-installation Conference, with appropriate contact information provided, as necessary. The same supervisor shall be utilized throughout the Project, unless a substitution is submitted to and approved in writing by the Owner. 1.7 LAYOUT AND ELEVATION CONTROL A. Provide layout and elevation control during installation of Silva Cells. Utilize grade stakes, benchmarks, surveying equipment and other means and methods to assure that layout and elevations conform to the layout and elevations indicated on the plans. 1.8 PERMITS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary permits/approvals from all such authorities. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, if applicable. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while on the project site. B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not deliver or place backfill, soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 2. Provide protection including tarps, plastic and or matting between all bulk materials and any finished surfaces sufficient to protect the finish material. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, and walkways. Provide additional sediment control to retain excavated material, backfill, soil amendments and planting mix within the project limits as needed. D. Silva Cells: Protect Silva Cells from damage during delivery, storage and handling

172 1. Store under tarp to protect from sunlight when time from delivery to installation exceeds one week. Storage should occur on smooth surfaces, free from dirt, mud and debris 2. Handling is to be performed with equipment appropriate to the size (height) of Cells and site conditions, and may include, hand, handcart, forklifts, extension lifts, or small cranes, with care given to minimize damage to Silva Cell frames, decks and adjacent Silva Cells PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verification of Existing Conditions and Protection of New or Existing Improvements: Before proceeding with work in this section, the Installer shall carefully check and verify all dimensions, quantities, and grade elevations, and inform the landscape architect immediately of any discrepancies. 1. Carefully examine the civil, record, and survey drawings to become familiar with the existing underground conditions before digging. Verify the location of all aboveground and underground utility lines, infrastructure, other improvements, and existing trees, shrubs, and plants to remain including their root system, and take proper precautions as necessary to avoid damage to such improvements and plants. 2. In the event of conflict between existing and new improvements notify the landscape architect in writing and obtain written confirmation of any changes to the work prior to proceeding. 3. When new or previously existing utility lines are encountered during the course of excavation, notify the landscape architect in writing and make recommendations as to remedial action. Proceed with work in that area only upon approval of appropriate remedial action. Coordinate all work with the appropriate utility contractors, utility company or responsible public works agency. B. Weather Limitations: Do not proceed with work when subgrades, soils and planting soils are in a wet, muddy or frozen condition. C. Protect partially completed Silva Cell installation against damage from other construction traffic with highly visible construction tape, fencing, or other means until construction is complete. Prevent all non-installation related construction traffic over the completed Silva Cell installation; allowing only loads less than the design loads PROTECTION A. Protect open excavations and partially completed Silva Cell installation from access and damage when work is in progress, and following completion with highly visible construction tape, fencing, or other means until all construction is complete WARRANTY A. Silva Cell manufacturer's product warranty shall apply. Submit manufacturer's product warranty PROJECT WORK A. Coordinate installation with all other work that may impact the completion of the work PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Prior to the start of the installation of Silva Cells, meet at the site with the landscape architect, general contractor and the Silva Cells installer to review installation layout, procedures, means and methods

173 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILVA CELLS A. Fiberglass-reinforced polypropylene structures including frames and decks designed to support sidewalk loads and designed to be filled with soil for the purpose of growing tree roots, and rainwater filtering, detention and retention. B. Silva Cell Frames: 400 mm x 600 mm x 1200 mm (16 inches x 24 inches x 48 inches). C. Silva Cell Deck: 5 cm x 600 mm x 1200 mm (2 inches x 24 inches x 48 inches). Deck to include manufactured installed galvanized steel tubes. D. Silva Cell Strongback: 400 mm x 600 mm x 150 mm (24 inches x 48 inches x 6 inches) modified Silva Cell Frame units designed to stiffen and align the frames as planting soil and backfill material is placed. Strongbacks are to be removed prior to placing decks. They are to be reused as the work progresses. E. Silva Cell Deck Screws: Manufacturer's supplied stainless steel screws to attach decks to frames. F. Manufacturer: DeepRoot Partners, L.P. (Deep Root); 530 Washington Street, San Francisco, CA 94111; ; ; fax ; ANCHORING SPIKES A. 10" (250 mm) long X 19/64" (8 mm) diameter, spiral, galvanized timber spikes. Utilize 4 spikes in each frame on the first layer of Silva Cells to anchor the frames to the aggregate sub base. 2.3 SOLID AND PERFORATED DRAIN LINES A. Any solid or perforated drain lines to be specified by project engineer. 2.4 INSPECTION RISER FOR DRAINAGE (where applicable): A. Rigid, PVC schedule 40 pipe, 4 diameter. B. Cap: Cast Iron solid threaded cleanout designed to fit standard PVC schedule 40 pipe-fittings. 1. Products meeting this specification: Zurn Z 1440, Cast Iron Adjustable Cleanout, Zurn, 1801 Pittsburgh Avenue, Erie, PA 16502, ZURN-NOW INSPECTION RISER FOR SOIL (where applicable): A. Rigid, PVC schedule 40 pipe, 6 diameter. B. Cap: Cast Iron solid threaded cleanout designed to fit standard PVC schedule 40 pipe-fittings. 1. Products meeting this specification: Zurn Z 1440, Cast Iron Adjustable Cleanout, Zurn, 1801 Pittsburgh Avenue, Erie, PA 16502, ZURN-NOW GEOGRID A. Geogrid shall be woven polyester fabric with PVC coating, Uni-axial or biaxial geogrid, inert to biological degradation, resistant to naturally occurring chemicals, alkalis, acids. 1. Tensile strength at ultimate: 1850 lbs/ft (27.0 kn/m) minimum by ASTM D6637 test method 2. Creep reduced strength : 1000 lbs/ft (14.6 kn/m) minimum by ASTM D5262 test method

174 3. Long term allowable design load: 950 lbs/ft (13.9 kn/m) minimum by GRI GG-4 test method 4. Grid aperture size (MD): 0.8 inch (20 mm) minimum 5. Grid aperture size (CD): 1.28 inch (32 mm) maximum 6. Roll size: 6 (1.8m) width is preferred, up to 18 (5.4m) B. Products meeting this specification: 1. Stratagrid SG 150, by Strata, Cumming, GA, 2. Miragrid 2XT as manufactured by Ten Cate Nicolon, Norcross, GA, (Distributed by Geosynthetic Systems in Ontario) 3. Fortrac 35 Geogrid as manufactured by Huesker, Charlotte, NC, 4. SF 20 Biaxial Geogrid, as manufactured by Synteen, Lancaster, SC, GEOTEXTILE A. Geotextile shall be nonwoven polypropylene fibers, inert to biological degradation and resistant of naturally occurring chemicals, alkalis and acids. 1. Grab tensile strength: 200 lbs (900 N) minimum (ASTM D 4632 test method) 2. Elongation: 50% minimum (ASTM D 4632 test method) 3. Trapezoid tear strength: 80 lbs (350 N) minimum (ASTM D 4533 test method) 4. Mullen burst strength: 350 psi (2400 kpa) minimum (ASTM D 3786 test method) 5. Puncture strength: 110 lbs (490 N) minimum (ASTM D 4833 test method) 6. CBR puncture strength: 500 lbs (2225 N) minimum (ASTM D 6241 test method) 7. Apparent opening size: 80 sieve (0.18mm) maximum (ASTM D 4751 test method) 8. Flow rate: 90 gal/min/ft2 (3870 l/min/m2) minimum (ASTM D 4491 test method) 9. UV Resistance (at 500 hours): 70% strength retained B. Products meeting this specification: 1. ADS Geosynthetics 0801T as manufactured by ADS Geosynthetics, 2. Mirafi 180 N as manufactured by Ten Cate Nicolon, Norcross, GA, a. In Canada, distributed by Geosynthetic Systems and Armtec (as Armtec 250) 3. Geotex 801 as manufactured by Propex Geosynthetics, Chattanooga, TN, a. In Canada, distributed by Nilex (as Nilex 4553) 2.8 AGGREGATE SUB BASE (BELOW CELL FRAME) A. Aggregate meeting one of the following specifications: 1. ASTM D , Type 1, Gradation B Standard Specification for Materials for Soil-Aggregate Sub base, Base, and Surface Courses. a. Type I mixtures shall consist of stone, gravel, or slag with natural or crushed sand and fine mineral particles passing a No. 200 sieve. Sieve Percent Passing 1.5" (37.5 mm) (25 mm) /8 (9.5 mm) No 4 (4.75 mm) No 10 (2.0 mm) No 40 (425 m) No 200 (75 m) Local Department of Transportation virgin aggregate that most closely meets the gradation of ASTM D Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS) 1010 Granular A. Dense graded aggregates intended for use as granular base within the pavement structure, granular shouldering, and backfill

175 Sieve Percent Passing 26.5 mm mm mm mm mm mm m m AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABOVE CELL DECK) A. SEE AGGREGATE SUB BASE 2.10 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR POROUS PAVEMENT (ABOVE CELL DECK) A. Aggregate meeting one of the following specifications: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 448, No. 57 Sieve Percent Passing 1.5 (37.5 mm) (25mm) /2 (12.5 mm) No 4 (4.75 mm) 0-10 No 8 (2.36 mm) SETTING BED FOR UNIT PAVERS (ABOVE CELL DECK) A. Aggregate meeting one of the following specifications: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 448, No. 8 Sieve Percent Passing 1/2 (12.5 mm) 100 3/8 (9.5mm) No 4 (4.75 mm) No 8 (2.36 mm) 0-10 No 16 (1.18 mm) BACKFILL MATERIAL (ADJACENT TO SILVA CELLS): A. Clean, compactable, coarse grained fill soil meeting the requirements of the Unified Soil Classification system for soil type GW, GP, GC with less than 30% fines, SW, and SC with less than 30% fines. Backfill material shall be free of organic material, trash and other debris, and shall be free of toxic material injurious to plant growth. B. Submit supplier certificate for material meeting this specification

176 2.13 PLANTING SOIL: (See Specification Section Planting Soil for Silva Cells) 2.14 ROOT BARRIER A. Root Barrier shall be DeepRoot; Tree Root Barriers; UB 18-2, manufactured by DeepRoot Partners, L.P. (Deep Root); 530 Washington Street, San Francisco, CA 94111; ; ; fax ; B. Material: Black, injection molded panels, 0.080"(2.03mm) wall thickness in modules 24 (61cm) long by 18 (46cm) deep; manufactured with a minimum 50% post-consumer recycled polypropylene plastic with UV inhibitors; recyclable. Integrated zipper joining system providing for instant assembly by sliding one panel into another. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT APPROVAL A. Prior to the start of work, layout and stake the limits of excavation and horizontal and vertical control points sufficient to install the Silva Cells and required drainage features in the correct locations. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to the depths and shapes indicated on the drawings. Base of excavation shall be smooth soil, level and free of lumps or debris. B. Do not over-excavate existing soil beside or under the limits of excavation required for the installation. If soil is overexcavated, install compactable fill material in lifts not more than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and compact to the required density. C. Confirm that the depth of the excavation is accurate to accommodate the depths and thickness of materials required throughout the extent of the excavation. D. Confirm that the width and length of the excavation is a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm), in all directions, beyond the edges of the Silva Cells. 3.3 SUBGRADE COMPACTION A. Check compaction of the subgrade below the Silva Cells and confirm that the subgrade soil is compacted to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor Method. B. Proof compact the subgrade with a minimum of three passes of a suitable vibrating compacting machine or apply other compaction forces as needed to achieve the required subgrade compaction rate. C. Apply additional compaction forces at optimum water levels. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE OVER SUBGRADE A. Where indicated on drawings, install geotextile over compacted subgrade. B. Removal of the geotextile as a standard component of the Silva Cell system must be determined by professional civil or geotechnical engineer. C. Install the geotextile with a minimum joint overlap of 18 inches (450 mm) between sections of material. Ensure geotextile is laid flat with no folds or creases

177 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSPECTION RISERS FOR DRAINAGE A. Cut PVC pipe to fit vertically from Silva Cell deck to finish surface. B. Manually perforate riser. Pipe should be rigid at level of pavement section, and perforated through level of Silva Cell system. C. Wrap pipe in geotextile and secure with zip ties. Brace riser for the remainder of installation to secure its location and elevation. D. Install caps on top of each riser flush with grade. 3.6 INSTALLATION Of AGGREGATE SUB BASE BELOW SILVA CELL FRAME A. Install aggregate sub base to the depths indicated on the drawings, under the first layer of Silva Cell frames. Sub base aggregate shall extend a minimum of 6 inches (150mm) beyond the edge of the Cell frames. B. Compact aggregate sub base layer to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor Method. Compact the subgrade with a minimum of three passes of a suitable vibrating compacting machine or apply other compaction forces as needed to achieve the required subgrade compaction rate. C. The maximum slope on the surface of the sub base shall be 5%. Where proposed grades on finished paving are greater than 5%, the Cells shall be stepped to maintain proper relationships to the finished grade. D. The grade and elevations of the base under the Silva Cells shall be approved by the landscape architect prior to proceeding with the installation of the Silva Cells. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF SILVA CELLS, PLANTING SOIL, GEOGRID, AND BACKFILL A. Identify the outline layout of the structure and the edges of paving around tree planting areas on the floor of the excavation, using spray paint or chalk line. B. Lay out the first layer of Silva Cell frames on the sub base. Verify that the layout is consistent with the required locations and dimensions of paving edges to be constructed over the Silva Cells. C. Check each Silva Cell frame unit for damage prior to placing in the excavation. Any cracked or chipped unit shall be rejected. D. Place frames no less than 1 inch (25 mm) and no more than 3 inches (75 mm) apart at base. In the event that spacing between Cells exceeds 3 inches (75 mm), bridging slab details and methods shall be used to span these gaps. E. Install Silva Cell frames around, over, or under existing or proposed utility lines as indicated on plans. F. Where any two adjacent Silva Cell frames must be installed at different elevations, the upper frame shall be supported by aggregate sub base with a maximum slope of 1:1. This may require installation of aggregate sub base within the adjacent lower Cell frame. No two frames shall differ in elevation by more than 15 inches (375 mm). G. Assure that each frame sits solidly on the surface of the sub base. Frames shall not rock or bend over any stone or other obstruction protruding above the surface of the sub base material. Frames shall not bend into dips in the sub base material. The maximum tolerance for deviations in the plane of the sub base material under the bottom of the horizontal beams of each Silva Cell frame shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 4 feet (1200 mm). H. Adjust sub base material including larger pieces of aggregate under each frame to provide a solid base of support. 1. Anchor each Silva Cell into sub base with four-10 inch (250 mm) spikes, driven through the molded holes in the Cell frame base. The purpose of the anchoring system is to maintain cell spacing and layout during the installation of planting soil and backfill

178 2. For applications where cells are installed over waterproofed structures, develop a spacing system consistent with requirements of the waterproofing system. Do not use anchoring nails that will come within 6" or less of any waterproofing material. I. Install the second layer of Silva Cell frames on top of the first layer. Comply with manufacturer s requirements to correctly register and connect the Cell frames together. J. Register each frame on top of the lower frame post. Rotate each frame registration arrow in the opposite direction from the frame below to assure that connector tabs firmly connect. Each frame shall be solidly seated on the one below. K. Build layers as stacks of frames set one directly over the other. Do not set any frame half on one Cell frame below and half on an adjacent frame. L. Install Strongbacks on top of the Silva Cell frames prior to installing planting soil and backfill. 1. Strongbacks are required only during the installation and compaction of the planting soil and backfill. 2. Strongbacks should be moved as the work progresses across the installation. 3. Strongbacks shall be removed prior to the installation of Silva Cell decks. M. Install planting soil, geogrid and backfill as indicated on the drawings. The process of installation requires that these three materials be installed and compacted together in several alternating operations to achieve correct compaction relationships within the system. N. Where required, place the geogrid curtain along the outside of the limit of the Silva Cell frames. 1. Geogrid curtains are required between the edge of the Silva Cells and any soils to be compacted to support paving beyond the area of Silva Cells. Do not place geogrid curtains between the edge of the Cells and any planting area adjacent to the Cells. 2. Pre-cut the geogrid to allow for 6 inches (150 mm) minimum under lapping below backfill, and 12 inches (300 mm) minimum overlapping top of Silva Cell stack. 3. Where Silva Cell layout causes a change direction in the plane of the geogrid, slice the top and bottom flaps of the material so that it lies flat on the top of the cell deck and aggregate base course along both planes. 4. Provide a minimum of 300 mm (12 inch) overlaps between different sheets of geogrid. 5. Place the geogrid in the space between the Silva Cell frames and the sides of the excavation. Attach the geogrid to the Silva Cell frames using 3/16 inch x 14-inch (5x350 mm) zip ties. Attach with zip ties at every cell and at Cell Deck. O. Install no more than two layers of Silva Cell frames before beginning to install planting soil and backfill. Compact the planting soil within the Silva Cell frames and the backfill material outside the frames in alternating lifts until the desired elevations and density is achieved in both planting soil and backfill. P. Install and compact backfill material in the space between the Silva Cells and the sides of the excavation in lifts that do not exceed 8 inches (200 mm). 1. Compact backfill to 95% of maximum dry density using a powered mechanical compactor. Use a pneumatic compacting tool or narrow foot jumping jack compactor for spaces less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide and a 12-inch wide jumping jack compactor or larger equipment in wider spaces. 2. Maintain the geogrid curtain between the Silva Cells frames and the backfill material. 3. Install backfill in alternating lifts with the planting soil inside the Silva Cells. Q. Fill the first layer or layers of frames with planting soil, specified in Section Planting Soil for Silva Cells. 1. Bring planting soil to the site using equipment and methods that do not overly mix and further damage soil peds within the soil mix. Soil mixes shall not be blown or pumped into the Cells using soil blowing equipment

179 2. Install in lifts that do not exceed 16 inches (400 mm). Lightly compact the soil inside the frames at each lift to remove air pockets and settle the soil within the frames. 3. Do not compact greater than 80% of maximum dry density. Check the soil compaction with a penetrometer or densiometer to achieve similar compaction levels provided in the mock up. 4. If the planting soil becomes overly compacted, remove the soil and reinstall. Use hand tools or other equipment that does not damage the Silva Cell frames. 5. Do not walk directly on horizontal beams of the frames. 6. Work soil under the horizontal frame beams of the second level of Cell frames and between columns eliminating air pockets and voids. Fill each frame such that there is a minimum of 10 inches (250 mm) of soil over the top of horizontal frame beams before beginning compaction. 7. The top 1-2 inches (25-50 mm) of each frame post should remain exposed above the soil to allow the placement of the next frame or deck. R. After the first two layers of Silva Cell frames have been installed, filled with planting soil and backfilled, proceed to install the third layer, if required, of Silva Cells frames. Comply with manufacturer s requirements to correctly register and connect the Cell frames together. S. Remove the strongbacks. Sweep any soil from tops before adding the next layer of frames. T. Register each frame on top of the lower frame post. Rotate each frame registration arrow in the opposite direction from the frame below to assure that connector tabs firmly connect. Each frame shall be solidly seated on the one below. U. Build layers as stacks of frames set one directly over the other. Do not set any frame half on one Cell frame below and half on an adjacent frame. V. Install Strongbacks on top of third layer of Silva Cells. W. Continue to install and compact the planting soil within the Silva Cell frames and the backfill material outside the frames in alternating lifts until the desired elevations and density is achieved in both soils. X. The planting soil shall be brought to level not more than 1-inch (25mm) below the bottom of the Silva Cell deck when installed. Y. For porous pavement applications, a 3 inch (75mm) layer of compost is recommended below the Silva Cell decks. When using compost, the final layer of planting soil as required to bring the planting soil level to not more than 3 inches (75 mm) below the bottom of the Silva Cell Deck when installed. Z. Obtain final approval by the landscape architect of soil installation prior to installation of the Silva Cell deck. AA. BB. Remove Strongbacks after planting soil and backfill has been compacted to the top of the entire set of Silva Cells. Leave 1-inch (25 mm) air space, or install 3 inches (75 mm) of compost, below Silva Cell Deck as indicated on the drawings. 3.8 IRRIGATION AND WATER HARVESTING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install irrigation and water harvesting system per project specifications. 3.9 SILVA CELL DECK INSTALLATION A. Install the Silva Cell Decks over the top of each frame stack. Clean dirt from the tops of the Silva Cell frame columns. Register the deck and make connections as recommended by the manufacturer to secure the deck to the top of the Silva

180 Cell Frame. Secure each deck at the four corners with screw fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer. Assure that each deck is seated firmly on the frame top with all connectors attached. B. Install and compact remaining backfill material such that the soil outside the limits of the Silva Cells is flush with the top of the installed deck INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE, GEOGRID, INSPECTION RISER FOR SOIL, AND AGGREGATE OVER THE DECK A. Overlap geogrid from the sides of the Silva Cells over the top of the Silva Cell Decks, with minimum of 12 inches (300mm) overlap. B. Place geotextile over the top of the deck and where indicated on the drawings, extending beyond the outside edge of the excavation by at least 18 inches (450 mm). Any joints must be overlapped by a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm). C. Install inspection risers for soil above geotextile as indicated on drawings. 1. Cut PVC pipe to fit vertically from Silva Cell deck to finish surface. 2. Align riser with slots in Silva Cell deck. 3. Wrap pipe in geotextile and secure with zip ties. Cut geotextile to overlap deck minimum Cut geotextile inside the pipe to allow access. Do not cut or otherwise damage Silva Cell deck. 5. Install caps on top of each riser flush with final paving surface. D. Install the aggregate base course (including aggregate setting bed if installing unit pavers) over the geotextile immediately after completing the installation of the fabrics and inspection risers. Work the aggregate from one side of the deck to the other to assure that the fabric and aggregate conforms to the cell deck contours. Do not apply aggregate in several positions at the same time. 1. Aggregate base course shall be a minimum of 4 inches (100mm) thick under pored in place concrete paving. 2. Aggregate base course shall be a minimum of 12 inches (300mm) thick under unit pavers, asphalt paving, or porous paving. E. Load the aggregate from equipment that is outside the limits of the excavated area. Work over material already in place. F. For large or confined areas, where aggregate cannot easily be placed from the edges of the excavated area, obtain approval for the installation procedure and types of equipment to be used in the installation from the Silva Cell manufacturer. G. Compact aggregate base course(s) in lifts not to exceed 6" in depth, to 95% of maximum dry density. Utilize a roller or plate compactor with a maximum weight of 1000 pounds. Make sufficient passes with the compacting equipment to attain the required compaction INSTALLATION OF PAVING ABOVE THE SILVA CELL SYSTEM A. Place paving material over Silva Cell system per project specifications. Take care when placing paving or other backfill on top of Silva Cell system not to damage the system components. B. Turn down edge of all concrete paving to Cell deck along the edges of all planting areas to retain the aggregate base course. C. When paving is a unit paver or other flexible material, provide a concrete curb under the paving at the edge of the Silva Cell deck to retain the aggregate base course material INSTALLATION OF BRIDGING SLABS (WHERE APPLICABLE) A. Bridging slabs are to be used in locations where spacing larger than 3 inches (75 mm) is necessary between Silva Cell frames

181 B. Replace aggregate base course material with a minimum 4 inch (100 mm) concrete slab beneath paving. The paving shall extend beyond the gap between Cells at a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm). C. If spacing (gap) between Cells is larger than 12 inches (300 mm), the concrete slab must be increased to 6 inch (150 mm) thickness. If spacing (gap) between Cells is larger than 18 inches (450 mm), steel reinforcing shall be added to the slab. Reinforcing is to be designed by the project structural engineer. In no case shall the space between Cells be greater than 30 inches (750 mm) INSTALLATION OF ROOT BARRIERS A. Install root barrier in accord with manufacturer's reviewed installation instructions INSTALLATION OF PLANTING SOIL WITHIN THE TREE PLANTING AREA A. Prior to planting trees, install additional planting soil, to the depths indicated, within the tree opening adjacent to paving supported by Silva Cells. B. Remove all rubble, debris, dust and silt from the top of the planting soil that may have accumulated after the initial installation of the planting soil within the Silva Cells. C. Assure that the planting soil under the tree root ball is compacted for the entire soil depth to 85-90% to prevent settlement of the root ball. D. The planting soil within the tree opening shall be the same soil as in the adjacent Silva Cells. E. Cover the planting soil finished grade with mulch as defined in Project specifications REPAIR OF CUT GEOTEXTILE A. In the event that any geotextile over subgrades or the Silva Cell decks must be cut during or after installation, repair the seam with a second piece of geotextile that overlaps the edges of the cut by a minimum of 12-inches in all directions prior to adding aggregate material PROTECTION A. Ensure that all construction traffic is kept away from the limits of the Silva Cells until the final surface materials are in place. No vehicles shall drive directly on the Silva Cell deck or aggregate base course. B. Provide fencing and other barriers to keep vehicles from entering into the area with Silva Cell supported pavement. C. Maintain a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of aggregate base course over the geotextile material during construction. D. When vehicle must cross Silva Cells that does not have final paving surfaces installed, use construction mats designed to distribute vehicle loads to levels that would be expected at the deck surface once final paving has been installed. Use only low impact track vehicles with a maximum surface pressure under the vehicle of 4 pounds per square inch, on top of the mats over Silva Cells prior to the installation of final paving CLEAN UP A. Perform cleanup during the installation of work and upon completion of the work. Maintain the site free of soil and sediment, free of trash and debris. Remove from site all excess soil materials, debris, and equipment. Repair any damage to adjacent materials and surfaces resulting from installation of this work. END OF SECTION

182 SECTION PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing and installation of Planting Soil within the Silva Cell system. B. Related Sections: 1. Section Silva Cells 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clay, silt, sand, and gravel soil particles: Per USDA size designations. It is critical NOT to use testing laboratories that report results in engineering size designations such as the Unified or AASHTO systems. B. Existing Site Soil: 1. Existing site soil that is clean, coarse grained fill soil meeting the requirements of the Unified Soil Classification system for soil type GW, GP, GC with less than 40% fines, SW, and SC with less than 40% fines. Soil shall be sufficiently friable to be mixed with the required compost and installed into the Silva Cell system. 2. Existing site soil shall be free of, trash and other debris. It shall be free of stones, stumps, roots, or other similar objects larger than three inches, and shall be free of toxic material injurious to plant growth. C. Planting Soil Mix: Soil, of a variety of textures, defined in this section, intended to fill the Silva Cell frames and other planting spaces to support the growth of trees and other plants. All planting soils within this specification shall be suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth. D. Screened Soil: Typical of stockpiled soils available direct from a soil supplier. Screening eliminates soil peds, and should be limited in the soil mixing process. E. Silva Cells: Plastic structural cellular system with post, beams and decks designed to be filled with planting soil for tree rooting and/or used for water storage and support vehicle loaded pavements. F. Soil Peds: Clumps of soil that naturally aggregate during the soil building process. Creating a soil mix shall be done in a way that maintains the soil peds. Refrain from over-mixing. G. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, loamy soil, harvested from natural topsoil sources; free from subsoil, refuse, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 1 inch, contaminants, noxious seeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other deleterious substances; suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth. H. Tree: A perennial woody plant with one or several trunks and a distinct crown and intended to become large enough to shade people and or vehicles

183 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Upon forty-five (45) days prior to start of installation of items in this section, the Contractor shall provide submittals required in this section to the landscape architect for review and approval. B. Soil test analysis: Submit soil testing results from an approved soil-testing laboratory for each soil mix for approval. 1. All testing will be at the expense of the Contractor. The landscape architect may request additional planting mix tests on different mix component ratios in order to attain results that more closely meet the mix requirements. 2. The testing laboratory shall be a member of the Soil Science Society of America's, North American Proficiency Testing Program (NAPT), and have a minimum of five years experience with the test protocols of the United States Golf Association - Green Section. 3. All testing shall comply with the requirements of the Methods of Soil Analysis Part 1 and 3, published by the Soil Science Society of America. 4. Soil testing shall be required as defined below: a. Physical analysis. 1. USDA particle size analysis shall be provided for gravel, clay, silt, and sand fractions 2. USDA soil texture 3. Fines Modulus Index for each sand source 4. Infiltration/Permeability/Hydraulic Conductivity testing shall be done using ASTM D 2434 or ASTM F1815 at 80% AND 85% compaction at proctor density (ASTM D ). a. This is a LABORATORY TEST to determine water flow at specified compaction rates. b. Laboratories that provide this testing include: a. Hummel Soil Labs, (607) , 35 King Street, PO Box 606, Trumansburg, NY, b. Turf Diagnostics & Design, (913) , 613 E. 1 st Street, Linwood, KS, b. Chemical analysis. Note that nutrient levels and chemical analysis shall include recommendations from the testing laboratory for ranges of each element appropriate for the types of plants to be grown in the soil mix. 1. Nutrient levels by parts per million including phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium, manganese, iron, copper, zinc and calcium 2. Percent organic content 3. ph 4. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity 5. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) 1. Chemical analysis shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. C. Product Data: For each type of product, submit manufacturer's product literature with technical data sufficient to demonstrate that the product meets the requirements of the specification. D. Material Certificates: Submit material certificates for all natural and bulk material indicating that the material meets the requirements of the specification. E. Samples for Verification: one gallon minimum per soil component or soil mix. Label samples to indicate product, source location, specification number, characteristics, and locations in the Work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor. Delivered materials shall closely match the samples. 1. Planting mix samples shall be labeled as to the percentage of each component. 1.5 SOIL INSTALLATION MOCK UP AND COMPACTION EVALUATION A. Prior to the installation of planting soil within the Silva Cells, construct a mock up of the complete installation at the site. The installation of the mock up shall be in the presence of the landscape architect. B. The Silva Cell mock up shall be as outlined in Specification Section Silva Cells

184 1.6 SCHEDULING A. General: Prior to the start of Work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades. B. Schedule all utility installations prior to beginning work in this section. C. Where possible, schedule the installation of planting soil within the Silva Cells immediately after the installation of the Silva Cell frames. Protect installed Silva Cells from damage in the event that work must occur over or adjacent to the completed Silva Cells. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Soil within the Silva Cells shall be installed by the same contractor who is installing the Silva cells. See Specification Section Silva Cells for installer qualifications. 1.8 PERMITS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary permits/approvals from all such authorities. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, if applicable. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while on the project site. B. Bulk Materials: Do not deliver or place backfill, soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 1. Bulk materials shall be stored and staged in a location approved by landscape architect or as indicated on the plans and in a manner that prevents damage to the site or the stored materials. 2. Provide protection including tarps, plastic and or matting between all bulk materials and any finished surfaces sufficient to protect the finish material. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, and walkways. Provide additional sediment control to retain excavated material, backfill, soil amendments and planting mix within the project limits as needed. D. Protect Silva Cells from damage during installation of planting soil PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During the installation of Planting Soil within the Silva cells comply with all project conditions in Specification Section Silva Cells B. Weather Limitations: Do not proceed with work when subgrade, soils and planting soils are in a wet, muddy or frozen condition PROJECT WORK A. Coordinate installation with all other work that may impact the completion of the Silva Cell installation PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Prior to the start of the installation of Planting Soil within the Silva Cells, meet at the site with the landscape architect, general contractor and the Silva Cell installer to review installation layout, procedures, means and methods

185 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COARSE SAND A. Coarse sand, ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate, with a Fines Modulus Index of 2.8 and Sands shall be clean, sharp, natural sands free of limestone, shale and slate particles. 2. Sand ph shall be lower than Provide the following particle size distribution: Sieve size % Passing 3/8 100 # # # # # # # B. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.2 COMPOST A. Compost shall meet the requirements of the US Composting Council Landscape Architecture/Design Specifications for Compost Use, section Compost as a Landscape Backfill Mix Component, with the following additional requirements: 1. Compost feedstock shall be yard waste trimmings and/or source-separated municipal solid waste to produce fungidominated compost. Compost shall not be derived from biosolids or industrial residuals. B. Compost testing and analysis: Compost analysis shall be provided by the Compost supplier. Before delivery of the Compost, the supplier must provide the following documentation: 1. A statement that the Compost meets federal and state health and safety regulations. 2. Compost testing methodologies and sampling procedures shall be as provided in Test methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost (TMECC), as published by the US Composting Council. C. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil texture shall be a naturally produced soil of loam, sandy loam to sandy clay loam, within the following parameters, and suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth. B. Physical Parameters Parameter Units Acceptable Range Gravel % by volume Less than 10% Sand % by volume 30-70% Silt % by volume 10-50% Clay % by volume 10-25% Organic Matter % Dry Weight 2-8% C. Physical Parameters Parameter Units Acceptable Range ph ph Units 5-8 D. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations

186 2.4 FERTILIZER A. Local soil types and conditions may require supplemental nutrients. If noted by the soil testing facility, add slow-release, organic fertilizer based on plant requirements. 1. Fertilizers should NOT be added in Bioretention applications. 2. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.5 EXISTING SOIL MIX A. Physical Parameters Material Units Acceptable Range Compost % by volume 20% Existing soil % by volume 80% Physical Requirements of existing soil Parameter Units Acceptable Range Gravel % by volume Less than 15% Sand % by volume 30-80% Silt % by volume 5-60% Clay % by volume 0-35% B. Chemical Parameters Parameter Units Acceptable Range ph ph Units 5.5 to 7.3 Existing site soils shall be used only after excavated and approved by the project Landscape Architect. C. Do not screen or over mix to maintain soil peds. Soil peds or clumps up to 4 inches in diameter are acceptable in the soil mix. D. Once mixing is complete, cover stock piles with tarps or heavy plastic to protect soil from drying, saturation and erosion. E. Project Landscape Architect shall approve all existing soil source locations and depths prior to excavation. F. Fertilizers, where indicated by soil test and approved by project Landscape Architects shall be added during soil mixing. G. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.6 UNSCREENED SOIL MIX A. This soil is a mix of coarse sand, topsoil and compost to achieve the following parameters: B. Physical Parameters Material Units Acceptable Range Coarse Sand % by volume 35-50% Compost % by volume 12-17% Topsoil % by volume 35-50% a. Adjust the ratio of the components to achieve infiltration rates between 2 and 3 inches per hour when compacted to 80-85% maximum dry density. C. Physical Parameters Parameter Units Acceptable Range ph ph Units 5-8 D. Do not screen or over mix to maintain soil peds. Soil peds or clumps up to 4 inches in diameter are acceptable in the soil mix

187 E. Fertilizers, where indicated by soil test and approved by project Landscape Architect, shall be added during soil mixing. F. Once mixing is complete, cover stock piles with tarps or heavy plastic to protect soil from drying, saturation and erosion. G. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.7 SCREENED SOIL MIX A. This soil is a mix of sand, silt, and clay to achieve the following parameters: B. Physical Parameters Material Units Acceptable Range Gravel > 2mm % by volume Less than 10% Sand % by volume 60-80% (>55% of sand must be classified as medium to coarse sand) Silt % by volume 5-20% Clay % by volume 5-20% Organic matter % by dry weight 3-5% a. Adjust the ratio of the components to achieve infiltration rates between 2 and 3 inches per hour when compacted to 80-85% maximum dry density. C. Chemical Parameters Parameter Units Acceptable Range ph ph Units 5-8 D. Once mixing is complete, cover stock piles with tarps or heavy plastic to protect soil from drying, saturation and erosion. E. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.8 BIORETENTION SOIL MIX A. Bioretention soil shall be a planting mix which meet the following parameters: Parameter Units/ Test Acceptable Range Silt and Clay Combined % by volume 8-12% Organic matter content* % Loss on ignition by dry weight 3-7% Hydraulic conductivity ASTM D 2434 or ASTM F /hour at 85% compaction Phosphorus mg/kg (Mehlich III test) ph ph Units 5-8 *Compost to meet requirements in Section 2 of this specification Hydraulic conductivity may be modified to meet minimums required by local regulators B. Planting mix shall be thoroughly mixed prior to installation. C. Submittals shall be completed per Section 1.4 and shall be interpreted by project Landscape Architect based on plant material specified and testing recommendations. 2.9 MUNICIPALLY APPROVED BIORETENTION SOIL MIXES A. There is a growing list of municipalities and other governing agencies that have custom bioretention soil mixes. The following have been approved for substitution in the Silva Cell system. Municipally Approved Bioretention Soil shall comply with all local requirements and the submittal requirements of these specifications for Bioretention Soil

188 1. Washington State Department of Ecology Bioretention soil shall meet the most current requirements as outlined in Volume III-Hydrologic Analysis and Flow Control BMPs, Appendix III-C, Washington State Department of Ecology Low Impact Development Design and Flow Modeling Guidance, Section City of Seattle Bioretention soil shall meet the requirements of the most current requirements as outlined in the City of Seattle Bioretention Soil Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION Install planting soil in Silva Cells as described in Section Silva Cells. END OF SECTION

189 SECTION LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Specified in this Section: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required to maintain the landscape in an attractive condition as specified herein for a period of 90 calendar days. B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: 1. Section 02810: Landscape Irrigation 2. Section 02900: Landscape Planting C. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor's representatives and employees shall be experienced in landscape maintenance CALENDAR DAY MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all areas involved in this Contract during the progress of work. Maintenance period shall not start until all elements of construction, planting, and irrigation for the entire project are in accordance with Plans and specifications. 1. A prime requirement is that all lawn and groundcover areas shall have been planted and that all lawn areas shall show an even, healthy stand of grass seedlings or sod, either of which shall have been mowed twice. Maintenance period will not be shortened when this criteria is met, but may be lengthened if not met. 2. The Contractor s maintenance period will be extended if the provisions required within the Plans and specifications are not fulfilled. Project may not be segmented into maintenance phases. 3. The Contractor shall request a Pre-Maintenance inspection by the Owner and Architect at the completion of the installation process. 4. The Maintenance Period shall begin upon successful completion of the Pre-Maintenance walk-through punch list and acceptance of the landscape installation by the Owner. 5. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Owner, a field notification will be issued to the Contractor to establish the effective beginning date of the maintenance period. B. The Maintenance Period continues for 90 calendar days until final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Improper maintenance or poor condition of planting at the termination of the scheduled maintenance period may cause postponement of the final completion date of the Contract. C. Any day when the Contractor fails to adequately maintain planting, replace unsuitable plants or do weed control or other work, as determined necessary by the Owner, will not be credited as one of the maintenance period working days. 1.4 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee: All plant material installed under the contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one year. Plants found to be dead or in poor condition due to faulty materials or workmanship, as determined solely by the Architect, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 1. Replacement: Materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the Maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. 2. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition of material. 3. The Contractor shall replace material rejected during the Guarantee period within fifteen (15) days of written notification by the Owner. 1.5 OBSERVATION VISITS A. The Contractor shall request progress visits from the Architect at least 48 hours in advance of anticipated visits. Normal observation visits are as follows:

190 1. Immediately prior to the commencement of the work in this section. 2. Completion of first 90 days of maintenance. 3. Final acceptance. 1.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT A. Prior to the date of the final observation visit, the Contractor shall acquire from the Architect-approved reproducible Plans and record (from the job record set) all changes made during construction, label these Plans "Record Drawings", and deliver to the Architect for review and approval. B. Prior to the date of final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect a written "Landscape and Irrigation Guarantee" as required herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials used shall either conform to landscape specifications in other sections or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner. B. The Owner shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides, and disease control chemicals used. Failure to provide such a record will continue maintenance period until compliance occurs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall be performed according to the following standards: 1. All areas shall be weeded and cultivated at intervals of not more than ten (10) days. 2. Watering, mowing, rolling, edging, trimming, fertilization, spraying, and pest and rodent control, as may be required, shall be included in the maintenance period. 3. Street gutters shall be cleaned as part of the maintenance program. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of the area. a. Damaged areas shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 5. Between the 15th day and the 20th day of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall reseed and re-sod all spots or areas within the lawn where normal turf growth is not evident. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for reporting to the Owner conditions beyond his control that prevent or have negative impact on the work required herein. 3.2 TREE AND SHRUB CARE A. Watering 1. Apply enough irrigation water so that moisture penetrates throughout root zone and only as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth. a. Do not maintain soils in a constantly wet condition. b. Contractor shall be responsible for familiarizing himself with the particular water requirements for the various plantings and shall be responsible for setting and maintaining the automatic controller to optimum minimum levels. c. Damage to the plantings caused by over-watering or under-watering shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace at no cost to Owner. 2. Maintain a water basin around newly planted plants so that water can be applied to moisturize throughout the root zone. At the end of the maintenance period these basins shall be flattened out to match surrounding grades. 3. If hand-watering, use a fan spray nozzle to break the water force. B. Tree Pruning 1. Nursery grown trees will not normally require pruning for the first year. Prune trees only if directed by Architect or Owner, and only for these purposes: a. selection and development of permanent scaffold branches that have a vertical spacing of from 18" to 48" and radial orientation so as not to cross each other, b. elimination of diseased or damaged growth,

191 c. elimination of narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack strength, d. reduction of toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns, e. maintenance of growth within space limitations, f. maintenance of natural appearance, g. Balancing of crown-to-root ratio. 2. Under no circumstances will stripping of lower branches ("rising up") of young trees be permitted. a. Lower branches shall be retained in a tipped-back" or pinched condition with as much foliage as possible to promote caliper trunk growth (tapered trunk). b. Lower branches can be cut flush with trunk only after the tree is able to stand erect without staking or other support. 3. Evergreen trees shall be thinned out and shaped when necessary to prevent wind and storm damage. The primary pruning of deciduous trees shall be done during the dormant season. Damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards shall be pruned at any time of the year as required. C. Shrub Pruning 1. The objectives of shrub pruning are the same as for trees. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design. 2. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches or buds or flush with the trunk. "Stubbing" will not be permitted. D. Staking and Guying: Stakes and guys shall remain in place until final acceptance and are to be continuously inspected and adjusted to prevent girdling of trunks or branches and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds and to allow trees to sway freely. Stakes and guys are to be removed when trees become sufficiently well rooted or after one year. When stakes or guys are removed, tree heads may be thinned to reduce wind load. E. Weed Control: Keep all areas, including basins and areas between plants, free of weeds. 1. Use recommended legally approved herbicides only when mechanical removal methods are not feasible. 2. Avoid frequent soil cultivation next to trees or shrubs that destroys shallow roots. 3. Use mulches to help prevent weed seed germination. F. Pest and Disease Control: Maintain control of insect and rodent infestations. The preferred method of control shall be biological control, or with non-toxic, biodegradable, organic materials. If stronger materials are needed, only materials that are recommended by a licensed Pest Control Advisor and are EPA approved and regulated shall be used. Only registered and licensed Pest Control Operators shall apply insecticide or chemical applications. Notify Owner a minimum of five (5) working days before chemical applications. G. Fertilization 1. Fertilize all planting areas at 30-day intervals, with fertilizer and at rate as recommended by Soils Report. a. Avoid applying fertilizer to root balls and bases of main stems b. Spread fertilizer evenly around plants to drip line. c. Distribute fertilizer evenly over turf or groundcover areas to avoid patchy coloration. H. Replacement of Plants: Replace dead, dying, and missing plants with plants of a size, condition, and variety acceptable to Architect or Owner at Contractor's expense. 3.3 GROUND COVER CARE A. Weed Control: Control weeds preferably with mechanical methods, and also with preemergent herbicides and selective systemic herbicides. Hoe weeds as little as possible since this may result in plant damage. Foot traffic in planted areas shall be minimized, and soil compaction shall be loosened immediately. B. Watering: Water enough so that moisture penetrates throughout root zone and only as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth. 1. Do not maintain soils in a constantly wet condition. 2. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the particular water requirements for the planting and shall be responsible for setting and maintaining the automatic controller to optimum minimum levels. 3. Damage to the planting caused by over-watering or under-watering shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace. C. Trash: Remove trash weekly. Remove debris, clippings or branches produced by maintenance activities within 8 hours

192 D. Edging and Trimming: Edge ground cover to keep in bounds and trim top growth as necessary to achieve an overall even appearance. E. Replacement: Replace dead and missing plants at Contractor's expense. 3.4 Lawn and Turf Care A. Mowing and Edging: 1. Mowing of turf will commence when the grass has reached a recommended height for the specified species. Mowing will be at least twice a week after the first cut. Turf must be well-established and free of bare spots and weeds to the satisfaction of the Architect prior to final acceptance. 2. Edges shall be trimmed at least weekly or as needed for neat appearance. 3. Grass clippings if visible in piles regardless of size shall be removed from the premises. B. Watering: Lawns shall be watered at such frequency as weather conditions require to replenish soil moisture below root zone and maintain healthy growth. C. Fertilizing: 1. Fertilize all on-grade lawn areas as follows or as recommended by soils report: a. At the end of the first 30 calendar days and at 30 to 90 calendar day intervals thereafter - 5 lbs. per 1,000 square feet of maintenance fertilizer. b. After application, irrigate thoroughly. D. Weed Control: Remove broad leaf weeds manually or control with selective herbicides. Turf areas shall be kept weedfree. E. Renovating: 1. If required, remove thatch by verticutting, preferably in the fall but otherwise in the spring. At this time, fertilize with maintenance fertilizer and over-seed if needed. 2. Aerify compacted areas to improve water penetration whenever needed. 3.5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. System Inspection: Contractor shall continuously check all systems for proper operation. Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each of the lateral. All heads are to be continuously adjusted as necessary for proper coverage and to eliminate over-spray on buildings or paving. Contractors regular maintenance personnel shall test, observe, and adjust each sprinkler system no less than once per month. B. Controllers: Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements and minimum optimum water use. Give Owner's representative a key to controllers and instructions on how to turn off system in case of emergency. C. Repairs: Repair all damage to irrigation system at Contractor's expense. Repairs shall be made within one watering period. END OF SECTION

193 SECTION CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Principal work in this Section includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Formwork and shoring for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Accessories and form coating. 3. Installation of inserts, bolts, anchors and other items furnished by other trades for installation in formed concrete. Coordination of work of all trades affecting concrete formwork. B. Work installed but furnished in other Sections includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Items supplied by other trades where the items must be placed when forms are erected. C. Related work in other Sections includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 2 for forming of exterior concrete curbs, walks and paving 2. Division 3 for forming of architectural concrete 3. Division 4 for falsework and shoring for masonry 4. Section for waterproofing beneath wearing slabs SUBMITTALS A. General: Make submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section B. Manufacturer's data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for proprietary materials including form coatings, manufactured form systems, ties and accessories. Submit written certification by the form coating manufacturer that the form coating will have no adverse effect as specified below. C. Shop drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings, signed and sealed by a California-registered civil or structural engineer, for fabrication and erection of formwork and shoring. Show the general construction of forms including jointing, special formed joints or reveals, temporary openings, location and pattern of form tie placement, and form panel layout, and other items which affect the exposed concrete visually. Include details of inserts and anchorages. Indicate sequence of removal of forms and shoring. 2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the structural adequacy of the forms, ties, shoring and bracing. Any requirements given herein are minimum for appearance purposes only, not to be considered as structural design QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: The applicable provisions of ACI 347R, Guide to Formwork for Concrete, and ACI 301, Chapter 4, Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings, govern the work of this Section. B. Definitions: 1. Exposed concrete: Exposed-to-view concrete which will receive finish materials such as paint, applied directly to its surface, or left unfinished. Not included is exposed concrete in Mechanical and Utility Rooms and exposed exterior architectural concrete. 2. Concealed concrete: Covered by structure or with finish material other than that applied directly to its surface as specified above. Included is exposed concrete in mechanical and utility rooms. C. Tolerances for exposed concrete: 1. General: Following is a list of the maximum permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions for exposed concrete. a. Honeycombs, bubbles and similar defects are considered a part of the finish and are to be distinguished from tolerances described herein. b. Variations in the level of elevated concrete such as floors and beams shall be measured before removal of supporting shores. The Contractor is responsible for deflection. 2. Variation from plumb: a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and arises:

194 Concrete Formwork 1) In 10 ft.: 1/4". In any story or 20 ft. maximum: 3/8". In 40 ft. or more: 3/4". b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves and other conspicuous lines: In any bay or 20 ft.: Maximum 1/4". In any 40 ft. or more: 1/2". 3. Variation from the level or from the grades shown: a. In floors, ceiling, beam soffits, joints and in arises: 1) In any 10 ft.: 1/4". In any bay or 20 ft. maximum: 3/8". In 40 ft. or more: 3/4". b. For exposed lintels, joists, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1) In any bay or 20 ft. maximum: 1/4". In 40 ft. or more: 1/2". 4. Variation of linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls and partitions: a. In any bay or 20 ft. maximum: 1/2". In 40 ft. or more: 1". 5. Variation in size and location of sleeves, floor openings and wall openings: 1/4". 6. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns, beams, joists and in the thickness of slabs and walls: a. Minus 1/4". b. Plus 1/2". 7. Variation in steps: Do not exceed the requirements of the Building Code. D. Tolerances for concealed concrete: Concealed concrete shall meet the following requirements. 1. Sufficiently accurate to accommodate the details of abutting work. 2. Measurably accurate so that the maximum deviation is not over 3/8" in 8 ft. 3. Measurably accurate so that the total maximum deviation is not over 1" in 40 ft. or more. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for exposed finish concrete (flat surfaces): 1. Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood-faced or other panel type materials acceptable to the Architect providing continuous, straight, as-cast surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system where shown. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection beyond allowable tolerances. Use full size panels when forming exterior face of exterior walls exposed to view 2. Use plywood complying with US Product Standards PS-1, "B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class 1, edge-sealed, with each piece bearing the legible trademark of an approved inspection agency. 3. Required form features: a. True shape and edges. b. Sharp, undamaged corners and edges. c. Uniformly smooth, clean surfaces without checks or knots. d. Free of damage, holes, bumps, warps and bends. e. Hard, waterproof surface. f. Single-unit forms without lapped joints for columns, beams and joists. 4. Do not use the following forms: a. Segmented units for joists. b. Boards. c. Plywood without high density overlay contact surface. d. Earth forms. B. Cylindrical columns and supports: One of the following. 1. Form round-section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant type adhesive. a. Line interior surface with polyethylene sheeting having minute perforations to permit uniform moisture penetration and wax-impregnate exterior for weather and moisture protection. b. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation

195 Concrete Formwork 2. Form round-section members of not less than 12 gage galvanized steel sheets. Butt sections together, with bolted or keyed and welded joints. Finish interior joints of forms smooth so there is no visible seam on finished concrete surfaces. C. Forms for concealed finish: Form concrete surfaces which will be concealed in the finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side for tight fit. 1. Forms that cannot be removed after concrete has been poured: a. High density polystyrene blocks, (HDFM-1), Styrofoam PD Board, with minimum compressive strength of 60 lbs/sq.inch, by The Dow Chemical Co., or equal. Thickness shall be as required. b. Constructed of steel; no wood or fiberboard forms permitted at these locations. D. Form ties: 1. For all concrete that will remain exposed to view: Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Provide plastic cone ties where indicated on Drawings or approved by the Architect. 2. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so that portion remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts is at least 1-1/2" from the outer concrete surface. Provide form ties, which will leave a hole not larger than 1" diameter in the concrete surface. 3. Form ties fabricated on the job site, or wire ties, wood spreaders, or embedded types in which embedded portion is less than 1-1/2" from exterior face of concrete, are not acceptable. E. Form coating: Commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds, nor affect subsequent finishes to be applied to concrete surfaces. F. Inserts: 1. Metal inserts for anchorage of materials or equipment to concrete construction not supplied by other trades and as required for the work. 2. Adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron, complete with bolts, nuts and washers; minimum 3/4" bolt size unless otherwise indicated. 3. Threaded inserts of malleable cast iron, furnished complete with full-depth bolts; minimum 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Stainless steel sheet metal reglets formed of the same material and gage as the flashing metal to be built into the reglets. Fill reglet or cover slot to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. G. Chamfer strips: 3/4" x 3/4" virgin vinyl with 1/2" radius and 1/2" nailing leg at corner. H. Prefabricated construction joint keyways: Key-Loc by Form-A-Key Products Division, or Keyed Kold Joint by the Burke Company, or equal, complete with all accessories DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that it will safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose. B. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during construction. C. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. D. For concrete surfaces which will remain exposed in the Work, seal joints with sealant or tape to prevent cement paste leakage. At other locations provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints to prevent leakage and fins. E. Design formwork to take into account the placing rate, temperature, vibrating and retarding admixtures so all portions of the assembly withstand the concrete pressures without deformation beyond 1/360 of spans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and conditions under which formwork will be installed. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of this work have been corrected

196 Concrete Formwork 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. 2. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures during concrete placement and construction loads for long span members without intermediate supports. 3. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal. 4. Provide temporary openings where interior of formwork is inaccessible for clean-out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Brace temporary closures and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms in as inconspicuous location as possible, consistent with project requirements. 5. Form intersecting planes to provide true, clean-out corners, with edge grain of plywood not exposed as form for concrete. 6. Before concrete placement, check the lines and levels of erected formwork. Make corrections and adjustments to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. 7. During concrete placement, check formwork and related supports to ensure that forms are not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances. 8. The Contractor shall engage a licensed surveyor to verify that formwork is within specified allowable tolerances. Surveyor shall report in writing to the Construction Manager, with copy to the Contractor, certifying formwork as acceptable or indicating deviations from allowable tolerances. B. Provisions for other trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms. C. Cleaning and tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is to be placed. Re-tighten forms immediately after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks FORMS FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE A. General: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes. 2. Do not use metal cover plates for patching holes or defects in forms. 3. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 4. Use extra studs, whalers and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs. 5. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to exposed concrete surfaces. 6. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials, and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. B. Corner treatment: 1. Form exposed corners of beams and columns with chamfers to produce smooth, solid, unbroken lines, except where otherwise indicated. 2. Form chamfers with 3/4" x 3/4" strips, unless otherwise indicated, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edge joints. Extend terminal edges to require limit and miter chamfer at changes in direction. 3. Concealed corners may be formed either square or chamfered. C. Joint locations: 1. Utilize largest available form panels for minimum joint spacing of 8 ft. x 4 ft. 2. Arrange joints in a symmetrical pattern so center of the surface involved is either a joint or the center of a form unit. Use form units of matching size where possible. 3. Arrange forms with continuous support at every joint to keep from offsetting during the placing operation

197 Concrete Formwork 4. Exposed joints not shown shall be made and located to least impair the strength of the structure. 5. Where a joint will occur, thoroughly clean the surface of the concrete and remove laitance. In addition, wet vertical joints thoroughly and slush with neat cement grout immediately before placement of new concrete. A delay until the concrete is no longer plastic in columns or walls (minimum of 2 hours) must occur before concrete is placed in the beams or slabs to be supported. 6. At horizontal construction joints, provide 1-1/2" continuous blocking at top of first casting. Remove blocking and re-brace forming member tightly against first casting to form a leak-proof joint for second placement. 7. There shall be no horizontal construction joints in concrete beams. a. Construction joints shall be made in the center of spans with vertical bulkheads. b. When a beam intersects a girder at this point, the joints in the girders shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. c. The location of construction joints is subject to the Engineer's review in each case. d. Provide additional reinforcing at construction joints as directed by the Engineer. 8. Locate construction joints in suspended floors at locations indicated on Drawings. 9. Refer to Section for additional provisions on this subject PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean form surfaces of embedded materials, of accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting, and of other foreign material before concrete is placed in them. B. Unless otherwise specified or approved, treat form surfaces as follows: 1. Before placement of either the reinforcing steel or the concrete, cover the form surfaces with specified coating material. Steel forms shall be free of rust. 2. Coat high density overlay plywood with mill oil of 100 or higher viscosity, in accordance with APA recommendations. 3. Do not allow excess form coating material to stand in puddles in the forms nor to come in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge forms and screeds strips for slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units to support types of screeds required REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: Comply with California Building Code, Section Removal of Forms, shores and Reshoring. B. Formwork not supporting concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided that curing and protection operations are maintained. C. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements may not be removed in less than 14 days, and not until concrete has attained design minimum 28-day compressive strength. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete after tests of field-cured specimens, representative of the concrete location or members, have been made by the Contractor's Testing Agency. D. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports RE-USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except when acceptable to the Architect. END OF SECTION

198 SECTION CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for providing concrete reinforcement. B. Related Sections: 1. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Section SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data, specifications, and installation instructions for proprietary materials and accessories. B. Mill Certificates: Steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend tests for reinforcing steel. C. Shop Drawings: For fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing. 1. Comply with ACI Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, as required for fabrication and placement QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete reinforcement shall comply with CBC Section B. Welding procedures, welding operators and welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4 and UBC Standard Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before proceeding further welding DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to Project site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on shop drawings. B. Store materials to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or excessive rust. C. Comply with the combined recommendations of AWS and the electrode manufacturer for storage of electrodes. Do not use electrodes that have been wetted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60. B. Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706, low alloy steel. C. Steel Wire: ASTM A82. D. Deformed Wire: ASTM A496. E. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. F. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1 E80XX Series, low hydrogen, or as indicated. G. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place. 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use wood, brick, and other unacceptable materials. 2. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs

199 Concrete Reinforcement 3. For exposed to view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with either plastic protected or stainless steel protected legs, at Contractor's option. 4. Over waterproof membranes, use precast concrete block bar supports to prevent penetration of the membrane FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CBC Section and Chapter 7 of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for fabrication of reinforcing steel. All reinforcing shall be free of rust, grease, mill scale or any other material that would affect its bond to concrete. 2. In case of fabricating errors, do not re bend or straighten reinforcing in a manner that will weaken the material. 3. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with one of the following defects will not be permitted in the work: a. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding CRSI fabrication tolerances. b. Bends or kinks not indicated. c. Bars with reduced cross section due to excessive rusting SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner's Testing Laboratory will: PART 3 1. Collect mill test reports for reinforcement. 2. Take samples from bundles and perform tensile tests and bend tests if required in accordance with CBC Section EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with referenced codes and standards. 1. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 2. Comply with Chapter 8 of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars". Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. 3. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for concrete protection. 4. Ensure bar spacing meets requirements of CBC Section Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Provide metal spreaders and spacers as needed to hold horizontal steel in position. 6. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are away from exposed concrete surfaces. B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as possible. 1. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with 16 gauge wire. 2. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. 3. Offset end laps in adjacent widths. C. Provide sufficient numbers of supports of strength to carry reinforcing. 1. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2-inches beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. 2. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. D. Splices: Splice bars by lapping ends and tightly wire tying. Minimum lap of spliced bars shall be as indicated. E. Weld splices in bars larger than No. 11, where No. 11 bars are spliced to larger size bars, and where shown. 1. Use full penetration butt welds by electric arc method. 2. Use welders who have passed AWS standard qualification tests within previous year. 3. Weld splices to develop 125 percent of specified yield strength of bars, or of smaller bar in transition splices. 4. Clean bars of oil, grease, dirt and other foreign substances and flame dry before welding

200 Concrete Reinforcement 5. Preheat bars before welding. 6. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 7. Prepare ends of bars in compliance with AWS D1.4. F. End splices in vertical reinforcing for No. 11 bars and larger may be made using a mechanical friction device which provides positive alignment during placement. Comply with manufacturer's directions for bar preparation and installation of clamping devices. G. Welding: 1. Comply with requirements of AWS D1.4 and UBC Standard 19-2 for field welding. 2. Prior to field welding, determine weldability of reinforcing bars by laboratory chemical analysis of steel. 3. Only steel conforming to chemical requirements specified in AWS D12.1 may be welded. H. Inspection and Test of Welds: In accordance with CBC Section END OF SECTION

201 SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Principal work in this Section includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Cast in place concrete. 2. Installation of items to be embedded in unformed concrete; refer to Section and for items to be embedded in formed concrete. Coordinate with requirements of all Sections having items to be embedded in Concrete. B. Related work in other Sections includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. 2. Division 1 Section Earthwork for excavation, grading and granular fill beneath building slabs on grade. 3. Division 2 Sections Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, Concrete Walks and Concrete Curbs & Combination Curb And Gutter for Site paving and concrete. 4. Concrete formwork: Section Concrete reinforcement: Sections Special requirements for architectural cast-in-place concrete: Section Miscellaneous metals: Section Division 7 Section Sealants for exterior, interior, traffic and non-traffic bearing elastomeric sealants. C. Related work provided by the Owner: 1. Registered Deputy Inspector to inspect the placement of cast-in-place concrete in accordance with Building Code requirements SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Admixtures. 3. Waterstops. 4. Curing materials. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Epoxy joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. F. LEED Submittals:

202 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. Concrete Cementitious and Aggregate Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating the total materialonly cost of each cementitious and aggregate product provided under this Section. Tabulate costs to correlate with related LEED Credits indicated below. 2. Product Data for Credits MR 4.1 / MR 4.2: For cementitious and aggregate products recycled content: a. If recycled content for one or more of each type of cementitious and aggregate products is available and amounts to more than 25 percent by weight then provide test reports signed by batching plant, for each type of cementitious and aggregate product, certifying amount of recycled material. b. Recycled Content shall be determined in accordance with FTC Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 16 DFR (e). 3. Product Data for Credit MR 5.1: For cementitious and aggregate materials produced and batched regionally, including printed statement identifying location of manufacturer and batching plant. 4. Product Data for Credit MR 5.2: For cementitious and aggregate materials quarried regionally, including printed statement identifying location of quarry QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Local / Regional Materials: 1. Provide cementitious and aggregate materials that are quarried and mixed regionally within a radius of 500 miles of Project Site. B. Reference standards: Applicable provisions of the following govern the work of this Section, except as noted or specified. 1. ACI 211, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete. 2. ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. 3. ACI 211.2, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete. 4. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 5. ACI 302, Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 6. ACI 303R, Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice. 7. ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 8. ACI 304.5, Recommended Practice for Batching, Mixing, and Job Control of Lightweight Concrete. 9. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 10. ACI 305, Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 11. ACI 306, Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. C. Source quality control: 1. Testing Agency shall test the materials for conformance with these Specifications before concrete mixes are established, and when source is changed, unless recent test results of materials to be used on the Project are acceptable to the Architect. 2. Testing coarse aggregates: a. Test aggregates before and after concrete mix is established and whenever the character source of material is changed, but not less than one test for each 500 cubic yards. b. Perform a sieve analysis to determine conformity with limits of gradation. Perform sampling and testing according to ASTM C33, and as follows: 1) Sampling of aggregates: ASTM D75. Take samples of aggregates at source of supply, or if source of supply has been approved, from storage bunkers at ready mixed concrete plant. 2) Testing of aggregates shall include: a) Sieve analysis: ASTM C136 b) Organic impurities: ASTM C40. Fine aggregate shall develop a color not darker than the referenced standard color. c) Soundness: ASTM C88. Loss after 5 cycles not over 8% for coarse aggregate, nor 10% for fine aggregate. d) Abrasion of concrete aggregate: ASTM C131. Weight loss not over 10 1/2% after 100 revolutions, nor 42% after 500 revolutions. e) Deleterious materials: ASTM C

203 Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Cement test: f) Materials passing No. 200 sieve: ASTM C117, not over 1% for gravel, 1.5% for crushed aggregate per ASTM C33. g) Reactive materials: ASTM C289. Aggregates shall indicate no potential deleterious reactivity. h) Definitions: ASTM C125. a. The cement mill laboratory will be acceptable as testing laboratory for this purpose when approved by the DSA. Submit evidence to show that the cement mill laboratory is qualified to perform tests. The laboratory shall make tests for every 500 barrels or fraction thereof of cement used, in accordance with ASTM C150. b. Make tensile strength test at 7 days. Tag the cement for identification at the location of sampling. A representative of the Testing Agency shall certify that materials being used are taken from the lots sampled and tested for this report. D. Sample panels: Before beginning work, cast a 6 ft. x 6 ft. sample panel of each type of flatwork finish specified at a location on the site agreed upon with the Architect. PART 2 1. Use same concrete mix, placing, consolidating and finishing methods and workmen as for the finish work. 2. Protect panels until their removal is authorized by the Architect. Make such modifications as necessary to achieve a panel satisfactory to the Architect and Owner. 3. Approved panels shall serve as the standard for all remaining work. Remove panels only after completion and acceptance of the flatwork. PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS E. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II low alkali. Do not change brand or type of cement without the Architect s written approval. Cement may be supplemented with fly ash conforming to ASTM C 618. F. Aggregates: Submit pit source and characteristics of each type aggregate prior to designing mixes. 1. ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete. 2. ASTM C330 for structural lightweight concrete. 3. Aggregate shall be graded so that coarse aggregate nominal size is not larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between form faces; nor 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars, whichever is less, but never greater than 3/4" in any dimension for slabs 4" thick or less; 1 1/2" at all other locations. 4. Except where specifically indicated, Pea Gravel concrete (concrete with a maximum aggregate size of 3/8 ) shall not be permitted without written permission from the Engineer. G. Admixtures: 1. Calcium chloride, thyocyanates and admixtures containing chloride ions are not permitted. 2. Other than specified, admixtures complying with the following may be used with the Architect s approval. Submit manufacturer's data for each product proposed for use. 3. Admixtures shall comply with the following: a. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. b. Water-reducing admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. c. High-range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. d. Water-reducing, non-chloride accelerator admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. e. Water-reducing, retarding admixture: ASTM C494, Type D. H. Structural adhesive: ASTM C881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suit Project requirements. 1. Thiopoxy; WR Grace. 2. Sikadur Hi-Mod; Sika Chemical Corp. 3. Patch and Bond Epoxy; The Burke Co. I. Water: Fresh, clean, and free of oil and other materials injurious to concrete

204 Cast-in-Place Concrete J. Sealer: 1. At all locations where concrete is exposed (not covered by floor finishes, coatings, etc.) at interior locations: Ashford Formula by Curecrete Chemical Co., or equal. K. Curing compound: 1. Liquid membrane forming compound containing a fugitive dye, conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, guaranteed not to affect the bond, adhesion, or effectiveness of finishes and surface treatment specified herein to be applied to concrete. 2. Curing compound used on exposed concrete surfaces shall be non-discoloring, fast drying and shall be conclusively demonstrated not to darken or yellow with age. Curing compound for use on concrete floors to receive adhered floor finishes shall be specially formulated for such use and shall be certified by the manufacturer not to inhibit the bonding qualities of flooring adhesives. L. Expansion joint materials: 1. Joint filler (indicated as JFT-1 on Drawings): Homex Expansion Joint by Homasote Co. or equal non bituminous product compatible with sealant specified in Section Use in combination with plastic joint cap made by Greenstreak or equal. 2. Joint sealant and back up rod: As specified in Section M. Dry-pack and grout: One of the following. 1. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders. 2. Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp. 3. Sika Grout 212, by Sika Chemical Corp. N. Bonding agent: Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp. or Proweld by Protex Industries Inc. O. Curing paper: Orange Label Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp., or equal MIXES A. Mix Design: Concrete shall be designed in accordance with 2001 California Building Code, Section , Method B, except that Method C shall be used when compressive strengths in excess of 6,000 psi are indicated on Structural Drawings. 1. A testing agency under the direction of a California-registered Civil or Structural Engineer shall design all structural concrete mixes required for the Project to provide: a. Concrete of the compressive strength indicated on the Drawings. b. Adequate workability and proper consistency to permit concrete to be worked readily into the forms and around reinforcement without segregation and excessive bleeding. c. Other requirements of these Specifications. 2. Determine proper proportions for design mixes in accordance with ACI 211 or ACI Determine proper water cement ratio by preliminary test made in accordance with ASTM C Slump limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in the concrete slump at point of placement not exceeding the maximum recommended by ACI 301 and as accepted in the mix design. 5. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C39. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: Only allow for foundation concrete. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 15 percent. C. Submit reports showing results of sieve analysis, mix design and results of compression tests. Make test specimens from not less than 3 batches of each design mix. The trial batch strength for each mix shall exceed indicated f'c by 25% or a lesser amount based on standard deviations of strength test records according to ACI 318. Do not start concrete production until mixes have been reviewed and are acceptable to the Architect. D. For each batch, weigh the fine and coarse aggregate separately, measure cement and water separately and introduce separately into the mix so that proportions can be accurately controlled and easily checked. E. Do not change proportions established by the accepted mix design without the Architect s written approval

205 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. Cement: If concrete develops less than required minimum strength, adjust mix proportions and increase the amount of cement, as necessary. 2. Water: Do not exceed predetermined amount of water because of slowness of discharge from mixer or any other reason, but reduce water to minimum necessary to produce concrete that will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcements, without segregation of materials and without free water collecting on the surface. 3. Aggregates: Reasonable variations in grading will be allowed because of characteristics of available materials and the need for workability and strength. F. Concrete mixing: PART 3 1. Mixing and delivery shall comply with ASTM C94, these Specifications, and Building Code requirements. 2. Testing Agency shall perform check sieve analysis of the aggregates being used, check compliance with mix design and the cement being used against mix design; check that water has been removed from the drum before adding mix ingredients for the following load and shall witness the loading of mixing trucks. Testing Agency shall provide a written report of each inspection indicating compliance or non-compliance with these Specifications. 3. In addition to the requirements of ASTM C94 section 16.1 provide the following information on delivery tickets. Provide a ticket signed by an authorized representative of the batching plant with each mixer truck of concrete delivered to the site. a. Type and brand of cement. b. Cement content per cu. yd., of concrete. c. Maximum size of aggregate. d. Total water content expressed as water/cement ratio. 4. Deliver batch tickets to the Owner s Inspector at the site when concrete is delivered. 5. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before charging each batch. Schedule rate of delivery to prevent delay of placing the concrete after mixing, or holding dry-mixed materials too long in the mixer before the addition of water and admixtures. 6. Remove all materials, including water remaining in the ready mix truck drum, completely before ingredients for the following loads are introduced in the drum. 7. Do not use concrete which has not been placed 30 minutes after leaving the mixer, or concrete that is not placed within 60 minutes after water is introduced into the mix. 8. Mix proportions for architectural cast-in-place concrete shall provide a mixture of proper workability and strength for specific type of concrete, with water-cement ratio in accordance with requirements of ACI 303R, Chapter 6. Slump shall be as low as possible, consistent with the particular type of concrete and methods of deposit. Consistency for any placement shall be constant from batch to batch in order to provide uniformity in the end product. Experiment with dryer concrete lifts gradually toward the top to provide a more uniform appearance. Experimentation may be done on concealed basement walls and/or mock-ups using Architectural concrete mix. a. Make every effort to pour architectural concrete with concrete temperatures between 65 and 85 degrees F. Higher temperatures can result in faster setting rate, and visible flow lines and cold joints. EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Inspect excavations, subgrades and formwork, as applicable for each placing operation, for accuracy of lines, levels, elevations and dimensions. B. Inspect placement of reinforcement and accessories for proper position, sizes, clearances, fastenings, laps and splices. C. Moisten, do not saturate, earth subgrade and bearing surfaces. Do not place concrete on muddy subgrade. D. Wet wood forms thoroughly when they are not treated with form release agent. Wet other materials sufficiently to reduce suction and maintain concrete workability. E. Embedded items including, but not limited to, conduits, anchors and rough hardware, built into concrete as indicated or required. 1. Do not embed piping and conduits, other than electrical conduits, in structural concrete. Locate conduits so as to reduce strength of the structure the least amount, as approved by the Architect, and as indicated on the Drawings

206 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Embed bolts, inserts and other items in the concrete. Secure accurately so that they are not displaced during concrete placing, compacting and finishing operations. Wire tie, nail or bolt embeds securely to forms. 3. Set embedded bolts for materials and equipment attached to concrete to template, layouts and shop drawings. Verify size, length and location of electrical conduits with respect to equipment supports. 4. Fill voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete in the voids. F. Install expansion joint fillers where indicated, and as required to isolate concrete slabs-on-grade from other building elements such as walls and equipment pads. Cover filler with plastic joint cap and leave in place until ready to receive sealant, then remove and discard plastic cap. G. Do not proceed with placement of concrete until all conditions are satisfactory CONVEYING A. Rapid handling: Transport concrete from the mixer to location of placing as rapidly as practical to avoid separation or loss of ingredients. B. Transporting methods: 1. Use cranes, carts, buggies or other approved means to deliver concrete to final locations. Do not use delivery systems (pipe, chutes, etc.) formed of aluminum for transporting concrete. 2. If pumping of concrete is contemplated, first obtain the Architect s approval for the design mix and the placement method before placing concrete. C. Free fall: As dictated by job conditions at each location, but not more than 4 ft. where concrete will be exposed in the Work and 6 ft. at all other locations. Avoid large concentration of concrete in one location, which would produce unacceptable deflection in supporting formwork or steel decking. D. Concrete flow: Keep surface of concrete level during placing with a minimum of concrete allowed to flow from one position to another. Carry concrete up uniformly for the length of walls being placed to reduce lateral flow of concrete to 5 ft. maximum. E. Runways: Construct substantial runways and scaffolding to avoid movement and vibration in the forms and reinforcing steel as a result of transporting and placing concrete PLACING A. General: Comply with the more restrictive requirements of ACI 304 and 2001 California Building Code, Section Preparation of Equipment and Place of Deposit. Do not place concrete in or under water. 1. In addition comply with applicable requirements of ACI 303R Chapter 7 requirements for architectural castin-place concrete, and requirements of Section B. Consolidation: Thoroughly consolidate concrete and work it around reinforcement and embedded items and into corners and angles of forms, by spading, rodding and tamping to exclude rock pockets, air bubbles and honeycombs, and to obtain required density and strength. C. Internal vibration: 1. Use mechanical vibrators to consolidate each layer with that previously placed, to completely embed reinforcement and fixtures and to bring fine materials to the faces and top surfaces to produce the proper finish. 2. Assign at least one workman at each location where concrete is being placed to vibrate and consolidate the concrete in forms. Take care to avoid overvibration causing separation of ingredients. Keep extra standby vibrator at the site. 3. Do not use vibrator to move concrete. 4. Comply with the requirements of Section for consolidation of architectural cast-in-place concrete. D. Flow of concrete: Keep surface of concrete level during placing, with a minimum of concrete allowed to flow from one position to another. Place concrete in a continuous operation until each section or panel has been completed. E. Record: Keep records showing location, date and time of placement of all concrete on the Project. F. Floor slabs: Shape slabs to the levels, slopes and elevations indicated and accurately pitch or grade to drainage fittings and fixtures installed in them. Where indicated, depress slabs to receive other finishes

207 Cast-in-Place Concrete G. Wall supported elements: Under normal weather conditions, wait at least 2 hours after depositing concrete in walls and columns before placing concrete in supported floors. Consider beams, girders, capitals and brackets as part of the floor systems. H. Temperature: Do not place concrete when the temperatures of the materials in contact with the concrete, and the ambient temperature exceed the ranges recommended in ACI 305 and 306, if it is likely to exceed these temperature before the concrete has taken its initial set, unless special precautions recommended by ACI 305 and 306 are provided. I. Construction joints: Refer also to Section Concrete Formwork for additional provisions on this subject. Comply with the more restrictive requirements of 2001 California Building Code, Section Construction Joints and the following: 1. Location: Locate joints to least impair the strength and appearance of the structure. Obtain the Architect s approval of all construction joint locations before casting concrete. In general construction joints shall be located as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. In walls locate at the underside of floors or slabs, and at the top of footings or floor slabs. b. In slabs on grade locate joints as detailed on the Drawings, but not more than 20' o.c.; off set not less than 5 ft., with a minimum of 2 offsets. Allow proper time lapse in placing of floor sections adjoining prior placings. c. In all cases make construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across joints. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in construction joints in slabs, and between walls and footings; use prefabricated bulkheads specified for slabs. 3. Keep exposed face of construction joints continuously moist from time of initial set until subsequent placing of concrete against them, but not to exceed the curing period. When not damp, wet (do not saturate) the contact surface of joints for a minimum of 24 hours before placing adjoining concrete. a. Before placing adjoining concrete, clean contact surfaces to remove all laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete, and expose sound, coarse aggregates solidly embedded in the matrix. b. To achieve the above, the contact surface may be washed with clean water under pressure (jet blast), may be sandblasted, or in areas which will be concealed from view when the building is completed an approved structural adhesive may be used on clean, structurally sound concrete. Remove wash water entirely from surface. c. If a contact surface becomes coated with foreign materials of any nature after being cleaned, clean again to suitable condition. J. Tolerances: In compliance with ACI 117 as follows. 1. Paragraph 2.1, except for reference to slip forming. 2. Paragraph 2.2, Class BX for slabs, except that where ceramic or paver tiles are dry-set on slabs, and epoxy terrazzo, provide Class AX. 3. Paragraph Grind and/or fill all slabs to receive epoxy terrazzo to maintain maximum deviation of 1/8" in 10' FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough form: 1. Provide as-cast rough form finish to formed concrete surfaces that are to be concealed in the finish work or by other construction, but not finished (paint, resilient flooring, wall coverings, etc.). 2. Standard rough form finish consists of concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth form finish for exposed non-architectural concrete: 1. Provide as-cast smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces to be exposed-to-view at interior locations, or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete, or a covering material bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, dampproofing, acoustical tiles, painting, and similar systems. 2. Provide smooth form finish by selecting form material to impart a smooth, hard, uniform texture and arranging the orderly and symmetrical with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with all fins or other projections completely removed and smooth

208 Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Architectural cast-in-place concrete: Finish of exposed concrete surfaces indicated on the Drawings as architectural cast-in-place concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section Architectural Cast-In-Place Concrete. D. Related unformed surfaces: 1. At tops of wall, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with textured matching the adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Continue the final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surface, unless otherwise shown. E. Top of footings: Screed to elevations indicated FINISHING FLATWORK A. Protection: 1. Protect work of other trades from damage by covering it with heavy kraft paper securely taped in place. Leave protection in place as long as its need exists. 2. Control the use of water and other contaminants within the building so that no damage to previously installed work or existing structure and finish occurs. B. Compacting and floating: 1. Bring slabs to proper elevations and strike off with a straightedge. Remove excess water and laitance. a. Compact and consolidate to embed coarse aggregates. b. Float and test surfaces with a 10 ft. straightedge and eliminate high and low spots to comply with tolerances specified. c. From this point, use the methods and tools necessary to produce surface tolerances and finishes specified. 2. Use screeds of type and spacing required to produce specified slab tolerances. C. Screeding: At concrete for floors to be placed over metal deck: 1. The steel angle closure at metal deck edges is not intended to serve as a screed. 2. Use adjustable screeds at all screeded points and adjust to compensate for existing deflection and for deflection of deck and beams occurring during concreting operations. 3. Continuously monitor screeds and floors during concrete placement and finishing and adjust concrete floor thickness as required to obtain level floors. D. Moisture control: In addition to other finishing requirements, use a water fog spray to reduce plastic shrinkage cracks during flatwork finishing operations when conditions of low humidity and/or high temperature exist. 1. Immediately after concrete has been brought to a flat surface and the shiny film of moisture disappears, restore it and maintain until final troweling by applying a light film of moisture with an atomizing type fog sprayer. 2. Use frequent light applications of moisture rather than excessive amounts at any one time. Adjust the amount and frequency of fog spray as required by variable conditions of weather, wind, temperature and humidity. E. General requirements: 1. Finish surfaces to produce a uniform appearance throughout area involved and throughout adjacent areas with the same treatment. 2. Where concrete finishing occurs adjacent to finished metal or other surfaces, particularly where serrated or indented surfaces occur, remove all traces of cement film before allowing to harden. 3. Use no troweling machines within 12" of electrical junction and outlet boxes which are set to finish flush with concrete floors. Float and trowel such areas by hand with wood floats and steel trowels, taking care to see that concrete is finished flush with box cover and matches adjacent surfaces. F. Schedule of finishes: Match approved sample panels. 1. Scratch finish: a. Apply to monolithic slabs to receive concrete floor topping, mortar set tile and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material. Verify finish required by various applied finishes such as epoxy terrazzo with the requirements of individual Sections and Manufacturers

209 Cast-in-Place Concrete b. After placing slabs, plane the surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 2 ft. when tested with a 2 ft. straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen the surface before the final set with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. 2. Float all other monolithic slab surfaces unless otherwise specified. 3. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared or when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation of power-driven float, or both. Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. a. Finish surfaces to receive elastomeric coatings and waterproofing to produce a uniform texture and finish throughout acceptable to the waterproofing and elastomeric coating manufacturer. b. Steel trowel surfaces to receive ceramic tile, carpeting, resilient flooring, other thin floor coverings, and concrete slabs which have no other specified finish (indicated as CONC-3 finish on Drawings), to a hard, dense, burnished surface. 1) After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. 2) Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface plane tolerance specified. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 3) After steel troweling, texture surfaces to receive ceramic tile with a fiber broom to provide a mechanical bond with the mortar, or omit the burnishing. These slabs must be approved by the subcontractors installing the tiles as satisfactory to receive their work. c. Use abrasive aggregate (non slip) finish for stair treads and landings where applied finishes are not used. 1) Broadcast abrasive aggregate on the concrete, after first troweling operation uniformly at the rate of 50 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. 2) After second troweling, rub surface with pads of steel wool to remove film of cement and expose the non slip aggregate, or as an option etch concrete with a 10% solution of muriatic acid followed by flushing with water to remove all traces of acid and expose the non slip aggregates. d. Finish all flatwork at parking areas, including ramps, with a medium broom finish with tooled edges. Draw broom against a straightedge at right angle to the direction of traffic, or as indicated on Drawings. e. Exterior flatwork: As specified in Section Markings: a. At expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated, mark slabs with a 1/4" radius rounded edging or marking tool. In textured work edge and mark slabs, after texturing, with a combination edging/ smoothing tool approximately 1-1/2" wide. b. Where saw cutting is indicated, time this operation so that it is performed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by the saw, but before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to produce cracking. Saw cutting shall be performed on the same day as placement of the concrete. c. Make marking lines straight, or curved as indicated, equally spaced and parallel to adjacent lines and/or walls, edges and other construction, and of uniform depth and cross section, with intersections accurately formed. G. Curbs: Immediately after removing forms finish faces and top with a steel trowel CURING A. General: Coordinate curing methods with requirements of manufacturers whose materials with be applied over concrete surfaces. B. Formed concrete: Wet the tops and exposed portions of formed concrete, keep moist and at a temperature of not less than 50 deg F until forms are removed, but for not less than 7 days duration. If forms are removed before 14 days after concrete is cast, coat concrete with curing compound as specified for flatwork below

210 Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Concrete flatwork: 1. After finishing, spray the specified curing compound uniformly in 2 coats at 90 deg. to each other not exceeding coverage rates recommended by the manufacturer. Inspect treated surfaces daily for 14 days for evidence of drying. Re wet the surfaces and apply a new application of curing compound if premature drying occurs, as soon as can be done after finishing without marring the surfaces. 2. Remove sealer residue after curing period is completed MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK A. Equipment bases and foundations: 1. Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations where indicated on Drawings. 2. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing the machines and equipment. 3. Prior to pouring equipment bases, verify sizes and adequacy of base with actual equipment to be supplied. Base sizes shown on the Drawings reflected requirements of primary name brand equipment supplier. B. Pits, trenches and curbs: Construct pits for elevators, transformers, pumps, valves, loading dock lift, trenches, curbs, gutters, and other miscellaneous concrete work. C. Grouting and dry-packing: Install as indicated and required, except for items grouted by other trades. Comply with the grout manufacturer printed instructions and the following. 1. Mix material with sufficient water so it flows under its own weight for grout, and to just moisten and bind the material together for drypack. 2. Place dry-pack by forcing and rodding to fill all voids and provide complete bearing under plates. Place fluid grout from one side only and puddle to completely fill voids; do not remove dams or forms until grout attains initial set. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, and damp cure at least 3 days. D. Waterproof membranes: Perform work over waterproof membranes to prevent damage to the membranes. Schedule this work to reduce to a practical minimum the period when the installed membrane is left without protection. Prior to placing concrete, inspect the membrane and repair damage which may have occurred PROTECTING/CLEANING A. A. Protect finished concrete surfaces from stains, abrasions and other damages until acceptance by the Architect. 1. Cover concrete with non-staining, waterproof tarpaulins or similar form of protection when performing other work adjacent to concrete surfaces. 2. Protect exposed edges of concrete by boarding. 3. Do not allow fire in direct contact with concrete. 4. Provide adequate protection against injurious action by sun or wind. Protect fresh concrete from heavy rain and mechanical injury. B. Upon completion, wash and clean exposed concrete and leave free of oil, paint, plaster and foreign substances, ready to receive applied finishes or to be left exposed DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Concrete which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents will be deemed defective. B. Remove defective concrete as directed by the Architect and replace with concrete meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete quality control (refer also to Section 01400): The following will be performed by the Owner s Inspectors. Additional tests may be made by the Contractor, for its convenience, at the Contractor's expense. 1. Samples will be taken during progress of the work to determine slump, compression strength, aggregate sieve analysis, and grout mix tests, with assistance furnished by the Contractor cylinders will be made for each day's pour, or for each 150 cubic yards, or once for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area, whichever is less, for each type of concrete being cast cylinder shall be tested at 7 days, and 2 cylinders at 28 days. The remaining cylinder will be kept in reserve in case tests are unsatisfactory. 4. Samples will be made in accordance with ASTM C Specimens will be made and laboratory cured in accordance with ASTM C

211 Cast-in-Place Concrete 6. The 28 day values shall be the criteria for acceptance of concrete regarding strength only. a. 7 day tests may be regarded as indicative of compliance or non compliance with the 28 day strength requirements, and the Contractor should be guided accordingly in matter of adjusting proportions, if necessary, and notify the Architect. b. 7 day tests shall also be a guide to the Contractor regarding time for form removal. 7. Slump tests will be made for each set of tests cylinders in accordance with ASTM C143. B. Tests evaluation: 1. Concrete cylinder test shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI 214 and If 28 day test results indicate that concrete strength is not as specified, core concrete as instructed by the Architect in accordance with ASTM C42. a. Plug core hole solid as specified in Article 3.04 of this Section. b. The cost of cores, tests and patching shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. In the event that additional core tests do not show strength required, or as determined by load tests made in accordance with ACI 318, the defective concrete shall be removed and replaced, or shall be reinforced as directed by the Architect, at the Contractor's expense. 4. If core tests results fall below design strength specified, adjust the concrete mix or water content for future batches, at no additional cost to the Owner ARCHITECTURAL FINISH A. Unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings, architectural finish shall be applied on permanently exposed portions of reinforced concrete structures above finish grades and waterlines except on minor drainage structures and curbs. B. Immediately after forms are stripped, concrete surfaces shall be inspected; joint defects, voids, rock pockets, or other defective areas shall be repaired; and holes for form-tie fasteners shall be filled. The application of architectural finish shall not start until all preparatory work, including the removal of dirt, grease, and curing compound, is complete. C. Application of Architectural Finish 1. Surface shall be brush abrasive blasted prior to applying architectural finish. 2. The brush abrasive blast surface shall be wetted and a grout shall be applied. The grout shall be made by mixing 1 part cement and 1.5 parts fine sand with sufficient water to give it the consistency of thick paint. The cement used in this grout shall be either 100 percent gray Portland cement or a mixture of gray with proportions of white Portland cement up to 60 percent. The freshly applied grout shall be vigorously rubbed into the concrete surface with a wood or rubber float, filling all pits in the surface. 3. After application of the grout, the surface shall be kept moist for a minimum of 1 hour or until the grout hardens sufficiently so that it can be scraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel without disturbing grout in the hole. The grout shall then be removed with a steel trowel and the surface shall be allowed to dry. 4. When dry, the surface shall be vigorously rubbed with burlap to completely remove grout. The entire operation for an area shall be terminated at panel points and shall be completed the day it is started. Grout shall not be left on the surface overnight. 5. The desired effect shall be a light-colored concrete surface of uniform color and texture, with no appearance of a paint or grout film. Defective architectural finish shall be rubbed down with carborundum bricks as directed by the Engineer. 6. Architecturally treated concrete surfaces shall match the approved sample in texture, color, and quality. END OF SECTION

212 SECTION UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for concrete block masonry work where shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications. 2. Excavating, Compacting and Backfilling for Structures in Section 3. Concrete Work in Section Bolts, Anchors and other metal items in Section QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Codes and Regulations: Perform work in accordance with requirements of the current California Building Code (CBC). C. Tests as required by the CBC, whenever the Inspector detects evidence of materials or work failing to meet the specified requirements. Perform all such tests as instructed by the Inspector at the Contractor's expense. D. Continuous Inspection as noted on the Drawing to be performed by a testing agency selected and employed by the Owner. The cost of reinspection due to defective work shall be paid by the Owner and backcharged to the Contractor SUBMITTALS A. General: Conform to the conditions in the SUBMITTALS SECTION of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these specifications. B. Samples: 1. General: To be submitted to the Architect for approval before start of masonry work. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: 2 full size pieces of each size of block and texture proposed for use. C. Sample Panel: Construct 3-foot-high by 3-foot long sample concrete block masonry panel to specification requirements, located at the job-site as directed and approved by the Construction Manager prior to start of masonry work. Completed work shall match approved sample panel. Remove sample panel from the job-site when so directed by the Inspector or Construction Manager. 1. Sample should be complete with rebar, sealer, and anti-graffiti coat. D. Submit material cost data for all materials required to construct the work in place. The cost data should be as marked up to the General Contractor. If the work is self performed the material cost shall reflect the actual cost of material without mark up. E. Provide manufacturer s information (from the batch plant) indicating the location of raw material harvest for cement, sand, fly ash, and aggregate PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Protect masonry units against damage during delivery to the job-site. B. Storage: Store units on platforms that allow circulation under units. Protect against wetting. Damaged or stained units will be rejected. Store all mortar and grout materials under cover in a dry place DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR MASONRY WORK

213 Unit Masonry A. Before Placing: To be removed from the job site. B. After Placing: To be removed and replaced in a manner acceptable to the Inspector at no added cost to the owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS C. Types: 1. Load bearing hollow concrete masonry units, in accordance with the CBC. Grades as noted below. Sizes and finishes as listed below and noted on the Drawings. D. Grades: As per ASTM C Grade "N" medium weight blocks use in walls above or below grade. E. Aggregates: 1. Normal Weight as per ASTM C-33. F. Sizes: Per Contract Drawings. G. Color and Finishes: Per Contract Drawings. H. Manufacturers: Provide units as manufactured by Orco Block, Angelus Block or approved equal MISCELLANEOUS RELATED MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60, sizes as noted on the drawings. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II low alkali, with total amount of sodium of potassium oxide in the cement not to exceed 0.6 percent when the aggregates contain opalescent silica or are reactive to alkalis; complying with the California Building Code 1. Portland Cement for colored mortar shall be "Riverside White", "Trinity White" or equal. 2. Portland Cement for colored mortar shall be color to match color of the concrete block. C. Lime and Lime Putty: Per CBC Requirements D. Sand for Mortar: Per CBC Requirements E. Pea Gravel for Grout: Not more than 5 percent passing the No. 8 sieve, 100 percent passing the 3/8-inch sieve. F. Bonding Agent: Larson Products Corporation "Plasterweld" as distributed by Pioneer Builder's Supplies, Inc. Los Angeles, California, or approved equal. G. Water: (for grout and mortar) Conform to requirements of the Code; from a source used for domestic purposes. H. Waterproofing Additive: For building masonry walls below grade shall be "Red Label Suconem" by Sika Corporation, 1372 East 15th Street, Los Angeles, California, or approved equal MORTAR AND GROUT A. Cement-Lime Mortar: Type "S" proportioned as set forth in the CBC or as noted on the Contract Drawings. 1. Mixing Time: Machine mixed for at least 3 minutes. 2. Time of Use: Within 30 minutes after leaving the mixer. Any mixture not so used to be discarded. Retempering not permitted. B. Grout: Proportion per CBC Requirements using fine aggregates in grout space where least cell dimension is 4 inches or more. Grout strength as noted on the Contract Drawings. PART 3 1. Where noted on the Contract Drawing grout mix shall contain specified waterproofing additive. 2. Fluid consistency as preferable for pouring in place without segregation of ingredients. 3. Mix by machine for at least 3 minutes and use within 30 minutes after leaving the mixer. Discard grout not used. EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

214 Unit Masonry C. Required: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work at no added cost to the owner. Do not proceed until all such detrimental conditions have been corrected ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when placed in air temperature of 99 degrees F. in the shade, with relative humidity less than 50% WORKMANSHIP A. Before starting to lay masonry units, roughen the top of concrete footings and clean off foreign matter and laitance by sandblasting as directed by the Inspector. B. Construct all block work in accordance with best standards of concrete masonry unit workmanship established by the Masonry Institute of California. C. Keep exposed surfaces clean and free of mortar and/or grout droppings at all times during construction operations until acceptance by the Owner. D. Do not commence installation of the work of this Section until horizontal and vertical alignment of foundation is within 1-inch of plumb and the lines shown on the Contract Drawings CONSTRUCTION A. Tolerances: Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. General Installation: 1. To be true and plumb, in even plane surfaces, with level courses and straight uniform joints. 2. Lay masonry units symmetrically. 3. Any masonry indicated on the Drawings without definite indications of joints, to be constructed with uniform and symmetrical joints as necessary for the specified masonry units and mortar joints. 4. Cut or trim masonry units as necessary and as approved by the Inspector, for suitable construction in narrow widths of wall, pilasters, returns, and reveals. Cut no unit to a length less than ½ the full size of the unit. All cutting and trimming to be neat, true, and even. Do not use chipped or broken units. 5. Anchor masonry to abutting construction with approved ties into concrete or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. 6. Set anchors, bolts, piping, sleeves, rough hardware, and other inserts specified in other Divisions and required to be embedded in masonry, into masonry as masonry units are laid. a. Tolerances: Comply with provisions of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/ TMS 602; Paragraph Tolerances for location of elements. 7. Coring: Whenever it becomes necessary to provide holes in completed masonry walls for passage of pipe or conduit, make such holes with a coring machine. 8. Frame wall openings where windows or louvers occur with specified "Trim Units" as detailed on the Contract Drawings. 9. Hollow metal door frames set in Wall openings to be filled with mortar and joints raked to receive sealant or caulking as indicated on the Drawings. 10. Mortar Joints: Tool joints when enough water has left the mortar and mortar is "Thumb Print Hard" and when such tooling will not bring excessive paste to the surface. Compress and compact the mortar using a 3/4-inch diameter round tool for making joints slightly recessed ½-inch. Make both vertical and horizontal joints uniformly concave without waves or dips. 11. Curing of Completed Masonry Work: Avoid wetting of masonry surfaces after completion of construction. If weather is extremely hot and/or windy, fog spray completed work as necessary to damper the surfaces, but not of such quantity to cause water to flow on the masonry surfaces or flow into the joints CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. Type: Reinforced hollow medium weight open ended unit masonry, as specified in MATERIALS section above

215 Unit Masonry B. Bond: Running bond, with end joints at centers of blocks in next lower course, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Joints: Exposed joints to be tooled slightly concave, concealed joints to be struck flush. Use 3/4-inch diameter round tool for making ½-inch joint slightly concave as indicated on the Drawing. 1. Bed Joints: Not less than 3/8-inch and not more than ½-inch thick. 2. Head Joints: To match bed joints. D. Mortar: Cement-lime Type "S" as specified above. Color as indicated on the Drawings. E. Block Layers: In accordance with CBC chapter 21 and as specified in Subsection 3.4 of this Section. F. Reinforcement: As shown on the Drawings fully embed in grout and not in mortar or mortar joints. Provide required metal accessories to ensure adequate alignment of reinforcing during grout filling operations. 1. Tolerances: Comply with provisions of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/ TMS 602; Paragraph Tolerances for Placing Reinforcement. G. Chases and Recesses: As detailed on the Drawings and cut only upon direction of the Engineer. H. Grout: All cells to be grouted solid. I. Mortar Cap: Provide as indicated on the Drawings and tool to shed water. J. Expansion or Control Joints: For yard walls and retaining walls, use "DUR-O-WALL No. 8 wide Flange Rapid Control Joint" unless noted otherwise, with necessary neoprene compound edge for use in 8-inch masonry wall, installed where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the full height of wall. For control joints in building walls see structural drawings. K. Pour grout in lifts of not exceeding 4 feet unless cleanouts are provided as required per the CBC. L. Fill masonry cores with grout and immediately consolidate each cell with a mechanical vibrator having a 3/4 inch head and operating at 5000 RPM submerged. M. Pour grout to 1 ½" below top of unit except at finish course, immediately remove grout or mortar on exposed faces. N. Form construction joint by stopping 1 ½" below top of wall 3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Install reglets, anchors, nailing strips, bolts, and other items specified in other Divisions of these specifications in masonry walls as indicated on the Drawings or as required for the work of other trades CLEANING AND POINTING (As necessary to avoid sandblasting) A. During Construction: Remove mortar and grout droppings from concrete block wall surfaces immediately with fiber brushes and water to prevent adhesion. Wash clean all surfaces. Attachments: No anchors or supports shall be attached to the masonry walls during construction operations unless authorized by the Construction Manager. B. Pointing: When mortar in the joints has slightly stiffened and prior to tooling, solidly fill all interstices and voids between block units or veneer units and the mortar and other materials as well as lime pin holes with mortar as work progresses. C. Completed Block Masonry Work: 1. After completion of pointing and tooling operations, thoroughly clean interior and exterior block surfaces of building, yard and planter walls of soil and spotting prior to acceptance of the work by the Owner and prior to receiving above grade waterproofing sealer treatment hereinafter specified in Division 7 of these Specifications. 2. If the Inspector requires additional cleaning to remove any remaining mortar or grout stain or other materials, the Contractor shall be required to apply additional coats of specified clear waterproofing sealer treatment material as directed by the Inspector at no added cost to the Owner SANDBLAST FINISH A. Required: As directed by the Construction Manager wherever new masonry wall surfaces remain stained or defaced by mortar or any other foreign matter to an unacceptable degree. B. Cleaning: Clean such surfaces by light sandblasting at no added cost to the Owner. Avoid damaging masonry surfaces and joints during sandblasting operations. END OF SECTION

216 SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Architecturally exposed structural steel. 3. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 1 Section Special Environmental Requirements. 3. Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures. 4. Division 1 Section Submittal Procedures Appendix A Green Building Product Information Submittal Form. 5. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. 6. Division 1 Section LEED Requirements Section 2.4 for Low Emitting Materials. 7. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for setting of anchor bolts, concrete foundations, and for as-built survey of concrete work. 8. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. 9. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 10. Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements. C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchors for casting into concrete. 2. Loose bearing plates to receive Structural Steel DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents, or exposed to public view SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section Submittal Procedures. Submit the Green Building Product In-formation Submittal Form a minimum 2 weeks prior to product delivered to site. B. Product Data: Submit Green Building Product Information Submittal Form a minimum 2 weeks prior to product delivered to site. Incomplete forms will be rejected and returned to the Contractor for completions. No work can be done on-site until the form is completed and sub-mitted for review. C. Product Data: 1. Producer s or Manufacturer s Specifications recommended installation instructions, laboratory test reports and other data required to prove compliance with the specified requirements. a. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. b. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. c. Shear stud connectors. d. Shop primers

217 Structural Steel 2. Nonshrink grout. D. Shop Drawings: Show complete details and schedules for fabrication of structural steel components and shop assembly of members. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchor bolts and other embedded structural steel. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify shop drawing details by reference to Sheet and Detail Number on the Contract Drawings. 6. Submit erection plan sequence and procedures. E. LEED Submittals: 1. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Product Data for materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum combined total of 20 percent of cost of all recycled content materials used for Project. 2. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Product Data for materials which, by project s end, total 20 percent of combined building materials (by cost) that are regionally extracted, processed and manufactured materials. 3. Credit EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2: Manufacturers' product data for sealants, adhesives and paints, including printed statement of VOC content and material safety data sheets. F. Welding certificates: Submit Certificates certifying welders employed on the work verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months. G. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, professional engineer, and testing agency. H. Manufacturer s Mill Certificate: Submittal shall certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. I. Mill Test Reports: Submit manufacturer s certificates indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. J. Test Reports: Submit reports of tests conducted on shop and field welded and bolted connections, including data on type of tests conducted and test results. K. Shop and Field inspection is required. L. Submit material cost data for all materials required to construct the work in place. The cost data should be marked up to the General Contractor. If the work is self performed the material cost shall reflect the actual cost of the material without mark up. M. Provide manufacturer s information/data sheet or a letter from the manufacturer indicated the location of manufacture, amount of recycled content (post consumer and post industrial percentage) in the product, and the location of raw material harvest if within 500 miles of the project site FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements, lines, grades and elevations agree with measurements shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete Contractor shall furnish the Steel Contractor accurate as-built drawing of bolt settings. B. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the correctness, conformity, accuracy and execution of structural steel work QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CASE or CSE. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Cbd or Sbd. C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1, P2, P3 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

218 Structural Steel E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: California Building Code, Title AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." a. Paragraph of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: 1) This approval constitutes the owner s acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as part of his preparation of these shop drawings. b. Paragraph is deleted in its entirety. c. Paragraph of the above code is hereby modified by the deletion of the following sentence: 1) The contract documents specify the sequence of schedule of placement of such elements. d. Structural steel members exposed to public view, including canopy and trellis framing, shall be considered Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS), and shall be fabricated, delivered and erected per Chapter 10 of the above code. 3. American Welding Society "Code D1-1 Structural Welding Code". 4. A.I.S.C. Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 5. R.C.R.B.S.J. Specifications for "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 Bolts". F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. B. Deliver materials, structural steel and components to the job site properly marked to identify location for which they are intended. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on the approved shop drawings. C. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Materials: LEED Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project. B. Regional Materials: LEED Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Provide at least 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regionally extracted, processed and manufactured materials. C. Indoor Environmental Quality: Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)

219 Structural Steel D. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992. E. Channels, Angles, M-shapes, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36. F. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36, or ASTM A 572, Grade 50 where indicated on Contract Drawings. G. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B welded seamless pipe, Standard weight class or as indicated on Contract Drawings, Black finish except where indicated to be galvanized. I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 as indicated, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain finish. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. D. Threaded Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or as indicated on the Contract Documents. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened. 3. Finish: Plain. E. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel. F. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel. G. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20. C. Indoor Environmental Quality: Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) GROUT A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404, Size No. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi in 7 days, or as indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi in 7 days, or as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Indoor Environmental Quality: Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) FABRICATION

220 Structural Steel A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including Standard tolerance limits, of AISC's "AESS Supplement" to Modern Steel Construction, May 2003 issue, for structural steel framing identified as architecturally exposed structural steel. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. 2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. H. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. I. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. J. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. K. Bases and Bearing Plates: Shop weld to columns and members attached to concrete SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces SHOP PRIMING a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds

221 Structural Steel A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M. 1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize structural steel members as indicated on Contract Drawings. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq.ft. galvanized coating SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements

222 Structural Steel B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Surveys: Establish permanent benchmarks necessary for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar items, before erection proceeds. E. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. F. Splice members only where indicated, unless, with the Engineer s approval, splices not indicated would result in lower costs due to reduced shipping or other expenses. For splices not indicated, submit structural calculations prepared and signed by a Civil engineer licensed to practice where the project is located. G. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. H. Do not use thermal cutting during erection, unless approved specifically by the Engineer. When gas cutting is permitted, finish the gas cut section to a sheared appearance. I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. J. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth

223 Structural Steel 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the repair paint manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. END OF SECTION

224 SECTION MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless 3. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 5. ASTM A143, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement 6. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 7. ASTM A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip 8. ASTM A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High-Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications 9. ASTM A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High- Temperature Service, or Both 10. ASTM A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 11. ASTM A283, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates 12. ASTM A307, Standard Specifications for Carbon Steel Bolts,Studs, and Threaded Rod (60,000 psi Tensile Strength) 13. ASTM A312, Standard Specification for Seamless Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes 14. ASTM A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems 15. ASTM A384, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies 16. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 17. ASTM A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing 18. ASTM A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 19. ASTM A564, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 20. ASTM A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings 21. ASTM A786, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates

225 Miscellaneous Metals 22. ASTM A992, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes 23. ASTM B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 24. ASTM D7091, Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals 25. ASTM F467, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use 26. ASTM F468, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, Socket Head Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use 27. ASTM F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs 28. ASTM F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 29. ASTM F844, Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ANSI/ASME B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS A5.4, Specification for Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding 2. AWS A5.9, Specification for Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes and Rods 3. AWS A5.10, Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods 4. AWS B2.1 Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification 5. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code, Steel 6. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code, Aluminum 7. AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code, Stainless Steel 8. AWS D10.4, Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing 9. AWS D10.12, Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe E. Federal Specifications (FS) 1. FS No. RR-S , Safety Equipment, Climbing F. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) G. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning 2. SSPC SP-5, White Metal Blast Cleaning 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Before beginning fabrication of structural steel, the Contractor shall submit complete shop and erection drawings showing details of methods, materials, tolerances on adjustable connections, and finishes. Shop drawings shall give complete information necessary for the fabrication and erection of the component parts of the structure including the location, type, and size of all welds and bolts. Drawings shall clearly distinguish between shop or field welds and bolts. 2. Separate plans for the setting of anchors and bearing plates, prepared in coordination with concrete placement drawings, shall be submitted and approved prior to the placement of concrete. B. Weld Procedure Qualifications 1. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) shall be submitted per AWS D1.6, or AWS D1.2 as applicable. Prequalified procedure may be submitted. The WPS forms shall be per AWS

226 Miscellaneous Metals 2. Welder, Welding Operator, and/or Tack welder Qualification Test Records shall be submitted on Form NE-4 of AWS D1.1 for approval for all welding personnel proposed for employment on the project. 3. Test shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 and shall be made using the positions to be used in the work. 4. The Engineer may require additional test plates as the work progresses and may demand the removal from the project of any welder whose work is not satisfactory, regardless of the quality of the test welds. 5. ICC-ES reports for self-drilling screws shall be submitted. C. Prior to the start of fabrication, the Contractor shall establish and submit an identification system for marking of material ordered to special requirements and for field identification of assemblies and assembly components QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding welder qualification requirements and welding procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D In lieu of performing welding operator or tack welder qualification tests, the Contractor may employ personnel possessing a current AWS certification in accordance with ASW D1.1 or City of Los Angeles, Department of Building and Safety certification for the type of welding operation to be performed. B. Records of steel manufacturer shall be kept, materials shall be properly identified, and shop fabrication records shall show that the proper material was incorporated into each item. Such records shall be available to the Engineer upon request DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 2 A. Erection and identification marks shall be applied to the members by painting or other suitable means, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall take reasonable care in the proper handling and storage of articles or materials during erection operations to avoid accumulation of dirt and foreign matter. The Contractor shall remove from the articles or materials, dust, dirt, or other foreign matter that accumulates during construction. Coated surfaces shall be protected from abrasion or other damage during handling, storing, and erecting. C. Materials taken from stock shall comply with the appropriate ASTM standards, including the applicable test reports, prepared at the mill where the material was manufactured, or at a testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carbon Steel 1. Carbon steel bars, shapes, and plates shall be in accordance with ASTM A36, ASTM A108, ASTM A283, or ASTM A992 with a minimum yield of 36 ksi. 2. Steel tubing in rounds and shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM A500 Grade B. 3. Pipe (including handrails, pipe columns, and light standards) shall be in accordance with ASTM A53, Grade B 4. Light gauge galvanized sheet metal shall be in accordance with ASTM A446 Grade A with a G90 coating, cold rolled. 5. Cold-rolled sheet metal shall be in accordance with ASTM A366, commercial quality. B. Stainless Steel 1. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, materials in contact with water, intermittently or continuously, or in a wet or moist environment shall be stainless steel. a. Stainless steel bars and shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM A276 Type 316 Condition A, or Type 316L Condition A where welding is required, unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. b. Stainless steel plate, sheet, and strip shall be in accordance with ASTM A167 Type 316 No. 1 finish, or Type 316L No. 1 finish when welding is required, unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. c. Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A312 Type 316L. d. Tubing specified by outer diameter and thickness shall be in accordance with ASTM A554 Grade MT316L

227 Miscellaneous Metals 2. Where age-hardened stainless steel is shown on the drawings, the steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A564 Type 630, cold finished. Heat-treatment or age-hardening shall be conducted at 900 F, except bolts and shafts, which shall be age-hardened at 1150 F. 3. Spring nuts, bolts, and other materials shall not be fabricated using powder metallurgy (PM) methods. C. Aluminum 1. Aluminum bars, plate, and shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM B221 Alloy 6061 or Alloy Temper designation shall be as shown in the drawings. 2. Aluminum plate shall be in accordance with ASTM B209 Alloy 5052 or Alloy Temper designation shall be as shown in the drawings. D. Fasteners 1. Threads for bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with ANSI B1.1. a. Threads for bolts 1 inch and less in diameter shall be coarse-thread series and threads for bolts 1-1/8 inches and greater in diameter shall be the 8-pitch thread series. b. The fit shall be Class 2 free fit; except that Class 3 medium fit shall be provided in holes tapped for studs. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, bolts shall have heavy hexagon heads and heavy hexagon nuts. 3. The lengths of studs and bolts, excluding anchor bolts, shall provide a projection of not less than 1/4 inch nor more than 1/2 inch through the nut when it is drawn tight; however, in exposed locations the projection shall be not more than 1/4 inch. 4. Carbon Steel Fasteners, Anchor Bolts, Machine Bolts, and Threaded Rods a. Anchor bolts, machine bolts, and threaded rods shall be heavy hex and in accordance with ASTM A307 Grade A, with Supplement S-1 where welding is required, unless otherwise shown. b. Nuts shall be in accordance with ASTM A563 Grade A, heavy hex. c. Hardened washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F436, Type Stainless Steel Fasteners a. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, stainless steel fasteners shall be used where the material will be immersed in water, intermittently or continuously, or in moist-environment installations. (1) Type 316 or 316N stainless steel fasteners shall be in accordance with ASTM A193 Grade B8MA, or Grade B8MNA for bolting and stud material, and ASTM A194 Grade 8MA or Grade 8MNA for nuts. Fasteners for age-hardened stainless steel shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594 Type 630. (2) Stainless steel washers shall conform to ASTM F844 except that they shall be punched from steel conforming to ASTM 167 Type 316 or machined from bar stock conforming to ASTM A276 Type 316. (3) Stainless steel fasteners shall be Type 316 or 316N unless otherwise shown on the drawings. An anti-galling compound shall be applied in the fastener threads in accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions. 6. Silicon Bronze Fasteners a. As shown on the drawings, silicon bronze cap screws, nuts, fasteners, and plugs shall be of copper-silicon alloy in accordance with ASTM F467 or ASTM F468 Alloy C65100 or Alloy C Self-Drilling Fasteners E. Electrodes a. Self-drilling fastener diameter, thread form, length, head style, and drill point shall be as shown on the drawings. b. Acceptable Products: Illinois Tool Works, Inc., TEKS /TRAXX Screws; or equal

228 Miscellaneous Metals 1. Electrodes for welding carbon steel shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 except that electrodes shall have a minimum yield of 70 ksi. Electrodes for shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) shall be low hydrogen. 2. Electrodes for welding stainless steel to stainless steel shall be in accordance with AWS A5.4 or AWS A5.9 Classification E316L/ER316L. 3. Electrodes for welding stainless steel to carbon steel shall be in accordance with AWS A5.4 or A5.9 Classification E309L/ER309L or E312/ER Electrodes for welding aluminum shall be in accordance with AWS A5.10. a. Alloy 6061/6063 shall be welded using ER 4043 filler metal. b. Alloy 5052 shall be welded using ER 5356 filler metal. F. Welded Stud Anchors 1. Welded stud anchors shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 2. Welded stud anchors to be embedded in concrete and shown to be attached to the miscellaneous metal shall be standard steel stud units intended for automatic welding process, furnished complete with an arc shield (ferule) or heat-resistant ceramic or equivalent. G. Anti-Galling Compound 1. The anti-galling compound to be used on threads of stainless steel fastener assemblies in potable water systems shall be an ANSI/NSF 61-certified compound. 2. Acceptable Products: Laco, Slic-Tite; Hercules, Real-Tuff; or equal FABRICATION OF MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK A. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions, as described in ASTM A143 and ASTM A384, during fabrication of articles to be galvanized to properly fabricate and prepare the material to prevent embrittlement, warpage, and distortion. 1. Steel tubing with cover plates welded at both ends or other enclosed assemblies shall have vent and drain holes drilled at locations shown on the assembly fabrication drawings approved by the Engineer. The holes shall be drilled during fabrication and before galvanizing. B. Prior to beginning fabrication, the Contractor shall field-verify existing conditions and dimensions and shall be responsible for accuracy and layout of the work. C. The Contractor shall review the drawings and the approved shop and erection drawings and shall report any discrepancies to the Engineer for clarification before starting fabrication. D. After shop fabrication, stainless steel welds shall be cleaned, pickled, and passivated in accordance with ASTM A380. Contaminated surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM A380 as approved by the Engineer FABRICATION WELDING PROCESS RESTRICTIONS A. SMAW will be permitted for manual welding. B. In automatic welding, both the rate of travel and the rate of deposition of metal shall be controlled automatically. C. Submerged arc welding (SAW) will be permitted for automatic or semi-automatic welding. D. Gas metal-arc welding (GMAW) will be permitted for semi-automatic welding, short circuit transfer mode is not allowed. E. Flux-core arc welding (FCAW) will be permitted only where specifically approved by the Engineer and provided that auxiliary gas shielding process is used FABRICATION WELDING OF CARBON STEEL A. Except for the modifications set forth in this section, the welding of miscellaneous metals or articles fabricated from carbon steel shall be in accordance with AWS D Electrodes for field welding shall not exceed 3/16 inch. 2. Welding of pipe or tubing shall be in accordance with the recommendations of AWS D

229 Miscellaneous Metals 3. Runoff tabs shall be removed by hand flame-cutting or other means as close to the edge of the finished member as practical, followed by grinding to a smooth surface contiguous with the adjacent metal FABRICATION WELDING OF STAINLESS STEEL A. Welding of miscellaneous metal articles fabricated from stainless steel shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Welding on austenitic stainless steel shall be performed by SMAW, GMAW, gas-tungsten arc welding (GTAW), or FCAW process using direct current. 2. Weld procedures shall be qualified in accordance with AWS B2.1. a. Interpass temperature shall not exceed 350 F. 3. Welding of stainless pipe or tubing shall be in accordance with the recommended practices of AWS D Stainless steel to carbon steel welds will not require stress-relieving heat treatment. 5. Stress-relieving of austenitic stainless steel, where deemed necessary by the Engineer, shall be performed at 750 F for 4 hours, plus an additional 1/2 hour for each additional inch over 1/2 inch weld section thickness, or a full solution anneal at 1900 F shall be performed with rapid quench. 6. Stainless steel welds shall be deburred and ground smooth using grinding wheels of aluminum oxide. Carborundum or other carbon bearing wheels are not acceptable for use on stainless steel surfaces. Wire brushing of stainless steel surfaces shall be performed only with stainless steel brushes. Grinding wheels and brushes used to clean stainless steel shall not have been used on carbon steel surfaces WELDING ALUMINUM A. Welding of aluminum shall be performed by GMAW or GTAW process using electrodes in accordance with AWS A CARBON STEEL CHECKERED PLATE A. Carbon steel floor plates shall be in accordance with ASTM A786 Pattern No. 4 or No NOSING FOR CONCRETE STAIRS A. Nosing for concrete stair treads and landings shall be an approved, flush mounted, non-slip, abrasive metal with hatched pattern finish having a 1/4-inch minimum nose depth. Nosing shall be 3 inches minimum width, of the length shown on the drawings, and shall be furnished in 1 piece. If the nosing length is not shown on the drawings, the nosing length shall be equal to the stair tread width less 3 inches each end. Nosing shall be drilled and countersunk for bolt-connection to the steps and landings. B. Acceptable Products: Balco Metalines, CA-300; Wooster Products Inc., Type 101, or equal LADDERS A. Fixed access ladders shall be in accordance with CCR Title 8, General Industry Safety Orders, Ladders. B. Ladders shall be made of carbon steel unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 1. Ladders shall be fabricated with flat steel side rails and solid steel bar rungs. Side rails and rungs shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp edges. 2. Rungs shall be plug-welded into drilled holes in the side rails and seal-welded to the inside of the rail. 3. Wall and floor brackets shall be welded to the side rails, and the joint shall be seal-welded on all planes. 4. Carbon steel ladders shall be prepared and coated in accordance with Section Fixed ladders 20 feet or greater in length shall be fabricated with cages designed per CCR Title 8 unless the ladder is for use in a vault or a manhole or is used infrequently or only in emergency. C. Fall-Prevention System 1. Where indicated on the drawings or in the specifications, the Contractor shall equip each ladder with a complete rigid fall-prevention system

230 Miscellaneous Metals 2. Ladders 20 feet or greater in height shall be equipped with a fall-prevention system, consisting of a fabricated ladder cage, except for ladders used in vaults, manholes or used infrequently or for emergency purposes. A fall prevention system may be substituted for a cage in the above cases. 3. Under specific circumstances (exceptions defined in CCR Title 8 and in the preceding paragraph), a fallprevention system may be substituted for a ladder cage. The fall-prevention system shall meet or exceed the requirements of FS No. RR-S and Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulation No The system shall consist of stainless steel Type 316, fixed and notched rail, dismount section, mount section, rest piece, rung clamp assembly, removable extension kit, and cast manganese-bronze sleeve with cadmium-plated steel roller bearings and double-locking snap. 4. All fall-prevention system components shall come from the same manufacturer. 5. Acceptable Products: North Safety Products, Saf-T-Climb; or equal SHOP FINISHES PART 3 A. Galvanizing 1. Miscellaneous metal parts shall be galvanized when shown on the drawings. 2. Galvanizing for shapes, plates, and fabricated items shall be in accordance with ASTM A123 with an average weight per square foot of 2.0 ounces and not less than 1.8 ounces per square foot. 3. Bolts, anchor bolts, and other threaded fasteners required to be galvanized shall, after being properly cleaned, be coated in accordance with ASTM A153 Table Except where otherwise specified, galvanizing shall be performed after fabrication, including cutting, punching, welding, and drilling. 5. Prior to galvanizing, items shall be cleaned to meet SSPC SP-3. a. Weld flux, weld spatter, minor weld defects, paint, and grease shall be removed. b. Parts shall be alkaline cleaned and then acid pickled to remove mill scale and surface rust. 6. Galvanizing shall be done after all fabrication is completed. 7. Where galvanized light-gauge sheet goods are specified, upset edges of factory die-punched holes need not have the bare edges re-galvanized and the galvanized coating adjacent to such die-punched edges need not be repaired. 8. Painting: Miscellaneous metalwork shall be prepared and coated in accordance with Section EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation and anchorage details for items of miscellaneous metal, regardless of ultimate usage ornamental, structural, architectural, mechanical, or electrical shall be as shown on the drawings. Details not shown on the contract drawings shall be developed by the Contractor and indicated on the shop drawings. B. Anti-galling compound shall be used each time stainless steel fasteners or combination stainless steel and silicon bronze fasteners are assembled or reassembled. C. Embedded Items 1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, anchor bolts, embed plates, or straps, openings for pipes or conduits, and inserts for pipe hangers or other anchorages shall be installed prior to the placing of concrete. Items shall be accurately placed and securely held while concrete is being placed. 2. Plates shall be bolted into their frames and the frame shall be incorporated within the concrete forms before concrete is placed. 3. Pipe sleeves and blockouts shall be accurately placed and securely held to avoid movement or displacement while concrete is being placed. 4. Openings formed in concrete for anchor bolts, the space beneath equipment base plates, and the space around gate frames shall be grouted in accordance with Section after the equipment or structure has been accurately set in position and braced to prevent movement

231 Miscellaneous Metals D. Anchor Bolts 1. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set, and maintained in position by templates while placing concrete. 2. Anchor bolts shall be cleaned of dirt and other foreign substances prior to placing concrete. Tape or other protection shall be provided to prevent anchor bolt threads from being filled with concrete. 3. Whenever it is impractical to place anchors or anchor bolts required for the installation of comparatively light metal accessories before the concrete is placed, concrete anchors shall be installed in accordance with Section REPAIR OF GALVANIZED SURFACES A. Galvanized surfaces damaged during fabrication, shipping, erection, or at any time prior to acceptance of the work shall be prepared and recoated according to one of the following methods. 1. The damaged components shall be thoroughly stripped and cleaned of all coating, and new galvanizing shall be applied by the hot-dipped process in accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 as applicable. 2. The method of repair of damaged areas shall be as approved by the Engineer. Damaged areas shall be repaired by one of the methods listed below as specified in ASTM A780 with the following modifications: a. Repair surfaces shall be blasted clean to meet SSPC SP-5 or cleaned by mechanical means to meet SSPC SP-3 and coated immediately before any deterioration (flash-rust) occurs. b. Sprayed Zinc (Metallizing): 4.0 mils minimum thickness using a wire with at least 98 percent zinc. c. Zinc-Based Solders: 4.0 mils minimum thickness. 3. Dry film thickness shall be verified using a magnetic-type gauge in accordance with ASTM D The finished surface shall be of uniform texture, free of lumps, coarse areas, and loosely adhered areas FIELD PAINTING AND COATING A. Miscellaneous metalwork that was not previously coated in the shop shall have the specified coating applied in the field in accordance with Section END OF SECTION

232 SECTION WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water repellent coating on the exterior concrete surfaces and walls. B. Related Sections: The following specifications contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. B. Samples of each substrate indicated to receive water repellent, 12 inches square, with specified repellent treatment applied to half of each sample. C. Applicator Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the applicator complies with requirements. D. Certification by water repellent manufacturer and waterproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of VOCs QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing products similar to those indicated for this Project and that has a documented record of successful in-service performance for past 5 years. B. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who employs only persons trained and approved by water repellent manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOC's and use of hydrocarbon solvents PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer: 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 2. Substrate surfaces have cured for less than 28 days. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F are predicted within 24 hours. 4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown into vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Submit a written warranty, covering 5 years from date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Water Repellent Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but, are not limited to the following: 1. Weather Seal Siloxane ProSoCo, Incorporated, (714)

233 Water Repellents 2. Thorosiloxane - 85" Harris Specialty Chemicals Incorporated, (800) Or equal WATER REPELLENTS A. Siloxanes: Penetrating water repellent. Alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents material. Test for moisture content, according to repellent material manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface is sufficiently dry. B. Test for ph level on concrete surfaces, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent material. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving waterrepellent treatment have been installed and cured, unless specifically allowed and approved otherwise by the water repellent and sealant manufacturer. E. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of products, prepare a field test application area in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by the Engineer to demonstrate the final effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned application. Proceed with work only after the Engineer approves test application or as otherwise directed APPLICATION A. Apply a heavy saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise directed. B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions CLEANING A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. B. Immediately clean excess water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION

234 SECTION SINGLE-PLY FULLY ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICATION A. This section includes the following: 1. Thermoplastic single-ply fully adhered membrane roofing system. 2. Roofing rigid insulation. 3. Insulation cover board REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of the Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C1289, Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board 2. ASTM D4434, Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing Classification: Type III. 3. ASTM D751, Test Methods for Sampling and Testing PVC Sheet Material 4. ASTM D3045, Retention of Properties After Heat Aging 5. ASTM D1004, Tearing Strength 6. ASTM D 2136, Low Temperature Bend 7. ASTM G154, Accelerated Weathering Test (Pass after 5000hrs) 8. ASTM D1024, Linear Dimension Change 9. ASTM D570, Weight change after immersion in water 10. E108, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings C. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 1. ASHRAE Handbook Equipment, Chapter 1 2. ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals, Chapter 32 D. Factory Mutual (FM) 1. FM 4450, Approval Standard for Class I Insulated Steel Deck Roofs 2. FM 4470, Approval Standard for Class I Roof Covers E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1. UL Class A assembly F. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) 1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 1. SMACNA, HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 2. SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

235 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and SPRI for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this section PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install a watertight Single Ply PVC membrane roofing and base flashing system with compatible components that will not permit the passage of liquid water and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Underwriters Laboratory Inc. Northbrook,IL a. Class A assembly C. FM Listing: Provide single-ply membrane roofing system, base flashings, and component materials that meet requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM markings. A. The installed roofing system shall have Factory Mutual I-90 wind-uplift resistance rating. D. Regulatory Requirements: The products and work specified in this section are subject to the rules and regulations of the local air quality management district (AQMD) and the California Air Resources Board (CARB). The roofing system specified is subject to change. In the event that a rule or regulation change makes the specified roofing system non-compliant, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in accordance with Section SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified, include manufacturer literature and product data substantiating those materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, for the following: 1. Base flashings, and membrane terminations. 2. Insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. C. Samples: Submit the following product samples for verification: 1. Field sheet of color specified. 2. Flashing Membrane. 3. Roofing insulation. 4. Insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system and is eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty. E. Installer Qualification Data: Submit list of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineer s and owners, completion dates and other information specified. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of roofing system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance with building code in effect for Project from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Maintenance Data: Submit and include in the maintenance manuals specified in Section I. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roof installation QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Work for this section shall be performed by experienced installers that are specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this project; and are approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing

236 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product; and are eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL, FM, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; complying with ASTM E108, for application and slopes indicated. C. Pre-installation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct conference at Project site. Notify participants at least 7 calendar days before conference. 1. Meet with Engineer, roofing installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing removal and installation, ventilation ducting removal and installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Review loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certifications, and inspection and testing, if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures or actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight location to ensure no significant moisture pickup and maintain at a temperature exceeding roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls. 1. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect roofing insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. C. Do not leave unused membranes and other sheet materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and moisture. D. Deliver and store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. E. Deliver sealants used for ductwork in original unopened containers, clearly labeled with product description and identification. Labeling shall include expiration date for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions when applicable. Store and handle per manufacturer s instructions PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. All products and equipment shall comply with SCAQMD

237 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing 2. Roofing materials shall not be applied during inclement weather or when air or surface temperature is below 50 F. 3. Roofing materials shall not be applied to the roof surface with any unsettled deficiency that could impair the quality of the roofing system WARRANTY PART 2 A. In addition to the warranty specified in Section 01740, Guarantee and Warranty, the Contractor shall provide a 10- year roof leak warranty. Should the Contractor-furnished-roof develop any leaks (irrespective of cause of leak, except as hereafter provided) during the 10-year period after acceptance by Metropolitan, the Contractor, at its own expense, shall repair the roof, bringing the roof back to its watertight state. The Contractor shall effect required repairs within 48 hours of notification by Metropolitan of the existence of a roof leak. 1. Should, during the time that the roof leak warranty is in force, Metropolitan desires to modify roofing penetrations, the Contractor agrees to make the modifications at an agreed-upon price, and the roof leak warranty shall continue in effect should the Contractor make those modifications. Should Metropolitan elect to have another firm or its own forces modify roofing penetrations, the roof leak warranty shall continue in effect, except for roof leaks that trace their source to the modified roofing penetration. PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Sarnafil 60-mil Fully Adhered Single-Ply PVC Roofing System over mechanically fastened rigid insulation. B. Johns Manville 60-mil Fully Adhered Single-Ply PVC Roofing System over mechanically fastened rigid insulation. C. Tremco Thermoplastic Tri-polymer Alloy (TPA) Single-Ply Roofing System over mechanically fastened rigid insulation. D. Or equal MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Main Field Sheet: Thermoplastic PVC or TPA membrane (60-mil thick) with fiberglass or polyester reinforcement with no felt backing. B. Main Field and Flashings: White, minimum initial reflectivity of 0.83, minimum initial emissivity 0.90, minimum solar reflective index (SRI) of 100. C. Field Sheet Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434 (latest version), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing". Classification: Type II (Fiberglass Reinforced) and Type III (Polyester Reinforced). D. Flashing Membranes: Thermoplastic PVC membrane (60-mil thick) with no felt backing AUXILIARY MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Membrane Adhesive water based and warranted and approved for use in this system by the manufacturer. B. Flashing Adhesive low VOC adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. C. Mastic Sealant: One-part polyurethane sealant as recommended by manufacturer. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470; designed for fastening insulation, cover board, termination bars and roofing membrane to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. E. Pre-Molded Flashings: 1. Corners: Pre-molded reversible corner manufactured with a non-reinforced thermoplastic membrane. 2. Pipe Boots: Pre-molded pipe boot manufactured with a non-reinforced thermoplastic membrane. 3. T-Patches: Pre-molded patch manufactured with a non-reinforced thermoplastic membrane. 4. Penetration Pans: One-piece, molded unit with a square base flange slit on one side and with a welding tab WALKWAY PADS A. A textured, flexible, polyester reinforced thermoplastic membrane manufactured using an ultraviolet resistant polyvinyl chloride formulation

238 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing B. Typical Physical Properties: 1. Color: Gray 2. Dimensions: 36 inches wide x 60 feet long 3. Thickness: Not less than 70-mil INSULATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide preformed roofing insulation boards selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. At cricket areas and where structural roof decks are not adequately sloped to maintain positive drainage, tapered units shall be used to provide a minimum slope of ¼ inch per foot to drain. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid closed-cell polyisocyanurate thermal insulation board integrally laminated to heavy black (non-asphaltic) fiber-reinforced felt facers complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, with 25 psi capacity. C. The overall thermal resistance of the roof insulation shall not be less than R-19 unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. D. Cover board for the insulation shall be ¼ inch thick roof board with glass-mat facings bonded to water-resistant gypsum core and pre-primed with non-asphaltic coating as approved by insulation manufacturer. E. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation 2. Johns Manville, Energy-3 3. Or equal F. Insulation Cover Board: 1. DensDeck Prime by Georgia Pacific 2. Or equal 2.08 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roofing insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roofing insulation to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Sealant shall be non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistant, compatible with mating material, liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic, meeting the fire hazard classification rating of 25/50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Duct Sealer: Miracle #D-618, United McGill UNI-WELD, United Sheet Metal Duct-Sealer. C. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O JOINT SEALANTS A. Joint sealants shall be in accordance with Section and as recommended by roofing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied for compliance with requirements. B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position. C. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at roof penetrations and terminations and match the thicknesses of insulation required

239 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Determine the segments of above deck ventilation ducting that will need to be removed in order to remove the old roofing materials and/or install the new roofing materials PREPARATION A. At existing roof areas to be re-roofed, completely tear off existing roofing to the deck. 1. Existing Roofing Removal: Existing roofing (including one or more layers and the insulation) shall be completely removed down to the deck. Roofing removal includes, but is not limited to, the removal of existing flashings, cants, metal edging, and all other necessary items prior to the installation of new roof insulation, SBS roofing system, flashing systems, metal edging and all other required items. The Contractor shall make use of a trash chute to remove the existing roofing from the buildings. Trucks or trash bins shall be parked or placed on areas designated by the Engineer. a. Throwing of roofing debris from the roofs shall not be allowed. Submit roof removal and disposal procedures to the Engineer for approval in the pre-installation conference. b. Properly dispose off-site all removed roofing debris. c. Roof removal shall be properly coordinated with the installation of all of the new work, and shall be limited to those buildings necessary for a schedule progress of the work. d. Care should be taken to avoid any damage to the decks, vents, and/or walls during roof removal. e. Roof decks shall not be left exposed overnight. f. Temporary protection of roof deck, in case of rain, is the Contractor s responsibility. g. The work area shall be cleaned at the end of each shift as directed by the Engineer. B. Ventilation Ducting Removal: Existing sections of the HVAC ventilation ducting may be removed in order to facilitate the removal of the existing roof and the installation of the new roof. Prior to any duct removal, the Contractor shall isolate the HVAC electronics (direct digital control system, dampers, etc.) to prevent any damage to the HVAC control system. If any ventilation ducting is removed, the Contractor shall ensure operation of the building s HVAC system to the maximum extent possible. Additionally, any air-handling units taken off-line due to ventilation ducting removal shall only be off-line for a maximum of 4 business days. The Contractor shall validate that the HVAC system is fully operational to the Engineer prior to completion of all work. C. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. D. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains, ventilation ducting and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. E. Existing utilities, piping systems, and electrical and mechanical equipment to remain in place shall be adequately supported, protected, and maintained until work is complete. Potable water line can be removed and replaced if necessary GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install single-ply membrane roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of NRCA/SPRI. B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Cooperate with inspecting and testing agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing single-ply membrane roofing system. D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so the interior of the building, insulation and deck is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Only tear off as much roofing that can be covered in the same day, no phase roofing is allowed. 1. Provide cutoffs at end of each day's work to cover exposed deck and insulation with an approved overnight tie in detail. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system

240 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roofing insulation. C. For areas over metal or plywood deck, mechanically fasten the dens deck and insulation boards to the metal deck with screws and plates to comply with the manufacturer s installation instructions. The screws and plates shall be specifically designed and sized for fastening the specified board-type insulation to the roof deck type indicated. D. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding ¼-inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4-inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. E. Where the required overall insulation thickness is greater than 2.5 inches, install the required thickness in 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Utilize and install tapered insulation to achieve the slopes indicated on the drawings. Succeeding layers of insulation shall be applied over the first layer of insulation utilizing hot mopped roofing asphalt. F. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush with ring of drain. G. Attachment of the insulation and cover board shall be in accordance to the insulation and roofing system manufacturers' written instructions to meet the specified wind-uplift requirements SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. The surface of the insulation or substrate shall be inspected prior to installation of the roof membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no surface roughness or contamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged insulation boards shall be removed and replaced. B. Single-ply roofing membrane shall be attached with adhesive and perimeter fasteners according to Factory Mutual s requirements. C. Membrane overlaps shall be shingled with the flow of water where possible. D. Full-width rolls shall be fastened perpendicular to the direction of the steel deck flutes, wood plank, and precast or cementitious wood fiber panel where possible. E. Over the properly installed and prepared substrate, approved water based adhesive shall be poured out of the pail and spread using notched ¼ inch x ¼ inch x ¼ inch (6 mm x 6 mm x 6 mm) rubber squeegees. The adhesive shall be applied at a rate according to Manufacturers requirements. No adhesive is applied to the back of the membrane. Do not allow adhesive to skin-over or surface-dry prior to installation of membrane. F. The roof membrane is unrolled immediately into the wet adhesive. Adjacent rolls overlap previous rolls by 3 inches (75 mm). This process is repeated throughout the roof area. Immediately after application into adhesive, each roll shall be pressed firmly into place with a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. G. Weld coverstrips at all seams that do not have a factory selvage edge. MEMBRANE FLASHINGS A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Engineer and Manufacturer s. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor s expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry, smooth, and solvent-resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn into the building. B. Low VOC Adhesive for Membrane Flashings 1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, adhesive shall be applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an area which can be completely covered in the same day's operations shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. 2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as required by welding techniques

241 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing 3. Install peelstop as required by the manufacturer with approved fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Peelstop is required by manufacturer at the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and valleys according to manufacturer's details. 4. Manufacturer's requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall be followed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by manufacturer prior to installation. 5. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches (0.2 m) above roofing level unless otherwise accepted in writing by the Engineer and manufacturer technical department. 6. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior corners and miters shall be cut and hot-air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contact with the roofing membrane. 7. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter-flashed top edge. 8. Flashings shall be terminated according to manufacturer recommended details. 9. All flashings that exceed 30 inches (0.75 m) in height shall receive additional securement as recommended by manufacturer METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: 1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 (latest issue). 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - latest issue. 3. Metal, other than that provided by Manufacturer, is not covered under the Manufacturer warranty. 4. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition exists daily. 5. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. 6. Metal joints shall be watertight. 7. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). 8. Airtight and continuous metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips are to be fastened 12 inches (0.3 m) on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall. 9. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches (100 mm). 10. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by 1- ½ inch (38 mm) minimum and shall be securely sealed from air entry. CLAD EDGE METAL A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Engineer and Manufacturer. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor s expense. B. All metal flashings shall be fastened into metal base or solid wood nailers as recommended by manufacturer. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. C. Adjacent sheets of PVC clad shall be spaced ¼ inch (6 mm) apart. The joint shall be covered with 2 inch (50 mm) wide aluminum tape. A 4 inch minimum (100 mm) wide strip of flashing membrane shall be hot-air welded over the joint. Exercise caution at perimeter of roof. Workers shall follow OSHA safety procedures WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. PVC Walkway Pads: A textured, flexible, reinforced thermoplastic walkway membrane; Sarnafil SarnaTRED; JMPVC Walkpad; Tremco TPA Walkway Pads; or equal TEMPORARY CUT-OFF

242 Single-Ply Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed to provide a 100% watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even by installing partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop. The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in a continuous heavy application of sealant. When work resumes, the contaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation fillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of these materials shall be used in the new work. B. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Contractor shall provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly-completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor s expense DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. All sheet metal ductwork shall be erected in a first class and workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of UBC, UMC, and CEC, and in accordance with SMACNA s Low Pressure Duct Standards, and as specified above. All transverse duct joints shall be taped airtight. B. Duct installation shall be as follows: 1. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealer to male end connectors before insertion, and afterwards to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. 2. Flanged joints: Seal with neoprene rubber gaskets. 3. To ensure airtight ducts, seams shall be sealed with liquid- or mastic-type sealants. Taped joints will not be permitted. All joints shall be in accordance with SMACNA Seal Class A. 4. Duct sealants shall not be installed when surface and ambient temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. Temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants shall be maintained as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Joints shall be sealed, as required, to limit total system leakage to a maximum of 3-1/2% of the specified equipment airflows COMPLETION A. Prior to demobilization from the site, the work shall be reviewed by the Engineer and the Contractor. All defects noted and non-compliances with the Specifications or the recommendations of Manufacturer shall be itemized in a punch list. These items must be corrected immediately by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Manufacturer prior to demobilization. B. All Warranties referenced in this Specification shall have been submitted and have been accepted at time of contract award FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of the installation and the delivery to Manufacturer by the Contractor of a certification that all work has been done in strict accordance with the contract specifications and Manufacturer's requirements, an inspection shall be made by a Technical Representative of Manufacturer to review the installed roof system PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Engineer. 1. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair base flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION

243 SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICATION A. This section includes requirements for the following types of sheet metal fabrications: 1. Exposed trim and fascia 2. Fabricated copings and metal flashing 3. Reglets 4. Scuppers, gutters and downspouts 5. Other flashing and trim required for complete installation 1.02 REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of the Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality 2. ASTM A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 3. ASTM A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 4. ASTM B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal 5. ASTM B749, Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet and Plate Products 6. ASTM C509, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material 7. ASTM D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 8. ASTM D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code-Steel 2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel D. Federal Specifications (FS): QQ-L-201F(2), Lead Sheet E. Factory Mutual (FM), Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Latest Edition 1.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement

244 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing capable of resisting the wind uplift forces according to recommendations in FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet C. Thermal Movements: 1. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 2. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. 3. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 4. Temperature Change (Range): 120 ºF, ambient; 180 ºF, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that does not allow water infiltration to building interior QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA s Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown, unless more stringent requirements are indicated SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: Show items in detail prior to fabrication. C. Samples: Only as requested DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. B. Store delivered products in clean, safe, dry area PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Protection 1. Typical Exposed Finishes: Protect as required against construction damage; remove prior to final acceptance. B. Scheduling, Sequencing: Insure timely delivery of items to be embedded in work of other sections and furnish setting drawings or templates and setting instructions for exact installation WARRANTY PART 2 A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified herein shall not deprive Metropolitan of other rights Metropolitan may have under other provisions of the contract documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the contract documents as specified in Section B. Special Finish Warranty: Submit a written warranty, signed by manufacturer, covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the specified warranty period and agreeing to repair finish or replace roof panels that show evidence of finish deterioration. Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film integrity. C. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of acceptance. PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metals 1. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A526, Grade G90 coating, minimum 24 gauge unless otherwise noted or recommended by SMACNA

245 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A924/A924M, Grade A or ASTM A653/A653M, G90 zinc coating; 24-gauge (0.02-inch) core steel, shop prefinished with fluoropolymer coating (Kynar polyvinylidene fluoride resin)] coating; custom color as selected by Engineer. 3. Lead Sheet: ASTM B-749, L50049 Grade. B. Wood Nailer: Provide treated wood nailers complying with requirements of Section as required for lead counter-flashing. C. Flashing Compound 1. Description: Polyisobutylene type, nonskinning, nondrying sealant, bulk or tape as required by installation conditions. Tape shall be 1 inch minimum width, 1/16-inch minimum thickness. 2. Acceptable Products: United Technologies Corp., Presstite Products "Permagum and ;" Cushion-Lok Div. of Morrison and Co.'s "CL-50;" or equal. D. Items for Permanent Protection of Dissimilar Metals and Materials: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D Bituminous Paint: ASTM D Compressible Tape: ASTM C509. Closed cell black neoprene tape, size as noted, with adhesive system as recommended by manufacturer FABRICATION A. Preparation: Verify measurements in field and coordinate with related work as required for proper and adequate fabrication and installation. B. General Requirements 1. Items of standard manufacture may be furnished in lieu of specially fabricated items provided such items meet requirements shown or noted. 2. As much as practicable, form and fabricate sheet metal items in shop. Where circumstances require on-site fabrication, provide quality equal to shop work. 3. Accurately reproduce profiles and bends as shown or noted. Ensure that intersections are sharp, even, and true; that plane surfaces are free from buckles and waves; that seams follow direction of water flow. 4. Where work is not otherwise shown or noted, design and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA. 5. Reinforce properly as required for strength and appearance. 6. Cut, fit, and drill sheet metal as required to accommodate accessory items and work adjacent or adjoining. 7. Exposed Edges of Sheet Metal: Fold, bead, or return; no raw edges will be permitted. C. Sheet Metal Usage 1. Where items are noted as typical sheet metal, use galvanized sheet steel of thickness noted under Materials article unless otherwise noted. 2. For interior sheet metal items, use galvanized sheet metal unless otherwise noted. D. Sheet Metal Joints 1. In general, provide lock joints; where impractical, lap, rivet, and solder. 2. Turn lock joints on exposed surfaces in direction of flow. 3. Solder joints and miters. 4. Where positive joining is required, arc-weld in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, or braze. E. Soldering 1. Pre-tin edges 1-1/2-inches both sides prior to soldering

246 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2. Use heavy soldering coppers of blunt design. 3. Immediately after applying flux, solder slowly with well-heated coppers, thoroughly heating seams and completely sweating solder through full width with at least 1 inch width along seams. 4. After soldering, immediately neutralize any acid flux and flush with clean water. F. Expansion-Contraction of Sheet Metal Runs: Provide loose locking slip joint at maximum 8 feet from external or internal corners, at every 24 feet of straight runs unless manufacturer recommends more frequent interval, and 1 at center of runs less than 20 feet but more than 8 feet long. G. Flashing, Counter-Flashing, Trim and Fascia. 1. Fabricate runs in maximum lengths subject to expansion-contraction allowance with minimum number of joints. 2. Form counter-flashings to lock rigidly into reglets where required. 3. Exposed Edges: Turn back and hem 1/2 inch. H. Reglets 1. Fabricate from typical sheet metal for conditions shown or noted. 2. Where reglets will be surface-applied, form 1 inch long locking tongue at ends for installing with lapped slip joint. I. Coping 1. Fabricate from typical sheet metal to profile shown on drawings. 2. Use continuous edge strips with drips at bottom edges on exterior wall side. Use slotted holes for fasteners on roof wall side if continuous cleats or edge strips are not used. 3. Form joints between sections with either alternate 4 or 5 as shown on plate 68, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, unless shown otherwise. 4. Fabricate corners with mitered joints, riveted and soldered. 5. Fabricate ends of coping terminating at vertical building surfaces to form a slot for the installation of sealant. 6. Fabricate exterior ends of coping closures of same appearance as exterior wall side. J. Scuppers 1. Fabricate from typical sheet metal as indicated on the drawings. 2. Form scupper body and flashings according to plate 26, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual unless otherwise shown. K. Gutters and Downspouts 2.03 FINISHES 1. Fabricate from typical sheet metal as indicated on the drawings. 2. Exposed Edges: Turn back and hem 1/2 inch. 3. Fabricate corners with mitered joints, riveted and soldered. 4. Form according to plate 26, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual unless otherwise shown. A. Sheet Metal: Manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise noted. 1. Galvanized Sheet Steel: After fabrication, touch-up abraded surfaces, in accordance with Section Paint per Section unless shown otherwise. 3. Factory finish with a two coat fluoropolymer where shown on Drawings. B. Permanent Protection of Dissimilar Metals and Materials 1. Items in Contact with Dissimilar Metals: Protect as required to prevent corrosion and discoloration from galvanic action

247 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2. Items in Contact with Concrete, Masonry Mortar, or Plaster or Not Accessible after Installation: Underlay items with asphalt-saturated felt or apply heavy coating of bituminous paint at areas of contact. 3. Items in Contact with Moisture Absorbent Materials or Preservative-Treated Wood: Apply heavy coating of bituminous paint to such items including lead and excluding stainless steel. 4. Fasteners and Anchors of Materials Dissimilar from Items Fastened: Mask as required to prevent corrosion and discoloration from galvanic action. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive items and verify following: 1. That dimensions are correct to receive items. 2. That adjacent or adjoining surfaces are clean, dry, reasonably smooth, and free from defects; that wood surfaces to be in contact with sheet metal are free from projecting nails. 3. Absence of other conditions that will adversely affect installation. B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected PREPARATION A. Coordinate as required with installation of related work. B. Where flashing and sheet metal work is related to built-up bituminous roofing, install under supervision of built-up bituminous roofing applicator INSTALLATION A. General Requirements 1. Install items in accordance with SMACNA unless otherwise noted. 2. Standard Catalog Products: Install in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise noted. 3. Where installation requires performing work of fabrication, meet requirements of applicable standards of fabrication article. 4. Apply flashing compound at slip joints or wherever else metal-to-metal contact occurs and movement may be anticipated. 5. Unless otherwise noted or required by manufacturer, fasten sheet metal runs to underlying material by nailing through slotted holes in flange at 3 inches on centers. Provide waterproof washers wherever required fasteners penetrate flashings. Where sheet metal occurs over roofing materials or other sheet metal, use nails with 1 inch metal disks. 6. Insure that items are installed in true and accurate alignment with other items and related work; that joints are accurately fitted; that exposed surfaces are free from dents; that corners are reinforced; that seams are watertight. B. Flashing and Counter-Flashing: Where lips and caulking are not practical for securing items in reglets, use lead wool packed tight with lead wedges on vertical surfaces and molten lead on horizontal surfaces. C. Elastic Flashing 1. Stretch material only in pulling over pipe or similar projections from slab or wall surfaces. Allow material to relax before making final attachment. 2. Do not apply flashing in cold temperatures without benefit of warming device recommended by flashing manufacturer. 3. Comply exactly with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION

248 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. General SECTION JOINT SEALANTS 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber 4. ASTM D545 Standard Test Methods for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Types) 5. ASTM D994/D994M - 11 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) Active Standard 6. ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 7. ASTM D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness 8. ASTM D3204, Standard Specification for Preformed Cellular Plastic Joint Fillers for Relieving Pressure C. Federal Specifications (FS) 1. FS TT-S-00227, Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) 2. FS TT-S-00230, Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single-Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Surface preparation and installation instructions shall be submitted. Material safety data sheets, physical and mechanical properties, and, as applicable, primer data sheets shall be submitted. B. Material Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available shall be submitted. C. Quality Control Submittals: Applicator qualifications documentation showing minimum of 5 years experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope shall be submitted. D. Warranty shall be submitted REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Air Quality Rules: Sealant products and primer materials specified herein shall meet the requirements of local air quality management district (AQMD) rules. However, the sealant and primer systems specified are subject to change by mandate issued by the AQMD. If a mandate is issued prior to application, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer who will specify alternative sealant and primer systems to be used. Surface preparation, materials, methods, and sealant and primer application equipment shall meet local AQMD and other pertinent regulations in effect during the course of the week. B. Pollution Control: Proposed sealant and primer materials shall conform to the restriction of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the local air pollution control district with regional jurisdiction on the location of the project. C. ANSI/NSF 61 Certification Materials that will come in contact with water in the treatment process, or with chemicals added to the treatment shall be certified for use in potable water applications. ANSI/NSF 61 certification

249 Joint Sealants must be provided by an approved testing laboratory. Where no material or product requiring ANSI/NSF 61 certification is available, the Contractor shall provide documentation in their submittal supporting that fact, and shall propose only materials or products that otherwise meet the technical specifications for review and approval by the Engineer DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Sealant products and primers shall be delivered in sealed, original, and labeled containers that bear the manufacturer's name, type of sealant or primer, brand name, batch number, and color designation. B. Materials shall be stored and mixed only in areas designated for that purpose and approved by the Engineer. C. Sealant products and primers shall be stored at a minimum ambient temperature of 50 F and a maximum temperature of 100 F, in a well-ventilated area, with precautionary measures taken to prevent fire hazards. D. Storage and mixing areas shall be kept clean and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Containers shall be kept tightly closed after each mixing or use. E. NO SMOKING signs shall be hung over the door and inside of each sealant products and primers storage or mixing room WARRANTY PART 2 A. Sealed joints shall be warranted against adhesive and cohesive failure of the sealant and for water tightness of sealed joints for a period of 5 years after the date of final acceptance of the sealed joints GENERAL PRODUCTS A. This section specifies products that are subject to the prequalified products provisions of Section B. Like items of materials shall be supplied by one manufacturer to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement throughout the project, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. Sealant characteristics shall be as follows: 1. Uniform, homogeneous 2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed 3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding D. Unless specifically noted, sealant color shall match the adjoining area. The color shall be approved by the Engineer prior to application. E. Table 1 lists the sealant types acceptable for each joint location. Table 1. Joint Sealant Schedule Joint Location Sealant Type Expansion, Contraction, and Control Joints at: Concrete Walls in Non-Hydraulic Structures 1, 3 Concrete Floor Slabs in Non-Hydraulic Structures 1, 3 Masonry Walls 1, 3 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 1, 3 Ceramic Tile Floors As Recommended by Manufacturer Ceramic Tile Walls As Recommended by Manufacturer Precast Concrete Wall Panels 1,

250 Joint Sealants Table 1. Joint Sealant Schedule Material Joints at: Joint Location Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames (Exterior) 1 Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames (Interior) 1 Wall Penetrations (Exterior) 1, 3 Wall Penetrations (Interior) 1, 3 Floor Penetrations 1, 3 Ceiling and Roof Penetrations 1, 3 Sheet Metal Flashings 1, 3 Sheet Metal Roofing and Siding 1 Precast Concrete Wall Panels 1, 3 Precast or Prestressed Floor Panels (Interior) 1, 3 Precast or Prestressed Floor and Roof Panels (Exterior) 1, 3 Other Joints: Threshold Sealant Bed 1, 3 Between Countertops and Backsplashes 5 Around Plumbing Fixtures 5 Openings Around Pipes, Conduits, and Ducts Through Fire-Rated Construction Concrete Form Snap-Tie Holes Immersed or Buried Joints 2, 3 Chemical Containment Area Expansion Joints 3 Caulking Around Wood Trim Inside Buildings 4 Chemical Containment Area Construction Joints 3 Joint Size 6 Cementitious Grout Less than 1 inch wide 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1 to 2 inches wide 1, 2, 3 Over 2 inches wide Not Permitted Sealant Type 2.02 SEALANT TYPES A. Type 1 - Silicone, Nonsag, Not Immersible, for Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic 1. Silicone base, single-component, and chemical curing in accordance with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T; or FS TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A 2. Capable of withstanding movement up to 50 percent of joint width 3. Acceptable Products: Dow Corning Corp., No. 795; Devcon, Silite; or equal

251 Joint Sealants B. Type 2 - Multi-Part, Self-Leveling, Immersible, or Buried 1. For plane horizontal joints, self-leveling compounds in accordance with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T; or FS TT-S-00227, Type I 2. For joints subject to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic, a compound providing non-tracking characteristics; Shore A hardness range of 25 to 35 in accordance with ASTM D Acceptable Products: Pacific Polymer Elasto-Thane 227, Type R; Sika, Sika Flex 2C NS/SL; or equal. C. Type 3- Multi-Part Polyurethane, Nonsag, Immersible, or Buried 1. Two-part polyurethane with the physical properties of a cured sealant in accordance with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; or FS TT-S-00227, Type II 2. For vertical joints and overhead horizontal joints, nonsag compounds in accordance with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; or FS TT-S-00227, Type II 3. Acceptable Products: Pacific Polymer Elasto-Thane 227, Type R; Sika, Sika Flex 2C NS/SL; or equal. D. Type 4 - One-Part Acrylic Terpolymer, Nonsag, Not Immersible 1. Capable of withstanding movement up to 7.5 percent of joint width; Shore A hardness of 55 maximum in accordance with ASTM D Acceptable Products: VIP, 5710; Pacific Polymers, Elasto-Tex; or equal. E. Type 5- Sanitary Sealant 1. Silicone sealant formulated to resist mold growth and repeated exposure to high humidity while retaining adhesion, flexibility, and color 2. Acceptable Products: Dow Corning, 786; General Electric, Sanitary Sealant; or equal. F. Type 6 - Fire-Resistant Penetration Seal 1. Medium-density fire-resistant foam that will retain stability at high temperatures 2. Acceptable Products: Dow Corning Corp., Fire Stop Sealant or Foam; 3M Corp., Fire Barrier Caulk CP25 and Putty 303; General Electric, Pensil 851; or equal JOINT FILLERS AND BACKUP MATERIAL A. Joint fillers and backup materials shall be in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Sponge rubber filler shall be preformed, non extruding, resilient, non bituminous type in accordance with ASTM D1752, Type I. 2. Backer rod shall be an extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam rod, non extruding, non staining, and of appropriate diameter in accordance with ASTM D3204, or may be closed-cell neoprene material in accordance with ASTM D1056, Type 2, with grade and class as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. 3. Bituminous filler shall be of the thickness shown on the drawings, and shall be preformed asphalt impregnated, expansion joint material in accordance with ASTM D BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Where shown, bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape (electrician's tape) that will satisfactorily adhere to the premolded joint material or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width as the joint. Tape shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer JOINT CLEANER A. Joint cleaner shall be a noncorrosive and nonstaining type in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's printed recommendations and shall be compatible with joint-forming materials PRIMER A. Primer shall be a nonstaining type, shall suit the application, and shall be in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's printed recommendations

252 Joint Sealants PART GENERAL EXECUTION A. Installation of sealants shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Before the sealants are installed, the Contractor shall confer with the Engineer to discuss the temperature and the weather forecast. The Contractor, with the Engineer's approval, shall select the most favorable weather and suitable time for the installation of the sealant. If the Contractor fails to confer with the Engineer prior to installing sealants, the sealant work may be rejected. Rejected work shall be removed and reinstalled. C. Use of more than 1 type of sealant for the same joint will not be permitted. D. Horizontal and sloping joints of no more than 1-percent slope shall have self-leveling joint sealant or nonsag sealant. E. Joints steeper than 1-percent slope, vertical joints, and overhead joints shall have nonsag joint sealant PREPARATION A. Joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions shall be verified as acceptable for sealant application. B. Deteriorated Existing Sealant: 1. The Contractor shall be directed by the Engineer where to remove and reapply sealant to surfaces that have existing sealant and/or backer rod in a deteriorated condition. The existing sealant and/or backer rod identified to be removed by the Engineer shall be removed and disposed of in a legal manner. All work where materials contain PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyls) asbestos and lead shall be performed in accordance with applicable specification sections, CCR Title 8, and all applicable laws and regulation, including personnel testing monitoring. 2. Deteriorated sealant shall be removed, and the surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of contaminants and foreign materials that may interfere with bond formation between the sealant and the substrate. 3. Final surface preparation for all concrete surfaces to receive sealant shall be accomplished by abrasive blasting using angular steel grit or garnet to provide a surface texture and condition of 80 grit sand paper. C. Application of Sealant to New Concrete: 1. Concrete surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, fully cured, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, and other foreign materials that may interfere with bond formation between the sealant and the substrate. 2. Final surface preparation for all concrete surfaces to receive sealant shall be accomplished by abrasive blasting using angular steel grit or garnet to provide a surface texture and condition of 80 grit sand paper. 3. Hand or mechanical cleaning shall be performed as required by these specifications as approved by the Engineer. 4. Adjacent surfaces shall be masked where necessary to protect them and maintain neat edges. 5. Primer shall be applied to dry surfaces. D. Compatibility of sealant with joint-shaping materials and release tapes shall be approved by the Engineer. E. Joint dimensions shall be examined to achieve the required width to depth ratios, as shown on the drawings INSTALLATION A. Joint filler shall be used to achieve the required joint depths. 1. Backup material shall be installed in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. Full-length sections of joint-filler material shall be used. Where splices are required, the number of splices shall be minimized. Splices shall be fitted and neat. B. Joint sealants shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C C. Joints shall be sealed around window, door, and louver frames; expansion joints; and elsewhere as shown on the drawings. D. Joints shall be tooled slightly concave after the sealant is installed, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. E. Joints shall be finished free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags

253 Joint Sealants 3.04 CLEANING A. Surfaces adjacent to the sealed joints shall be cleaned of foreign substances and excess sealant. B. Damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities shall be replaced. END OF SECTION

254 SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of the Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A224.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI A250.6, Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application). 3. ANSI A250.8, Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A366, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 3. ASTM A568, General Requirements for Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold Rolled. 4. ASTM A569, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. 5. ASTM A653, Standard Specifications for Hot-Dip Galvanized Coils and Sheets Quality Norms. 6. ASTM A924, Standard Specifications for Hot-Dip Galvanized Coils and Sheets Tolerances. 7. ASTM E90, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 8. ASTM E152, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 9. ASTM E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) 1. DHI RL, Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. DHI A115, Specifications for Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. F. Steel Door Institute (SDI) G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames referenced to the Engineer s door mark and hardware group. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, glass and louver opening sizes and locations, conditions at openings, details of construction,

255 Steel Doors and Frames location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on the Drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. C. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to Metropolitan that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Provide fire-rated door assemblies that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined in accordance with ASTM E152 and which are labeled and listed by UL or Warnock Hersey. 2. Oversized Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide manufacturer's certification that doors conform to standard construction requirements of tested and labeled doors for rated door assemblies except for size. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have Temperature Rise Rating of 450 degrees Fahrenheit maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 4. Source Limitation: Obtain steel doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 2 A. Acceptance at Site 1. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Properly identify each item with number used in the Drawings. 2. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Engineer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. B. Storage and Protection: Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Ceco Door Products 2. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 3. Security Metal Products Corp. 4. Or equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process complying with ASTM A653 and ASTM A924 with A60 or G60 coating designation

256 Steel Doors and Frames D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gauge sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built in at exterior walls, hotdip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable DOORS A. Provide metal doors of ANSI A250.8 grades and models specified below or as indicated on the Drawings or schedules: 1. Non-Rated Doors and Frames: a. Interior Doors: Level 2, heavy-duty, Model 1 with flush top, minimum 18-gauge cold-rolled sheet steel faces. 2. Labeled Fire Doors and Frames: a. Conform to listing requirements of UL. b. Label each door and frame for class of rating required. c. Modify drawing details if required to secure label and clearly identify modifications on Shop Drawings. 3. Manufacturer s Standard Door Louvers: a. Provide door louvers where indicated, with inverted Y-shape blades. Door louver frames and blades shall be fabricated from same steel and of same thickness as associated door. b. Provide aluminum 18- to 14-mesh, inch diameter, 5056 clad insect screen with frame at exterior doors. 4. Pre-Manufactured Door Louver: a. Extruded Aluminum, 16-gauge minimum thickness with clamp-in frame and inverted V sight proof blades. b. Screen: Furnish manufacturer s standard on exterior doors. c. Finish: Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: Construction Specialties; Dowco; Panelouvre; or equal. 5. Transoms: Where door assemblies are indicated to include transom panels, transom shall be fabricated from same steel and of same thickness as associated door including rating of door, where opening requires rated assembly. 6. Oversized Doors: Where oversize doors are shown, provide unit of greater thickness steel than for standard door, where recommended by door manufacturer. B. Door Cores 2.04 FRAMES 1. Core Stiffeners: Vertical steel stiffeners or steel channel grid. 2. Core Filler a. Sound deadening mineral composition, incombustible, moisture resistant, chemically inert in accordance with reviewed manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise noted. b. Fire Resistive: Labeled door core material shall conform to requirements of labeling authority. A. Provide fully welded steel frames for doors and windows of types and styles as indicated on the Drawings and schedules. Conceal fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior: Fabricate of minimum 16-gauge cold-rolled steel. 2. Exterior: Fabricate of minimum 14-gauge hot-rolled galvanized steel. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped and smoke gasketed frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double door frames

257 Steel Doors and Frames 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at jobsite. Comply with ANSI requirements. 1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffeners or unitized steel grid with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with ANSI standards. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8-inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4-inch. Not more than 3/4-inch at bottom. 3. Close door tops and bottoms. 4. Provide grounding tabs on concealed side at base of door frames. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel. C. Tolerances: Comply with ANSI A D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either coldrolled or hot-rolled steel. E. Fabricate exterior doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with ANSI A Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 14 gauge inverted steel channels. F. Fabricate removable mullion frame with concealed supports. G. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. H. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested in accordance with ASTM E90, and classified in accordance with ASTM E Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with sound ratings of STC 33 or better. I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of DHI A115 and ANSI A250.6 for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. J. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware and wall guards where shown. Drilling and tapping for surface applied hardware may be done at project site. K. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with DHI RL. L. Shop Painting: Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before application of paint. 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. M. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gauge steel. 1. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors

258 Steel Doors and Frames 2.06 FINISHES A. Field Painting: As specified in Section B. Factory Finishing: 1. Galvanized with A60 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A653. Wipe coat is not acceptable. 2. Phosphate treat metal for paint adhesion. 3. One shop coat of baked-on rust inhibiting prime coating compatible with field coat painting. PART INSTALLATION EXECUTION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of ANSI , unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI Install fire rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition PROTECTION A. Protect installed doors and frames against damage from other construction work SCHEDULES A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and finish hardware requirements, see Door and Hardware Schedule on the Drawings. END OF SECTION

259 SECTION DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic protective trim units in each finish, color, and texture required for each type of trim unit indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each finish specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of door hardware schedule. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. D. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. DOOR HARDWARE

260 b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. c. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. d. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. 5) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of AHC, detailing City Engineer s final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Door Hardware: DOOR HARDWARE

261 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and City Engineer about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for egress operation. E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with California Building Code Chapter 11B. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to City Engineer, Contractor conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. DOOR HARDWARE

262 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Requirements for access control. 5. Address for delivery of keys. G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys and permanent cylinders to City Engineer by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware and keying with City Engineer and City Facilities & Maintenance WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware which fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Locksets: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE

263 b. Manual Closers: Twenty five years from date of Substantial Completion MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for City s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hager Companies. b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MK). c. Bommer. 2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A Certified Grade 1-600; interlocking extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy with pin-less assembly applied to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with minimum 27 bearings for each leaf. Hinges shall be capable of UL certification up to and including 90-minute applications for wood and metal doors, without requiring special fire pins installed in door or frame. B. Geared Hinges: DOOR HARDWARE

264 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McKinney. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PE). 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latch bolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: As indicated in Hardware Sets. 2. Levers: Stainless steel wrought or cast. 3. Dummy Trim: Match Lever lock trim. 4. Operating Device: Lever with (roses). E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latch bolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Certified Operational and Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Corbin-Russwin; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RU). b. Sargent; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. c. Schlage; an Allegion Group Company. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Match Existing System (MES). B. Lock Cylinders: Provide Mortise Cylinders with Key Section to match that currently in use at City of Monrovia Department of Public Works. C. Construction Master Keys: Provide 4 construction (keyed alike) keys. D. Construction Cores: Provide cylinders and locks with temporary construction cylinders for use during construction, replaceable by permanent cylinders. DOOR HARDWARE

265 2.6 KEYING A. Keying System: Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: a. Provide final keying for permanent cylinders to City s existing GGMK Key System. B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a key control reference number, as instructed by City Engineer s instructions and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: Provide the following: a. Cylinder Keys: Three per each lock or cylinder. 2.7 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rockwood; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RO). 2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; Heavy-duty cast shell rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Closers shall be tested to minimum ten million cycles. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide multi-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Corbin-Russwin; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. b. Norton; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (NO) c. LCN; an Allegion Group Company MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; cast brass, bronze, or stainless steel base metal. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rockwood; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RO). b. Ives. DOOR HARDWARE

266 2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RF). b. Rockwood; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company DOOR GASKETING AND ASTRAGALS A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot ( cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible silicone seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. B. Astragals: BHMA A156.22; Overlapping, flat full height satin stainless steel, UL10C fire listed. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. National Guard Products. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PE) THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated, per detail. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. National Guard Products. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PE) METAL PROTECTIVE PLATES A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from inch-(1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel; with four sides beveled, with manufacturer's counter-sunk fasteners (CSK), sized two inches less width of door, by height indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rockwood; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RO). b. Ives FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. DOOR HARDWARE

267 B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on doors, provide sleeves for each through bolt (SNB). 2. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to frames. b. Steel Through (Sex-Nut) Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DOOR HARDWARE

268 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings. B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cylinders to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cylinders with permanent cylinders as directed by City Engineer. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section "Joint Sealants." F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Install floor stops maximum four inches from adjacent wall. Do not mount floor stops where they will present hazard to pedstrian traffic. G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Strikes: Adjust alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolts. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. DOOR HARDWARE

269 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train City s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Section "Demonstration and Training." 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Doors: AR01, AR02 Set: 1 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Mortise Lock (public restroom) ML2042 LWA M17 KA 630 RU 2 Cylinder MORTISE 626 MES 1 Door Closer R 7500 DA M SN NO 2 Kickplate K " 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Threshold verify type 172A / 2727A x MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Sweep 29326CNB PE Notes: Install kick plate on both sides of door Doors: AR03A Set: 2 3 Hinge TA /2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 LWA M17 KA 630 RU 1 Cylinder MORTISE 626 MES 1 Surface Closer 7500 SN NO 1 Kickplate K " 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Threshold verify type 17A / 2727A x MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Sweep 29326CNB PE DOOR HARDWARE

270 Doors: AR03B Set: 3 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 LWA M17 KA 630 RU 1 Cylinder MORTISE 626 MES 1 Door Closer Plus CPS7500-T SN NO 1 Kickplate K " 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold verify type 172A / 2727A x MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Sweep 29326CNB PE 1 Latch Protector 325 US26D RO Doors: AR04 Set: 4 3 Hinge TA /2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 LWA M17 KA 630 RU 1 Cylinder MORTISE 626 MES 1 Door Closer J7540ST x 7786JP SN NO 1 Kickplate K " 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 441H US26D RO 1 Threshold verify type 172A / 2727A x MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing S88D PE 1 Sweep 29326CNB PE Doors: AR05 Set: 5 3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 LWA M17 KA 630 RU 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE

271 SECTION FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 1 apply to this Section. B. This Section includes assemblies incorporating fiberglass sandwich panels and aluminum frame systems as follows: 1. Roof (sloped, overhead) assemblies. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 05120: Structural Steel. 2. Section 07600: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3. Section 07900: Joint Sealants PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide assemblies, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. B. Failure includes the following: 1. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. Water leakage. 3. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. 4. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. 5. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 6. Delamination of fiberglass-sandwich-panel faces from panel cores

272 C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated by structural design data on Drawings. 2. Concentrated Live Loads on Overhead Assemblies: 300 lbf applied to assemblies at locations that will produce greatest stress or deflection. 3. Seismic Loads: As indicated by seismic design data on Drawings. 4. Load Combinations: Calculate according to requirements of applicable code indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Assemblies: 1. Vertical Assemblies: Limited to 1/180 of clear span for each assembly component. 2. Overhead Assemblies: Limited to 1/180 of clear span for each assembly component. E. Roof Assemblies: Class A per ASTM E 108 or UL 790. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for assemblies. B. Shop Drawings: For assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each frame system intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Fiberglass sandwich panels. 5. Flashing and drainage

273 F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for assemblies. H. Maintenance Data: For assemblies to include in maintenance manuals. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Entity capable of assuming engineering responsibility, including preparation of Shop Drawings, and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: For fiberglass sandwich panels, a qualified manufacturer whose facilities, processes, and products are monitored by an independent, accredited quality-control agency for compliance with applicable requirements in ICBO ES AC04, "Sandwich Panels." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for assemblies' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including testing conducted by an independent testing agency and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-test-response characteristics are indicated for assemblies and components, provide products identical to those tested per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Reports: To be furnished by systems manufacturer in accord with Div.1, Submittals. The manufacturer shall submit certified test reports by an independent testing organization for each type and class of panel system. Reports shall verify that the material will meet all performance requirements of this specification. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if by current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project. Test reports required are: 1. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (ASTM E-84 by UL 723)

274 2. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635) 3. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244) 4. Impact Strength (UL 972) 5. Tensile Bond Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D-1037) 6. Shear Bond Strength (ASTM D-1002) after 5 different aging conditions 7. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72) 8. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) 9. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E-108) 10. Class A Roof System UL Listed (UL-790) 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Water leakage. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace panels that exhibit defects in materials or workmanship. 1. Defects include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fiberbloom. b. Delamination of coating, if any, from exterior face sheet. c. Discoloration of exterior face sheet of more than 8.0 units Delta E when measured according ASTM D d. Delamination of panel face sheets from panel cores. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Aluminum-Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering

275 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading of finishes. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for assemblies is based on Kalwall Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Major Industries, Inc. 2. Skywall Translucent Systems; Vistawall Group (The). 3. Structures Unlimited, Inc ALUMINUM FRAME SYSTEMS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. B. Components: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: One-piece extruded-aluminum components C. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less than inch thick. D. Frame-System Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. E. Frame-System Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer. F. Anchors, Fasteners, and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding; compatible with adjacent materials. 1. At closures, retaining caps, or battens, use ASTM A 193/A 193M, 300 series stainlesssteel screws. 2. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 3. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended in writing by manufacturer

276 G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. H. Frame System Fabrication: 1. Fabricate components before finishing. 2. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: a. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. b. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. c. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within components, and moisture migrating within the assembly to exterior. 3. Fabricate sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component. 4. Reinforce components as required to receive fastener threads. 5. Weld components in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANELS A. Panel Construction: Assembly of uniformly colored, translucent, thermoset, fiberglassreinforced-polymer face sheets bonded to both sides of a grid core and complying with requirements applicable to panel materials in ICBO ES AC04, "Sandwich Panels." 1. Face-Sheet, Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or more per ASTM D Face-Sheet Burning Extent: 1 inch or less per ASTM D Face-Sheet, Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less per ASTM E Interior Face-Sheet, Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 per ASTM E Roof-Covering Class: Class A per ASTM E 108 or UL 790. B. Panel Thickness: 2-3/4 inches. C. Panel U-Factor: Not more than 0.53, measured in Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K) according to NFRC 100 or ASTM C 1363 using procedures described in ASTM C 1199 and ASTM E D. Panel Strength Characteristics: 1. Maximum Panel Deflection: 3-1/2 inches when a 4-by-12-foot panel is tested according to ASTM E 72 at 34 lbf/ sq. ft.), with a maximum inch set deflection after 5 minutes

277 2. Panel Support Strength: Capable of supporting, without failure, a 300-lbf (1334 N) concentrated load when applied to a 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter disk according to ASTM E 661. E. Grid Core: Mechanically interlocked extruded-aluminum I-beams, with a minimum flange width of 7/16 inch. 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, in alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. I-Beam Construction: One-piece extruded-aluminum components. 3. Grid Pattern: see drawings, not to exceed 12 x 24. F. Exterior Face Sheet: 1. Thickness: [0.070 inches (1.778 mm)] 2. Color: White 3. Color Stability: Not more than 3.0 units Delta E when measured according to ASTM D 2244 after outdoor weathering in southern Florida according to procedures in ASTM D 1435 with panels mounted facing south and as follows: a. Panel Mounting Angle: Not more than 32 degrees from horizontal. b. Exposure Period: 30 months for components of Class A roof assemblies]. 4. Erosion Protection: Manufacturer's standard G. Interior Face Sheet: 1. Thickness: inch. 2. Color: White H. Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Adhesive: ASTM D Compatible with facing and core materials. 2. Tensile and shear bond strength of aged adhesive ensures permanent adhesion of facings to cores, as evidenced by testing according to ASTM C 297 and ASTM D 1002 after accelerated aging procedures that comply with aging requirements for adhesives with high resistance to moisture in ICBO ES AC05, "Sandwich Panel Adhesives." I. Panel Fabrication: Factory assemble and seal panels. 1. Laminate face sheets to grid core under a controlled process using heat and pressure to produce straight adhesive bonding lines that cover width of core members and that have sharp edges. a. White spots indicating lack of bond at intersections of grid-core members are limited in number to 4 for every 40 sq. ft. (3.7 sq. m) of panel and limited in diameter to 3/64 inch (1.2 mm)

278 2. Fabricate with grid pattern per drawings that is symmetrical about centerlines of each panel. 3. Fabricate panel to allow condensation within panel to escape. 4. Reinforce panel corners ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulating Materials: Insulation to provide minimum 8% light transmission. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints

279 6. Weld aluminum components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum components will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed or welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters. D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within aluminum members and panels, and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations. F. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Erection Tolerances: Install assemblies to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches (76 mm); otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch (13 mm) over total length FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed assemblies with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas shall be tested according to ASTM E a. Test Procedures: Test under uniform and cyclic static air pressure. b. Static-Air-Pressure Difference: c. Water Penetration: None. 2. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, assemblies shall be tested according to AAMA and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements

280 END OF SECTION

281 SECTION GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes anti-graffiti coating. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 - General Requirements. 2. Section 09900: Painting and Coating SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Division 01. B. Samples: Submit Samples of coating system. C. Product Data: Submit anti-graffiti coating manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions, recommended coverage rates for types of surfaces to be treated, and evidence that coatings conform to requirements specified. Submit evidence of code approvals. D. Furnish Samples on the same materials to which coating will be applied on. Indicate satin or flat finish. Coat one-half of each Sample, with the other half non-coated. E. Installer: Submit written evidence the installer for the Work of this section has completed at least five projects of similar complexity within the past five years. F. Certificate and Summary Statement: Before Substantial Completion, submit a certificate stating that coatings applied conform to reviewed submittals and specified requirements. Provide a summary statement setting forth the following: 1. Number of square feet of each surface treated with coating, classified as to the kind of material treated, open pore or closed pore type, and whether vertical or horizontal. 2. The number of gallons of each type, class, or grade of coating required to treat involved surfaces, based on the number of square feet of each type and orientation of the material the coating was installed on. 3. Total gallons of each coating type, class, or grade installed. G. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish manufacturer's recommended graffiti removal instructions, and recommendations for recoating. Furnish names and addresses of cleaning firms and of suppliers of maintenance materials. H. Maintenance Material: Furnish five gallons of each product specified QUALITY ASSURANCE GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS

282 A. Manufacturer's Observation: Start coating application under the observation of the coating manufacturer s technical representative. Notify Project Inspector and coating manufacturer at least 72 hours before starting installation. B. Preliminary Tests: Perform tests on each kind of surface to be treated to establish the actual application rates required to provide the surfaces resistant to defacing and meet warranty requirements. Tests shall demonstrate the coating does not yellow, darken, mottle, or discolor any treated surface and those surfaces to be treated are dry. Established application rates shall not be less than those recommended in the coating manufacturer's technical data for the kind and surface orientation of the material. C. Compliance with Regulations: Materials shall comply with the current rules and regulations of the local air quality management district, with the rules regarding volatile organic compounds, and with FDA rules and regulations for dangerous materials in coatings. D. Materials shall meet requirements of SCAQMD regarding emission of solvents and other pollutants. E. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Anti-graffiti coating shall be product of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in manufacturing anti-graffiti coatings for at least 5 years. Manufacturer shall supply references of at least five satisfactory installations in which anti-graffiti coating has been in service for at least five years DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver coating materials to the Project site in containers bearing name and batch number of manufacturer, with seals intact PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection: Install temporary coverings and protection, and do not allow coating to contact plastic, planting soil, plants, asphaltic paving, roofing membranes, or other materials that are likely to be damaged by coating. B. Weather Conditions: Do not install coating during windy, wet, or excessively hot or dry weather conditions WARRANTY 1. Manufacturer shall provide a five year material warranty. 2. Installer shall provide a one year application warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. TSW anti-graffiti coating.: GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS

283 1. Acryli-Master anti-graffiti coating. Clear, matt finish, non-sacraficial, Low VOC coating. TSW, This Stuff Works, B. Coval Anti-Graffiti coating by Coval Molecular Coatings PROPERTIES A. Coatings shall not darken or discolor the treated surfaces and shall be non-toxic, compatible with standard polymer type sealing materials, conforming to AQMD 1113, and certified by manufacturer as suitable over paint finish. B. Colors of opaque materials shall match adjoining colors, or shall be selected from manufacturer's custom colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not start installation of coating if conditions are present that prevent or interfere with the correct preparation of surfaces or installation of coating system PREPARATION A. Remove dust, dirt, oil, grease, other deleterious substances and stain, and efflorescence and laitance from surfaces. Repair cracks and holes over 1/16 inch size. Spot prime cracks and holes 1/16 inch size and smaller and prime horizontal surfaces other than soffits with a heavy duty coating supplied by same coating manufacturer. Mask and protect adjoining surfaces and glass, unless coating is harmless and easily removed APPLICATION A. Install the anti-graffiti coating to surfaces indicated on drawings. B. Test graffiti resistant coating in an inconspicuous location to ensure adhesion and performance. C. Apply the anti-graffiti coating to surfaces indicated on drawings per manufacturer s recommended application methods and thicknesses CLEANING A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS

284 SECTION PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems C. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM D7091, Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Non-magnetic, Non-conductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals. 2. ASTM D1186, Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to a Ferrous Base D. Federal Standards (FS) 1. FS 595a, Colors Used in Government Procurement E. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) 1. NACE SP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings 2. NACE SP0274, High-Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC PA-1, Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting 2. SSPC PA-3, Guide to Safety in Paint Application 3. SSPC SP-1, Solvent Cleaning 4. SSPC SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning 5. SSPC SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning 6. SSPC SP-5, White Metal Blast Cleaning 7. SSPC SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 8. SSPC SP-10, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning G. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) 1. Rule 1107, Volatile Organic Content Regulation for Shop Applied Coatings 2. Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, Volatile Organic Content Regulation 3. Rule 1140, Abrasive Blasting 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Product data sheets (PDS) and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for each coating material, solvent, cleaning agent, or other potentially hazardous material to be used shall be submitted. B. Plans and Procedures: Safety procedures and disposal methods associated with acid etching shall be submitted. C. Coatings Schedule: At least 30 working days prior to the start of coating work, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of coating products to be used. The format of the coating schedule shall provide the information shown in Tables 1 and 2 provided at the end of this section. The list shall indicate the manufacturer's brand name of each material to be used and the surfaces to which each material is to be applied and the method of holiday testing

285 Painting D. At least 30 working days prior to the start of coating work, the Contractor shall submit a plan and detailed step by step procedure for abrasive blasting, and containing and disposing of blasting products and debris. E. The Contractor shall submit a letter certifying by name and product number that the specific coatings submitted for this project are approved by the coating manufacturer for inspection methods as directed herein under Quality Control article. F. Workers Qualifications: 1. At least 30 working days prior to the start up of coating operations, the Contractor shall submit a list of names with qualifications identifying the jobs the individuals will be performing on this project. The list shall include as a minimum, supervisors, quality control inspectors, abrasive blasters, coating applicators and paint mixers. Qualifications include formal training, certificates currently held, on the job training, years spent doing the job for which they are listed, and any other qualification the Contractor wishes to add. 2. The Contractor shall submit the experience and qualifications of employees assigned to perform DFT testing and porosity and holiday defect detection testing. The individual in charge of quality assurance shall be a NACE certified Coatings inspector Level 3 or SSPC equivalent. (Qualifications shall be as defined in Quality Assurance article below and item 1 above). G. Samples 1. Contractor shall submit 2 sample plates of each selected color in each material to be applied. Painting shall not be started until color samples have been approved. a. Each sample plate shall be of flat sheet metal, tempered hardboard, or other rigid sheet material. The size of the sample plate shall be 8 inches by 12 inches. b. Each sample plate shall illustrate the type and finish of each separate coat, including block fillers and primers, in each distinguishable color value. The primer shall cover the entire plate. The undercoat, in the selected (but lighter in shade than the finish coat) color, shall cover two thirds of the applied primer from one end of the plate. The finish coat shall cover half, no less than 4 inches, of the applied undercoat from the same end of the plate. Finish coat shall possess a gloss of no less than 70 units when measured at 60 degrees with a portable gloss meter. 2. Piping and conduit identification and color coding samples shall be submitted. H. Test and Certifications 1. Impresser tape system for surface profile testing and surface profile test results shall be submitted. 2. Certification shall be provided that color pigments have been ground in at the factory. Coatings not meeting this requirement will be promptly rejected for use on this project. Ground in at the factory means that all pigments (prime, inert, and color) must be added to the grind paste of the dispersion phase of the manufacturing process. Any subsequent tinting must be done with factory quality paste in the absolute minimum quantity possible. I. Manufacturers' Instructions: Current manufacturers' application instructions and recommendations for surface preparation, dry film thickness (DFT), drying time, time to recoat, and defect repair shall be submitted. J. Substitution Requests: Substitution requests shall be submitted in ample time to allow the testing and qualification requirements indicated below. K. The Contractor shall submit two one-quart size samples of the blast media, along with product data and MSDS sheets, to be evaluated for size and cleanliness, and conformance to Metropolitan standards. The Contractor shall provide the following information for all abrasives to be used for dry unconfined abrasive blasting: 1. The manufacturer's name or identifiable trade name. 2. The grade or brand name of the abrasive. 3. Affidavit that the abrasives are CARB certified for dry unconfined blasting DEFINITIONS A. Corrosive Environment One in which items installed come into incidental or intimate contact with water or chemicals; or the items are exposed to areas of high humidity, vapor zones, chemical fumes, chemical splash, or spillage; or the items are buried in the soil

286 Painting B. Non-Corrosive Environment One in which items are exposed to normal atmospheric conditions in which extraneous additives or alterations are not present. C. Painting or Paint As specified herein means field- or shop-applied coating of surfaces and includes primer, sealer, filler, or stain as required with the specified DFT requirement. D. Cementitious Surfaces Surfaces such as concrete, plaster, grout, and gypsum drywall. E. Enclosed Spaces Interior of tanks, pipelines and related structures, including temporary enclosures QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. The Contractor shall employ trained, experienced applicators (SSPC QP-1 and QP-2 certified or NACE equivalent). The Contractor shall employ trained NACE level 3 certified or SSPC equivalent quality control inspectors. The Contractor shall employ trained coating mixer/helpers. 2. These workers shall work under the direction of qualified and experienced supervisors. 3. Supervisors shall have a minimum 5 years recent, continuous experience supervising industrial maintenance coating application operations similar to the operations required to complete this project. 4. Applicators and mixer/helpers shall be trained and certified by the coating manufacturer for all coating products used on this project. 5. Applicators shall have a minimum 2 years recent, continuous experience applying the industrial maintenance coatings products used on this project. 6. Contractor Employees assigned to make DFT measurements and perform porosity and holiday defect tests shall possess the experience and qualification to accurately undertake these measurements and tests. If the equipment manufacturer has a certification program for operators of the equipment, the operators shall possess the certification. The Contractor shall submit the experience and qualifications of these employees. B. Field Sampling and Testing: The Engineer may require the Contractor to take samples of paint at random from the products delivered to the jobsite for testing by Metropolitan to verify that the products conform to this specification. Products not in conformance shall be removed from the jobsite. C. Container Marking and Shipping Certifications: Color pigments shall be ground in at the factory and of the highest quality. Each container shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's batch number, Federal Standard Color Number (FS 595a), and color. Certification that the furnished coating materials comply with these requirements shall accompany each shipment. D. Regulatory Requirements: The products and work specified in this section are subject to the rules and regulations of the local air quality management district (AQMD) and the California Air Resources Board (CARB). The coating systems specified are subject to change. In the event that a rule or regulation change makes the specified coating system non-compliant, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in accordance with Section DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Paint shall be delivered in sealed, original, and labeled containers that bear the manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, batch number, and color designation. B. Materials shall be stored and mixed only in areas designated for that purpose and approved by the Engineer. C. Paint shall be stored at a minimum ambient temperature of 50 F and a maximum temperature of 100 F, in a well ventilated area, with precautionary measures taken to prevent fire hazards. D. Storage and mixing areas shall be kept clean and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Containers shall be kept tightly closed after each mixing or use. E. NO SMOKING signs shall be hung over the door and inside of each paint storage or mixing room SAFETY METHODS A. Safety methods in painting and coating preparation and application shall be established in accordance with CCR Title

287 Painting PART 2 B. When mineral spirits or other chemicals are used, impermeable gloves, goggles or face shields, and other recommended protective equipment shall be used to avoid skin, eye, and respiratory contamination. 1. Painting work shall be conducted in a manner to minimize exposure to building occupants and the general public. 2. Established safety methods shall be implemented in accordance with the guidelines and safety requirements of the MSDS. PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. This section specifies products that are subject to the prequalified products provisions of Section B. For each surface and condition, the Contractor shall use the products specified in Table 1 at the end of this section. Additional prequalified products not shown on Table 1 may exist for a given condition and can be furnished upon request, if available. Table 1 denotes shop versus field applications, which are governed under different regulations and VOC requirements. C. Expedited Testing of Or Equal Products: If, despite the Contractor s due diligence in searching for existing stocks of product, that existing product cannot be found, Metropolitan will consider 120-day expedited testing of or equal products subject to the following pre-screening criteria: 1. The coating system does not have at least two approved products that meet current SCAQMD VOC requirements. 2. The proposed coating that is to be tested shall be equivalent to the specified products. In order for a proposed product to be considered equivalent, the proposed product shall: a. Have the same performance characteristics as the specified product. b. Have the same number of components as the specified product. c. Have a chemical formulation similar to the chemical formulation of the specified product. d. Be solvent borne. Water borne products are not considered equivalent. e. Be intended for Industrial Maintenance application. D. Paint materials for each coating system shall be the products of a single manufacturer and shall consist of compatible products for primer, intermediate, and final coats. However, material from different manufacturers that is certified compatible by the manufacturers of both the prime and the subsequent coats, when approved by the Engineer, may be used EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS A. Compressed-air units used in dust-off cleaning, abrasive blasting, and spray painting operations shall be equipped with oil and water separators to remove all oil and moisture from the air. Separators shall be placed as close as practical to the application equipment. B. Application equipment shall conform to the requirements and recommendations contained in the paint manufacturer's printed instructions and shall be sufficient for surface preparation and paint application. C. Ventilation equipment, respirators, and other safety devices shall be provided and used for the protection of personnel as required by these specifications, other authorities having jurisdiction, and as recommended by the paint manufacturer. D. Scaffolding, ladders, staging, and other similar items shall be provided in sufficient quantity to maintain satisfactory work progress without interference with the work of others. E. Drop cloths shall be provided as required to protect adjacent surfaces from cleaning residue or paint spatter and droppings. F. Brushes and application equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each segment of use and whenever changing the type of paint or color ABRASIVE BLAST MATERIAL A. Abrasive blast media shall be in compliance with federal, state and local regulations, including CCR Title 17, Sections , and SCAQMD Rule Abrasives used for dry unconfined abrasive blasting are to have current certification by the California Air Resources Board (CARB)

288 Painting PART 3 B. Abrasive blast material shall be dry, clean angular garnet or steel grit. Shot or a mixture of shot and grit shall not be used as an abrasive medium. EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACES REQUIRING COATING A. General: Welding and grinding shall be completed before surface preparation or coating application. Surfaces shall be prepared and painted in accordance with the materials and applicable conditions shown in Table 1 unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. B. Concrete: Except at chlorine injection points and chemical containment areas, concrete shall not be painted unless shown on the drawings. C. All carbon steel, cast iron and ductile iron surfaces, unless specified otherwise, shall be coated in accordance with Table 1. D. PVC piping exposed to sunlight shall be covered with urethane insulating sleeve with UV resistant properties. However, when approved or directed by the Engineer, it shall be prepared and painted with coating system NP-1. E. The exterior of fiberglass tanks shall be prepared and coated in accordance with this section and painted with coating system NF-1. F. Galvanized and Non-Ferrous Metals: Unless specified to be painted and where otherwise shown on the drawings, paint shall not be applied on stainless steel, galvanized, and other non-ferrous metal surfaces. G. No coating system shall be applied to unexposed electrical conduit and pullboxes, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. H. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Painting: Unless the item is excluded from painting by other sections of the specifications, the following items shall be painted. 1. Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork. 2. Supports, hangers, air grills, and registers. 3. Miscellaneous metalwork. 4. Pipe insulation coverings. 5. Surfaces behind surface-mounted equipment, switch-plates, registers, fixtures, and accessories that are designed to be removed and are readily detachable by removal of exposed fasteners. 6. Unless otherwise shown or specified, preparation and painting of equipment, enclosures, and parts of manufactured items are required to conform to the requirements of this section. 7. Unless otherwise shown or unless the pre-finished surface does not meet the requirements of the specifications, paint shall not be applied over pre-finished surfaces not within the categories of Table 1, such as nonmetallic enclosures, glass, wall coverings, furnishings, or floor finishes. I. Machinery and Moving Parts: Paint shall not be applied to the operational contact areas of machinery, such as the teeth of gears, pulley grooves, or to the interior surfaces of motors, gearboxes, or mechanical controllers. Exposed portions of equipment shall be prepared and painted as specified for the material and exposure. The Contractor shall coordinate the factory prime or finish coat on equipment for compatibility with field coat materials and required color. J. Except for markings or lettering cast into or stamped on a part of the equipment, paint shall not be applied over equipment identification labels or code-required UL or factory mutual (FM) labels. Decals and self-adhesive labels on surfaces requiring field painting shall be removed prior to preparation for painting. The Contractor shall require the equipment manufacturer to provide duplicate decal and self-adhesive labels for application to the equipment after completion of coating. K. Concealed and Inaccessible Surfaces 1. Non-Corrosive Areas: In non-corrosive areas the following need not be coated unless otherwise shown on the drawings: a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panel-boards, ductwork, or machinery and equipment fixed in place, or

289 Painting b. Surfaces in concealed spaces such as above suspended ceilings or in furred spaces and chases. 2. Corrosive Areas: When a space is specified to be painted for protection against a corrosive environment, all surfaces within that space shall be coated. This includes surfaces that are inaccessible except during construction or after disassembly or partial disassembly to allow coating, surfaces above ceilings or behind panels or equipment, and surfaces in furred areas, chases, troughs or channels. It shall further include conduit, ductwork, electrical panels and other items which might otherwise be exempt from coating. L. Aluminum components in direct contact with concrete or mortar. When aluminum components come into direct contact or are embedded in concrete or lime mortar, contact surfaces shall be coated with 30 mils of 2-component epoxy or a high build bitumen polyurethane composite coating as directed in Table 1, condition NS-5F or other method approved by the Engineer to prevent corrosion APPLICATION AND CURING CONDITIONS A. Painting shall not be performed during rainy weather or when the temperature of the surface to be painted is below 50 F or is anticipated to be below 50 F within 24 hours. Surface, ambient, and paint temperatures shall be between 50 F and 100 F at the time of application. 1. Exterior Coatings: Surfaces shall not be coated or allowed to be cured during foggy or rainy weather or under the following surface temperature conditions: a. Less than 5 F above the dew point. b. Below 50 F or over 100 F unless approved by the Engineer. 2. Interior Coatings and Linings: Surfaces shall be coated only when the surface and ambient air temperatures can be maintained between 50 F and 100 F during the application and curing of coatings. 3. Forced ventilation heat curing shall not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. 4. Contractor shall submit a procedure for forced ventilation heat curing to the Engineer, for authorization, prior to performing this method of curing. B. Ventilation and Dehumidification 1. Ventilation shall be in accordance with Section and as specified herein. 2. All dust and solvent vapors released during and after application of coatings shall be removed from the enclosed space. During coating application the capacity of ventilating fans shall be at least 300 cfm per gallon of coating applied per hour. 3. Continuous forced ventilation at a rate of at least one complete air change every 4 hours shall be provided during the blasting operations and for at least 48 hours after coating application is completed or until coating is completely cured in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The Contractor may provide heating and dehumidification equipment to maintain ambient and steel surface temperatures that are at least 10 degrees above the coating manufacturer s written minimum application temperatures. Humidity requirements will be according to the requirements of the coating manufacturer unless dehumidification is used. If the Contractor uses dehumidification, the ambient air shall be at 35% RH or lower during abrasive blasting and curing of the coating. 5. The Contractor shall monitor and record the ambient inside and outside the application area as well as steel surface conditions every shift. This includes air temperature inside the application area, steel surface temperature, dew point temperature, percent relative humidity, and the temperature difference between the dew point and the temperature of the steel surface. 6. The Contractor shall provide, in writing, the manufacturer s recommended recoat periods (maximum and minimum) based on actual cure temperatures occurring in the coating areas. This information shall be submitted to the Engineer daily. 7. The Contractor shall provide all fans, blowers, ducts, tubes or other equipment required for ventilation. Fans and ventilators shall have explosion-proof switches. The Contractor shall provide proper equipment for control of relative humidity, temperature and other climatic conditions within the enclosed space as required. These conditions shall be controlled within the enclosed space during final surface preparation, application of coatings and during coating cure time as specified herein

290 Painting 8. When coatings are applied inside the enclosed space, all persons exposed to toxic vapors shall wear air-supplied masks as shown on the appropriate MSDS and in accordance with CCR Title The Contractor shall monitor the enclosed space at all times for solvent vapor concentration, lower explosive limit (LEL), carbon monoxide, (CO), oxygen concentration, (O2) and other hazardous conditions GENERAL PREPARATION A. Protection 1. Surfaces that are not required to be painted but that are located adjacent to surfaces to be cleaned, abrasive blasted, and painted, shall be protected from cleaning residue, abrasive blasting, stains, overspray, drips, and damage during the cleaning and painting operation. 2. The canopies of lighting fixtures shall be removed and the fixtures shall be protected from paint. Electrical switch and outlet plates and other items that are in place but are not to be painted shall be removed before painting adjacent surfaces and shall be replaced upon completion of the work. B. Preparation and cleaning procedures shall be performed in accordance with the printed instructions of the paint manufacturer and as specified herein for the particular substrate and exposure conditions. C. Assembled parts shall be disassembled sufficiently before painting or coating to ensure complete coverage by the required coating. D. After blasting, all traces of abrasive blasting products shall be removed from the surfaces by cleaning with a vacuum, by brushing with clean brushes made of hair, bristle, or fiber, or by blowing with clean, dry compressed air METAL SURFACE PREPARATION A. Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Surfaces 1. Before abrasive blasting, weld spatter, burrs, and other irregularities shall be carefully removed or repaired. Welds shall be ground smooth, burrs shall be removed, and sharp edges and corners shall be rounded smooth. Metal surfaces requiring abrasive blasting shall first be solvent cleaned with acetone in accordance with SSPC SP-1, solvent cleaning. All grease, oil, dirt and other contaminants shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. 2. Steel that has pits 1/8 or greater shall be abrasive blasted to a commercial blast, SSPC SP-6, weld filled, and ground smooth matching the contour of the steel. Pits less than 1/8 shall be filled with a ceramic filled epoxy such as Chesterton 858, or equal. Filler shall be smoothly applied to match the contour of the part. Once filled, the weld repairs and epoxy filler shall be reblasted prior to application of the coating system. 3. Cast iron, and ductile iron that have pits 1/8 or greater shall be abrasive blasted to a commercial blast, SSPC SP-6. Pits shall be filled with a ceramic filled epoxy such as Chesterton 858, or equal. Filler shall be smoothly applied to match the contour of the part. Once filled, the epoxy filler shall be reblasted prior to application of the coating system. 4. Carbon steel surfaces to be coated shall be abrasive blasted to white metal in accordance with SSPC SP Cast steel, cast iron, and ductile iron surfaces shall be abrasive blasted to near white metal in accordance with SSPC SP After abrasive blasting, the height of the surface profile shall be a minimum of 2.0 to 3.0 mils. a. Surface profile shall be verified by measuring with an impresser tape system approved by the Engineer. A minimum of 1 test per 100 square feet of surface area is required. Testing shall be witnessed by and approved by the Engineer. b. The impresser tape used to make the test shall be permanently marked with the date, time, and specific locations where tests were taken. Extra coarse tape shall be used unless otherwise noted. c. The test results shall be promptly presented to the Engineer. 7. The surfaces shall not be touched between the time of blasting and the time that the coating is applied. Coatings shall be applied to the surface within 4 hours after completion of blasting. 8. Metal surfaces that have been previously abrasive blasted and given the required shop coats of primer will not be required to be re-cleaned by abrasive blasting if the original coat is intact and the manufacturer's recommended time to recoat has not been exceeded. However, the Contractor shall clean these surfaces in accordance with

291 Painting SSPC SP-1, SP-2 or SP-3, as approved by the Engineer. The SSPC cleaning standard selected (SP-1, SP-2, or SP-3) shall be the cleaning standard that properly prepare the surface for re-priming and finish paint. 9. Wherever previously primed or painted surfaces have become corroded or damaged, the surface shall be cleaned to white metal by abrasive blasting and recoated with the appropriate metal primer. 10. Recycling of blast media is acceptable providing the abrasive is periodically checked for adequate sieve size and filtered to remove paint chips and debris. Recycling of blast media containing lead shall not be permitted. Additionally, all blast media used on Metropolitan projects shall begin the project as new and unused. B. Galvanized Metal Surfaces 1. Galvanized surfaces shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with the requirements of SSPC SP-1 and power tool cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-3. Minor touch-up areas, as approved by the Engineer, shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of SSPC SP Newly galvanized metal parts shall receive an acid wash treatment prior to coating application. The acid solution to be used shall consist of a percent solution of phosphoric acid or other acid solutions approved by the coating manufacturer. 3. Galvanized surfaces that have deteriorated less than 20 percent with no blistering or peeling shall be water blasted at 2000 to 3000 psi to remove loose galvanizing coat. 4. Galvanized surfaces that have deteriorated more than 20 percent or have blistered shall not be allowed to be incorporated into the work. The items shall be removed from the job and replaced CONCRETE PREPARATION A. Preparation of concrete surfaces for coating shall not begin until finishing and repair operations in accordance with Section have been completed, and the surfaces have been accepted by the Engineer. 1. Concrete or cementitious materials shall not be coated until the end of the curing period specified in Section or until 28 calendar days after the forms have been removed, whichever is later. 2. The moisture content of cementitious surfaces to be coated shall be tested frequently to determine if surface preparation may begin, using an approved moisture meter such as that manufactured by James Instrument Company, or equal. 3. Preparation of cementitious surfaces shall not begin until the surface moisture is no higher than the moisture content recommended by the manufacturer of the coating and as approved by the Engineer. 4. After the surface preparation is complete the surface moisture content shall be retested. If the moisture content at this time is higher than that recommended by the manufacturer of the coating and approved by the Engineer, supplementary ventilation and heating systems shall be provided to lower the surface moisture content of the concrete to the acceptable level. B. Concrete surfaces to be subjected to a corrosive environment and required to be coated shall be abrasive blasted until all laitance, efflorescence, form oil and curing compound have been removed and the entire concrete surface has the appearance of a 80 grit sandpaper. If the surface texture does not, in the opinion of the Engineer, simulate the appearance of a 80 grit sandpaper, additional blasting shall be provided until the specified surface appearance is obtained. 1. Air pockets covered by thin layers of cement or those which are not completely open shall be opened by mechanical means or by abrasive blasting. Before application of coatings, concrete surfaces shall be repaired as follows: a. Protrusions, fins, or bulges higher than 1/16 inch shall be mechanically ground to match the rest of the surface. b. Holes greater than 1/8 inch in diameter shall be filled with epoxy Sika Sikadur 31 or equal, to provide smooth level surface. 2. Dust and foreign matter shall be removed from the surface after the abrasive blasting operation by vacuuming or blowing with high-pressure air. 3. In the event that abrasive blasting cannot be used for concrete surface preparation, acid etching shall be the alternative

292 Painting a. Prior to acid etching, proposed safety procedures and disposal methods associated with acid etching shall be submitted. b. A 15 to 40 percent solution of phosphoric acid shall be used. Stiff bristle brooms or brushes shall be used to spread the acid evenly over the surface. After the foaming action stops in 3 to 5 minutes, the surface shall be flushed thoroughly with water, and then scrubbed with the same stiff brooms or brushes to remove salts formed by the acid reaction with the Portland cement, and to free loose particles. After scrubbing, a second rinse shall be applied. C. Concrete surfaces in non-corrosive environments and specified to be coated shall have the surface prepared and architectural finish applied in accordance with Section Following completion and approval of the application of architectural finish, the surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the paint manufacturer's printed instructions as approved by the Engineer APPLICATION A. No part of a coating system shall be applied before the Engineer has approved the surface preparation. If coating has been applied without the approval of the Engineer, the applied coat shall, if directed by the Engineer, be removed by abrasive blasting or other approved means, and the coat shall be reapplied in accordance with this specification. B. Painting shall be performed only on thoroughly clean and dry surfaces. Each coat of paint shall be permitted to dry properly before the succeeding coat is applied. Newly applied coatings that are damaged by the elements shall be replaced. C. Coating systems shall be applied in accordance with SSPC PA-1, as modified below: 1. Coating systems shall be applied with approved application equipment consisting of brushes, rollers, or spray equipment. For fine architectural finishes, such as doors, door and window frames, etc. spray application is the preferred method. Inaccessible areas that cannot be sprayed shall be coated by brush or roller. 2. Paint shall be applied evenly and smoothly without sags, runs, orange peel or other aesthetic defects. 3. During the spray application of a zinc-rich primer, the product shall be continuously agitated in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendation. 4. The DFT shall be as shown in Table 1, regardless of the method used to apply the paint. 5. Rivets, welds, edges, crevices, and other irregularities shall be thoroughly coated and shall receive extra coating material, if necessary, to provide the same DFT as on the adjacent smooth surfaces. If necessary to provide complete protection on welds, edges, crevices, and other regularities, coatings shall be applied by the stripe-coat process. 6. Surface cracks, surface irregularities, construction joints, and expansion joints shall receive preparation and extra coating as recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. 7. Before applying subsequent coats, the primer or intermediate coats shall be allowed to dry for the minimum curing time recommended by the manufacturer for the atmospheric conditions present. However in no case shall the time between coats exceed the manufacturer's recommendation for time to recoat. 8. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in applied shade or tint of colors. 9. Applied coating systems shall be cured at 75 F or higher for at least 48 hours for architectural coatings and 7 days for immersion coatings. If temperatures are lower than 75 F, curing time shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. D. Chemical Containment Areas 1. All concrete surfaces indicated on the drawings to be subject to chemical splash or exposure or indicated to be chemical containment areas shall be coated with chemical resistant coatings. Chemical resistant coatings for concrete shall be Coating System CC-2A or CC-2B as directed by the Engineer, as shown in Table Immediately following the application of the intermediate coat, while the intermediate coat is still tacky, traffic areas shall have No. 30 mesh silica sand broadcast over the surface at the rate of lbs per 100 sq ft. After the intermediate coat has cured, the topcoat shall be placed over the sand-covered intermediate coat QUALITY CONTROL

293 Painting A. Applied coating systems shall be tested after the finishing or final coats have been cured. The Contractor's qualified personnel shall conduct tests for determining DFT as specified in Table 1, porosity and holiday imperfections of the coating as specified in Table 2 of this section. B. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. Tests performed in the absence of the Engineer shall not be accepted and the subject coating shall be retested in the Engineer's presence. C. DFT shall be verified using electronic-type gauge in accordance with ASTM D7091. D. Defective coating shall be repaired and retested until it passes the tests and is approved by the Engineer. E. The Contractor shall arrange for the presence on-site of the coating manufacturer's technical representative if quality control or application problems arise, or at the Engineer's request CLEANING A. During the progress of the work, discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and rags shall be removed at the end of each day's work. B. Brushes and other application equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each period of use and when changing to another paint or color. C. Upon completion of painting work, masking tape, tarps, and other protective materials shall be removed using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. Table 1: Paint Products and Applicable Conditions Surface Paint System No. Applicable Conditions Paint System Description 1st coat (DFT) 2nd coat (DFT) 3rd coat (DFT) Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron CS-1S Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l high-solids epoxy (See notes 1 & 3) See note 1 (See Table 2, Test #2) total dry film thickness of mils NSF-61 (see note 2) Subject to humid, immersed, and non-uv environment, exterior and interior surfaces of equipment such as pumps, valves, gates, pipe and fittings (products suitable for application to bare prepared steel) 3M Scotchkote 323 (12) Akzo Nobel Enviroline 230 (16) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) 3M Scotchkote 323 (12) Akzo Nobel Enviroline 230 (16) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) 3M Scotchkote 323 (12) Akzo Nobel Enviroline 230 (16) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron CS-1F Field Applied AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l high-solids epoxy (See notes 1 & 3) See note 1 (See Table 2, Test #2) If required to achieve total DFT of mils NSF 61 (see note 2) Subject to humid, immersed, and non-uv environment, exterior and interior surfaces of equipment such as pumps, valves, gates, pipe and fittings. (products suitable for application to bare prepared steel) Raven Linings AqutaPoxy A-6 (0) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) Akzo Nobel Enviroline 230 (16) Raven Linings Aquatapoxy A-6 (0) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) Akzo Nobel Enviroline 230 (16) Raven Linings AqutaPoxy A-6 (0) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) Akzo Nobel Enviroline 230 (16)

294 Painting Carbon Steel, Ductile and Cast Iron (extreme conditions) CS-1E Shop or Field AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l NSF 61 (see note 2) Where identified carbon steel, ductile and cast iron surfaces that come in contact with high velocity abrasive water including pump liners, pump components, immersed sump pumps, valve discs, valve body interiors, etc. high-solids ceramic filled epoxy (See notes 1 & 3) Chesterton ARC 858 Polymer Ceramic Repair Composite (0) Apply at a thickness suitable to fill pits and smooth rough surfaces (See note 1) Chesterton ARC PW Modified Epoxy Lining (0) (See note 1) Chesterton ARC PW Modified Epoxy Lining (0) Carbon Steel, External Parts ARC Zinc Metalized Coating. CS-2 Exterior surfaces of radial arm gates, trash racks, and other parts subject to partial or sporadic immersion, and abrasion. International Metalizing and Coatings, 99.9% Zinc wire or other approved equal. No other alloys or metals will be permitted for use mils DFT of the zinc coating is required. N/A N/A Carbon Steel (in buried service) CS-2AS Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l Exterior surfaces of tanks and designated pipelines for underground installation (products suitable for application to bare prepared steel and coal tar enamel) (See note 4) (See Table 2, Test#2) Berry Plastics Powercrete J or J Fast Cure (0) applied at 10 mils PPG coal tar epoxy applied at 10 mils (See note 4) (See Table 2, Test#2) Berry Plastics Powercrete J or J Fast Cure (0) applied at 10 mils PPG coal tar epoxy applied at 10 mils (See note 4) (See Table 2, Test#2) Berry Plastics Powercrete J or J Fast Cure (0) applied at 10 mils DFT = 30 mils PPG coal tar epoxy applied at 10 mils DFT = 30 mils Reilly Ind. Adhesive V-80 CTE primer applied at 1-2 mils (68) Reilly Ind. Special Blend enamel applied at 50 mils per AWWA C203 (<32) Reilly Ind. Special Blend enamel applied at 50 mils per AWWA C-203 (<32) Carbon Steel (in buried service) CS-2AF Field Applied AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l (See note 4) (See Table 2, Test#2) (See note 4) (See Table 2, Test#2) (See note 4) (See Table 2, Test#2) Exterior surfaces of tanks and designated pipelines for underground installation (products suitable for application to bare prepared steel and coal tar enamel) Berry Plastics Powercrete J or J Fast Cure (0) Lone Star Reilly Ind. Adhesive V-80 CTE Primer applied at 1-3 mils (68) Berry Plastics Powercrete J or J Fast Cure (0) Lone Star Reilly Ind. Special Blend enamel applied at 60 mils per AWWA C-203 (<32) Berry Plastics Powercrete J or J Fast Cure (0) Final DFT = 30 mil min. Lone Star Reilly Ind. Special Blendr enamel applied at 60 mils per AWWA C-203 (<32) Carbon Steel Internal Lining of Tanks and Pipes (Caustic & Ammonia steel tanks shall Not be coated) CS-2BF Field Applied Epoxy AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l NSF 61 (see note 2) Interior surfaces of water tanks and designated pipelines in continuous immersion (products suitable for application to bare prepared steel epoxy PPG Amercoat 133 (72) NSF 61 Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95) epoxy PPG Amercoat 133 (72) NSF 61 Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95) epoxy (Total thickness of final coating shall be 26±4mils) PPG Amercoat 133 (72) NSF 61 Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95)

295 Painting Carbon Steel Internal Lining of Tanks and Pipes (Caustic and Ammonia steel tanks shall not be coated) CS-2PF Field Applied Polyurethane AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l NSF 61 (see note 2) Interior surfaces of water tanks and designated pipelines in continuous immersion (products suitable for application to bare prepared steel Polyurethane Carboline: Polyclad 767 Aromatic Polyurethane (0) Lifelast: Durashield 310 Aromatic Polyurethane (0) Polyurethane Carboline: Polyclad 767 Aromatic Polyurethane (0) Lifelast: Durashield 310 Aromatic Polyurethane (0) Polyurethane (Total thickness of final coating shall be 60 to 80 mils; see note 8) Carboline: Polyclad 767 Aromatic Polyurethane (0) Lifelast: Durashield 310 Aromatic Polyurethane (0) Global Eco Technologies: Enduraflex 1988 Polyurethane (0) Global Eco Technologies: Enduraflex 1988 Polyurethane (0) Global Eco Technologies: Enduraflex 1988 Polyurethane (0) Tnemec: 406 Elastoshield Polyurethane (0) Tnemec: 406 Elastoshield Polyurethane (0) Tnemec: 406 Elastoshield Polyurethane (0) Carbon Steel Steel Dowel at Control Joints CS-3S Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Steel dowels at control joints heat-fusion epoxy (fluid bed application) ( mils) Henkel Loctite Hysol DK18-05 Blue Fusion Bonded (0) N/A N/A OR heat-fusion epoxy (electrostatic spray) ( mils) 3M: Scotchkote 134 Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating (0) Carbon Steel, Cast iron and Ductile Iron Outside NS-1S Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l In a non-corrosive environment (exterior) UV /sunlight exposure zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68 HS, Zinc-Rich Epoxy (288) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC, Zinc-Rich Epoxy (84) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 (180) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) (See Table 2, Test #1) PPG Amershield Polyurethane (264) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) Tnemec: Endura- Shield 740 Urethane (99) Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Outside NS-1F Field Applied AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l In a non-corrosive environment (exterior) UV/sunlight exposure zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) (See Table 2, Test #1) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) Tnemec: Endura- Shield 740 Urethane (99)

296 Painting Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron NS-2S Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) zinc-rich epoxy, repeat the first coat ( mils) N/A Encased in Concrete (not to include rebar) To be encased in concrete or surfaces to be dry-packed PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) PPG Amercoat 68 HS Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (288) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) PPG Amercoat 68 HS Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (288) Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Encased in Concrete (not to include rebar) NS-2F Field Applied AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l To be encased in concrete or surfaces to be dry packed zinc-rich epoxy ( mils) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) zinc-rich epoxy, repeat the first coat ( mils) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) N/A Architectural Ferrous Metals NS-4F AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Interior doors, door frames, window frames, miscellaneous trim, angles and supports, etc. zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) Tnemec: Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cured urethane (96) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) Tnemec: Endura- Shield 740 Urethane (99) Architectural Galvanized Steel NS-6 Shop or Field AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l Exterior doors, door frames, window frames, sheet metal trim, copings, gutters, scuppers, downspouts, supports, etc. Surface preparation and pretreatment shall be an acid etchant like Krud Kutter Metal Clean and Etch or other approved preparation methods. rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series L140F Epoxy (95) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) (See Table 2, Test #1) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) Tnemec: Endura- Shield 740 Urethane (99)

297 Painting Aluminum In contact with cement NS-5F Field & Shop AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l This coating procedure applies to all surfaces of aluminum embedded or in direct contact with cement. Surface preparation and pretreatment shall be an acid etchant such as Krud Kutter Metal Clean and Etch or other approved preparation methods. Epoxy or high-build bitumen -polyurethane composite coating (15 mils) Epoxy or high-build bitumen -polyurethane composite coating (15 mils for liquid product, single 30 mil coat of trowelable product) Raven Linings AqutaPoxy A-6 (0) applied at 15 mils Raven Linings AqutaPoxy A-6 (0) applied at 15 mils Berry Plastics Powercrete J (0) applied at 15 mils Berry Plastics Powercrete J (0) applied at 15 mils C.I.M. CIM 1000 Urethane Elastomeric (92) applied at 15 mils C.I.M. CIM 1000 Urethane Elastomeric (92) applied at 15 mils C.I.M. CIM 1000TG Urethane (88) Single 30 mil coat application Architectural Ferrous Metals Powder coating NS-7S Architectural carbon steel surfaces that are specified to be coated with a heat-fused, powder coating for ultraviolet and moisture exposure Total coating DFT shall be a minimum of 8 mils. Primer shall be a powder coating with a minimum of 4 mils and rust inhibitive properties. Top coat shall be powder coating with a minimum of 4 mils. Topcoat shall be a high gloss polyester, polyurethane, or acrylic resin. *Product systems that use an epoxy top coat will not be tested Stainless Steel NONE Unless otherwise shown or specified, stainless steel is not required to be coated. Architectural Surfaces Interior (semi-gloss) NC-1 AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Interior drywall surfaces noted to receive semi-gloss finish as shown on drawings sealer ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Vinylastic VNPR00 Premium Int Wall Sealer (50) water based acrylic enamel ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Suprema SPMA50 Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (50) (semi-gloss) ( mils) Repeat 2 nd Coat Sherwin-Williams No product approved. Sherwin-Williams Solo 100% Acrylic Int/Ext Gloss A77 Series (<50g/L) Architectural Surfaces Interior (egg-shell) NC-2 AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Interior drywall surfaces noted to receive an eggshell finish as shown on drawings sealer ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Vinylastic VNPR00 Premium Int Wall Sealer (50) Water Based Acrylic Enamel ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Eco-Shield W 603 Int Latex Semi-Gloss Paint (2) Water Based Acrylic Enamel ( mils) Repeat 2 nd Coat Sherwin-Williams No product approved. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel (0)

298 Painting Masonry Interior NC-3A AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Interior masonry coating as noted in drawings Dunn-Edwards: (concrete, plaster, masonry) Eff-Stop ESPR00 Int/Ext Masonry Primer/Sealer (50) Dunn-Edwards Evershield EVSH60-0 Ext/Int Acrylic Gloss Paint (50) Repeat 2 nd Coat Masonry (water sealer/ repellent) NC-3W AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Masonry water sealer/repellent shall be in accordance with Section Wood (exterior) NW-1 AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l All surfaces (exterior) acrylic exterior primer ( mils) Dunn-Edwards E-Z Prime Premium EZPR00-1 Ext Acrylic Wood Primer(50) acrylic gloss enamel ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Evershield EVSH60-0 Ext/Int Acrylic Gloss Paint (50g/L) N/A Sherwin-Williams Exterior Latex Wood Primer Sherwin-Williams Solo 100% Acrylic Int/Ext Gloss A77 Series (<50g/L) Wood (interior clear) NW-2 AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Filler Coat Sealer Coat 2-component polyurethane (gloss) ( mils) Interior surfaces shown on drawings to receive natural finish None approved Epmar Kemiko (Sta Crete) SS2700 W/B Aliphatic Polyurethane Clear (50) Epmar Kemiko (Sta Crete) SS2700 W/B Aliphatic Polyurethane Clear (50) Wood (interior pigmented) NW-3 AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l All other interior surfaces primer ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Inter- Kote Premium IKPR00 Int Acrylic Undercoater(50) Dunn-Edwards Super U- 365 E 22-1V&E 22-1E Int Fire Ret. Alkyd Undercoat (350) enamel ( mils) Dunn-Edwards Suprema SPMA50 Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (50) Dunn-Edwards Aristoglo 74V Int Fire Retardant Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel enamel ( mils) Repeat 2 nd Coat PVC Surfaces NP-1 Field AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l high solids epoxy ( mils) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) N/A Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight (UV rays) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus L140F Epoxy (95) Tnemec: Endura-Shield 740 Urethane (99) Fiberglass NF-1 Field AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight (UV rays) high solids epoxy ( mils) Ameron: Amerlock 2 VOC (84) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) Ameron: Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) N/A Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus L140F Epoxy (95) Tnemec: Endura-Shield 740 Urethane (99)

299 Painting Equipment (water contact powder coating) CE-2 AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l Equipment specified to be coated with heat-fusion epoxy. (see note 2) heat-fusion epoxy (fluid bed application) ( mils) Henkel Loctite Hysol DK18-05 Blue Fusion Bonded (0) N/A N/A OR heat-fusion epoxy (electrostatic spray) ( mils) 3M Scotchkote 134 Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating (0) Equipment Inside a structure NE-1S Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l exterior surfaces (exposed to humidity only, no UV or periodic immersion) zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) Repeat 2 nd coat PPG Amercoat 68 HS Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (288) PPG Amerlock 2 (180) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus L140F Epoxy (95) Equipment Inside a structure NE-1F Field Applied AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Exterior surfaces (exposed to humidity only, no UV and no periodic immersion) zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) Repeat 2 nd coat Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus L140F Epoxy (95) Equipment Outside NE-2S Shop Applied AQMD rule 1107 applies to shop applications VOC limit =340 g/l Exterior surfaces (when equipment is outside) zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) (See Table 2, Test #1) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) PPG Amercoat 68 HS Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (288) PPG Amerlock 2 (180) PPG Amershield Polyurethane (264) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus L140F Epoxy (95) Tnemec Endura-Shield 740 Urethane (99)

300 Painting Equipment Outside NE-2F Field Applied AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l Exterior surfaces (when equipment is outside) zinc-rich epoxy (2.0 to 3.0 mils) PPG Amercoat 68 HS VOC Epoxy, Zinc-Rich (84) rust-inhibitive epoxy ( mils) PPG Amerlock 2 VOC (84) high-build polyurethane enamel ( mils) (See Table 2, Test #1) PPG Amershield VOC Polyurethane (84) Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94- H 2O moisture cure urethane (96) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus L140F Epoxy (95) Tnemec Endura-Shield 740 Urethane (99) Concrete or Cementitious Surfaces CC-1A Field AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l high-solids epoxy sealer (4.0 mils) high-solids epoxy (20 mils) high-solids epoxy (20 mils) (dry or damp substrate, NO pooling water) NSF 61 (see note 2) Corrosive environment surfaces around chlorine, sulfuric and fluorosilicic acid injection points, coat one pipe/conduit diameter or 10 feet upstream, whichever is greater; coat 15 feet downstream Koster American Koster VAP I 2000 (<10) Raven Linings: AquataPoxy A-10 (0) Chesterton ARC 855 Polymer /Ceramic Composite (0) Raven Linings: AquataPoxy A-6 (0) Chesterton ARC 855 Polymer /Ceramic Composite (0) Raven Linings AquataPoxy A-6 (0) Concrete or Cementitious Surfaces (exposed to mildly corrosive chemicals) CC-2A Field AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l (For mild chemicals such as 25% Na OH, Alum, polymers, etc.) Corrosive environment chemical containment areas, tank farm floors, sumps, pillars, equipment supports, walls, sidewalls, unloading pad, and other areas that are subject to chemical splash or spillage chemical resistant primer (See notes 6 and 7) Koster American Koster VAP I 2000 (<10) Neogard 70714/70715 Epoxy primer (<5) chemical resistant coating (See note 5) (20.0 ± 2.0 mils) C.I.M. CIM 1061 Urethane Elastomeric (92) Neogard 7430-CA single component urethane (97) chemical resistant topcoat (20.0 ± 2.0 mils) C.I.M. CIM 1061 Urethane Elastomeric (92) Neogard FC7530 /FC7963 Elastomeric Urethane (37) Concrete or Cementitious Surfaces CC-2B Field AQMD rule 1113 applies to field applications VOC limit = 100 g/l chemical resistant primer (See notes 6 and 7) chemical resistant coating (See note 5) (20.0 ± 2.0 mils) chemical resistant topcoat (20.0 ± 2.0 mils) (exposed to highly corrosive chemicals) (For severe and harsh chemicals such as 98% Sulfuric Acid, Fluorsilicic Acid, etc.) Corrosive environment chemical containment areas, tank farm floors, sumps, pillars, equipment supports, walls, sidewalls, unloading pad, and other areas that are subject to chemical splash or spillage KCC Corrosion Control Techni-Plus E 3.2 (0) Or Koster American Koster VAP I 2000 (<10) ITW Devcon CS 2000 Epoxy Concrete Sealer (0) KCC Corrosion Control: Techni-Plus EN 25.5 Epoxy Novolac (0) ITW Devcon Epoxy Coat 7000 AR Acid Resistant Epoxy Coating (0) KCC Corrosion Control: Techni-Plus EN 25.5 Epoxy Novolac (0) ITW Devcon Epoxy Coat 7000 AR Acid Resistant Epoxy Coating (0) Notes: 1. Apply high-solids epoxy in multiple coats to achieve 26 mils (+/- 4.0 mils) DFT, or unless otherwise noted. 2. Produtcs applied to items that come in contact with potable water or with water that will be treated to become potable shall have NSF 61 certification. 3. Coal tar epoxy and or enamel shall not be used on any surfaces that would come in contact with potable water or water that would be treated to become potable. 4. Coating shall be applied in multiple coats to achieve a total of 60 ± 4 mils dry film thickness. (including aggregate) 5. Surface cracks or irregularities and expansion joints shall receive extra coating and surface preparation as recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. 6. Penetrating Primers on masonary surfaces shall be applied in two coats to effectively eliminate pin holes. 7. Except where part of an item of mechanical or electrical equipment or where specified for corrosive environments, galvanized carbon steel or aluminum conduits, grating, stair treads, deck cover plates, chain link fence, and pull boxes shall not be painted. 8. Coating shall be applied in multiple coats to achieve a total of 80 ± 4 mils dry film thickness, including aggregate, in water pipelines, and 60 ± 6 mils dry film thickness in water tanks

301 Painting Table 2: Holiday Test Methods Test # Coating Types Test Method 1 Interior and exterior coatings in non-corrosive environment shall be holiday tested if required by the Engineer. Coatings suitable for this method of testing include but are not limited to: Alkyd Enamels, Silicone Alkyds and Polyurethane coatings. Dry Film Thickness: 20.0 mils or less 2 Coatings suitable for this method of testing include but are not limited to: polyurethane and epoxy coatings as well as other coatings with manufacturer approved physical and dielectric properties. Coating Dry Film Thickness: 20.1 to 40.0 mils 3 Coatings suitable for this method of testing include but are not limited to: rubber lining, extruded polyethylene, heat fusion powder and coal tar enamel coatings as well as other coatings with manufacturer's approved physical and dielectrical properties. Coating Dry Film Thickness: 41.0 mils and greater Tinker and Rasor Model M-1 holiday detector having 67-1/2 volts in accordance with NACE SP0188, Standard Recommended Practices, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings. The holiday detector sponge shall be saturated with clean potable water to which an approved wetting agent, such as Kodak Kodaflow, has been added. Tinker and Rasor Model AP-W high-voltage holiday detector or equal. Test voltages shall be determined in accordance with NACE SP0188, Table I, Standard Recommended Practices, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings Tinker and Rasor Model AP-W high-voltage holiday detector or equal. Test voltages shall be determined in accordance with NACE SP0274. High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation Note: The Contractor is advised that coated surfaces tested with Method 1. Tinker and Rasor Model M-1 holiday detector having 67-1/2 volts (wet sponge detector) in accordance with NACE RP0188, shall be cleaned, dried, and be approved by the Engineer prior to any coating repair activities. Cleaning methods shall be approved in advance by the Engineer and shall consist of but are not limited to: rinsing with clean potable water, wiping, drying, and degreasing if necessary. END OF SECTION

302 SECTION CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete floor sealer on concrete surfaces as indicated on Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit one pint Sample of floor sealer. B. Product Data: Submit floor sealer manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions covering installation conditions of the Work of this section, with copies of code approvals QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Concrete floor sealer shall be product of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in manufacture of material for at least 10 years and can provide references of at least 5 installations in which this material has been in satisfactory service for at least 3 years. B. Compliance with Regulations: Materials shall comply with the current rules and regulations of the local air quality management district, with the rules regarding volatile organic compounds, and with FDA rules and regulations for dangerous materials in sealers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thoro System Products, Miami FL. B. ProSoCo, Inc., Kansas City, KS. C. Or equal MATERIALS A. General: Sealer shall be water based, SCAQMD approved, clear urethane coating, designed for installation on interior and exterior traffic surfaces. Sealer shall be designed to penetrate the pore surface of the concrete and inhibit moisture migration. B. Sheen: Completed sealer shall have semi-gloss sheen, unless otherwise required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be applied. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected PREPARATION A. Bead blasting: Work includes bead blasting of surfaces as required for proper preparation of surfaces. Completely remove existing curing compounds, finishes, stains, oil, grease, bitumen, penetrated mastics and adhesives including primers, and substances deleterious to bond or connection of new materials, and expose clean sound surfaces. Employ wet bead blasting for interior surfaces and for exterior surfaces where required. B. Sealer application: Prepare surfaces in accordance with the coating manufacturers printed instructions. Remove contaminants including loose mortar, rust and other products of corrosion, disintegrated concrete, and other substances that could interfere with adhesion of the coating system to the substrate APPLICATION A. Install by experienced mechanics with methods and spray or roller equipment recommended by coating manufacturer, after surfaces to be treated are dry

303 Concrete Floor Sealer B. Mix the 2 components and install floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install evenly over the surface in 2 coats at approximately 200 square feet per gallon per coat. C. Keep traffic from treated surfaces until the material is thoroughly dry CLEANING A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste material and legally dispose off the Project site PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Consultant Specs (construction contract)

304 10141 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters for Monument Signage. DEFINITIONS A. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source as shown on drawings. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of dimensional character. 2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

305 10141 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PRODUCTS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, to review design of monument sign structure and anchorage of dimensional characters and revise as deemed necessary to withstand structural loads. B. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

306 10141 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability and for securing fasteners; and as follows. 1. Illuminated Characters: Frontlighted character construction with lighting including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for servicing and concealing connections to site electrical system. Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly. a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings. b. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior characters. 2. Character Material: Sheet or plate steel. 3. Material Thickness: Nominal inch thick for face and inch thick for returns. 4. Character Height: As indicated. 5. Character Depth: As indicated. 6. Finishes: a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Mounting: As indicated. 8. Typeface: Neutraface, Condensed, Medium. DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS A. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. FABRICATION A. General: Provide sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

307 Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs-Pins: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of base plate. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

308 10141 a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

309 10142 PYLON SIGNAGE GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fitness Loop Mileage Markers. 2. Information Kiosks. 3. Interpretive Signs. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

310 10142 PRODUCTS FITNESS LOOP MILEAGE MARKERS A. Pole type trail marker sign by Cylex Signs N. 29 th Ave. Phoenix, AZ 85009, B. Dimensions: 28" long x 3.5" square C. Material: Pre-cast Concrete. D. Mounting: Embedded, see drawings. E. Sign Content: As noted on drawings F. Typeface: Aerial INFORMATION KIOSKS A. Map Stand and Directional Signage by LMG Lucid Management Group Inc Birch Bay Square St., Suite #205 Blaine, WA 98230, OR Darren Penner, , [email protected], B. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. C. Mounting: As indicated on drawings. D. Sign Content: As noted on drawings. INTERPRETIVE SIGNS A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings. B. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. C. Mounting: As indicated on drawings. D. Sign Content: As noted on drawings. EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

311 10142 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed. C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

312 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICATION SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. This Section includes the following: Floor mounted-overhead braced steel toilet partitions and wall hung urinal screens REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of the Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 2. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed of Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar. 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. California Building Code (CBC), 2007 Edition 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of unit required. Submit 6 inch square samples of and finish on same substrate to be used in work PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages that must be built into other work for installation of toilet compartments and related items. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design based on Bradley floor-mounted overhead braced, series 400 Sentinel. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bradley Corp, Metpar Corp., Global Partitions., Sanymetal., or equal MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable

313 Toilet Compartments B. Steel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from 22 gauge stainless steel sheet with a #4 brushed finish, leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness. 1. Pilasters: 1 ¼ constructed from 20 gauge stainless steel. 2. Panels: 1 thick constructed from 22 gauge stainless steel. 3. Doors: 1 thick constructed from 22 gauge stainless steel. 4. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: 1 thick constructed from 22 gauge stainless steel. 5. Steel-Sheet Finish: #4 brushed finish C. Doors, Panels, and Pilaster: 1. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide Concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 2. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. 3. Urinal-Screen Construction: Similar to panels, with integral full-height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304, not less than inch specified thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings): Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer s standard design; stainless steel. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer s standard design, heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of stainless steel with satin finish. Provide slide bolts at handicapped stalls. Mount coat hooks and bumpers 48 inches above the floor. G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer s standard theft-proof exposed fasteners finished to match hardware. H. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer s standard continuous, extruded aluminum head rail with anti-grip profile and in manufacturer s standard finish FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer s standard corrosion resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24 inch wide in-swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 34 inch wide (clear opening) out-swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped in accordance with CBC accessibility requirements. D. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and finish as compartment system panels. E. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with CBC for handicapped accessibility and as follows: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer s standards. Provide self-closing hinge at wheelchair accessible stall door. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer s standard surface mounted latch unit, designed for handicapped accessibility and for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide slide bolt or flip-over type latch at wheelchair accessible stall door. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer s standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories. Install coat hooks at 48 inches A.F.F. at wheelchair accessible stalls. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer s standard unit for out-swinging doors that complies with CBC. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors. Install pulls above latch

314 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Toilet Compartments A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2-inch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls and pilasters with continuous U-channels. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's theft resistant anchoring devices. B. Overhead Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION December 22, (construction Contract)

315 SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15. B. This Division is an integrated whole comprising interrelated and interdependent Sections and shall be considered in its entirety in determining requirements of the Work. C. Refer to other sections of this Division for additional requirements or information regarding the subjects of this Section SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1: 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Submittals. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Rough-ins. 6. Mechanical installations. 7. Cutting and patching. A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section Submittals and Substitutions B. Mechanical Submittals: Increase the number of mechanical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted to allow for required distribution by one additional copy, which will be retained by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer. C. Product Data: Assemble "product data" into tabbed brochures according to main areas of work i.e.,: Fire Protection; Plumbing; H.V.A.C.; Temperature Control; Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1. Assemble each brochure with tabbed separators for each Specification Section where products are noted to be submitted, with separate tabs for each product listed

316 3. For items such as valves, hangers and accessories, indicate specific items and where they are to be used. 4. Contractor need only to submit for review those items specified to be submitted, unless requested by the Architect for special review. D. Submit for review, only the specific items required in this Section or other Sections of Division 15. E. Additional submittals shall include but not be limited to: 1. Equipment data record drawings. 2. Certification of completion of testing. 3. Certification of completion of operation instructions. 4. Operating instruction brochure. 5. Maintenance instruction brochures. 6. Equipment guarantees. 7. 1/4" = 1'-0" or larger scale layouts of "Equivalent" equipment or "Or Equal" equipment. 8. Coordination Drawings, where requested or required. F. Submittal materials will be reviewed for substantial conformity with the intent of the contract plans and specifications only. Such review does not indicate approval of dimensions, quantities, coordination with other trades, or work methods of the contractor which are indicated thereon. G. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these specifications COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be totally responsible for coordinating the layout of all building elements to avoid conflict of the work of the structural, mechanical, electrical systems, and architectural features of the building. B. The cost of any extra work of any kind caused by a conflict due to this lack of coordination, shall be borne by the Contractor COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 to a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation

317 and access and where sequencing and coordination of the installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. c. Equipment for connections and support details. d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 2. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. B. Submittal of "Or Equal" substitutions of equipment will not be reviewed unless accompanied by coordination drawings RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Record, as specified in Division 1 the locations and invert elevations of underground installations MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Supplementary Mechanical Requirements" DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification EQUIVALENT EQUIPMENT A. These specifications and/or drawings names and specifies certain equipment in detail. It also names equivalent equipment by manufacturer which is not

318 considered to be a "substitution". B. Submit equivalent equipment to the Engineer for review as per the requirements of Division 1, and Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements." C. Equipment of Manufacturers named in Division 15 will be considered equivalent to that specified in detail and/or named on the drawings if: 1. The proposed equipment is of equivalent quality, capacity. 2. Equipment is as fully equipped, fits the space allotted, and has physical configuration and weight similar to the equipment specified in detail. 3. Any additional power connections required other than indicated on schedules shall be provided at the contractor's expense. D. A complete lay out of an equipment room or area must be submitted for equivalent equipment. Notice space limitations. Layouts to include plans and section views at a scale of not less than 1/4" = 1 ft. E. The Engineer shall determine the acceptability of "Equivalent Equipment." 1.10 MANUALS A. Field Reference Manuals: Have available for reference at project field office copies of the following: 1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 2. MSS (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) Publications. MSS-SP58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design & Manufacture. MSS-SP69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. MSS-SP89 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation. MSS-SP90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements

319 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical system with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components in full compliance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. If the drawings or the manufacturer does not provide a specific space requirement for servicing equipment, provide a minimum horizontal distance of 36" from face of equipment to opposite vertical surface. 11. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces

320 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Any equipment located above a ceiling that has any component which is serviceable shall be installed within 12" of the top of the ceiling CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply: 1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work. C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 1. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using experienced installers and new materials matching existing materials. Installers qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. END OF SECTION

321 SECTION SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete and operable installation, including all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tools, apparatus, transportation, warehousing, rigging, scaffolding and other equipment and services necessary to accomplish the work in accordance with the intent and meaning of these drawings and specifications COORDINATION A. Coordination of the work is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Contractor shall designate an individual competent and versed in the mechanical trades to coordinate the mechanical work with the work of other trades DEFINITIONS (AS USED ON DIVISION 15 DRAWINGS AND HEREIN) A. "Provide" means furnish, install and connect unless otherwise described in specific instances. B. "Piping" means pipes, fittings, valves and all like pipe accessories connected thereto. C. "Ductwork" means ducts, plenums, compartments, or casings including the building structure, which are used to convey or contain air. D. "Extend", "Submit", "Repair" and similar words mean that the Contractor (or his designated subcontractor) shall accomplish the action described. E. "Codes" or "Code" means all codes, laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, orders, decrees, and other requirements of all legally constituted authorities and public utility franchise holders having jurisdiction. F. "Products", "Materials" and "Equipment" are used interchangeably and mean materials, fixtures, equipment, accessories, etc. G. "Utility Areas" are defined as mechanical, electrical, janitorial, and similar rooms or spaces which are normally used or occupied only by custodial or maintenance personnel. "Public Areas" are defined as the rooms or spaces which are not included in the utility areas definition. H. "Building Boundary" includes concrete walkways immediately adjacent to the building structure. I. "Below Grade" means buried in the ground

322 J. "Substantial Mechanical Completion" means all components of all systems are functioning but lacking in final adjustment. K. Pressure rating specified (such as for valves and the like) means design working pressure for and with references to the fluid which the device will serve RELATED WORK A. Coordination: Refer to Architectural, Civil, Structural, and Electrical Drawings for the construction details and coordinate the work of this Division with that of other Divisions. Order the work of this Division so that progress will harmonize with that of other Divisions and all work will proceed expeditiously. The work of this Division shall include direct responsibility for the correct placing and connection of mechanical work in relation to the work of other Divisions. B. Examine other Divisions for work related to the work of this Division especially Division 16 - ELECTRICAL EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Visit the site prior to bidding and investigate the existing conditions which affect or will be affected by the work of this Division. Become thoroughly familiar with the working conditions and take into account any special or unusual features peculiar to this job. By the act of submitting a Bid, the Contractor will be deemed to have complied with the foregoing, to have accepted such conditions, and to have made allowance therefor in preparing his Bid. B. The location of existing concealed utility lines are shown in accordance with reference data received by the Architect. The Architect does not guarantee the accuracy of such data. The points of connection are therefor approximate and the Bidder shall include adequate funds in his Bid to cover costs of connection regardless of their exact location. C. Exercise extreme caution during trenching operations. Repair the damage caused by such operations to existing utility lines at no cost to the Owner, whether the lines are shown on drawings or not DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These drawings and specification do not include necessary components for construction safety. B. All provisions shall be deemed mandatory except as expressly indicated as optional by the word "may" or "option". C. Except where dimensioned, the drawings relating to this division are a diagrammatic presentation of the design concept, which indicates the general area where piping and ductwork is to be run. The drawings do not necessarily indicate any and all offsets and configurations required for coordination with other trades. The contractor is responsible for the correct placing of his work, and the proper location and

323 connection of his work in relation to the work or other trades. D. Contractor shall verify, at the site, the location of all existing equipment, ductwork, piping, utilities, panelboards, partitions affecting the installation of new work WATER (DOMESTIC AND FIRE), SANITARY SEWERS AND NATURAL GAS SERVICES A. Within 5 days after award of Contract, notify the serving utilities that the project is under construction and apply for permanent service in the name of the Owner. Furnish pertinent load and location information to them including the required dates for permanent service. Verify service locations and conform to utility company requirements. B. Contractor shall pay charges for permanent service connections levied by the utilities for which he will be reimbursed by the Owner. The reimbursement shall be limited to the actual amount of the utility service charges and a copy of the billing from the utility company shall accompany the Contractor's invoice PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain, schedule and pay for permits, licenses, approvals, tests, and inspections required by legally constituted authorities and public utility franchise holders having jurisdiction over the work. B. Afford the Architect's representative every facility for evaluating the skill and competence of the mechanics and to examine the materials. Concealed work shall be reopened when so directed during his periodic visits CODES AND REGULATIONS A. By submitting a Bid, Contractor is deemed to represent himself as competent to accomplish the work of this Division in conformance with applicable Codes. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and Code requirements, the Codes shall take precedence. Should such conflicts appear, cease work on the parts of the contract affected and immediately notify the Architect in writing. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to correct, at no cost to the Owner, any work he executes in violation of Code requirements. Specific references to codes elsewhere in this Division are either to aid the Contractor in locating applicable information or to deny him permission to use options which are permitted by Codes. B. Applicable Codes: (Current editions unless otherwise noted) 1. All local codes; city and/or county as applicable. 2. OSHA requirements 3. Uniform Building Code 4. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Titles (as applicable) 5. Fire Marshal Regulations

324 6. State, County, City Health Department Ordinances and Regulations 7. Regulations of all other authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Uniform Mechanical Code. 9. Uniform Plumbing Code. C. Where conflict or variation exists amongst Codes, the most stringent shall govern RECORD AND DOCUMENTATION A. Accumulate the following and deliver to the Owner's representative prior to final acceptance of the work. 1. Record (As-Built) Drawings: a. Maintain in good order in the field office a complete set of prints for all work being done under Division 15. Update the drawings daily with neat and legible annotations in red ink showing the work as actually installed. b. The actual size, location and elevation of all buried lines, valve boxes, manholes, monuments, and stubouts shall be accurately located and dimensioned from building walls or other permanent landmarks. c. Furnish the originals. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Furnish an operation and maintenance manual covering the stipulated mechanical systems and equipment. Seven copies of the manual, bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent, shall be provided to the Architect. 3. Furnish one complete manual prior to the time that system or equipment tests are performed. 4. Furnish the remaining manuals before the contract is completed. 5. The following identification shall be inscribed on the cover: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PROJECT TITLE CONTRACTOR Provide a table of contents. Insert tab sheets to identify discrete subjects. Instruction sheets shall be legible and easily understood, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manual shall be complete in all respects for all materials, piping, valves, devices and equipment, controls, accessories and appurtenances stipulated. Include as a minimum the following:

325 a. Updated approved materials lists, shop drawings and catalog information of all items of mechanical system equipment. b. System layout showing piping, valves and controls. c. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each component. d. A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown. e. Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the system. f. Procedure for starting. g. Procedure for operating. h. Shut-down instructions. i. Installation instructions. j. Adjustments, maintenance and overhaul instructions. k. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range and frequency. l. Safety precautions, diagrams and illustrations. m. Test procedures. n. Performance data. o. Parts lists, with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers. p. Preventive maintenance schedule. q. Service organization with name, address and telephone number. r. Valve identification chart and schedule. s. ASME certificates. t. Air balance report. u. Hydronic balance report. B. Standards Compliance: Where equipment or materials are specified to conform with requirements of standards of recognized technical or industrial organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

326 Engineers (ASHRAE), American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), American Gas Association (AGA), American Refrigeration Institute (ARI), or National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), that use a label or published listing as a method of indicating compliance, proof of such conformance shall be submitted and approved. The label or listing of the specified organization will be acceptable evidence. C. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Submit original and not pre-printed certifications. Do not make statements in the certifications that could be interpreted to imply that the product does not meet all requirements. D. Certified Test Reports: Certified Test Reports are reports of tests conducted on previously manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for use. Before delivery of materials and equipment, submit certified copies of test reports specified in the individual sections. E. Factory Tests: Factory tests are tests which are required to be performed on the actual materials or equipment proposed for use. Submit results of the tests in accordance with the requirements for laboratory test results of this Contract. F. Permits and Certificates of Inspection: Furnish the originals. G. Testing procedures and test results required in this and other sections. Furnish 2 copies. H. Other data required by other sections of this Division. Furnish 2 copies CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN A. Prepare and submit for review a construction cost breakdown for the major subdivisions of the mechanical work in accordance with General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1. B. Subdivide each item on the breakdown into two headings: labor and materials. Include overhead and profit in each entry. C. Submit one copy of the breakdown directly to the Engineer and the remaining copies sent through regular channels TOOLS A. Provide all special tools needed for proper operation and routine adjustment and maintenance of systems and equipment. Deliver tools to Owner's representative and request a receipt for same WARRANTIES A. Refer to Division 1 Section for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. B. Where periods more than one year are specified in the specifications, such longer

327 periods shall govern. However, when any component fails at any time during this period, the warranty period for such component and all other components which are inactive because of said failure shall be suspended. The warranty period for such components shall resume to run for the remaining portion of the warranty period when failed component is completely repaired and in operation; however, in no case shall the resumed portion of the warranty period be less than 3 months in duration. C. Neither payment for work, nor total or partial occupancy of work by the Owner, within or prior to the warranty period specified, shall be construed as acceptance of faulty work or shall condone any negligence or omission of Contractor in doing the work. D. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 15, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. E. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names and addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services SEISMIC RESTRAINT A. Provide seismic restraint for mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork. B. Contractor shall submit certification of suitability of seismic restraint methods signed by Structural Engineer registered in State of California. C. Contractor may refer to details applicable in the SMACNA, "GUIDELINES FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS", using the 'g' forces for "other buildings" classification CCR Title 24. Deliver a copy of these Guidelines to the Owner's Resident Inspector SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TESTS A. The Contractor shall inform the Owner one week prior to starting this testing in order that the Owner's representative may be present. B. After balancing and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall operate all systems continuously trouble free and stable for a minimum period of fourteen (14) consecutive days including Saturday and Sunday. Each day shall be a minimum of an 8-hour day. Should a problem arise, the fourteen (14) day period shall be restarted and repeated until successfully operated for full 14 days. A written report certified by the Owner's representative shall indicate the successful completion of a stable and trouble free 14 day period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Standard Products: Materials and equipment shall be essentially the standard cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such

328 materials or equipment and shall be their latest standard designs that comply with the specification requirements. B. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use at least two years prior to bid opening, unless more stringent requirements are specified. Where two or more units of the same type of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer. The components thereof, however, are not required to be exclusively of the same manufacturer. C. Each major component of equipment shall have manufacturer's name, address, model, and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. D. Whenever on the plans, or in these specifications, products are identified by the name of one manufacturer, it is intended that equivalent products of other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise indicated, if accepted as a substitution by the Architect. E. Where three or more manufacturers are listed as "acceptable manufacturers" however, then the products furnished shall be the product of one of the manufacturers listed. Manufacturers listed as "acceptable manufacturers" shall be considered "Equivalents" and shall meet quality and performance of a particular one specified by both name and catalog number PRODUCT LISTING A. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required (plumbing fixtures, pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in Work, except as otherwise indicated NAMEPLATE DATA A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model name, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location SUBSTITUTIONS A. General: Submittals of "Substitutions" shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. By proposing a substitution, it is deemed that the Contractor shall bear the cost of any changes (whether architectural, structural, electrical or mechanical) necessary to accommodate the substitution, if said substitution is accepted. C. Specific: Refer to other sections of this Division for additional requirements

329 2.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Make submittals in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. Specific: Refer to other sections of this Division for additional requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS 3.02 TESTS A. Workmanship shall be in the best standard practice of the trade. B. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations unless otherwise noted or specified. A. General: 1. Demonstrate that all components of the work of this Division have been provided and that they operate in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Provide instruments and personnel for tests and demonstrations. Submit signed test results. B. Specific: Refer to the other sections of this Division for test requirements DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage both while in storage and during construction. B. Cover materials in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred or splattered with plaster or paint, and all moving parts will be kept clean and dry. C. Replace or refinish any damaged materials including fronts of control panels, ductwork fittings, and shop fabricated ductwork. D. Keep cabinets and other openings closed to prevent entry of foreign matter. E. Specific: Refer to other sections of this Division for additional requirements PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Services: Examine the Contract Drawings and visit the project site to ascertain the extent of the existing services. Where existing equipment/services serving existing structures and/or existing structures to be demolished are to remain in service, reroute, relocate or extend such existing equipment and/or services to accommodate this project without additional cost. Unless otherwise, indicated

330 equipment to be removed and not reused shall become the property of the Contractor. B. Interruption of Existing Services: Where it is necessary to relocate or reroute existing services or utilities, or to make connections of new work to existing services or utilities, give timely written notice of such intent to the Owner and secure written approval before proceeding. Make all such interruptions at such time as permitted by the Owner. Anticipate such interruptions to be made outside of normal working hours or normal working days; therefore, no additional cost will be permitted for such work. Except in a case of emergency involving life, limb or health, do not operate any existing equipment (including valves). Where such operations are necessary, they will be performed by the Owner's personnel. C. Check and coordinate for clearance, accessibility and placement of equipment either by going through openings provided or by placing equipment during construction. Ordering of equipment to be shipped disassembled, or disassembly of equipment at Project Site and reassembly of equipment to accomplish this requirement shall be executed without additional cost. Where provided openings are inadequate to accommodate equipment, provide new openings and restoration of same, all at no additional cost. Obtain written approval for new openings before proceeding. D. Verify location of all plumbing fixtures and equipment within finished spaces with the Architectural Drawings. In the event that Mechanical Drawings do not indicate exact locations, or are in conflict with the Architectural Drawings, obtain information regarding proper locations. Installation of work without proper instruction under such circumstances will result in relocation of work, when directed, without additional cost INSTRUCTION TO OWNER PERSONNEL A. When specified in other sections, the Contractor shall furnish, without additional expense to the Owner, the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to the designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment or system specified. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance of work. Instruction shall be given at the Owner's convenience. The number of man-days (eight-hours) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in other sections. When more than four man-days of instruction are specified, approximately half of the time shall be used for classroom instruction. All other time shall be used for instruction with the equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications. B. Contractor shall video tape, both visual and audio, instruction to Owner's personnel on the maintenance and operation of the mechanical systems. C. Submit certification, signed by Owner's agent, that instructions have been completed and the videotape has been reviewed and delivered to the Owner. D. Printed operating instructions and a copy of wiring diagrams are to be mounted in all

331 3.06 CLEANING equipment areas, framed and behind glass or encased in plastic. Printed operating instructions shall include steps for starting up and securing equipment. As a precedent to final acceptance four (4) copies of instructions are to be submitted to the Architect for review. Contractor shall turn over to Owner in a neat brochure form, equipment guarantee and maintenance instructions. A. Cleaning shall be done as the work proceeds. Periodically remove waste and debris to keep the site as clean as is practical. B. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning. C. Leave exposed parts of the mechanical work in a neat, clean and usable condition, with painted surfaces unblemished and plated metal surfaces polished. D. Thoroughly clean all materials, equipment and appliances. Clean and prepare all surfaces to be painted. Clean the entire premises of unused materials, debris, spots and marks to the satisfaction of the Architect. E. Remove, thoroughly clean and replace all strainers and automatic valves after the system has been put in operation until system is clear of all foreign matter and repeat this operation after ten (10) days and again after the system has been in operation thirty (30) days. Submit certification that this operation has been completed SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Enclose and guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts in accordance with OSHA requirements. Insulate, guard, and cover any high-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or create a fire hazard. END OF SECTION

332 SECTION MECHANICAL PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests made after award of the Contract for substitutions of products specified in Division RELATED SECTIONS A. The Contractor's construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Division 1 Section "Submittals." B. Standards: Refer to Division 1 Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products specified. C. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options are included under Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment." D. Division 1 Section "Products and Substitutions." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Products" is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for project or taken from Contractor's stock of previously purchased products. "Materials" is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed or applied to form units of work. B. "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.). Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in contract documents, including "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction", and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry SUBSTITUTIONS A. The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor options on products and construction methods. Revisions to contract documents, where requested by Owner, Architect or Engineer, are "changes" not "substitutions". Substitutions requested during bidding period, which have been accepted prior to Contract Date, are included in contract document and are not subject to requirements for substitutions as specified herein. Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing

333 authorities do not constitute "substitutions"; and do not constitute a basis for change orders, except as provided for in contract documents. Otherwise, contractor's requests of changes in products, materials and methods of construction required by contract documents are considered requests for "substitutions", and are subject to requirements hereof. B. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Mechanical Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements SUBMITTALS 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 5. Contractor will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects. 6. Contractor certifies that the substitution is not heavier than the specified item and does not necessitate any structural redesign; will fit within the room or area designed for the specified item; and will not exceed any maximum dimensions specified or shown on the original contract Documents. All roof mounted equipment must be less than or equal to the maximum height dimension from the finished roof as shown on the drawings. 7. Contractor represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. 8. Contractor represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that specified. A. Requests for Substitutions: Submit 3 copies, fully identified for product or method being replaced by substitution, including related specification section and drawing number(s), and fully documented to show compliance with requirements for substitutions. Include product data/drawings, description of methods, samples where applicable, contractor's detailed comparison of significant qualities between specified item and proposed substitution, statement of effect on construction time and coordination with other affected work, cost information or

334 proposal, and Contractor's statement to the effect that proposed substitution will result in overall work equal-to-or-better-than work originally indicated. B. Substitution Warranty: All submittals of Request for Substitutions under the General and Supplementary Conditions of this Section shall be accompanied by a completely executed (filled out) and signed Substitution Warranty in the form entitled "Substitution Warranty", bound herein. Substitutions will not be accepted without the Substitution Warranty. In addition to other requirements, Contractor shall warrant in writing on his own letterhead that substituted materials shall perform as specified, and assume complete responsibility for same, including responsibility and costs required for modifications to building or other materials or equipment, and any additional coordination with work of other trades. Testing, if required, shall be paid by Contractor. C. Responsibility of Contractor: The contractor shall be solely and directly responsible for fitting accepted substitute material and equipment into the available space in a manner acceptable to the Architect, and for the proper operation of the substituted equipment with all other equipment with which it may be associated. The Contractor shall bear all costs of meeting the above requirements for presenting a proposed substitution, and if the substitution is accepted, he must bear all costs involved. D. Submit the following as part of the Request for Substitutions: 1. Data showing proposed equipment is "equal" to that specified and is fully equipped, fits the space allotted and has physical configuration and weight similar to the equipment specified in detail. 2. A complete layout, where applicable, of equipment room or area must be submitted for equipment proposed in "Request for Substitution". Submittal shall conform to requirements of Division "Basic Mechanical Requirement" as applies to "Coordination Drawings." 3. Seismic Restraint: Where seismic restraint is required for products or equipment as specified, methods of seismic restraint signed by structural engineer registered in the State of California, shall be submitted for review ENGINEER S ACTION A. The Engineer may request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Requests, by the Engineer, for additional information or documentation will be in accordance with Division 1 requirements. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

335 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions shall conform to the product requirements for the specified products or equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable.) END OF SECTION

336 SAMPLE S U B S T I T U T I O N S W A R R A N T Y In addition to other requirements, Contractor shall warrant in writing that substituted materials shall perform as specified, and assume complete responsibility for same, including responsibility and costs required for modifications to building or other materials or equipment, and any additional coordination with work of other trades. Testing, if required, shall be paid by contractor. The following is an example of the type Substitution Warranty which shall be executed by the Contractor, on his own letterhead: SUBSTITUTION WARRANTY We propose to provide (Describe items being proposed for substitution) for in lieu of (List project name) as indicated on the drawings and described in Section of the Specifications. We agree to assume the cost of any modifications to other portions of the work as necessary to accommodate or material(s) and system(s). We hereby warrant that (Provide Description) is the equivalent of (Specified Product) in every respect and will perform satisfactorily under the conditions and use indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specifications. Signed: Date: (Manufacturer/Supplier/Other) Signed: Date: (Subcontractor) Signed: Date: (Contractor) NOTE: Affix Corporate Seal over Signatures.

337

338 SECTION PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Division One of these specifications, apply to the work of this section SCOPE A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, and performing all operations required for complete and operable plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. These drawings and specifications do not include necessary components for construction safety. C. These drawings are diagrammatic and show in general where the piping and ductwork is to be run. The drawings do not necessarily indicate any and all offsets and configurations required for coordination with other trades. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of this work, and the proper location and connection of his work in relation to the work of other trades. D. The Contractor shall examine all mechanical, architectural, structural, electrical and other drawings and accept such conditions and make allowances for them in preparing the bid VISITING THE PREMISES A. The Contractor, before submitting his bid on the work must visit the site and familiarize himself with all visible existing conditions, as a result of having visited the premises, the Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the work as it related to such visible existing conditions. B. The submission of a bid will be considered an acknowledgement on the part of the bidder of his visitation to the site INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES A. Service shall be maintained in all existing plumbing systems except for short designated intervals for making connections. The time of interruption of service shall be coordinated with the Owner in order to minimize time and inconvenience. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for any interruption to service and shall be required to flush lines, relight pilots and perform all operations necessary to return the system to proper operation. The Contractor shall repair any damage to existing systems caused by his operation

339 1.06 INTERPRETATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Drawings are schematic. The location of all existing equipment, ductwork, piping, utilities, panelboards, partitions, etc., shall be verified at the site. B. Where existing systems to remain in service are dismantled to facilitate the installation of new work and cannot be reinstalled to its original conditions, relocate new work as required to maintain existing conditions of service. C. Where changes are required that are not shown on contract drawings, they shall be immediately brought to the Architect's attention for resolution. D. Conformation to requirements of local and/or State Codes and/or ordinances including the Uniform City and County Building Codes, State and county City Health Department Ordinances, State of California Industrial Accident Commission safety orders and regulations of the State Fire Marshal, and the California Administrative Code PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. Apply and pay for all permits, fees, inspections, examinations and tests required by any legally constituted public authorities SUBMITTALS A. Submission of six (6) brochures containing material lists, certified manufacturer's drawings, performance data, rough-in dimensions and cuts of all equipment and fixtures within thirty-five (35) days after contract is signed. Submittals shall be in a neat brochure form and shall contain a complete list, in index form, of the manufacturer's names, cuts of equipment, performance data, catalogue numbers and trade names as required to properly identify the materials and equipment to be furnished under these specifications. use tabbed separator sheets in brochures. Each item shall be properly identified by reference to item number or paragraphs in the specifications. Any deviation from item as specified shall be clearly indicated on the submittal and noted as such FURNISHING ITEMS A. For any equipment or materials indicated but not described as to model or quality, obtain information from Architect prior to bidding. Failure to do so will not relieve Contractor from furnishing items of the quality desired by Architect before final acceptance, and at no additional cost to Owner SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUIVALENT EQUIPMENT A. Refer to "Substitutions" in Division 1. The Architect will review all substitutions when submitted. B. Equivalent Equipment: This section of the specification specifies certain equipment in detail. It also names equivalent equipment which is not considered

340 to be a "substitution". However, submit the equivalent equipment named herein to the Architect for review as per the General Requirements subsection of this section of the specifications. Equivalent equipment, if named herein, will be considered equivalent if it is equivalent quality, capacity and is fully equipped as the unit specified in detail; if the unit fits the space allotted; and if the unit has a physical configuration and weight similar to the unit specified in detail RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide a complete set of "as-built" drawings showing locations and depths of all buried and concealed pipe and equipment. Master copy shall be kept in the custody of the Resident Inspector and shall be updated daily to show every change from the original drawings and specifications. No backfilling of trenches will be permitted until "as-built" drawings are up-to-date. No progress payments will be authorized until "as-built" drawings are up-to-date. Depth of sewers shall be from a permanent bench mark. Entries shall be in a neat, clear, professional manner. Upon completion of the project, obtain Inspector's signature on the record set verifying information. Transfer as-built information to reproducible tracings of each sheet of record set and deliver them unfolded, along with the record set, to the Architect prior to final acceptance PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect all work, materials and equipment from damage during progress of work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to Owner, and before requesting final acceptance. Coordinate the work of this section with that of all other sections to avoid interferences and for the general benefit of all the work SEISMIC RESTRAINT B. Contractor may refer to details applicable in the SMACNA "GUIDELINES FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS", using the "g" forces for "other buildings" classification. Deliver a copy of these Guidelines to the Owner's Resident Inspector. C. Refer to Structural Drawings for any restrictions on methods, location of support point, and maximum weight per support for attachment to structural system COORDINATION A. Responsibility for coordination with connecting or related work furnished under other sections remains the work of this section. This includes but is not limited to the following: Electrical - The Electrical Section of the specifications indicate and specify conduit, conductors, outlets, disconnect switches, starters except as hereinafter specified, and the making of final power connections. Concrete - Responsibility for the proper size and location of equipment pads furnished under another section remains the work of this section

341 1.16 USE OF TERMS Structural - Location of any necessary drilling or cutting of structural members shall be coordinated with and approved by structural. Substitutions - Any change or revision to the work from the shown on the plans and specified which is required due to the use of substitute or equivalent equipment under which it is made. A. Use of the mandatory word "shall" has been dispensed with in the majority of the preceding and following paragraphs. This, together with the abbreviated sentence construction is solely for the purpose of brevity. All parties shall interpret the provisions and requirements of the specifications as mandatory, unless otherwise expressly and particularly stipulated. B. The terms "install" or "provide" mean "furnish and install" MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Follow manufacturer's directions of articles furnished in addition to directions shown on the drawings or specified herein ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. All motors and power driven equipment required and connected with the work of this section of the Specifications are to be furnished and installed under this section. The Electrical Section of the specifications indicate and specify conduit, conductors, outlets, disconnect switches, starters except as hereinafter specified, and the making of final connections ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATION A. Prior to the acceptance of this work, adjust and operate all plumbing systems to the satisfaction of the Architect CLEAN-UP 1.22 TESTS A. Thoroughly clean all materials, equipment, fixtures and appliances. Clean and prepare all surfaces to be painted. Clean the entire premises of unused material, debris, spots, and marks to the satisfaction of the Architect. Remove, thoroughly clean and replace all fluid strainers after the system has been in operation thirty (30) days. A. Nothing in these specifications shall be construed to permit deviation from the test requirements of any legally constituted authority. Where tests as specified hereinafter are at variance with test requirements of any legally constituted authority, contractor may, with the approval of the authority concerned, perform whichever test is more restrictive, but in no case shall test be less than as

342 specified herein. No system shall at any time be tested at more than 10% above the requirements of tests as specified. B. Piping of the plumbing systems shall be tested as follows: 1.23 GUARANTEE 1. Sewer and Roof Drainage System: Perform a hydrostatic test on system equal to not less than a ten foothead of water for a period of not less than 15 minutes. 3. Water Piping: Test piping hydrostatically and make tight under 125 pounds per square inch. 4. Instruments and labor for tests furnished by Contractor. A. All materials and equipment provided and/or installed under this specification shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective materials or inferior workmanship noticed at time of installation and/or during guarantee period shall be corrected immediately to the entire satisfaction of the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only new materials, and unless prefabricated, deliver to the site in standard sizes. Use the standard product of one manufacturer for each article of its type. Comply with the minimum standards for plumbing materials as outlined in Table A, Section 201, 1991 edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code except as herein specified to be above these standards. Materials and workmanship not otherwise specified are to conform to the latest applicable Federal, N.F.P.A., A.S.M.E., A.S.T.M., N.E.M.A., or A.G.A.; A.N.S.I. specifications PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Soil, waste and vent piping to 5 feet outside of buildings, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, coated inside and out and shall be labeled with the mark of quality and permanence as illustrated in Commercial Standard CS-188. At Contractor's option, piping 3 inches and smaller if kept 6 inches or more above ground, may be galvanized steel pipe with black coated cast iron screwed drainage fittings, except use galvanized drainage fittings where run exposed. At Contractor's option, use type "DWV" hard drawn copper waste, vents and fittings. B. All waste and vent piping occurring in demountable or minimum thickness walls shall be Type DWV copper pipe from finish floor to above roof. C. Soil, waste and vent piping above ground, Type DWV hard drawn copper drainage piping as manufacturing by Anaconda, Mueller or Revere. Fittings, cast

343 brass, solder-joint drainage fittings as manufactured by Anaconda, Nibco, Mueller, or Revere, DWV tubing - ASTM B-306. Drainage fittings ASA B D. Sewer piping from 5 feet outside of buildings, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings for pipe 3 inches and smaller, and extra strength vitrified clay pipe and fittings for pipe 4 inches and larger unless indicated cast iron. At Contractor's option, pipe and fittings 4 inches and larger, Johns-Manville Ring-Tite P.V.C., ASTM-D3034-SDR 35. E. Roof drainage and downspout piping, as specified for soil, waste and vent piping. F. Roof drainage and downspout piping, galvanized steel pipe with galvanized, banded, malleable iron screwed fittings above ground, standard weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings below ground. G. Roof drainage and downspout piping, above grade, Type "DWV", hard drawn copper. Pipe and fittings; standard weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings below ground. H. Cold water piping underground outside of buildings and upstream of building shut-off valves, sizes 4" through 6", P.V.C. "Ring-Tite" pipe 200 p.s.i. (SDR 21) meeting all requirements of ASTM-D1784, ASTM-D2241 and Commercial Standard PS with factory fabricated P.V.C. bell fittings. Install pipe and provide concrete thrust blocking as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be copper tubing, conforming to ASTM B88. J. Pipe downstream of building shut-off and within building, seamless hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type "K" below ground, Type "L" above ground, with wrought copper ANSI B16.22, or cast bronze ANSI B16.18 cast bronze ANSI B16.18 cast solder fittings Class 150. All piping under floor slabs to be Type "K" copper regardless of size. K. Hot water piping, seamless hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type K below ground, Type L above ground, with wrought copper ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze ANSI B16.88 solder fittings, Class No M. Water piping exposed serving plumbing fixtures, (except pipe noted to be run exposed in kitchen, shops and utility areas), I.P.S. chrome plated yellow brass pipe with polished chrome plated 125# screwed brass fittings. O. Dielectric Isolators: Central Plastics Distributing Company, 150 lb. Cadmium Plated Insulating Unions PIPE JOINTS A. Thread Compound: "Crane Thread Lubricant" or Led Plate Paste No. 250". No other type of thread compound is acceptable unless approved in writing before installation. At Contractor's option use "Teflon" thread tape applied without pipe "dope". B. Dual-Tite double sealing neoprene gaskets for hub and plain end cast iron soil

344 pipe below ground. C. Neoprene sealing sleeve and stainless steel shield and clamp assembly for No- Hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings. Sleeve must bear the IC mark of quality. Sleeve permitted only on piping above grade. Use MG Coupling Company, or equal, cast iron couplings below grade. D. Solder: tin-lead per ASTM B-32 for drainage lines, 95-5 tin-antimony all other copper lines PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Piping which is accessible for maintenance shall be identified with semi-rigid plastic markers and directional flow arrows. Markers shall be provided adjacent to each valve, each branch take-off, each pipe on each side of a wall or floor and on horizontal and vertical pipe runs no more than 25 feet on center. B. All markers must conform to the Scheme for identification of piping systems (ASA-A ) sponsored by the National Safety Council and the Society of Mechanical Engineers and OSHA. C. Parkers to be Seton Name Plate Corporation or equivalent PIPE VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Flexible connections molded bellows type reinforced teflon or rubber flanged joint. Where space conditions permit, straight sided vibration joints are acceptable. B. Manufacturers: Resistoflex, U.S. Rubber, American Rubber, Belmontd, Korfund, Vibration Mountings, Mason Mercer WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Arrestors shall be bellows type and shall be PDI rated and sized as specified herein. Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or Zurn UNIONS, GASKETS AND STRAINERS A. Unions - 2 inches and under: Walworth, Crane or Stockham, 250# class ground joint malleable iron screwed unions with brass to iron seat, galvanized or black to match piping in which installed. B. Unions - 2-1/2 inches and larger: Cast iron flanged, gasket type, galvanized or black to match piping in which installed. C. Unions - for copper tubing: Nibco #733 D. Gaskets: 1/16-inch Garlock #122 or Cranite "CC". E. Strainers: Crane, Wilkins or Zurn Y type except as otherwise noted. Cast iron or bronze bodies. Strainer element stainless steel, with perforations suitable for

345 2.09 CLEANOUTS service requirements. Strainers in copper lines shall have bronze bodies. A. Cleanouts on cast iron soil pipe, iron body with extra heavy bronze plugs screwed into caulking ferrules. Cleanouts on steel pipe, extra heavy bronze plugs. Cleanouts on vitrified clay pipe, vitrified clay pipe plugs and/or cast iron hub with iron body cleanout and extra heavy bronze plug. Where cleanouts occur in finished interior surfaces, smooth polished chromium plated. Exposed parts of floor cleanouts in finished rooms, non-slip polished nickel bronze. Floor cleanouts adjustable type. Where cleanouts occur in carpeted floor areas, the cover shall be elevated so as to be flush with finish carpet surface. Wherever possible, cleanouts shall be kept out of carpeted area. B. Exterior cleanouts: 1. On cast iron pipe above ground, or in lawns or unpaved areas, Smith #4425, Josam or Zurn Fig. Z-1440A in Brooks No. 3RT access box. 2. In paved areas: Smith #4223, Josam CAL, Zurn Z with cast iron top. 3. On steel pipe: Extra heavy bronze plugs. 4. On vitrified clay pipe below grade: Vitrified clay plugs. 5. On vitrified clay pipe to grade: Cast iron hub with Smith #4425, Josam , or Zurn Fig. Z-1440A in Brooks No. 3RT access box. C. Interior cleanouts: 2.10 VALVES 1. Wall type for cast iron pipe: Smith #4532, Josam , or Zurn Z Wall type for steel pipe: Smith #4472, Josam , or Zurn A. Valves, unless otherwise specified or noted, are gate type. All valves of the same type to be of the same manufacturer. The valves listed below are approved. B. Solder joint type valves: Gates valves: 150 pound, solder joint, bronze. Powell-No S Nibco/Scott--No. S-136 Globe valves: 150 pound, solder joint, bronze Powell-No Nibco/Scott--No. S-235-B

346 Check valves: 150 pound, swing, Y-pattern Powell-No Nibco/Scott-No. S-433B C. Screwed and/or flanged valves: Gate 2 inches and under: 150-pound screwed and/or flanged, all bronze, solid wedge disc. R.S. Powell Fig. 514 Jenkins Fig. 49-U Nibco/Scott Fig. T131 Walworth Fig. 11 Crane Fig. 431 Kennedy Fig. 80 Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and larger: Standard screwed and/or flanged, iron body bronze mounted, O.S.& Y. Powell Fig & 1793 Jenkins Fig. 650A-651A Nibco/Scott Fig. T-617-O&F Walworth Fig. 726 & 726F Crane Fig /2 & 465-1/2 Kennedy Fig & 0611 Gate valves 2-1/2 to 6 inches for outside water service: Standard flanged iron body bronze mounted, N.R.S. Powell Fig Jenkins Fig. 326 Nibco/Scott Fig. F619 Walworth Fig. 719F Crane Fig. 461 Kennedy Fig. 058 Gate valves 8 inches and larger for outside water service: Standard hub end, iron body bronze mounted, N.R.S. Jenkins Fig. 327 Crane Fig /2 Walworth Fig. 734 Globe valves: 150-pound screwed, bronze, stainless steel plug type disc with union bonnet. Powell Fig. 102 Crane Fig. 14-1/2P Nibco/Scott Fig. T256AP Walworth Fig. 237P Jenkins Fig. 246P Kennedy Fig. 138PS Angle valves: 150-pound screwed, bronze, stainless steel plug type disc with union bonnet: Powell Fig

347 Crane Fig. 16-1/2P Nibco/Scott Fig. T356AP Walworth Fig. 238P Jenkins Fig. 548P Kennedy Fig. 139PS Gas valves at equipment: All bronze, flathead screwed gas cocks: Powell Fig. 947 Crane Fig. 270 Healey Fig. 20F Walworth Fig. 591 Gas service cocks: Semi-steel 175 pound with tapered bronze plug and bolted yoke. Furnish one operating wrench for each valve. Powell Fig & 2201 Nordstrom Fig. 142 & 143 Walworth Fig & 1797F Homestead Fig. 611 & 612 Check valves 2 inches and smaller: 200 pound, screwed, all bronze regrinding swing type. Powell Fig. 560 Nibco/Scott Fig. T-453-B Walworth Fig. 420 Crane Fig. 36 Jenkins Fig. 762-A Kennedy Fig. 544 Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger: 125# standard flanged, iron body, bronze mounted, renewable seat and disc type. Powell Fig. 559 Nibco/Scott Fig. F-918-B Walworth Fig. 928F Crane Fig. 373 Jenkins Fig. 624 Kennedy Fig PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORTS A. Standard manufactured malleable iron or steel split ring hangers with adjustable length of pipe or rod for horizontal pipe and wrought iron or steel pipe clamps for vertical pipe. Hangers and supports, Fee & Mason, Grinnell, or equivalent hangers of the same type to be of the same manufacturer. All hangers and supports shall conform to ASA code for pressure piping, B31.1. B. Isolators, Semco "Trisolators" or Potter-Roemer Company "Pr-Isolators" of size required FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES

348 A. Floor, wall and ceiling plates, unless otherwise specified hereinafter under plumbing fixtures, "Beaton Cadwell" #10, or approved equal, steel flanged with locking device and polished chromium plated finish PIPE SLEEVES A. 20 gauge steel pipe sleeves for concrete walls and floors. Galvanized steel telescoping type sleeves as manufactured by "Adjust-Crete" or "Paramount Manufacturing", or Sperzel poly-ethylene "Crete Sleeve", may be used. Pipe sleeves installed under structures are to be terra cotta or fiber. B. Fire wall and floor penetrations: 2.15 PIPE FLASHING Bare Pipe - All pipe penetrating fire walls and floors shall be encased in adjustable sheet metal cans - minimum, 24 ga. - sized for maximum 1" spacing between pipe and can. Spacing shall be packed on either end with double neoprene coated rope with positive fastening catch. Insulated Pipe - All insulated pipe penetrating fire walls and floors shall be encased in adjustable sheet metal cans - minimum 24 ga. - sized for maximum 1" spacing between insulation and can. Insulation shall consist of 360 o sheet metal shield - minimum, 26 ga. and shall be the same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. Spacing between shield and can shall be packed on either end with double neoprene coated rope with positive fastening catch. On hot piping, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over butt joints. A. Flashing assemblies, Semco Fig. # or as required with vandalproof hood for vent pipes, and "Semco" fig. # for other pipes. B. Pipes passing through roofs to be flashed with 4 pound sheet lead flashing burned to form one piece with a sheet metal supporting boot and having at least 8 inch wide flanges to work in with roofing. Flashing to extend up pipe and is to be covered with a screwed or caulked counter-flashing sleeve ACCESS BOXES AND PANELS A. Access boxes for gas and water service valves, Brooks Concrete Works Model #1-RT or #RT with the words "Gas" or "water" respectively cast in top of cover, or comparable box by Fraser Cement Products Company. B. Access boxes for sewer cleanouts brought to grade in unpaved areas, Brooks concrete Works Model #3RT with the word "Sewer" cast in top of cover, or comparable box by Fraser Cement Products Company. C. Access panels in walls and ceilings, except as hereinafter specified, Smith 4760 W/AK, Acorn , Wade W-8490-K-AK or Zurn 1460 W/AK of the size required or noted, but not less than 12" x 12". Provide Allen wrench operating device set flush in face of door. Doors and frames prime coat finish

349 D. Access panels in tile walls, Zurn Fig , Smith 4730, or Wade W-8480-ST cover and frame chrome plated or stainless steel, size suitable for purpose intended with minimum opening or 12" x 12" HOSE BIBBS A. Provide loose key stops for all hose bibbs. B. Inside hose bibbs, Acorn No. 8121, 3/4 inch with flange and hose end, polished chromium plated, vacuum breaker. C. Recessed hose bibbs, complete with box, stop, vacuum breaker and hose connection. Acorn number: 8151, 18 ga., 304 g.g., No. 4 finish RELIEF VALVES A. Install pressure relief valves and temperature relief valves and/or combination temperature and pressure relief valves at all water heater installations. Pressure relief valves to be A.S.M.E. labeled and rated with capacity in B.T.U. not less than that of the water heater, set to relieve at not more than 50 psi above water supply pressure and not more than the working pressure on the tank. Temperature relief valves to be A.G.A. labeled and rated for capacity of heater in which installed. Combination type relief valves to be rated and labeled the same as for individual pressure and temperature relief valves PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES A. Plumbing fixture trim and exposed supplies and wastes are to be brass with polished chromium plated finish unless otherwise specified. Provide individual loose key or screwdriver stops for all fixture supplies. Separately trap all wastes. Furnish chrome plated wall escutcheons for all exposed supplies and trap arms. Locate stops below fixtures or countertops. B. The following specification mentions manufacturer's to establish a standard of quality. The following fixtures and accessories are acceptable, if used throughout: Bradley, Kohler or Crane plumbing fixtures. Delaney flush valves. Bradley, Elkay or Just stainless steel sinks. Josam or Wade drains. C. Provide stainless steel "Hudee" ring, as required, for all flat rim sinks and lavatories installed in countertops. D. Provide abrasive washers under all single drilling deck mounted trim. E. All plumbing fixture faucets, submitted for review, shall have identification label or certification showing compliance with California Title 24, Part 6, Article 1, "Energy Conservation Standards"; Article 11, T ; Article 2, T and Article 4,

350 1604 and F. Furnish the following fixtures: Floor Drain - Item FD-1: Zurn no. z-415-b-p, cast iron drain, complete with round polished nickel-bronze top, trap primer connection and p-trap. Service Sink Item SS-1: American standard no "x28", acid resistant enamal; floor mounted service sink. t&s #b-0665-bstr wall mounted faucet with atmospheric vacuum breaker spout faucet. Lavatory - Item LAV-1: Bradley lav6101 chase-mounted, barrier-free rectangular stainless steel lav, ada complaint, bead blast, centershank faucet. Water Closet - Item WC-1: Bradley WC7335 or equal. Type 304 Stainless steel, ADA compliant, chase-mounted with back supply. Low consumption mechanical flush valve. Urinal - Item UR-1: Bradley URI8200 or equal chase-mounted, type 304 stainless steel urinal. back supply, bead blast, 1.6 gpf. w/ low consumption mechanical flush valve (lcmfv). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Construct pipe lines of full length sections of pipe specified. Short sections allowed only when run requires less than one full length of pipe. Fabricate short sections from dimensions taken at site. B. Install pipe straight and true. Do not spring or force piping into place. Install piping in such a manner as to prevent any undue strain on equipment. Install pipe runs and connections to insure unrestricted flow, eliminate air pockets and unusual noise, and allow for drainage of system. C. Make-up joints with inside smooth and obstructed. Thoroughly ream cut pipe ends to remove all burrs. Inspect pipe and fittings and remove obstructions prior to fabrication. Make screwed joints tight with tongs and wrenches. Re-make leaky connections with new materials. The use of thread cement or caulking to make joints tight is prohibited. D. Conceal piping in finished portions of building except where otherwise noted, or otherwise directed by Architect or Engineer. Piping to clear structural members and obstructions even if drawings do not so indicate. Constantly check the work of the other trades to prevent interference. E. Make plated, polished or enameled connections with special care. Allow no tool marks or threads to show. Support with neat plated, polished or enameled hangers with round head screws of same material and finish to match item being

351 supported. F. Make pipe size reductions with reducing fittings. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. Close nipples are not allowed. G. Rough-in as rapidly as the general construction will permit, and test before lathing, plastering or other finish work is started. Accurately rough-in and fit work to available space. Cap or plug the ends and openings in pipe and fittings immediately after installation and until fixtures are installed and/or final connections are made. H. Dielectric Isolators: Where dissimilar materials come in contact, isolate with insulating unions for connecting non-compatible pipe and/or valves to pipe, other than brass valves connected to steel pipe. I. Flexible connections in water lines - flexible connections at pumps installed with axis parallel to pump shaft. Where bellows type are used, install additional supports to compensate for axial thrust. J. Provide an air chamber at each valved water outlet or fixture supply for fixtures with manual closing valves. Air chamber shall be 18 inches long and one pipe size larger than supply to outlet. For a battery or fixture, one air chamber 30 inches long and the full size of the header, but not less than 1 inch may be installed in lieu of individual air chambers. Precision Plumbing Products, JMJ "System Rated" arrestors are acceptable in lieu of air chambers. K. Install water hammer arrestors on supply line to fixtures with self-closing, automatic or flushometer valves. Arrestors shall be as close as possible to individual fixtures and on the end of the header for a battery of fixtures. Arrestors shall be installed in the wall or furring, whenever possible, behind an access plate large enough to permit removal of the arrestor. Sizes as shown on the drawings or as specified hereinafter. Sizes and model numbers are J.R. Smith; equivalent arrestors by Josam, Wade or Zurn are acceptable. L. Cover underground metal piping 24 inches unless otherwise indicated. Cover underground transite or plastic piping 36" unless otherwise noted. Where this coverage cannot be obtained, encase in concrete as directed by the engineer. M. All accessible for maintenance piping shall be identified with pipe markers or tags as specified under "Pipe Identification" Part II of this Section. N. Install horizontal sanitary and drainage piping to a uniform grade of 1/8-inch per foot unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer. Where inverts are indicated on drawings, lay pipe accurately to that grade. Grade vent piping for proper ventilation and drainage in accordance with code requirements. Gang vents where possible in order to maintain minimum penetration of roof. O. Plastic pipe below grade: 1. Plastic pipe shall be installed no less than 36" below grade. Risers to grade shall be protected by a rigid casing. Risers to and nipples in valve

352 boxes shall be Schedule Pipe shall be run under blacktop or compacted soil areas free from large stones or boulders. Pipe may pass under sidewalks or driveways less than 10 feet wide, as long as no joint occurs under such crossing. 3. Pipe passing under paved areas wider than 10 feet shall be in ventilated conduits extending past the paving. 4. Pipe shall not support the weight of valves, metal fittings or other items. Pipe shall be installed strain-free. P. Plastic pipe and fittings shall not be stored or left exposed to sunlight. Q. Pipe in open trenches shall be shielded. Sand envelope may be placed around pipe with the exception of joints with the approval of the inspector. Mechanical protection for the pipe shall be used when necessary to leave pipe exposed overnight. S. Thoroughly flush all water piping at least twice before sterilization as specified herein. T. Provide scarfed outlet on exposed terminations of downspouts, lengths as required to direct water into basin of splash block. U. Do all necessary trenching, excavation, shoring and backfilling required for the proper laying of the pipe lines. Bottoms of trenches to be cut to grade. Make trenches 12 inches wider than the greatest diameter of the pipe. All piping under building slab shall be set on a 6-inch bed of damp sand and backfilled to bottom of slab with damp sand. All underground piping, outside the building, shall be set on a 6-inch bed of damp sand and backfilled within 12 inches of finish grade with damp sand. Remainder of backfill to be native soil. Remove excess earth from the premises. Do not backfill until installation has been approved and as-built drawings are up to date. Promptly install all piping after excavation or cutting for same has been done, so as to keep the excavations open as short a time as possible. Provide and install 14 gauge copper "Tracer" wire, continuous for entire length, for all underground non-metallic piping. Secure to piping at alternate joints, at each fitting and at each valve. Locate "Tracer" wire along side pipe, but not under pipe. V. Install thrust blocks at all thrust points in cement or PVC pressure water lines. Install thrust blocks in accordance with pipe manufacturers recommendations, or as shown in Johns-Manville Installation Guides "Transite Ring-Tite Pressure Pipe" and "Ring-Tite PVC Pipe" INSTALLATION OF UNIONS, GASKETS AND STRAINERS A. Install a union on one side of shut-off valves, including on building side of underground house valves, at both sides of automatic valves, at equipment connection and elsewhere as indicated or required. Install unions in accessible locations

353 B. Install strainers in accessible locations to allow for easy removal of strainer element, and so that they may be flushed without spilling liquid over equipment INSTALLATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Make up screwed joints with a minimum amount of compound applied to the male thread only. Apply "Teflon" thread tape tightly, starting with entry thread and covering all threads. Overlap each wrap. B. Weld joints on pipe with continuous welds and with pipe ends beveled before fabrication. Weld fittings in accordance with manufacturer's directions. C. Make up flanged joints with ring gaskets. D. Mechanical joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Clean pipe and fittings, apply flux and solder joints in accordance with manufacturer's directions ROUGHING-IN FOR FIXTURES A. Rough-in for all fixtures and/or equipment shown on any drawings, including the architectural drawings, which forms a part of the contract documents. This shall include all fixtures and equipment shown and/or noted as N.I.C. (not in contract) or as U.O.S. (furnished under another section of the specification). Stub out all piping to the exact location of the fixtures and set symmetrical with the fixture. Stub out for fixture supply pipes with drop ear fittings secured to stud or backing plate. Stub out two pipe diameters and terminate with pipe cap. When lines are indicated as capped or plugged at floor level, plug flush with the finished floor. B. On copper systems connecting nipples for fixture rough-in, red brass or bronze. Steel nipples are not acceptable. C. Individual branches to fixtures: WATER TRAP AND SOIL OR FIXTURE COLD HOT CONNECTIONS WASTE VENT Water Closets: Tank 1/2" - 4" 4" 2" Flush Valve 3/4" - 2" 2" 1-1/2" Lavatories 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/4" x 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" Sinks, Kitchen 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" Sinks, Wash 3/4" 3/4" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" Sinks, Mop 1/2" 1/2" 3" 3" 2" Drinking Fountains Multiple 1/2" - 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" Floor Drains - - 2"/3" 2"/3" 2" Floor Sinks 1/2" 1/2" 2"/3" 2"/3" 2"

354 D. Water headers serving water closets shall be the following sizes and be the same size through their length: 1-1/4" pipe for 1 flush valve 1-1/2" pipe for 3 flush valves 2" pipe for 9 flush valves E. Water headers serving urinals shall be the following sizes and be the same size throughout their length: 1" pipe for 1 flush valve 1-1/4" pipe for 2 flush valves 1-1/2" pipe for 6 flush valves F. Water headers serving lavatories shall be the following sizes and shall be the same size through their length: 1/2" pipe for 1 lavatory 3/4" pipe for 3 lavatories 1" pipe for 5 lavatories G. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI rated and shall be of the following sizes unless otherwise indicated on the drawings: Self-closing valves, lavatories, sinks, etc.: Supply or header pipe size W.H.A. No. 1/2" /4" " 5010 Flushometer, automatic and solenoid valves: Supply or header pipe size W.H.A. No. 3/4" " /4" /2" " INSTALLATION OF CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts where indicated on the drawings and as required by code regulations. Install in accessible locations with extension to grade or to outside of buildings as indicated or required. Set cleanout covers flush with finished wall, floor or grade. Securely anchor by means of integral lugs and bolts. When

355 surfacing materials such as asphalt tile or carpet is used, ascertain the thickness being used, and set cleanout top so that finished floor will be smooth INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Provide shut-off valves where indicated on the drawings, and where required for adequate control of the system. B. Install an external gas valve immediately adjacent to each piece of gas burning equipment. C. Label all valves, inside and outside of building, designating service with brass or plastic tags chained to valves with brass chains, and with etched or stamped letters filled with white paint. D. Provide a neat chart showing the locations and uses of all valves as mentioned above. When the installation consists of more than one building, prepare a chart for the site and a chart for each building. Install charts behind clear glass or plastic on wall at locations as directed INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using, where possible, standard, commercially accepted pipe hangers and accessories. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI code for Pressure Piping, B31.1. Where thermal movement in the pipe line will occur, the pipe hanger assembly must be capable of supporting the line in all operating conditions. B. Isolate all water lines from hangers and supports by means of Semco "Trisolators" or Potter-Roemer Co. "Pr-Isolators" of size required. Branch lines located in furred spaces serving plumbing may be isolated with hair felt if specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. C. The manner in which pipe is to be supported: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, hold horizontal pipe runs firmly in place by specified hangers. Install and support piping, except buried piping, so that they may expand or contract freely without strain to pipe or equipment. 2. Install horizontal steel piping with beam clamps, concrete inserts, or 2-1/2" x 2-1/4" angles from structural roof members, hangers or supports every 10 feet, except piping under 1 inch in diameter, support every 8 feet, and gas piping every 6 feet. 3. Install horizontal cast iron piping with hangers or supports for each length of pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at floor and at ceiling with steel pipe clamps

356 Provide supports for all branch lines, and support branches 6 feet in length or longer with a hanger. 5. Support chromium plated pipe by means of neat chromium plated hangers or clamps using round head screws of same material and finish. D. Where the attachment of the support system to structural concrete is required the following will apply: 1. Power driven anchors may be used in structural concrete except at the following locations: a. Within 4" of any concrete edge. b. Bottoms of joists or beams. c. Where there may be Rebar #6 or larger INSTALLATION OF FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES A. Install floor, wall and ceiling plates at all points where pipes pierce finished surfaces INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide 20 gauge steel pipe sleeves for concrete walls and floors of sufficient size to permit the covering of insulated pipes to pass through, and in no case having an inside diameter less than 1 inch larger than outside diameter of passing pipe, plus insulation. Make insulation, including any vapor barrier, continuous. Except as otherwise noted, cut sleeve ends flush with both surfaces, and caulk water tight. Galvanized steel telescoping type sleeves may be used. Pipe sleeves installed under structures or where indicated on the drawings are to be terra cotta or fiber. Where caulking is required to prevent seepage, use steel pipe. B. Sleeve all underground gas piping under buildings and/or other structures where gas may be trapped in case of leaks INSTALLATION OF PIPE FLASHING A. Seal the joint between flashing and pipe with waterproofing compound. Install counter-flashing sleeve to cover a minimum of 3/4 inch of top of lead flashing, making the top joint permanently water tight INSTALLATION OF ACCESS BOXES AND PANELS A. Provide access boxes for valves located below finished grade. Top of operating handle of valve to be a maximum of 12 inches below grade. B. Provide access panels for valves located on concealed pipe runs. Provide access panels for concealed traps, air gaps or fittings requiring access. C. Set all access boxes and panels flush with finished surfaces in which installed

357 Remove door of panels during construction, or suitable protect otherwise. D. Provide access boxes with metal, concrete or clay pipe sleeve extension where added depth is required STERILIZATION A. Sterilize each unit of water supply and distribution system with chlorine before acceptance for operation. Contractor shall furnish shut-off valve and corporation stop or other means of injecting chlorine. B. The minimum dosage of chlorine to be 50 parts per million. C. The procedure to be followed: 1. Allow a contact period of not less than 8 hours, and then flush system with clean water until the residual content is not greater than 0.5 parts per million. Flush entire system including all fire hose cabinets, hose bibbs, fixture outlets, dead ends, and other points where dead water tends to collect. Open and close all valves several times during contact period. 2. Furnish two (2) copies of a certificate of performance of complete sterilization to the Architect before final inspection of the work. This shall be performed under the supervision of and certified by a Chemical Engineer registered in the State of California INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES A. Set floor mounted, water closets on slotted cast brass floor flanges. Make joint permanently gas and watertight by means of an impregnated felt setting gasket held in place with 5/16 inch solid brass bolts. Putty will not be permitted for this joint. B. Securely attach wall hung fixtures to a 3/8 inch x 6 inch wide steel plate. Steel plate to extend at least one stud beyond first and last mounting point. Drill and tap plate at time of installation of fixture or fixture hanger. Support fixture hanger with 1/2" diameter threaded studs, jamb nuts, C.P. Acorn nuts and completely free of wall by means of a second set of jamb nuts. Weld plate to each metal stud crossed by means of a continuous vertical fillet weld and same size as stud thickness. Secure plate to each wood stud crossed by securely bolting to each stud crossed with two 1/2-inch steel bolts, 4-9 inch center with 1/8-inch maximum x 1-1/2 inch steel back up plates. Notch studs to set plate flush with surface ADJUSTING A. Adjusting: Circulating hot water system. Free and equal circulation through each part of the piping system, as well as satisfactory operation of all valves, pumps, and hot water heaters SYSTEMS

358 A. Use general materials and methods of installation as hereinbefore specified insofar as same are applicable to the work of the following systems SEWER SYSTEM A. Consists of soil, waste and vent piping, and connections to plumbing fixtures throughout the buildings, and underground sewer piping outside of buildings to point of connection indicated. System includes waste piping connections to miscellaneous equipment, and to equipment installed under other sections of the specification. B. Construct dry swells of size and with materials indicated on the drawings ROOF DRAINAGE AND DOWNSPOUT SYSTEM A. Consists of roof drains, downspouts and overflow piping as indicated and underground piping as indicated COLD WATER SYSTEM A. Consists of cold water piping and connections to plumbing fixtures, hose bibbs, water heaters, and to other miscellaneous items and N.I.C. equipment throughout the buildings, and piping underground to point of connection as indicated. END OF SECTION

359 SECTION GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 - Specification sections, apply to the work of this section SCOPE A. The Construction Documents shall include the drawings and specifications covering all related work in addition to the electrical. The Contractor shall carefully examine all of the Construction Documents to acquaint himself with the responsibilities of the various Contractors regarding the supply, installation and connection of the Components of the various electrical and other systems. B. It is intended that all systems shall be complete and shall include all components necessary for the operation of the system. If components are indicated on the drawings or inferred from the system requirements but not specified by catalogue number, such components shall be furnished by the manufacturer furnishing the remainder of the system. C. In the event of a conflict of the requirements detailed in the drawings and any sections of the specification the Contractor shall inform the Owner's Rep of such conflict in writing before ordering equipment. If such notification is not provided, the Contractor shall accept the Owner's Rep decision on the resolvement of such conflict without any further compensation DEMOLITION, ALTERATION AND EXTENSION WORK IN AN EXISTING STRUCTURE. A. Contractor shall survey the entire project site and become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions. Check the locations of all existing structures, equipment, wiring, etc. The intent of the work is shown on the drawings and described hereinafter. B. While the existing facility is being altered, keep the present power service and necessary life safety systems intact. C. Provide and perform demolition, alteration, extension, preparatory and miscellaneous work as indicated, specified or as required, complete. The work shall include: 1. Demolition and removal of existing electrical conduit, wiring and equipment required to complete the project. 2. Preparation of the existing building to receive or connect the new work GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

360 including relocation of existing electrical conduit, wiring, equipment, etc. where new work interferes with existing conditions. 3. Miscellaneous demolition, cutting, patching, alteration, and repair work in the existing building necessary for the completion of the entire project while maintaining electrical circuit continuity to all equipment, outlets, fixtures, etc. scheduled to remain. 4. Disconnecting, relocating, and reconnecting of electrical equipment as required by the construction modifications. 5. Coordination of power interruption with the Owner's representative or utility company where necessary. D. Salvage and Disposal: All removed material other than items to be reused shall be returned to the Owner or disposed of in accordance with instructions from the Owner's representative. Dispose all hazardous materials per guideline of State of California Department of Health Services and other agencies having jurisdiction ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS A. The documents are written in a brief form for the purpose of work economy. For example: "Motor starters" is used in place of "The Contractor shall provide all motor starters". Omitted words shall be determined by inference. B. It should be particularly noted that the terms "furnish", "provide", and "install" are interchangeable and that each of these terms means to furnish, install, and connect, unless otherwise stated. C. When a catalog or series numbers are shown they are intended to indicate the type and quality of product. The product furnished shall meet all specification requirements even if the product conforming to the given catalog number does not. D. In the event of conflict between requirements, whether shown on drawings or in specifications the most stringent requirements shall govern. E. Wherever tables or schedule show quantities of materials they shall not be used as the final count. These figures serve only as an aid to Contractor. Each Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all material noted on drawings or specified. F. A minimum size or performance requirement specified shall be superseded by requirements specified in other technical specification sections or shown on drawings. For example: A minimum control wire size specified for an alarm system shall take precedence over the minimum wire sizes listed in Section Conductors. G. When short circuit currents or interrupting capacities are indicated on drawings or specified they shall be considered as minimum R.M.S. symmetrical unless otherwise stated GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

361 H. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangement of all raceways, equipment and appurtenances. They shall be followed as closely as actual building construction, field conditions and the work of other trades will permit. The electrical work shall conform to the requirements shown on the drawings. I. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over electrical drawings, because of the small scale of the electrical drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall investigate the existing conditions affecting the work and shall arrange his work accordingly, providing such fittings and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions CODE AND STANDARDS A. Code Compliance 1. Installation must conform with all applicable National, State and local codes, rules, ordinances, regulations and manufacturer's recommendations which will govern the quality and the character of work, style and size of materials. 2. In case of difference between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations the Contractor shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies. 3. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements, ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations he shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies. B. Building Codes 1. Comply with the latest editions of the following Codes promulgated by governing authority for the specific job site: C. Industry Codes a. California State Safety Orders b. California State Fire Prevention Commission Official Regulations c. National Electrical Code - NFPA 70 d. Life Safety Code NFPA All electrical equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and shall meet all requirements established by NEC, NEMA and ANSI, and as specified hereinafter. 2. Materials and installation procedures shall comply with all applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards. ANSI ASTM American National Standards Institute, Inc. American Society of Testing Materials GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

362 ETL IEEE IPCEA ITL NBS NECA NEMA NFPA UL USASI Electrical Testing Laboratories Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Independent Testing Laboratories National Bureau of Standards National Electrical Contractor Association National Electrical Manufacturer's Association National Fire Protection Association Underwriters' Laboratories United States of America Standards Institute 1.06 Work and Workmanship A. General 1. These specifications may not include every detail or operation considered to be standard high grade installation procedure as it is assumed that the Contractor is familiar with these procedures. In the absence of specified details in the Contract Documents regarding installation procedure, the National Electrical Contractors Association "Standard of Installation" manual and the latest edition of Crofts "American Electricians, Handbook" shall be considered as minimum requirements. 2. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA-70, National Electrical Code. 3. Locations of all equipment connections are shown for bidding purposes only. Contractor shall verify erection and connection requirements and details. 4. The Contractor shall read the specifications and drawings of all other trades and verify erection and connection requirements and details. 5. The Contractor shall take all field measurements as necessary for his work, and shall be responsible for the accurate location and size of all openings, recesses, slots, ferrules, and the like. 6. Should any structural difficulties prevent the setting of cabinets, running of conduit, etc., at points shown on drawings, necessary minor deviations as determined by the Owner's Rep may be permitted only if authorized in writing. 7. Specific emphasis must be made that if the equipment other than that which the drawings were designed around does not properly adapt to the space allotted or is not easily accessible for repair and maintenance the Contractor is responsible for providing all additional access panels, pipe, fittings, all materials, labor, etc. to achieve the desired end result. 8. Any extra costs which might result from deviations from the drawings to avoid interference shall be considered a "job condition" and no additional compensation will be considered applicable. In the event that any such interference occur in the course of the work due to an error, omission or oversight by the Contractor, no additional compensation shall be allowed. 9. Interference which may occur during the course of construction shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Rep and his decision confirmed in writing shall be final as to which trade shall take preference GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

363 10. The finished job shall be functional and complete in every detail including any and all such items required for a complete system whether or not these items be specified or shown on drawings. 11. Special attention shall be given to the accessibility of working and controlling parts. Adjustable parts shall be within easy reach. Removable parts shall have space for removal. 12. Underground utilities: Known underground services are shown at approximate locations on drawings. Contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid damage in exposing underground services: a. Where an underground facility is encountered which is not shown on drawings or mentioned in any other contract document, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and Architect and responsible utility agency for direction. b. Do not proceed with Work until direction is received. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Perform work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 2. Manufacturer to be a company specialized in fabrication of respective production with a minimum of 10 years documented experience, or as indicated in the respective spec section. 3. Manufacturer to provide quality control production testing for each unit of major equipment in accordance with applicable standards. 4. Maintain one copy of each testing document on site COORDINATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS A. The Contractor shall acquaint himself with details of all work to be performed by other trades and take necessary steps to integrate and coordinate his work with these trades. B. Special attention shall be given to points where ducts cross other ducts or piping, where lighting fixtures fit into ceilings and where pipes, ducts and conduit pass through walls and columns. C. Each Contractor shall be responsible for informing himself of the nature and arrangement of the materials and construction to which his work attaches or passes through PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. In addition to the provisions and stipulations of the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract each Contractor and Subcontractor shall provide various types of protection as follows: 1. Protect finished floors from chips and cutting oil by the use of metal receiving pans and an oil proof floor covering. 2. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from welding and cutting spatters with baffles and spatter blankets. 3. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from paint droppings, insulation GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

364 1.09 RUBBISH adhesive and size droppings, etc. by use of drop cloths. 4. Maintain fire rating of walls and structures; provide fire proof enclosure where required. A. All rubbish resulting from the work herein specified shall be removed from the premises by the trade which produced it, as fast as it accumulates. B. On completion of his work each Contractor shall remove and see that each of his Subcontractors removes from the site all tools, equipment, surplus material and rubbish pertaining to his own operations. Each Contractor or Subcontractor shall pay all costs for such removal and disposition and shall cooperate with the General Contractor in final cleaning. C. Disposal of hazardous material shall be per guideline of the state of California, Department of Health Services and other authorities having jurisdiction ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT A. Connections and wiring diagrams shown on drawings or described in the specifications are typical and are for reference purposes only. Detailed diagram instructions and construction shop drawings will be required from the Contractor supplying the equipment PRODUCTS AND MATERIAL A. General 1. Electrical equipment shall be new, listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and shall conform to the standard of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 2. Materials used for like service shall be by the same manufacturer, e.g., all motor starters to be from the same manufacturer. B. Prefabricated Equipment: Unless noted as field fabricated all equipment shall be delivered completely factory assembled and wired. C. Approval: A specification followed by one or more manufacturer "or approved equal" is open to all equal products or materials unless otherwise noted. However, the Contractor shall supply one of the listed manufacturers' at no additional cost if the Engineer finds the substituted product unsatisfactory. D. Material: The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Rep, for his approval within 48 hours after request, a list of all materials he proposes to use. E. Storage 1. Provide suitable protection from weather and vandalism for all materials GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

365 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS and equipment to be installed. Storage shall be dry, clean and safe. Any materials or equipment damaged, deteriorated, rusted or defaced due to improper storage shall be fully repaired, refinished or replaced as directed by the Engineer. 2. Cover and protect all equipment, materials, raceways, etc., before and after installation to prevent injury and to prevent entrance of grit, dirt and foreign matter. A. General 1. These requirements are supplemental to the General Conditions of the Contract, Spec Section Submittals and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Drawings shall be accurately drawn large scale drawings, adequately dimensioned, showing external and internal features, mechanical provisions, materials, gauges, electrical characteristics, wiring diagrams and such other information necessary to show compliance with the intent of the specifications and drawings. 3. Generalized diagrams having several alternate methods of connection will not be acceptable. 4. Catalog data in lieu of certified prints shall be submitted for standard specialties, wire and cable, switches, starters, insulation and similar items. 5. Contractor's responsibility includes coordination of his work with all other trades, fabrication process and technique of construction. Contractor shall check all shop drawings for correct performance, size, capacity, clearance, and finish prior to submittal to Engineer. Drawings must be stamped or marked to indicate Contractor has reviewed these drawings. 6. Contractor review shall insure that equipment will fit into available space. 7. The Engineer will review submitted shop drawings as a further check and as a service to the Contractor. Such review does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for correct ordering of material and equipment. B. Shop Drawings 1. Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the following systems or equipment and other equipment requested by Owner's Rep within ten days after the award of Contracts: a. Switchboards and Panelboards b. Cabinets and Pull Boxes c. Devices and Conductors d. Transformers 2. Each submitted item shall refer to the specification section and paragraph number in which the item is specified. 3. Approval of a specific item does not include approval of the assembly of which the item is a component GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

366 1.13 DELIVERY SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall submit, upon request, a schedule listing the equipment and materials required to complete the installation, quantity ordered, the date of placing the order and the promised delivery date. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be new and the current model or type of a manufacturer regularly engaged in their production. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be products of the same manufacturer. B. Equipment shall fit into the space allotted and shall have adequate and acceptable clearances for entry, servicing and maintenance. The work shall be provided in an arrangement which will not necessitate cutting of structural members which will not interfere with lighting, HVAC equipment or doors, and which will present the best appearance possible. C. Where equipment or materials are specified to be approved by and constructed and/or tested in accordance with the published standard of the UL, ANSI, ASTM, ETL or any similar nationally recognized agency, the Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this specification conform to such requirements COLOR SCHEDULE AND SAMPLES A. The Contractor shall submit, upon request, a list of available finishes, together with color samples, for all equipment where color finishes are requested by the Architect. The list of equipment will be made available to the Contractor before equipment delivery authorization is required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. AC Switchgear Test and Inspection 1. New breakers in the main switchboard shall be tested and inspected as follows: a. Circuit breakers shall be tested and inspected for proper trip operations on long delay, short delay and instantaneous trip. Test current for long delay tripping shall be 300% of rate trip. All circuits shall have Ductor readings made where possible. b. All bolted connections shall be checked and tightened for proper torque. c. A written report showing test results shall be submitted to Architect GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

367 B. Tests 1. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments and equipment required for making tests and shall make test of all wiring for shorts, open circuits, grounds, etc., and shall immediately correct any defective work. 2. When the entire installation has been completed and all lighting fixtures installed, test out all circuits and switching and demonstrate that the operation of the system is in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Spares Fuses-Provide Owner with three (3) fuse refills for each size fuse used in the installation. Mount fuse clip in spare fuse cabinet. Locate in main electrical room or maintenance shop. D. Cleaning and Touch-Up 1. All panelboards, cabinets, switchboards, motor controllers, control panels and other enclosures shall be cleaned and the paint touched up as necessary to duplicate a factory finished appearance. Touch-up paint shall match the color, composition and quality of the factory applied finish. 2. Label all electrical equipment or controls by means of engraved laminated plastic plates screwed or riveted to device. Height of letters to be not less than 1/4" unless otherwise specified or directed. Items to be labeled include the following: a. Main circuit breakers and switches b. All circuit breakers and switches in switchboards and distribution panels c. All panel boards (labeled on inside) d. Printed card labels may be used on items of equipment furnished with plastic windows. Labeling of the cards shall be neatly printed using a lettering device such as a "KROY" instrument. e. Directories on inside of panelboards shall be type-written and shall show list of circuits and points, equipment of areas supplied (1/8" letter height acceptable). f. Labels or tags inside the covers of safety switches or motor starters noting interlocks, conductor sizes, etc., may be of the embossed adhesive type. E. Record Drawings - At the end of the project the Contractor's working drawings shall be brought up to date and a set of prints delivered to the Owner's Rep with written material certification that all corrections are true and accurately noted installed thereon. Each drawing shall be labeled Record Drawings, dated and signed by the Contractor. F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals 1. These requirements are supplemental to those listed or referred to in any GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

368 foregoing sections of these specifications. 2. Contractor shall prepare suitable bound volumes pertaining to his systems and equipment. Submit one (1) copy to the Owner's Rep for approval. After approval, submit three (3) copies to the Owner's Rep for delivery to the Owner. 3. Volumes shall be properly bound, indexed and contained in hard, heavy duty 3 ring binders. The following shall be clearly printed on the front cover: a. Project name, address and date b. Name and address of Architect-Engineer c. Telephone number of Contractor, including night or emergency 4. Bind the written operating instructions, shop drawings, equipment catalog cuts and manufacturer's instructions into the binder. Material to be assembled as follows: a. First page - Title of job, Owner, address, date of submittal, name of Contractor and name of Owner's Rep. Emergency operating instructions and/or list of service organizations (including address and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service on 24 hour calls. b. Second page - Table of Contents. 5. Material shall be assembled in divisions according to the systems which are on the project (e.g., emergency distribution system, etc.). Each division shall include the following sections: a. First Section - Written description of system contents, where actually located in building, how each part functions individually and how system works as a whole. Conclude with a list of items requiring services and either state the service needed or refer to the manufacturer's data in the binder that describes the proper service. b. Second Section - A copy of each approved shop drawing (clearly marked for item furnished) with an index at the beginning of the section. c. Third Section - A copy of each manufacturer's operating instructions with an index at the beginning of the section. d. Fourth Section - A list of all equipment used in the system, Contractor's purchase order numbers, suppliers name and address. e. Field replacement parts list. G. Guarantee and Warranty 1. These requirements are supplemental to those listed or referred to in any foregoing section of these specifications. 2. All wiring and conduit systems provided under Division 16 shall be guaranteed for a period of three (3) years GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

369 3. Warranty period shall also apply to services, including instruction, adjustment, testing, noise control, etc. H. Special Requirements 1. No work shall be performed "HOT". 2. Any power outages shall be performed on an after-hours on an overtime basis, generally after midnight on weekends between the hours of a.m. and 6:00 a.m. The Contractor shall coordinate the outage with the Owner, giving at least twenty (20) days notice. All overtime costs shall be included in the Contractors Bid. 3. Temporary service or service jumper to be provided when outage will be expected to last more than three hours. The cost of this service shall be addressed and shall be included in contract. END OF SECTION GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

370 SECTION CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. C. Electrical metallic tubing. D. Nonmetal conduit. E. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. F. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Boxes. C. Section Support Devices. D. Section Grounding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." F. NEMA TC2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). G. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA CONDUIT

371 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches (51 mm). 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thick wall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use thick wall nonmetallic conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 1 inch (25 mm). C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel. D. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit. E. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use intermediate metal conduit. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. 2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket CONDUIT

372 B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Die cast EMT type. 2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC & 80 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. M. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) CONDUIT

373 N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. Q. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations. R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size. S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. T. Provide XJG expansion coupling with internal grounding (by Crouse Hinds) to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. U. Threadless fittings, indentor type or set-screw type fittings shall not be used for EMT. EMT shall be installed with threaded gland compression type connectors and couplings. V. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. W. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section X. Properly identify conduit. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements using approved material and methods. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. END OF SECTION CONDUIT

374 SECTION DUCTBANK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Duct. C. Pullboxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Earthwork. B. Section Concrete Formwork. C. Section Steel Reinforcement. D. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete. E. Section Plumbing Specialties. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. B. ANSI C Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated. C. ANSI/ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ANSI/ASTM A569 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled, Commercial Quality. E. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. F. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. G. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. H. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings. I. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips. J. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) DUCTBANK

375 K. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. L. NEMA TC 6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. M. NEMA TC 8 - Extra-Strength PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. N. NEMA TC 9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. O. NEMA TC 10 - PVC and ABS Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings for Underground Installation. P. NEMA TC 14 - Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of openings, and accessory locations for precast pullboxes. C. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, nonmetallic conduit, and manhole accessories. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Accurately record actual locations of exact routing of ductbank. C. Accurately record actual locations of each pullboxes. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown DUCTBANK

376 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide under provisions of Section B. Provide field sample of plastic duct, two each at 2 feet long. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation for rough-in. C. Verify locations of pullboxes prior to excavating for installation. D. Duct bank routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Route as required to complete duct system. E. Pullbox locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete ductbank system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit. 2. Graybar Electric. 3. Or equal. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel. 2.2 PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Graybar Electric. 3. Or equal DUCTBANK

377 B. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC PLASTIC DUCT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Graybar Electric. 3. Or equal B. Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6; PVC Type EB. C. Plastic Utility Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9. D. Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 10, Type EB. 2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE PULLBOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Quikset. 2. Brooks. 3. Or equal. B. Material: Reinforced precast concrete. C. Construction: Modular sections with tongue-and-groove joints. D. Reinforcing: AASHTO Classification H-20. E. Shape: Rectangular. F. Nominal Inside Dimensions: 3 x 5 or as required by field conditions. G. Base Section: Include 3 inch deep x 6 inch round sump with cast sleeve, and two 1 inch ground rod openings. H. Top Section: Include rectangular grooved opening for frame and cover. I. Riser Casting: 6 or 12 inch, with manhole step cast into frame. J. Frames and Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron, machine finished with flat bearing surfaces. Provide cover marked ELECTRIC or COMMUNICATION as applies. K. Duct Entry Provisions: Window knockouts. L. Duct Entry Locations: Each side or as indicated on drawings. M. Duct Entry Size: As indicated on drawings DUCTBANK

378 N. Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanized rod and hardware. Locate opposite each duct entry. Provide watertight seal. O. Cable Racks: Steel channel, 1-1/2 x 3/4 x 14 inches, with fastener to match mounting channel. P. Sump Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron. Q. Traffic Covers: Provide traffic covers for all the handholes located on the roadway and to those located in the vicinity of roadway (4' or closer). 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Underground Warning Tape: 6 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines; Model HTDU6R-E as manufactured by PANDUIT or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify excavation under provisions of Section B. Verify that excavation, base material installation, and compaction is completed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare excavation in accordance with manhole manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION A. Install duct in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install duct to locate top of ductbank at depths as required by NEC - Art as applicable to field condition. C. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (100 mm per 30 m). Slope duct away from building entrances. D. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. E. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. F. Join nonmetallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. G. Wipe nonmetallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. H. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points DUCTBANK

379 I. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required. J. Terminate duct at manhole entries using end bell. K. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum. L. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers. M. Band ducts together before placing concrete. N. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement. O. Place concrete under provisions of Section Use mineral pigment to color concrete red. P. Provide minimum 3 inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of ductbank. Q. Provide one #4/0 bare copper ground installed with the conduits. Make necessary provisions for connections. R. Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas. S. Connect to existing concrete encasement using dowels. T. Connect to manhole wall using dowels. U. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples. V. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture. W. Backfill trenches under provisions of Section X. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling specified in Section Install tape 6 inches below finished surface. 3.3 PRECAST MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install pullboxes plumb. C. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation. D. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole installation is complete. E. Install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system or to a 4 inch pipe, terminating in 1/3 cu yd crushed gravel bed under provisions of Section DUCTBANK

380 F. Install ground rod electrodes (3/4" x 10' - copper) as required to ensure a 5 ohms maximum ground resistance. G. Dampproof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has cured 28 days, under provisions of Section END OF SECTION DUCTBANK

381 SECTION CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Conduits. C. Section Boxes. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Determine required separation between cable and other work, or between the different type of conductors in the same raceway. B. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts CONDUCTORS

382 D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN and THW. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet (23 m). G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet (61 m). H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. I. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. J. Protect exposed cable from damage. K. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. L. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. O. Make splices,taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. DTA MASTER CONDUCTORS

383 P. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. Q. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. R. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and larger. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION DTA MASTER CONDUCTORS

384 SECTION BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Conduit. B. Section Boxes. C. Section Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

385 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN. 2.2 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type UF. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

386 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation. B. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. C. Underground Installations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. D. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 22 AWG for control circuits. F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet (23 m). G. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. H. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. I. Protect exposed cable from damage. J. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. K. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. L. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. M. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. N. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

387 O. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. P. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

388 SECTION BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Support Devices. C. Section Grounding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. B. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required BOXES

389 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: concrete type. B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section E. Pull and Junction: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1. Sheet Metal Boxes: Nema OSI-galvanized steel. 2. Hinged Enclosures: Per Section Surface Mounted Cast Boxes: NEMA 250; flat-flanged; furnish with ground flange neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. 4. In-ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250; type 6 galvanized cast iron; recessed cover box for flash mounting, with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover scres. Cover legend: "ELECTRIC". 5. Fiberglass Hand Holes (for underground direct-burial cable installations): Die molded glass fiber hand holes; Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side; Provide glass fiber weather proof cover with non skid finish. A. Verify locations of outlets prior to rough-in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in Section F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only BOXES

390 H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. J. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. K. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. L. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. O. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. P. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Q. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. R. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. S. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. T. Support boxes independently of conduit. U. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. V. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. W. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet locations. X. Set floor boxes level. Y. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations. 3.3 ADJUSTING BOXES

391 A. Adjust flush - mounting outlets to make front flash with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION BOXES

392 SECTION WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Device plates and decorative box covers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. General Electric. 3. Or equivalent. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use switch WIRING DEVICES

393 C. Body and Handle: Plastic with rocker handle. Finish: as required by Architect. D. Ratings: 1. Voltage: volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. General Electric. 3. Pass & Seymor. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle. Finish: as required by Architect. C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. D. Convenience Receptacle: Type E. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. F. Isolated ground receptacle - (orange color) see drawings for location. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Plastic. Finish: as required by Architect. 1. Hubbell. 2. Or equivalent. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. 1. Hubbell. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 2. Or equivalent. A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION WIRING DEVICES

394 A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter. D. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. E. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor. G. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 above finished floor. H. Coordinate the installation of wiring devices with underfloor duct service fittings provided under Section WIRING DEVICES

395 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES

396 SECTION PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Distribution panelboards. B. Branch circuit panelboards. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Support Devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrical Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PB Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide two of each panelboard key. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric. B. Cutler - Hammer. C. Square "D". 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS PANELBOARDS

397 A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: As noted on drawings. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. Provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. E. Provide circuit breaker accessory trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated. F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. G. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps. Provide hinged door with flush lock. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type. B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480Y/277 volt panelboards, or as indicated. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. F. Cabinet Front: Flush or surface cabinet front as required with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. Provide supports in accordance with Section C. Height: 6 ft to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 ft with bottom no less than 4 inches above floor. PANELBOARDS

398 D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS

399 SECTION SUPPORT DEVICES AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to SMACNA - Guideline for seismic restraints of Mechanical Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners, supports and seismic restraints to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 2.2 STEEL CHANNEL 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel ramset fasteners and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. A. Description: Galvanized steel SUPPORT DEVICES AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

400 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength, flexibility and/or and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. K. Use neoprene, vibration isolators and seismic restraints where required. END OF SECTION SUPPORT DEVICES AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

401 SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers. D. Conduit color coding. E. Panelboard directories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Painting. B. Section General Electrical Provisions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Type NP Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic with black letters on white background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch (3 mm) letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch (6 mm) letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.2 LEGEND PLATES A. Type LP: Die-stamped metal legend plate with mounting hole and positioning key. B. Paint-fill engraved characters. 2.3 WIRE AND TERMINAL MARKERS A. Self-adhering, pre-printed, self-laminating vinyl wrap-around strips. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

402 boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings. 2.4 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Description: High performance snap-on or pressure sensitive precoiled, preprinted suitable for indoor and outdoor conditiions. B. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 10 feet. C. Spacing: 20 feet on center. D. Color: Volt System: Yellow Volt System: Green. 3. Fire Alarm System: Red. 4. Telephone System: Brown. 5. Data System: Blue. E. Legend: Volt System: 480 V Volt System: 208 V. 3. Fire Alarm System: FA. 4. Telephone System: TEL. 5. Data System: DATA. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using two screws or adhesive. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. 3.3 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

403 on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. B. Provide conductor phase color coding as per Section NAMEPLATING ENGRAVING A. Provide type "NP" nameplates of minimum letter height as noted below. 1. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4-inch to identify equipment designation. 1/8-inch to identify voltage rating and source. 2. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches and Motor Starters in Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8-inch to identify circuit and load served, including location. 3. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8- inch to identify load served. 4. Transformers: 1/4-inch to identify equipment designation. 1/8-inch to identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location. 5. Equipment Cabinets, Terminal Cabinets, Control Panels and other Cabinets enclosing apparatus: 3/8-inch to identify equipment and designation. B. Provide type "LP" metal legend plates for attachment to panel mounted operator's devices such as pilot lights, push buttons, selector switches, etc. 3.5 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES A. Provide typewritten directories arranged in numerical order showing number of room in which each device served by each panelboard circuit is located. B. Verify room numbers to be used with Owner. Room number will not necessarily be those used on the Drawings. C. Mount directories in a 6 inch by 8 inch metal frame under a clear plastic cover inside each panelboard door. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

404 SECTION SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Main switchboard. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Support Devices and Seismic Restrains C. Section Utility Service Entrance. D. Section Grounding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. ANSI/IEEE C Code for Electricity Metering. C. ANSI C Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments. D. ANSI C Instrument Transformers. E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. F. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. G. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. H. NEMA PB Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details. B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production tests SWITCHBOARDS

405 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in 48 inch (1.2 m) maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. B. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage. C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide two of each key. B. Provide two fuse pullers EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide three of each size and type of fuse installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric. B. Cutler - Hammer SWITCHBOARDS

406 C. Square "D". D. Or approved equal. 2.2 SWITCHBOARD A. Description: NEMA PB 2 with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated. B. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted. C. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted. D. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted. E. Rating: Provide series connected protection rating in accordance with UL procedures. F. Bus Material: Copper with tin plating, standard size. G. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. H. Fully insulate load side bus bars in rear accessible compartments. I. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. J. Neutral Bus: 100% Rated. 2.3 METERING COMPARTMENT A. Provide digital meters as specified on the drawings and noted in section B. Provide meters with appropriate multiplier tags. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surface is suitable for switchboard installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in locations shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEMA PB 2.1. B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. C. Install fuses in each switch. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SWITCHBOARDS

407 A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. B. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and phase to ground for one minute each, at test voltage of 1000 volts; minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms. C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench. D. Physically test key interlock systems to insure proper function. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION SWITCHBOARDS

408 SECTION UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service, including payment of Utility Company charges for service. B. Underground service entrance. C. Metering equipment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Conduits. C. Section Support Devices and Seismic Restraints. D. Section Switchboards: Metering compartment. E. Section Grounding. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Southern California Edison B. System Characteristics: See drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Southern California Edison prepared drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Southern California Edison written requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Southern California Edison drawings UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE

409 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UTILITY METERS A. Meters will be furnished by Southern California Edison. 2.2 METERING PROVISION: A. Sequence of meter to main, pull section landing lugs, busbars and current transformer "space as required" by service utility. Shop drawings must be approved by serving utility before submittal to the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Make arrangements with Southern California Edison to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. B. Coordinate location of Southern California Edison's facilities to ensure proper access is available. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install service entrance raceway from Southern California Edison's terminal pole to building service entrance equipment. Southern California Edison will connect service lateral conductors to service entrance conductors. END OF SECTION UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE

410 SECTION GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Elecrical Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 99-Health Care Facilities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. 1.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Concrete-encased electrode. D. Ground ring. E. Rod electrode. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS GROUNDING

411 A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODE A. Material: Copper. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS 2.3 WIRE A. Material: Bronze. A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 2.4 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS A. Well Pipe: 8 inch diameter by 24 inch long clay tile pipe with belled end. B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. C. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipe top flush with finished grade. D. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness GROUNDING

412 and proper installation. B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall- of-potential method. Provide the owner with one copy of the test results. END OF SECTION GROUNDING

413 SECTION ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section General Electrical Provisions. B. Section Support Devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide three of each size and type current limiter. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler - Hammer. B. Square "D". C. General Electric or approved equal. 2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER A. Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1. B. Service Conditions 1. Temperature: -5ºC to + 60ºC. 2. Altitude: up to 2000 meters above sea level. 2.3 TRIP UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Field - adjustable trip circuit breaker: Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger with mechanism for adjusting setting for automatic operation. B. Current limiting circuit breaker: Provide circuit breaker with automatically - resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Let - through current and energy: Less then permitted for same size class RK-5 fuse ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

414 C. Solid - State circuit breaker: Provide circuit breaker with electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings instantaneous trip and adjustable short time trip. 2.4 CURRENT LIMITERS A. Current Limiter: Designed for application with molded case circuit breaker. B. Coordinate limiter size with trip rating of circuit breaker to prevent nuisance tripping and to achieve interrupting current rating specified for circuit breaker. C. Provide interlocks to trip circuit breaker and to prevent closing circuit breaker when limiter compartment cover is removed or when one or more limiter is not in place or has operated. 2.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES A. Provide accessories as needed. B. Handle Lock: Include provisions for padlocking. C. Provide mechanical trip device. D. Provide grounding lug in each enclosure. E. Provide Products suitable for use as service entrance equipment where so applied. 2.6 ENCLOSURE A. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1: Type 1 for indoor installation. Type 4 for outdoor installation. B. Fabricate enclosure from steel. C. Finish using manufacturer's standard enamel finish: color per Architect requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

415 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section B. Inspect and test each circuit breaker to NEMA AB 1. C. Inspect each circuit breaker visually. D. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker. E. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position. F. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. G. Include description of testing and results in test report. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust trip settings so that circuit breakers coordinate with other overcurrent protective devices in circuit. B. Adjust trip settings to provide adequate protection from overcurrent and fault currents. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

416 SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaries and accessories. B. Ballasts. C. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. D. Lamps. E. Luminaire accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High - Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. ANSI/NFPA Life Safety Code. E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements. F. IES - Lighting Handbook. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each Luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements LIGHTING FIXTURES

417 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of each Luminaire. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two of each plastic lens. B. Provide two of each ballast type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINARIES A. Furnish products as specified on Drawings. B. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. 2.2 BALLASTS 1. Description: ANSI C82.1, electronic high power factor type ballast. 2. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified. 3. Voltage: Match Luminaire voltage. 4. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. 2.3 LAMPS A. Provide lamp type specified for Luminaire LIGHTING FIXTURES

418 B. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaries. B. Examine each Luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. B. Install suspended luminaries and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend Luminaire at indicated height. C. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size independent of ceiling framing. D. Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. E. Install surface mounted luminaries plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. F. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaries on grid ceiling directly from building structure. G. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. H. Install recessed luminaries using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. I. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaries in place. J. Install wall mounted luminaries at height as indicated on Drawings. K. Install accessories furnished with each Luminaire. L. Connect luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section as indicated. M. Make wiring connection to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within Luminaries. N. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding LIGHTING FIXTURES

419 conductor. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each Luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaries. B. Relamp luminaries at Substantial Completion. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide minimum of two hours demonstration of Luminaire operation. END OF SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES

420 SECTION EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE, INC. (ANSI) ANSI c2 National Electrical Safety Code AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A123 ASTM A (Ref. A) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products 1982 (R 1987) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES) IES LHBK Lighting Handbook, Reference and Application Volumes NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA ICS 2 NEMA ICS Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies 1988 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) UL 773 UL 773A UL Plug-in, Locking type Photocontrols for use with Area Lighting, Third Edition 1989 Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control 1986 High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts, Fourth Edition Exterior Lighting

421 UL High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures, Second Edition 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 16011, "Electrical General Requirements," applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. 1.3 DEFINITIONS Average Life Time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions Ground Line Section That portion between one foot above and 2 feet below the ground line. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit the following to the Contracting Officer in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals." Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IES LHBK, as applicable, for the lighting system specified SD-17, Manufacturer's Catalog Data a. Luminaries b. Lamps c. Ballasts d. Poles e. Brackets f. Photocell switch h. Lighting contactor SD-35, Drawings a. Luminaries Exterior Lighting

422 b. Poles Luminaries Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings Poles Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS2, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information Test Data for Luminaries a. Computerized horizontal illumination levels in footcandles at ground level, taken every 10 feet. Include average maintained footcandle level and maximum and minimum ratio. b. Distribution data according IES classification type as defined in IES LHBK SD - 77, Field Test Reports a. Operating test Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control." 1.5 Quality Assurance Metal Poles Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINARIES ANSI C or UL Provide luminaries as indicated. Provide luminaries complete with lamps of number, type, and wattage indicated. Details, shapes, and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaries of a particular manufacturer. Luminaries of similar designs and equipment, light distribution brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved. 2.2 Lamps Exterior Lighting

423 2.2.1 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge (HID) Luminaries UL 1029 and ANSi c82.4, and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high power-factor type unless otherwise indicated. Provide single-lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. Ballasts shall be: a. Designed to operate on voltage system to which they are connected. b. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life. 2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTOR NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contractor. Rate contactor as indicated. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy doublebreak contacts and coil clearing contacts and shall require no arcing contacts. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic. 2.4 Time Switch Astronomic dial type arranged to turn "ON" at sunset, and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 125 volts, having automatically wound spring mechanism to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual onoff bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS PHOTOCELL SWITCH UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide cell rated 125 volts ac, 60 Hz with single pole double-throw (spdt) contacts for mechanically held contactors rated 1000 watts and 125 volts. Provide switch in a high-impact-resistant, non-corroding and nonconductive molded plastic housing with a lock-type receptacle conforming to ANSI C Switch shall turn on below 3 footcandles and off at 3 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. 2.6 POLES Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS2 while supporting luminaries having effective projected areas indicated. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screw Exterior Lighting

424 2.6.1 METAL POLES AASHTO LTS2. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gauge steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 factory finish. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 36,000 psi. 2.7 Brackets and Supports ANSI C136.3, ANSI C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 1/4-inch galvanized steel pipe secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaries provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head. 2.8 Pole Foundations Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03302, "Cast-in-Place Concrete (Minor Construction)." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF POLES Steel ANSI C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide galvanized nuts, washers, and ornamental covers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 16375, "Underground Electrical Work." Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket or sheath and at the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location. After installation, paint exposed surfaces of steel poles with two finish coats of exterior oil paint of a color as indicated. 3.2 GROUNDING Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 16375, "Underground Electrical Work." Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a Exterior Lighting

425 metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon Completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section. END OF SECTION Exterior Lighting